SINAMICS G130-G150 Drive Manual
Uploaded by
Subhendu JanaSINAMICS G130-G150 Drive Manual
Uploaded by
Subhendu JanaSINAMICS G130/G150
List Manual 11/2009
SINAMICS
s
s
Preface
SINAMICS
Parameter
Function diagrams
SINAMICS G130/G150
Faults and alarms
Appendix
List Manual
List of abbreviations
Bibliography
Index
Valid for
Drive
Software version
SINAMICS
4.3 SP1
A5E03263479A
11/2009
1
2
3
A
B
C
D
Safety notices
This manual contains information which you should observe to ensure your own personal safety and prevent material damage. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a
warning triangle; notices that relate to material damage only have no warning triangle. The notices shown
below are graded according to the level of danger (from most to least dangerous):
Danger
Indicates that death or serious injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
Warning
Indicates that death or serious injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
With a warning triangle, indicates that minor injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
Without a warning triangle, indicates that material damage may result if proper precautions are not taken.
Notice
Indicates that an undesirable result or state may occur if the relevant instructions are not observed.
If more than one level of danger exists, the warning for the highest level of danger is always used. A warning notice with a warning triangle indicating possible personal injury may also include a warning relating
to material damage.
Qualified personnel
The associated device/system may only be installed and operated in conjunction with this documentation.
The device/system may only be commissioned and operated by qualified personnel. For the purpose of
the safety notices in this documentation, "qualified personnel" are those authorized to commission,
ground, and label equipment, systems, and circuits in accordance with established safety procedures.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
Warning
Siemens products are only permitted to be used for the applications envisaged in the catalog and in the
associated technical documentation. If third-party products and components are used, they must be recommended or approved by Siemens. To ensure proper and safe operation of these products, they must
be correctly transported, stored, set up, mounted, installed, commissioned, operated, and maintained. The
permissible ambient conditions must be met. Information in the associated documentation must be
observed.
Trademarks
All names identified with are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. Any other names used in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of
the owner.
Copyright Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
Liability Disclaimer
The reproduction, transmission, or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without express written permission. Violation of
this rule will cause indemnities. All rights reserved, especially those
relating to granting patents or GM registration.
We have checked that the contents of this document correspond to
the hardware and software described. Nevertheless, we cannot assume responsibility for any deviations that may arise. The data in this
document is regularly checked and any necessary corrections included in subsequent editions.
Siemens AG
Industry Sector
Postfach 4848
90327 NUREMBERG
GERMANY
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Siemens AG 2009
Subject to change without prior notice
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2)
Preface
SINAMICS documentation
The SINAMICS documentation is organized in 2 parts:
General documentation/catalogs
Manufacturer/service documentation
At http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol/docu information is available on the
following topics:
Ordering documentation
Here you can find an up-to-date overview of publications.
Downloading documentation
Further links for downloading files from Service & Support
Researching documentation online
Information on DOConCD and direct access to the publications in DOConWeb.
For customizing documentation based on Siemens content using My Documentation Manager (MDM), see
http://www.siemens.com/mdm
My Documentation Manager provides you with a range of features for creating
your own machine documentation
Training and FAQs
Information on the range of training courses and FAQs (Frequently Asked
Questions) are available via the page navigation.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Preface-5
Preface
Usage phases and their tools/documents (as an example)
Table Preface-1Usage phases and the available tools/documents
Usage phase
Orientation
Planning/Configuration
Tools/documents
SINAMICS G Sales Documentation
SIZER configuration tool
Configuration Manuals, Motors
Decision making/ordering
SINAMICS G Catalogs
Installation/Assembly
SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions
SINAMICS G130 Operating Instructions
Commissioning
SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions
SINAMICS G130 Operating Instructions
Usage/Operation
SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions
SINAMICS G130 Operating Instructions
Maintenance/Servicing
SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions
SINAMICS G130 Operating Instructions
Target group
This documentation is aimed at machine manufacturers, commissioning engineers, and service personnel who use SINAMICS.
Use
This documentation contains the comprehensive information about parameters,
function diagrams, and faults and alarms required to commission and service the
system.
This manual should be used in addition to the other manuals and tools provided
for the product.
Preface-6
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Preface
Standard version
The scope of the functionality described in this document can differ from the
scope of the functionality of the drive system that is actually supplied.
It may be possible for other functions that are not described in this documentation to be executed in the drive system. This does not, however, represent
an obligation to supply functions of this kind when new equipment is delivered
or during servicing.
The documentation may contain descriptions of functions that are not available in a particular product version of the drive system. The functionality of the
supplied drive system should only be taken from the ordering documentation.
Extensions or changes made by the machine manufacturer must be documented by the machine manufacturer.
For reasons of clarity, this documentation does not contain all of the detailed information on all of the product types. This documentation cannot take into consideration every conceivable type of installation, operation, and service/maintenance.
Search tools
The following guides are provided to help you locate information in this manual:
1. Table of contents
Table of contents for the entire manual (after the preface).
Table of contents for function diagrams (Chapter 2.1).
2. List of abbreviations
3. Bibliography
4. Index
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Preface-7
Preface
Technical support
If you have any questions, please contact our hotline:
Europe/Africa
Phone
+49 (0) 180 5050 - 222
Fax
+49 (0) 180 5050 - 223
0.14 /min from German landlines, max. 0.42 /min from cell phones
Internet
http://www.siemens.de/automation/support-request
America
Phone
+1 423 262 2522
Fax
+1 423 262 2200
Asia/Pacific
Phone
+86 1064 757 575
Fax
+86 1064 747 474
Note:
Telephone numbers for technical support in specific countries are listed at the following Internet address:
http://www.automation.siemens.com/partner
Internet address for SINAMICS
http://www.siemens.com/sinamics
Preface-8
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Table of contents
1
Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-11
1.1
1.1.1
1.1.2
Overview of parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Explanation of list of parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Number ranges of parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-12
1-12
1-27
1.2
List of parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-29
1.3
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
1.3.4
1.3.5
Parameters for data sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameters for command data sets (CDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameters for drive data sets (DDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameters for encoder data sets (EDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameters for motor data sets (MDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameters for power unit data sets (PDS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-853
1-853
1-855
1-862
1-864
1-867
Function diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-869
2.1
Table of contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-870
2.2
Explanations for the function diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-876
2.3
Overviews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-881
2.4
CU320-2 input/output terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-893
2.5
PROFIdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-900
2.6
Internal control/status words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-932
2.7
Sequence control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-945
2.8
Brake control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-948
2.9
Safety Integrated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-953
2.10
Setpoint channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-959
2.11
Encoder evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-968
2.12
Vector control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-971
2.13
Technology functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-994
2.14
Technology controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1000
2.15
Signals and monitoring functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1006
2.16
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1014
2.17
Data sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1020
2.18
Terminal Board 30 (TB30). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1026
2.19
Communication Board CAN10 (CBC10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1031
2.20
Terminal Module 31 (TM31) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1038
2.21
Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1049
2.22
Basic Operator Panel 20 (BOP20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1053
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Content-9
Table of contents
Faults and alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1055
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
Overview of faults and alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General information about faults and alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Explanation of the list of faults and alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Number ranges of faults and alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1056
3-1056
3-1061
3-1064
3.2
List of faults and alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1066
Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-1445
A.1
ASCII table (excerpt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-1446
A.2
A.2.1
A.2.2
List for motor code/encoder code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Encoder code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-1447
A-1447
A-1480
List of abbreviations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-1483
Bibliography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-1491
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-1497
Content-10
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
Contents
1.1
Overview of parameters
1-12
1.2
List of parameters
1-29
1.3
Parameters for data sets
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-853
1-11
Parameter
Overview of parameters
1.1
Overview of parameters
1.1.1
Explanation of list of parameters
Basic structure of parameter descriptions
The data in the following example has been chosen at random. The table below
contains all the information that can be included in a parameter description. Some
of the information is optional.
The parameter list (See Section 1.2) is structured as follows:
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Start of example- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - pxxxx[0 to n]
BICO: Full parameter name/Abbreviated name
Drive object (function module)
Changeable in: C1(x), C2(x), U, T
Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG
Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32/Integer16
Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Function diagram: 2080
P group: Closed loop control
Unit group: 7_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: FEM
Normalizing: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Nm]
Max
10.00 [Nm]
Factory setting
0.00 [Arms]
Description:
Text
Values:
0:
1:
2:
etc.
Recommendation:
Text
Index:
[0] = Name and meaning of index 0
[1] = Name and meaning of index 1
[2] = Name and meaning of index 2
etc.
Bit array:
Bit
00
01
02
Dependency:
Text
See also: pxxxx, rxxxx
See also: Fxxxxx, Axxxxx
Danger:
Warning:
Name and meaning of value 0
Name and meaning of value 1
Name and meaning of value 2
Signal name
Name and meaning of bit 0
Name and meaning of bit 1
Name and meaning of bit 2
etc.
Caution:
Caution:
Notice:
Note:
Information which might be useful
1-12
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
FP
8010
8012
Safety notices with a warning triangle
Safety notices without a warning triangle
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
Overview of parameters
pxxxx[0 to n] Parameter number
The parameter number consists of a "p" or "r", followed by the parameter number
and the index (optional).
Examples of number representation in the parameter list:
p...
Adjustable parameter (read and write parameter)
r...
Display parameter (read-only)
p0918
Adjustable parameter 918
p0099[0 to 3]
Adjustable parameter 99, indices 0 to 3
p1001[0 to n]
Adjustable parameter 1001, indices 0 to n (n = configurable)
r0944
Display parameter 944
Other examples of notation in the documentation:
p1070[1]
Adjustable parameter 1070, index 1
p2098[1].3
Adjustable parameter 2098, index 1 bit 3
r0945[2](3)
Display parameter 945, index 2 of drive object 3
p0795.4
Adjustable parameter 795, bit 4
r2129.0 to 15
Display parameter 2129 with bit array (maximum 16 bits)
The following applies to adjustable parameters:
The "shipped" parameter value is specified under "Factory setting" with the relevant unit in square parenthesis. The value can be adjusted within the range
defined by "Min" and "Max".
The term "linked parameterization" is used in cases where changes to adjustable
parameters affect the settings of other parameters.
Linked parameterization can occur, for example, as a result of the following
actions or parameters:
Execute macros
p0015, p0700, p1000, p1500
Set PROFIBUS telegram (BICO interconnection)
p0922
Set component lists
p0230, p0300, p0301, p0400
Calculate and pre-assign automatically
p0112, p0340, p0578, p3900
Restore factory settings
p0970
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-13
Parameter
Overview of parameters
The following applies to display parameters:
The fields "Min", "Max" and "Factory setting" are specified with a dash "-" and the
relevant unit in square parenthesis.
Note:
The parameter list can contain parameters that are not visible in the expert lists
of the particular commissioning software (e.g. parameters for trace functions).
BICO: Full parameter name/Abbreviated name
The following abbreviations can appear in front of the parameter name:
BI:
Binector Input
This parameter is used for selecting the source of a digital signal.
BO:
Binector Output
This parameter is available as a digital signal for interconnection
with other parameters.
CI:
Connector Input
This parameter is used for selecting the source of an "analog" signal.
CO:
Connector Output
This parameter is available as an "analog" signal for interconnection with other parameters.
CO/BO:
Connector/Binector Output
This parameter is available as an "analog" and digital signal for
interconnection with other parameters.
Note:
A connector input (CI) cannot be just interconnected with any connector output
(CO, signal source).
When interconnecting a connector input using the commissioning software, only
the corresponding possible signal sources are listed.
1-14
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
Overview of parameters
Drive object (function module)
A drive object (DO) is an independent, "self-contained" functional unit that has its
own parameters and, in some cases, faults and alarms.
When carrying out commissioning using the commissioning software, you can
select/deselect additional functions and their parameters by activating/deactivating function modules accordingly.
The parameter list specifies the associated drive object and function module for
each individual parameter.
Examples:
p1070 CI: Main setpoint
VECTOR
The parameter is only available with the VECTOR drive object, regardless of
which function modules have been activated.
p1055 BI: Jog bit 0
VECTOR
The parameter is available with the VECTOR drive object, regardless of which
function modules have been activated (i.e. it is available with every activated
function module belonging to the drive object).
A parameter can belong to one, several, or all drive objects.
The following information relating to "Drive object" and "Function module" can be
displayed under the parameter number:
Table 1-1
Data in "Drive object (function module)" field
Drive object (function module)
Type
Meaning
All objects
This parameter belongs to all drive objects.
CU
Control Unit, all versions
CU_G_G130
Control Unit SINAMICS G130
CU_G_G150
Control Unit SINAMICS G150
CU_G_G130 (CAN)
CU_G_G150 (CAN)
Control Unit with "CAN" function module (p0108.29)
CU_G_G130 (COMM
BOARD)
CU_G_G150 (COMM
BOARD)
Control Unit with "COMM BOARD" function module (p0108.30)
CU_G_G130 (PROFINET)
CU_G_G150 (PROFINET)
Control Unit with "PROFINET" function module (p0108.31)
ENCODER
300
Object for a DRIVE-CLiQ encoder
HUB
150
DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module
TB30
100
Terminal Board 30
TM31
200
Terminal Module 31
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-15
Parameter
Overview of parameters
Table 1-1
Data in "Drive object (function module)" field, continued
Drive object (function module)
Type
Meaning
VECTOR_G130/G150
12
VECTOR_G130/G150
(n/M)
Vector drive with "Closed-loop speed/torque control" function module
(r0108.2)
VECTOR_G130/G150
(Ext. brake)
Vector drive with "Extended brake control" function module
(r0108.14).
VECTOR_G130/G150
(Parallel)
Vector drive with "Parallel connection" function module (r0108.15).
VECTOR_G130/G150
(Tech_ctrl)
Vector drive with "Technology controller" function module (r0108.16).
VECTOR_G130/G150
(Ext. msg)
Vector drive with "Extended messages/monitoring functions" function
module (r0108.17).
VECTOR_G130/G150
(Cooling unit)
Vector drive with "Cooling unit" function module (r0108.28).
VECTOR_G130/G150
(CAN)
Vector drive with "CAN" function module (r0108.29)
VECTOR_G130/G150
(PROFINET)
Vector drive with "PROFINET" function module (r0108.31)
Vector drive
Note:
The drive object type is used to identify the drive objects in the drive system (e.g.
r0107, r0975[1]).
1-16
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
Overview of parameters
Changeable in
The "-" sign indicates that the parameter can be changed in any object state and
that the change will be effective immediately.
The letters "C1(x), C2(x), T, U" ((x): optional) mean that the parameter can be
changed in the specified drive unit state only and that the change will not take
effect until the object switches to another state. This can be one or more states.
The following states may be specified:
C1(x) Device commissioning
C1: Commissioning 1
Device commissioning is in progress (p0009 > 0).
Pulses cannot be enabled.
The parameter can only be changed in the following device commissioning settings (p0009 > 0):
C1: Changeable for all settings p0009 > 0
C1(x): Only changeable when p0009 = x
A modified parameter value does not take effect until device commissioning mode is exited with p0009 = 0.
C2(x) Drive object commissioning
C2: Commissioning 2
Drive commissioning is in progress (p0009 = 0 and p0010 > 0).
Pulses cannot be enabled.
The parameter can only be changed in the following drive commissioning settings (p0010 > 0):
C2: Changeable for all settings p0010 > 0
C2(x): Only changeable when p0010 = x
A modified parameter value does not take effect until drive commissioning mode is exited with p0010 = 0.
U
Operation
U: Run
Pulses are enabled.
T
Ready
T: Ready to run
The pulses are not enabled and status "C1(x)" or "C2(x)" is not active.
Note:
Parameter p0009 is CU-specific (belongs to Control Unit).
Parameter p0010 is drive-specific (belongs to each drive object).
The operating state of individual drive objects is displayed in r0002.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-17
Parameter
Overview of parameters
Calculated
Specifies whether the parameter is influenced by automatic calculations.
The calculation attribute defines which activities influence the parameter.
The following attributes apply:
CALC_MOD_ALL
p0340 = 1
Project download with commissioning software and send from p0340 = 3
CALC_MOD_CON
p0340 = 1, 3, 4
CALC_MOD_EQU
p0340 = 1, 2
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
p0340 = 1, 3, 5
p0578 = 1
CALC_MOD_REG
p0340 = 1, 3
Note:
For p3900 > 0, p0340 = 1 is also called automatically.
After p1910 = 1, p0340 = 3 is automatically called.
Access level
Specifies the access level required to be able to display and change the relevant
parameter. The required access level can be set via p0003.
The system uses the following access levels:
1. Standard
2. Advanced
3. Expert
4. Service
Parameters with this access level have password protection.
5. Macro (the parameter can only be changed via macro)
Note:
Parameter p0003 is CU-specific (belongs to Control Unit).
1-18
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
Overview of parameters
Data type
The information on the data type can consist of the following two items (separated
by a slash):
First item
Data type of the parameter
Second item (for binector or connector input only)
Data type of the signal source to be interconnected (binector/connector output)
Parameters can have the following data types:
I8
Integer8
8-bit integer
I16
Integer16
16-bit integer
I32
Integer32
32-bit integer
U8
Unsigned8
8 bits without sign
U16
Unsigned16
16 bits without sign
U32
Unsigned32
32 bits without sign
Float
FloatingPoint32
32-bit Floating Point number
Depending on the data type of the BICO input parameter (signal sink) and BICO
output parameter (signal source), the following combinations are possible when
BICO interconnections are established:
Table 1-2
Possible combinations of BICO interconnections
BICO input parameter
CI parameter
BICO output parameter
Unsigned32/Inte
ger16
BI parameter
Unsigned32/Inte Unsigned32/Floa Unsigned32/Bina
ger32
tingPoint32
ry
CO: Unsigned8
CO: Unsigned16
CO: Integer16
CO: Unsigned32
CO: Integer32
CO: FloatingPoint32
x1
BO: Unsigned8
BO: Unsigned16
Legend:
x: BICO interconnection permitted
: BICO interconnection not permitted
1 Exception:
BICO input parameters with data type "Unsigned32/FloatingPoint32" can also be interconnected with the following
BICO output parameters, although these are not of the "FloatingPoint32" data type:
CO: r8850, CO: r8860, CO: r2050, CO: r2060
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-19
Parameter
Overview of parameters
Table 1-2
Possible combinations of BICO interconnections, continued
BICO input parameter
CI parameter
BICO output parameter
Unsigned32/Inte
ger16
BI parameter
Unsigned32/Inte Unsigned32/Floa Unsigned32/Bina
ger32
tingPoint32
ry
BO: Integer16
BO: Unsigned32
BO: Integer32
BO: FloatingPoint32
Legend:
x: BICO interconnection permitted
: BICO interconnection not permitted
1 Exception:
BICO input parameters with data type "Unsigned32/FloatingPoint32" can also be interconnected with the following
BICO output parameters, although these are not of the "FloatingPoint32" data type:
CO: r8850, CO: r8860, CO: r2050, CO: r2060
Dynamic index
For parameters with a dynamic index [0 to n], the following information is specified
here:
Data set (if this is available).
Parameter for the number of indices (n = number - 1).
The following information can be contained in this field:
"CDS, p0170" (command data set, CDS count)
Example:
p1070[0] main setpoint [command data set 0]
p1070[1] main setpoint [command data set 1], etc.
"DDS, p0180" (drive data set, DDS count)
"EDS, p0140" (encoder data set, EDS count)
"MDS, p0130" (motor data set, MDS count)
"PDS, p0120" (power unit data set, PDS count)
"p2615" (traversing blocks count)
1-20
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
Overview of parameters
Function diagram
The parameter is included in this function diagram. The structure of the parameter
function and its relationship with other parameters is shown in the specified function diagram.
Example:
Function diagram: 3060.3
3060:
Function diagram number
3:
Signal path (optional)
P group (refers only to access via BOP (Basic Operator Panel))
Specifies the functional group to which the parameter belongs. The required
parameter group can be set via p0004.
Note:
Parameter p0004 is CU-specific (belongs to Control Unit).
"Unit", "Unit group", and "Unit selection"
The standard unit of a parameter is specified in square brackets after the values
for "Min", "Max", and "Factory setting".
For parameters where the unit can be switched, the specifications for "Unit group"
and "Unit selection" determine the group to which this parameter belongs and with
which parameter the unit can be changed over.
Example:
Unit group: 7_1, unit selection: p0505
The parameter belongs to unit group 7_1 and the unit can be changed over using
p0505.
All the potential unit groups and possible unit selections are listed below.
Table 1-3
Unit groups (p0100)
Unit group
Unit selection for p0100 =
0
Reference quantity
for %
7_4
Nm
lbf ft
8_4
lbf
14_2
HP
14_6
kW
HP
ft2
25_1
kgm
lb
27_1
kg
lb
28_1
Nm/A
lbf ft/A
29_1
N/Arms
lbf/Arms
30_1
ft
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-21
Parameter
Overview of parameters
Table 1-4
Unit groups (p0349)
Unit group
Unit selection for p0349 =
1
15_1
Reference quantity
for %
mH
1000 p0304
---------------------------------------------------------------2 3 p0305 p0310
16_1
Ohm
p0304 --------------------------3 p0305
Table 1-5
Unit groups (p0505)
Unit group
Unit selection for p0505 =
1
1-22
Reference quantity
for %
2_1
Hz
Hz
p2000
2_2
kHz
kHz
p2000
3_1
rpm
rpm
p2000
4_1
m/min
ft/min
p2000
4_2
m/min
m/min
ft/min
ft/min
5_1
Vrms
Vrms
p2001
5_2
p2001
5_3
p2001
6_1
mArms
mArms
p2002
6_2
Arms
Arms
p2002
6_3
mA
mA
p2002
6_4
p2002
6_5
p2002
7_1
Nm
lbf ft
p2003
7_2
Nm
Nm
lbf ft
lbf ft
7_3
Nm
lbf ft
1.0
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
Overview of parameters
Table 1-5
Unit groups (p0505), continued
Unit group
Unit selection for p0505 =
1
Reference quantity
for %
8_1
lbf
p2003
8_2
lbf
lbf
8_3
lbf
1.0
14_1
HP
r2004
14_3
HP
r2004
14_4
HP
r2004
14_5
kW
HP
r2004
14_7
kW
HP
r2004
14_8
kW
HP
r2004
14_9
HP
HP
14_10
kW
kW
HP
HP
14_11
var
var
r2004
14_12
kvar
kvar
r2004
17_1
Nms/rad %
lbf ft
s/rad
p2000/p2003
18_1
V/A
V/A
p2002/p2001
19_1
A/V
A/V
p2001/p2002
21_1
21_2
ft/s2
ft/s2
p2007
22_1
m/s
m/s2
22_2
m/s2
ft/s2
23_1
Vrms
s/m
Vrms
s/m
Vrms s/ft Vrms s/ft -
24_1
Ns/m
Ns/m
lbf s/ft
lbf s/ft
24_2
Ns/m
lbf s/ft
p2000/p2003
26_1
m/s3
m/s
ft/s
ft/s
39_1
1/s2
1/s2
Table 1-6
p2007
Unit group (p0595)
Unit group
Unit selection for p0595 =
Value
9_1
Unit
Reference quantity
for %
The values that can be set and the technological units are shown in
p0595 (See Section 1.2).
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-23
Parameter
Overview of parameters
Parameter values
Min
Minimum value of the parameter [unit]
Max
Maximum value of the parameter [unit]
Factory setting
Shipped value (default) [unit]
A different value may be displayed for certain parameters
(e.g. p1800) during first commissioning.
Reason:
The setting of these parameters is determined by the
operating environment of the Control Unit (e.g. depending on device type, macro, power unit).
Note:
For SINAMICS G130/G150, the macros and their settings are provided in the following documentation:
SINAMICS G130/G150 Operating Instructions
Not for motor type
Specifies for which motor type this parameter has no significance
ASM: Induction motor
FEM: Separately excited synchronous motor
PEM: Permanent-magnet synchronous motor
REL: Reluctance motor/SIEMOSYN motor
Normalizing
Specifies the reference quantity that is used to convert a signal value automatically with a BICO interconnection.
The following reference quantities may be specified:
p2000 to p2007: Reference speed, reference voltage, etc.
TEMP: 100 = 100%
PERCENT: 1.0 = 100%
4000H: 4000 hex = 100%
Expert list
Specifies whether this parameter is available in the expert list of the specified
drive objects in the commissioning software
1: Parameter does exist in the expert list.
0: Parameter does not exist in the expert list.
1-24
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
Overview of parameters
Notice:
The user shall assume full responsibility for using parameters marked "Expert list:
0" (parameter does not exist in the expert list).
These parameters and their functionalities have not been tested and no further
user documentation is available for them (e.g. description of functions). Moreover,
no support is provided for these parameters by "Technical Support" (hotline).
Description
Explanation of the function of a parameter
Values
Lists the possible values of a parameter
Recommendation
Information about recommended settings
Index
The name and meaning of each individual index is specified for indexed parameters.
The following applies to the values (Min, Max, Factory setting) of indexed adjustable parameters:
Min, Max:
The adjustment range and unit apply to all indices.
Factory setting:
When all indices have the same factory setting, index 0 is specified with the
unit to represent all indices.
When the indices have different factory settings, they are all listed individually
with the unit.
Bit array
For parameters with bit arrays, the following information is provided about each
bit:
Bit number and signal name
Meaning with signal states 0 and 1
Function diagram (optional)
The signal is shown on this function diagram.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-25
Parameter
Overview of parameters
Dependency
Conditions that must be fulfilled for this parameter. Also includes special effects
that can occur between this parameter and others.
See also: List of other relevant parameters.
Safety notices
Important information that must be observed to avoid the risk of physical injury or
material damage.
Information that must be observed to avoid any problems.
Information that the user or operator may find useful.
1-26
Danger
The description of this safety notice can be found at the
beginning of this manual (see Safety notices).
Warning
The description of this safety notice can be found at the
beginning of this manual (see Safety notices).
Caution
The description of this safety notice can be found at the
beginning of this manual (see Safety notices).
Caution
The description of this safety notice can be found at the
beginning of this manual (see Safety notices).
Notice
The description of this safety notice can be found at the
beginning of this manual (see Safety notices).
Note
Information that the user or operator may find useful.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
Overview of parameters
1.1.2
Number ranges of parameters
Note:
The following number ranges represent an overview for all parameters in
SINAMICS.
The parameters for the product described in this List Manual are described in
detail in Section 1.2.
Parameters are grouped into the following number ranges:
Table 1-7
Number ranges of parameters
Range
Description
From
To
0000
0099
Operation and visualization
0100
0199
Commissioning
0200
0299
Power unit
0300
0399
Motor
0400
0499
Encoder
0500
0599
Technology and units
0600
0699
Thermal motor monitoring and motor model, maximum current
0700
0799
Command sources and terminals on Control Unit, measuring
sockets
0800
0839
CDS, DDS data sets (e.g. switch over, copy)
0840
0879
Sequence control (e.g. source for ON/OFF1)
0880
0899
Control and status words
0900
0999
PROFIBUS/PROFIdrive
1000
1199
Setpoint channel
1200
1299
Functions (e.g. motor holding brake)
1300
1399
V/f control
1400
1799
Closed loop control
1800
1899
Gating unit
1900
1999
Power unit and motor identification
2000
2099
Communication (PROFIBUS)
2100
2199
Faults and alarms, monitoring functions
2200
2399
Technology controller
2900
2930
Fixed values (e.g. per cent, torque)
3400
3699
Infeed control (Active Line Module)
3800
3899
Friction characteristic
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-27
Parameter
Overview of parameters
Table 1-7
Number ranges of parameters, continued
Range
1-28
Description
From
To
3900
3999
Management parameters
4000
4199
Terminal Board, Terminal Module (e.g. TB30, TM31)
4200
4399
Terminal Module (e.g. TM15, TM17)
6000
6999
SINAMICS GM/SM/GL
7000
7499
Parallel connection of power units
7800
7899
EEPROM read/write parameters
8500
8599
Data and macro management
8600
8799
CAN bus
8800
8899
Communication Board
9300
9399
Safety Integrated
9400
9499
Parameter consistency and storage
9500
9899
Safety Integrated
9900
9949
Topology
9950
9999
Diagnostics (internal)
10000
10099
Safety Integrated
11000
11299
Free technology controller 1, 2, 3
20000
20999
Free function blocks (FBLOCKS)
21000
25999
Drive Control Chart (DCC)
50000
53999
SINAMICS DC MASTER (DC closed loop control)
61000
61001
PROFINET
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
1.2
List of parameters
Product: SINAMICS G130/G150, Version: 4301400, Language: eng
Objects: CU_G_G130, CU_G_G150, ENCODER, HUB, TB30, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
r0002
Control Unit operating display / CU op_display
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
117
Factory setting
-
Description:
Operating display for the Control Unit (CU).
Value:
0:
10:
20:
25:
31:
33:
34:
35:
70:
80:
99:
101:
111:
112:
113:
114:
115:
117:
Notice:
For several missing enable signals, the corresponding value with the highest number is displayed.
r0002
Encoder DO operating display / Enc DO op_display
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
250
Factory setting
-
Operation
Ready
Wait for run-up
Wait for automatic FW update of DRIVE-CLiQ components
Commissioning software download active
Remove/acknowledge topology error
Exit commissioning mode
Carry out first commissioning
Initialization
Reset active
Internal software error
Specify topology
Insert drive object
Delete drive object
Change drive object number
Change component number
Run parameter download
Delete component
Description:
Operating display for encoder drive object
Value:
0:
35:
45:
46:
60:
200:
250:
Notice:
For several missing enable signals, the corresponding value with the highest number is displayed.
Encoder in cyclic operation
Carry out first commissioning (p0010)
Remove fault cause, acknowledge fault
Exit commissioning mode (p0009, p0010)
Encoder deactivated
Wait for booting/partial booting
Device signals a topology error
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-29
Parameter
List of parameters
r0002
DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module operating display / Hub op_display
HUB
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
250
Factory setting
-
Description:
Operating display for the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module.
Value:
0:
40:
50:
60:
70:
120:
200:
250:
Notice:
For several missing enable signals, the corresponding value with the highest number is displayed.
r0002
TB30 operating display / TB30 op_display
TB30
Module in cyclic operation
Module not in cyclic operation
Alarm
Fault
Initialization
Module deactivated
Wait for booting/partial booting
Device signals a topology error
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
250
Factory setting
-
Description:
Operating display for Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
Value:
0:
40:
60:
70:
80:
120:
200:
250:
Notice:
For several missing enable signals, the corresponding value with the highest number is displayed.
r0002
TM31 operating display / TM31 op_display
TM31
Module in cyclic operation
Module not in cyclic operation
Fault
Initialization
Reset active
Module deactivated
Wait for run-up
Device signals a topology error
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
250
Factory setting
-
Description:
Operating display for Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Value:
0:
40:
50:
60:
70:
120:
200:
250:
Notice:
For several missing enable signals, the corresponding value with the highest number is displayed.
1-30
Module in cyclic operation
Module not in cyclic operation
Alarm
Fault
Initialization
Module deactivated
Wait for booting/partial booting
Device signals a topology error
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
r0002
TM54F operating display / TM54F op_display
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
250
Factory setting
-
Description:
Operating display for Terminal Module 54F (TM54F).
Value:
0:
40:
50:
60:
70:
120:
200:
250:
r0002
Drive operating display / Drv op_display
Module in cyclic operation
Module not in cyclic operation
Alarm
Fault
Initialization
Module deactivated
Wait for booting/partial booting
Device signals a topology error
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Integer16
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
250
Factory setting
-
Description:
Operating display for the drive.
Value:
0:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
21:
22:
23:
31:
35:
41:
42:
43:
44:
45:
46:
60:
200:
250:
Dependency:
Refer to: r0046
Notice:
For several missing enable signals, the corresponding value with the highest number is displayed.
Operation - everything enabled
Operation - set "enable setpoint" = "1" (p1142, p1152)
Operation - set "enable speed controller" = "1" (p0856)
Operation - RFG frozen, set "RFG start" = "1" (p1141)
Operation - set "enable RFG" = "1" (p1140)
Oper. - MotID, excit. running and/or brake opens, SS2, SOS
Operation - open brake (p1215)
Operation - withdraw braking with OFF1 using "ON/OFF1" = "1"
Operation - braking with OFF3 can only be interrupted with OFF2
Operation - brake on fault, remove fault, acknowledge
Operation - armature short-circ./DC brake act. (p1230, p1231)
Ready for operation - set "Operation enable" = "1" (p0852)
Ready for operation - demagnetizing running (p0347)
Ready for operation - set "Infeed operation" = "1" (p0864)
Ready for switching on - set "ON/OFF1" = "0/1" (p0840)
Switching on inhibited - carry out first commissioning (p0010)
Switching on inhibited - set "ON/OFF1" = "0" (p0840)
Switching on inhibited - set "OC/OFF2" = "1" (p0844, p0845)
Switching on inhibited - set "OC/OFF3" = "1" (p0848, p0849)
Switching on inhibited - connect 24 V to terminal EP (hardware)
Switching on inhibited - rectify fault, acknowledge fault, STO
Switching on inhibited - exit comm mode (p0009, p0010)
Drive object deactivated/not operational
Wait for booting/partial booting
Device signals a topology error
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-31
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
OC: Operating condition
EP: Enable Pulses (pulse enable)
RFG: Ramp-function generator
COMM: Commissioning
MotID: Motor data identification
SS2: Safe Stop 2
SOS: Safe Operating Stop
STO: Safe Torque Off
p0003
BOP access level / BOP acc_level
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1, U, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
4
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the access level for reading and writing parameters via the Basic Operator Panel (BOP).
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
Note:
Access level 0 (user-defined):
User-defined
Standard
Extended
Expert
Service
Parameters from the user-defined list (p0013). Not used as of firmware version 2.6 (p0016).
Access level 1 (standard):
Parameters for the simplest operator control possibility (e.g. p1120 = ramp-function generator, ramp-up time).
Access level 2 (extended):
Parameters to operate the basic functions of the drive unit.
Access level 3 (experts):
Expert know-how is required for these parameters (e.g. BICO parameterization).
Access level 4 (service):
For these parameters, it is necessary that authorized service personnel enter the appropriate password (p3950).
p0004
BOP display filter / BOP disp_filter
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C2(1), U, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
99
Factory setting
0
Description:
1-32
Sets the display filter for parameters with the Basic Operator Panel (BOP).
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
7:
8:
10:
12:
13:
14:
15:
17:
18:
19:
20:
21:
25:
28:
47:
50:
90:
95:
98:
99:
All parameters
Displays, signals
Power unit
Motor
Encoder/pos enc
Technology/units
Digital inputs/outputs commands sequence control
Analog inputs/outputs
Setpoint channel/ramp-fct generator
Functions
V/f control
Control
Data sets
Basic positioner
Gating unit
Motor identification
Communication
Faults, alarms, monitoring functions
Closed loop position control
Free function blocks
Trace and function generator
OA parameters
Topology
Safety Integrated
Command Data Sets (CDS)
Drive Data Sets (DDS)
Dependency:
Refer to: p0003
Notice:
The display filter via p0004 provides precise filtering and displays the corresponding parameters only when p0009
and p0010 = 0.
Note:
The set access level via p0003 is also relevant for the display filter via p0004.
Examples (assumption: p0009 = p0010 = 0):
p0003 = 1, p0004 = 3
--> Only the parameters for the motor are displayed with access level 1.
p0003 = 2, p0004 = 3
--> Only the parameters for the motor are displayed with access levels 1 and 2.
p0005[0...1]
BOP operating display selection / BOP op_disp sel
All objects
Can be changed: U, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
[0] 2
[1] 0
Description:
Sets the parameter number and parameter index for display for p0006 = 2, 4 for the Basic Operator Panel (BOP).
Examples for the SERVO drive object:
p0005[0] = 21, p0005[1] = 0: Actual speed smoothed (r0021)
p0005[0] = 25, p0005[1] = 0: Output voltage smoothed (r0025)
p0005[0] = 27, p0005[1] = 0: Absolute current actual value, smoothed (r0027)
Index:
[0] = Parameter number
[1] = Parameter index
Dependency:
Refer to: p0006
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-33
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
Procedure:
1.
The parameter number to be displayed should be set in index 0. Only the monitoring parameters (read-only parameters) can be set that actually exist for the actual drive object.
If the set parameter number is not indexed, or if there is an index in index 1 that lies outside the valid range of the
set parameter, then index 1 is automatically set to 0.
2.
The index that belongs to the parameter set in index 0 should be set in index 1. The permissible changes in index 1
always depend on the parameter number set in index 0.
p0006
BOP operating display mode / BOP op_ disp mode
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, HUB,
TB30, TM31,
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: U, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
4
Max
4
Factory setting
4
Description:
Sets the mode of the operating display for the Basic Operator Panel (BOP) in the operating states "ready for operation" and "operation".
Value:
4:
Dependency:
Refer to: p0005
Note:
Mode 0 ... 3 can only be selected if also r0020, r0021 are available on the drive object.
p0005
Mode 4 is available for all drive objects.
p0006
BOP operating display mode / BOP op_ disp mode
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: Integer16
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
4
Factory setting
4
Description:
Sets the mode of the operating display for the Basic Operator Panel (BOP) in the operating states "ready for operation" and "operation".
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
Dependency:
Refer to: p0005
Note:
Mode 0 ... 3 can only be selected if also r0020, r0021 are available on the drive object.
Operation --> r0021, otherwise r0020 <--> r0021
Operation --> r0021, otherwise r0020
Operation --> p0005, otherwise p0005 <--> r0020
Operation --> r0002, otherwise r0002 <--> r0020
p0005
Mode 4 is available for all drive objects.
p0007
BOP background lighting / BOP lighting
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [s]
Max
2000 [s]
Factory setting
0 [s]
Description:
Sets the delay time until the background lighting of the Basic Operator Panel (BOP) is switched off.
Note:
p0007 = 0: Background lighting is always switched on (factory setting).
If no keys are actuated, then the background lighting automatically switches itself off after this time has expired.
1-34
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p0008
BOP drive object after booting / BOP DO after boot
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
65535
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the required drive object that is active at the Basic Operator Panel (BOP) after booting.
Note:
The value from p0008 initializes the display on the Basic Operator Panel (BOP) at the top left after booting.
The drive object Control Unit is selected using the value 1.
p0009
Device commissioning parameter filter / Dev comm par_filt
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
10000
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the device and basic drive commissioning.
By appropriately setting this parameter, those parameters are filtered that can be written into in the various commissioning steps.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
29:
30:
50:
55:
101:
111:
112:
113:
114:
115:
117:
10000:
Ready
Device configuration
Defining the drive type/function module
Drive base configuration
Data set base configuration
Device download
Parameter reset
OA application configuration
OA application installation
Topology input
Insert drive object
Delete drive object
Change drive object number
Change component number
Parameter download
Delete component
Ready (asynchronous)
Notice:
For p0009 = 10000 the following applies:
After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in
r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
Note:
The drives can only be powered up outside the device commissioning (the inverter enabled). In this case, p0009
must be 0 (Ready) and the individual drive objects must have already gone into operation (p0010).
p0009 = 1: Device configuration
At the first commissioning of the device, after booting, the device is in the "device configuration" state. To start the
internal automatic first commissioning of the drive unit, p0009 should be set to 0 (Ready) after the ID for the actual
topology (r0098) was transferred into the ID for the target topology (p0099). To do this, it is sufficient to set a single
index value of p0099[x] the same as r0098[x]. Before the device has been completely commissioned, no other
parameter can be changed. After the first commissioning was carried out, in this state, when required, other basic
device configuration parameters can be adapted (e.g. the basic sampling time in p0110).
p0009 = 2: Defines the drive type / function module
In this state, the drive object types and/or the function modules can be changed or selected for the individual drive
objects. To do this, the drive object type can be set using p0107[0...15] and the function can be set using
p0108[0...15] (refer to p0101[0...15]).
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-35
Parameter
List of parameters
p0009 = 3: Drive basis configuration
In this state, after the device has been commissioned for the first time, basic changes can be made for the individual drive objects (e.g. sampling times in p0111, p0112, p0115 and the number of data sets in p0120, p0130, p0140,
p0170, p0180).
p0009 = 4: Data set basis configuration
In this state, after the device has been commissioned for the first time, for the individual drive objects changes can
be made regarding the assignment of the components (p0121, p0131, p0141, p0151, p0161) to the individual data
sets and the assignment of the power unit, motor and encoder to the drive data sets (p0185, ...).
p0009 = 29: Device download
If a download is made using the commissioning software, the device is automatically brought into this state. After
the download has been completed, p0009 is automatically set to 0 (ready). It is not possible to manually set p0009
to this value.
p0009 = 30: Parameter reset
In order to bring the complete unit into the "first commissioning" state or to load the parameters saved using p0977,
to start, p0009 must be set to this value. p0976 can then be changed to the required value.
p0009 = 50: OA application configuration
In this state, after the device has been commissioned for the first time, changes can be made for the individual drive
objects regarding the activity (p4956) of the OA applications.
p0009 = 55: OA application installation
OA applications can be installed and/or uninstalled in this state.
p0009 = 101: Topology input
In this state, the DRIVE-CLiQ target topology can be entered using p9902 and p9903.
p0009 = 111: Insert drive object
This state allows a new drive object to be inserted using p9911.
p0009 = 112: Delete drive object
This state allows existing drive objects to be deleted using p9912 after the device has been commissioned for the
first time.
p0009 = 113: Change drive object number
This state allows the drive object number of existing drive objects to be changed using p9913 after the device has
been commissioned for the first time.
p0009 = 114: Change component number
This state allows the component number of existing components to be changed using p9914 after the device has
been commissioned for the first time.
p0009 = 115: Parameter download
This state allows the complete device and drive commissioning using the parameter services.
p0009 = 117: Delete component
This state allows components to be deleted using p9917 after the device has been commissioned for the first time.
p0010
Encoder DO commissioning parameter filter / EncDO com par_filt
ENCODER
Description:
Can be changed: C2(1), T
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
30
Factory setting
0
Sets the parameter filter to commission an encoder drive object.
Setting this parameter filters out the parameters that can be written into in the various commissioning steps.
For the BOP, this setting also causes the read access operations to be filtered.
Value:
0:
4:
5:
29:
30:
Note:
Procedure for "Reset parameter": Set p0010 to 30 and p0970 to 1.
1-36
Ready
Encoder commissioning
Technological application/units
Only Siemens int
Parameter reset
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p0010
TB30 commissioning parameter filter / TB30 comm.par_filt
TB30
Description:
Can be changed: C2(1), T
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
30
Factory setting
0
Sets the parameter filter for commissioning a Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
Setting this parameter filters out the parameters that can be written into in the various commissioning steps.
For the BOP, this setting also causes the read access operations to be filtered.
Value:
0:
29:
30:
Dependency:
Refer to: p0970
Note:
Procedure for "Reset parameter": Set p0010 to 30 and p0970 to 1.
p0010
TM31 commissioning parameter filter / TM31 comm par_filt
TM31
Description:
Ready
Only Siemens int
Parameter reset
Can be changed: C2(1), T
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
30
Factory setting
0
Sets the parameter filter for commissioning a Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Setting this parameter filters out the parameters that can be written into in the various commissioning steps.
For the BOP, this setting also causes the read access operations to be filtered.
Value:
0:
29:
30:
Ready
Only Siemens int
Parameter reset
Dependency:
Refer to: p0970
Note:
Only the following values are possible: p0010 = 0, 30
Procedure for "Reset parameter": Set p0010 to 30 and p0970 to 1.
p0010
TM54F commissioning parameter filter / TM54F com par_filt
TM54F_MA
Description:
Can be changed: C2(1), T
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2847
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
95
Factory setting
0
Sets the parameter filter for commissioning a Terminal Module 54F (TM54F).
Setting this parameter filters out the parameters that can be written into in the various commissioning steps.
For the BOP, this setting also causes the read access operations to be filtered.
Value:
0:
29:
30:
95:
Ready
Only Siemens int
Parameter reset
Safety Integrated commissioning
Dependency:
Refer to: p0970
Note:
Procedure for "Reset parameter": Set p0010 to 30 and p0970 to 1.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-37
Parameter
List of parameters
p0010
Drive commissioning parameter filter / Drv comm. par_filt
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(1), T
0
Data type: Integer16
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2800, 2846
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
10000
Factory setting
1
Sets the parameter filter to commission a drive.
Setting this parameter filters out the parameters that can be written into in the various commissioning steps.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
15:
17:
25:
29:
30:
95:
10000:
Ready
Quick commissioning
Power unit commissioning
Motor commissioning
Encoder commissioning
Technological application/units
Data sets
Basic positioner commissioning
Position control commissioning
Only Siemens int
Parameter reset
Safety Integrated commissioning
Ready with immediate feedback signal
Notice:
For p0010 = 10000 the following applies:
After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in
r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
Note:
The drive can only be powered up outside the drive commissioning (inverter enable). To realize this, this parameter
must be set to 0.
For p3900 not equal to 0, at the end of the quick commissioning, this parameter is automatically reset to 0.
Procedure for "Reset parameter": Set p0010 to 30 and p0970 to 1.
p0010 = 10000 corresponds to p0010 = 0. Unlike with p0010 = 0, the parameter modification is applied immediately
and the calculations are made in the background. Further parameter modifications cannot be made while the calculations are being performed.
p0011
BOP password entry (p0013) / BOP passw ent p13
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the password for the Basic Operator Panel (BOP).
Dependency:
Refer to: p0012, p0013
p0012
BOP password acknowledgement (p0013) / BOP passw ackn p13
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
0
Description:
Acknowledges the password for the Basic Operator Panel (BOP).
Dependency:
Refer to: p0011, p0013
1-38
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p0013[0...49]
BOP user-defined list / BOP list
All objects
Can be changed: U, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the required parameters to read and write via the Basic Operator Panel (BOP).
Activation:
1. p0003 = 3 (expert).
2. p0013[0...49] = requested parameter number
3. If required, enter p0011 = password in order to prevent non-authorized deactivation.
4. p0016 = 1 --> activates the selected user-defined list.
Deactivation/change:
1. p0003 = 3 (expert).
2. If required, p0012 = p0011, in order to be authorized to change or deactivate the list.
3. If required p0013[0...49] = required parameter number.
4. p0016 = 1 --> activates the modified user-defined list.
5. p0003 = 0 --> deactivates the user-defined list.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0009, p0011, p0012, p0976
Note:
The following parameters can be read and written on the Control Unit drive object:
- p0003 (access stage)
- p0009 (device commissioning, parameter filter)
- p0012 (BOP password acknowledgement (p0013))
The following applies for the user-defined list:
- password protection is only available on the drive object Control Unit and is valid for all of the drive objects.
- p0013 cannot be included in the user-defined list for all drive objects.
- p0003, p0009, p0011, p0012, p0976 cannot, for the drive object Control Unit, be included in the user-defined list.
- the user-defined list can be cleared and deactivated "restore factory setting".
A value of 0 means: Entry is empty.
p0015
Macro drive unit / Macro drv unit
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
999999
Factory setting
1
Description:
Runs the corresponding macro files.
The selected macro file must be available on the memory card/device memory.
Example:
p0015 = 6 --> the macro file PM000006.ACX is run.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0700, p1000, p1500, r8570
Notice:
After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in
r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
Note:
The macros in the specified directory are displayed in r8570. r8570 is not in the expert list of the commissioning
software.
Macros available as standard are described in the technical documentation of the particular product.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-39
Parameter
List of parameters
p0015
Macro drive object / Macro DO
TM31,
Can be changed: C2(1)
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Unsigned32
0
P-Group: Commands
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
999999
Factory setting
0
Runs the corresponding macro files.
The selected macro file must be available on the memory card/device memory.
Example:
p0015 = 6 --> the macro file PM000006.ACX is run.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0700, p1000, p1500, r8570
Notice:
After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in
r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
No errors were issued during quick commissioning (p3900 = 1) when writing to parameters of the QUICK_IBN
group!
Note:
The macros in the specified directory are displayed in r8570. r8570 is not in the expert list of the commissioning
software.
Macros available as standard are described in the technical documentation of the particular product.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
p0016
Activate BOP user-defined list / BOP user list act
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1, U, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Setting for activating/deactivating the user-defined list for the Basic Operator Panel (BOP).
If p0016 = 1, then it is only possible to access parameters in the parameter list (p0013).
Value:
0:
1:
BOP user-defined list deactivated
BOP user-defined list activated
Dependency:
Refer to: p0011, p0012, p0013
Note:
The user-defined list can only be deactivated with p0011 = p0012
r0018
Control Unit Firmware-Version / CU FW version
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the firmware version of the Control Unit.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0128, r0148, r0158, r0197, r0198
Note:
Example:
The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00.
1-40
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
r0019.0...14
CO/BO: Control word BOP / STW BOP
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the control word for the Basic Operator Panel (BOP).
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
07
13
14
r0020
Speed setpoint smoothed / n_set smth
Signal name
ON / OFF (OFF1)
No coast-down / coast-down (OFF2)
No Quick Stop / Quick Stop (OFF3)
Acknowledge fault (0 -> 1)
Motorized potentiometer raise
Motorized potentiometer lower
1 signal
ON
No coast down
No Quick Stop
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
OFF (OFF1)
Coast down (OFF2)
Quick Stop (OFF3)
No
No
No
FP
-
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 5020, 6799
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Description:
Displays the currently smoothed speed setpoint at the input of the speed controller or V/f characteristic (after the
interpolator).
Dependency:
Refer to: r0060
Note:
Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The speed setpoint is available smoothed (r0020) and unsmoothed (r0060).
r0021
CO: Actual speed smoothed / n_act smooth
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1580, 1680,
4710, 6799
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Description:
Displays the smoothed actual value of the motor speed.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0063
Note:
Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The value displayed in r0021 is the smoothed value of r0063.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-41
Parameter
List of parameters
r0022
Speed actual value rpm smoothed / n_ist rpm smooth
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1580, 1680,
4710, 6799
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Displays the smoothed actual value of the motor speed.
r0022 is identical to r0021, however, it always has units of rpm and contrary to r0021 cannot be changed over.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0063
Note:
Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The value displayed in r0022 is the smoothed value of r0063.
r0024
Output frequency smoothed / f_outp smooth
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1690, 5300,
5730, 6799
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Hz]
Max
- [Hz]
Factory setting
- [Hz]
Description:
Displays the smoothed converter frequency.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0066
Note:
Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The output frequency is available smoothed (r0024) and unsmoothed (r0066).
r0025
CO: Output voltage smoothed / V_outp smooth
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1690, 5730,
6799
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Vrms]
Max
- [Vrms]
Factory setting
- [Vrms]
Description:
Displays the smoothed output voltage of the power unit.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0072
Note:
Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The output voltage is available smoothed (r0025) and unsmoothed (r0072).
1-42
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
r0026
CO: DC link voltage smoothed / Vdc smooth
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6799, 8750,
8850, 8950
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
- [V]
Max
- [V]
Factory setting
- [V]
Description:
Displays the smoothed actual value of the DC link voltage.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0070
Notice:
For SINAMICS S120 AC Drive (AC/AC) the following applies:
When measuring a DC link voltage < 200 V, for the Power Module (e.g. PM340) a valid measured value is not supplied. In this case, when an external 24V power supply is connected, a value of approx. 24 V is displayed in the display parameter.
Note:
SERVO, VECTOR: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The DC link voltage is available smoothed (r0026) and unsmoothed (r0070).
r0027
CO: Absolute actual current smoothed / I_act abs val smth
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 5730, 6799,
8850, 8950
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Description:
Displays the smoothed absolute actual current value.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0068
Notice:
This smoothed signal is not suitable for diagnostics or evaluation of dynamic operations. In this case, the
unsmoothed value should be used.
Note:
A_INF, S_INF, VECTOR: Smoothing time constant = 300 ms
SERVO: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The absolute current actual value is available smoothed (r0027) and unsmoothed (r0068).
r0028
Modulation depth smoothed / Mod_depth smth
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 5730, 6799,
8950
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:
Displays the smoothed actual value of the modulation depth.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0074
Note:
A_INF: Smoothing time constant = 300 ms
SERVO, VECTOR: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The modulation depth is available smoothed (r0028) and unsmoothed (r0074).
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-43
Parameter
List of parameters
r0029
Current actual value field-generating smoothed / Id_act smooth
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 5730, 6799
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Description:
Displays the smoothed field-generating actual current.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0076
Note:
SERVO: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
VECTOR: Smoothing time constant = 300 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The field-generating current actual value is available smoothed (r0029) and unsmoothed (r0076).
r0030
Current actual value torque-generating smoothed / Iq_act smooth
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 5730, 6799
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Description:
Displays the smoothed torque-generating actual current.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0078
Note:
SERVO: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
VECTOR: Smoothing time constant = 300 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The following applies for SERVO:
The torque-generating current actual value is available smoothed (r0030 with 100 ms, r0078[1] with p0045) and
unsmoothed (r0078[0]).
The following applies for VECTOR:
The torque-generating current actual value is available smoothed (r0030 with 300 ms) and unsmoothed (r0078).
r0031
Actual torque smoothed / M_act smooth
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 5730, 6799
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: 7_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2003
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Nm]
Max
- [Nm]
Factory setting
- [Nm]
Description:
Displays the smoothed torque actual value.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0080
Note:
Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The active current actual value is available smoothed (r0031) and unsmoothed (r0080).
1-44
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
r0032
CO: Active power actual value smoothed / P_actv_act smth
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 5730, 6799,
8750, 8850, 8950
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: 14_10
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: r2004
Expert list: 1
Min
- [kW]
Max
- [kW]
Factory setting
- [kW]
Description:
Displays the smoothed actual value of the active power.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0082
Notice:
This smoothed signal is not suitable for diagnostics or evaluation of dynamic operations. In this case, the
unsmoothed value should be used.
Note:
Significance for the drive: Power output at the motor shaft
Significance for the infeed: Line power drawn
For A_INF, B_INF and S_INF the following applies:
The active power is available smoothed (r0032 with 300 ms) and unsmoothed (r0082).
The following applies for SERVO:
The active power is available smoothed (r0032 with 100 ms, r0082[1] with p0045) and unsmoothed (r0082[0]).
For VECTOR and VECTORMV, the following applies:
The active power is available smoothed (r0032 with 100 ms) and unsmoothed (r0082).
r0033
Torque utilization smoothed / M_util smooth
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8012
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Displays the smoothed torque utilization as a percentage.
The torque utilization is obtained from the required smoothed torque in reference to the torque limit, scaled using
p2196.
Note:
Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The torque utilization is available smoothed (r0033) and unsmoothed (r0081).
For M_set total (r0079) > 0, the following applies:
- Required torque = M_set total
- Actual torque limit = M_max upper effective (r1538)
For M_set total (r0079) <= 0, the following applies:
- Required torque = - M_set total
- Actual torque limit = - M_max lower effective (r1539)
For the actual torque limit = 0, the following applies: r0033 = 100 %
For the actual torque limit < 0, the following applies: r0033 = 0 %
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-45
Parameter
List of parameters
r0034
Motor utilization / Motor utilization
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8017
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:
Displays the motor utilization from the thermal I2t motor model.
Dependency:
The motor utilization is only determined for permanent-magnet synchronous motors and if the I2t motor model is
activated.
The motor utilization is formed from the ratio between the I2t motor model temperature (minus 40 Kelvin) and the
reference value p0605 (motor overtemperature, fault threshold) - 40 Kelvin. If p0605 is reduced, r0034 increases
and the motor temperature remains the same.
Refer to: p0611, p0612, p0615
Note:
Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
A value of r0034 = -200.0 % indicates an invalid display, for example, because the thermal I2t motor model was not
activated or was incorrectly parameterized.
r0035
CO: Motor temperature / Mot_temp
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 7008, 8016,
8017
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: 21_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: TEMP
Expert list: 1
Min
- [C]
Max
- [C]
Factory setting
- [C]
Description:
Displays the actual temperature in the motor.
Note:
For r0035 not equal to -200.0 C, the following applies:
- this temperature display is valid.
- a KTY sensor is connected.
- the thermal model for the induction motor is activated (p0612 bit 1 = 1 and temperature sensor deactivated: p0600
= 0 or p0601 = 0).
For r0035 equal to -200.0 C, the following applies:
- this temperature display is not valid (temperature sensor error).
- A PTC sensor or bimetallic NC contact is connected.
- the temperature sensor of the synchronous motor is deactivated (p0600 = 0 or p0601 = 0).
r0036
CO: Power unit overload I2t / PU overload I2t
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8014
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Displays the power unit overload determined using the I2t calculation.
A current reference value is defined for the I2t monitoring of the power unit. It represents the current that can be
conducted by the power unit without any influence of the switching losses (e.g. the continuously permissible current
of the capacitors, inductances, busbars, etc.).
If the I2t reference current of the power unit is not exceeded, then an overload (0 %) is not displayed.
In the other case, the degree of thermal overload is calculated, whereby 100% results in a trip.
1-46
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
Dependency:
Refer to: p0290, p0294
Refer to: F30005
r0037[0...1]
Control Unit temperature / CU temperature
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: TEMP
Expert list: 1
Min
- [C]
Max
- [C]
Factory setting
- [C]
Description:
Displays the Control Unit temperature.
An appropriate message is output when 87 C is exceeded.
Index:
[0] = Control Unit temperature actual
[1] = Control Unit temperature maximum
Dependency:
Refer to: A01009
Note:
The value of -200 indicates that there is no measuring signal.
r0037[0...19]
CO: Power unit temperatures / PU temperatures
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8014
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: 21_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: TEMP
Expert list: 1
Min
- [C]
Max
- [C]
Factory setting
- [C]
Description:
Displays the temperatures in the power unit.
Index:
[0] = Inverter, maximum value
[1] = Depletion layer maximum value
[2] = Rectifier maximum value
[3] = Air intake
[4] = Interior of power unit
[5] = Inverter 1
[6] = Inverter 2
[7] = Inverter 3
[8] = Inverter 4
[9] = Inverter 5
[10] = Inverter 6
[11] = Rectifier 1
[12] = Rectifier 2
[13] = Depletion layer 1
[14] = Depletion layer 2
[15] = Depletion layer 3
[16] = Depletion layer 4
[17] = Depletion layer 5
[18] = Depletion layer 6
[19] = Cooling system liquid intake
Note:
The value of -200 indicates that there is no measuring signal.
r0037[0]: Maximum value of the inverter temperatures (r0037[5...10]).
r0037[1]: Maximum value of the depletion layer temperatures (r0037[13...18]).
r0037[2]: Maximum value of the rectifier temperatures (r0037[11...12]).
The maximum value is the temperature of the hottest inverter, depletion layer, or rectifier.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-47
Parameter
List of parameters
r0038
Power factor smoothed / Cos phi smooth
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6799, 8850,
8950
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the smoothed actual power factor.
Note:
Smoothing time constant = 300 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
Significance for the motor: Motor power factor
Significance for the infeed: Power factor at the connection point (p3470, p3471)
r0039
Energy consumption / Energy consumption
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [kWh]
Max
- [kWh]
Factory setting
- [kWh]
Description:
Displays the electrical energy used since the last reset.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0040
p0040
Reset energy consumption display / Energy usage reset
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: Unsigned8
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Setting to reset the energy consumption display (r0039).
Procedure: Set p0040 = 0 --> 1.
The display is reset and the parameter is automatically set to zero.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0039
p0045
Smoothing time constant, display values / T_smth display
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 4715, 5610,
5730, 6714, 8012
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [ms]
Max
1000.00 [ms]
Factory setting
1.00 [ms]
Sets the smoothing time constant for the following display values:
SERVO: r0078[1], r0079[1], r0081 (calculated from the quantities smoothed with p0045), r0082[1].
VECTOR: r0063[1], r0068[1], r0080[1], r0082[1].
1-48
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
r0046.0...31
CO/BO: Missing enable sig / Missing enable sig
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned32
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2634
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays missing enable signals that are preventing the closed-loop drive control from being commissioned.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
08
09
10
11
12
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Signal name
OFF1 enable missing
OFF2 enable missing
OFF3 enable missing
Operation enable missing
Armature short-circuit / DC current brake,
enable missing
STOP2 enable missing
STOP1 enable missing
EP terminals enable missing
Infeed enable missing
Ramp-function generator enable missing
Ramp-function generator start missing
Setpoint enable missing
OFF1 enable internal missing
OFF2 enable internal missing
OFF3 enable internal missing
Pulse enable internal missing
Armature short-circuit/DC current brake
internal enable missing
STOP2 enable internal missing
STOP1 enable internal missing
Function bypass active
Drive inactive or not operational
Demagnetizing not completed
Brake open missing
Cooling system ready signal missing
Speed controller inhibited
Jog setpoint active
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Dependency:
Refer to: r0002
Note:
The value r0046 = 0 indicates that all enable signals for this drive are present.
FP
7014,
7016
7014,
7016
-
Bit 00 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the signal source in p0840 is a 0 signal.
- there is a "switching on inhibited".
Bit 01 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the signal source in p0844 or p0845 is a 0 signal.
Bit 02 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the signal source in p0848 or p0849 is a 0 signal.
Bit 03 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the signal source in p0852 is a 0 signal.
Bit 04 =1 (armature short-circuit active), if:
- the signal source in p1230 has a 1 signal
Bit 05, Bit 06: Being prepared
Bit 08 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the pulse enable via terminal EP is missing (booksize: X21, chassis: X41).
Bit 09 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the signal source in p0864 is a 0 signal.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-49
Parameter
List of parameters
Bit 10 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the signal source in p1140 is a 0 signal.
Bit 11 = 1 (enable signal missing) if the speed setpoint is frozen, because:
- the signal source in p1141 is a 0 signal.
- the speed setpoint is entered from jogging and the two signal sources for jogging, bit 0 (p1055) and bit 1 (p1056)
have a 1 signal.
Bit 12 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the signal source in p1142 is a 0 signal.
- When activating the function module "basic positioner" (r0108.4 = 1), the signal source in p1142 is set to a 0 signal.
Bit 16 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- there is an OFF1 fault response. The system is only enabled if the fault is removed and was acknowledged and
the "switching on inhibited" withdrawn with OFF1 = 0.
Bit 17 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- commissioning mode is selected (p0009 > 0 or p0010 > 0).
- there is an OFF2 fault response.
- the drive is inactive (p0105 = 0) or is not operational (r7850[DO-Index]=0).
Bit 18 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- OFF3 has still not been completed or an OFF3 fault response is present.
Bit 19 = 1 (internal pulse enable missing), if:
- synchronization is running between the basic clock cycle, DRIVE-CLiQ clock cycle and application clock cycle.
Bit 20 =1 (internal armature short-circuit active), if:
- the drive is not in the state "S4: Operation" or "S5x" (refer to function diagram 2610).
- the internal pulse enable is missing (r0046.19 = 0).
Bit 21 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
The pulses have been enabled and the speed setpoint has still not been enabled, because:
- the holding brake opening time (p1216) has still not expired.
- the motor has still not been magnetized (induction motor).
- the encoder has not been calibrated (V/f vector and synchronous motor)
Bit 22: Being prepared
Bit 26 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the drive is inactive (p0105 = 0) or is not operational (r7850[DO-Index]=0).
Bit 27 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- demagnetizing has still not been completed (only for vector).
Bit 28 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the holding brake is closed or has still not been opened.
Bit 29 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the cooling system ready signal via BI: p0266[1] missing.
Bit 30 = 1 (speed controller inhibited), if one of the following reasons is present:
- A 0 signal is available via BI: p0856.
- the function generator with current input is active.
- the measuring function "current controller reference frequency characteristic" is active.
- the pole position identification is active.
- motor data identification is active (only certain steps).
Bit 31 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the speed setpoint from jog 1 or 2 is entered.
1-50
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
r0047
Motor data ident. routine and speed controller optimization / MotID and n_opt
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Integer16
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
300
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the actual status for the motor data identification (standstill measurement) and the speed/velocity controller optimization (rotating measurement).
Value:
0:
115:
120:
140:
150:
170:
190:
195:
200:
210:
220:
230:
240:
250:
270:
290:
300:
Note:
r0047 = 300 is also displayed if encoder calibration p1990 is selected.
r0049[0...3]
Motor data set/encoder data set effective / MDS/EDS effective
No measurement
Measurement q leakage inductance (part 2)
Speed controller optimization (vibration test)
Calculate speed controller setting
Measurement, moment of inertia
Measurement, magnetizing current and saturation characteristic
Speed encoder test
Measurement q leakage inductance (part 1)
Rotating measurement selected
Pole position identification selected
identification, leakage inductance
Identification, rotor time constant
Identification, stator inductance
Identification, stator inductance LQLD
Identification, stator resistance
Identification, valve lockout time
Standstill measurement selected
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned8
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8565
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the effective Motor Data Set (MDS) and the effective Encoder Data Sets (EDS).
Index:
[0] = Motor Data Set MDS effective
[1] = Encoder 1 Encoder Data Set EDS effective
[2] = Encoder 2 Encoder Data Set EDS effective
[3] = Encoder 3 Encoder Data Set EDS effective
Dependency:
Refer to: p0186, p0187, p0188, p0189, r0838
Note:
Value 99 means the following: No encoder assigned (not configured).
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-51
Parameter
List of parameters
r0050.0...3
CO/BO: Command Data Set CDS effective / CDS effective
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned8
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8560
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the effective Command Data Set (CDS).
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
Dependency:
Refer to: p0810, p0811, r0836
Note:
The Command Data Set selected using a binector input (e.g. p0810) is displayed using r0836.
r0051.0...4
CO/BO: Drive Data Set DDS effective / DDS effective
Signal name
CDS eff., bit 0
CDS eff., bit 1
CDS eff., bit 2
CDS eff., bit 3
1 signal
On
On
On
On
ENCODER,
Can be changed: VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Unsigned8
0
P-Group: Displays, signals
0 signal
Off
Off
Off
Off
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
FP
-
Description:
Displays the effective Drive Data Set (DDS).
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
Dependency:
Refer to: p0820, p0821, p0822, p0823, p0824, r0837
Note:
The drive data set changeover is suppressed when selecting the motor identification, during the rotating measurement, the encoder calibration and the friction characteristic record.
r0056.0...15
CO/BO: Status word, closed-loop control / ZSW cl-loop ctrl
Signal name
DDS eff., bit 0
DDS eff., bit 1
DDS eff., bit 2
DDS eff., bit 3
DDS eff., bit 4
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned16
1 signal
On
On
On
On
On
FP
-
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1530, 2526
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status word of the closed-loop control.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
1-52
0 signal
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Signal name
Initialization completed
Demagnetizing completed
Pulse enable present
Soft starting present
Magnetizing completed
Voltage boost when starting
Acceleration voltage
Frequency negative
Field weakening active
Voltage limit active
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Active
Active
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
Inactive
Inactive
No
No
No
FP
6300
6300
6719
6714
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
10
11
12
r0060
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
6310
6719
-
13
14
Slip limit active
Frequency limit active
Current limiting controller voltage output
active
Current/torque limiting
Vdc_max controller active
Active
Yes
Inactive
No
15
Vdc_min controller active
Yes
No
6060
6220,
6320
6220,
6320
CO: Speed setpoint before the setpoint filter / n_set before filt.
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2701, 2704,
5020, 6030, 6799
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Description:
Displays the actual speed setpoint at the input of the speed controller or V/f characteristic (after the interpolator).
Dependency:
Refer to: r0020
Note:
The speed setpoint is available smoothed (r0020) and unsmoothed (r0060).
r0061
CO: Actual speed unsmoothed / n_act unsmoothed
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1580, 4710,
4715
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Description:
Displays the actual speed values sensed by the encoders (unsmoothed).
r0061
CO: Actual velocity unsmoothed / v_act unsmoothed
ENCODER (Lin enc) Can be changed: -
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1580, 4710,
4715
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: 4_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [m/min]
Max
- [m/min]
Factory setting
- [m/min]
Displays the actual velocities sensed by the encoders (unsmoothed).
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-53
Parameter
List of parameters
r0061[0...2]
CO: Actual speed unsmoothed / n_act unsmoothed
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1580, 4710,
4715
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Description:
Displays the actual speed values sensed by the encoders (unsmoothed).
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Note:
For V/f operating modes, the speeds from encoder 2 and encoder 3 are not displayed.
r0062
CO: Speed setpoint after the filter / n_set after filter
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1590, 1750,
5020, 5030, 5210, 6030
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Description:
Displays the actual speed setpoint after the setpoint filters.
r0063[0...2]
CO: Actual speed value / n_act
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1680, 4715
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Description:
Displays the actual speed of the closed-loop speed control and the V/f control.
Index:
[0] = Unsmoothed
[1] = Smoothed with p0045
[2] = Calculated from f_set - f_slip
Dependency:
Refer to: r0021
Note:
The speed actual value is calculated in encoderless operation and for V/f control.
For operation with encoder, r0063[0] is smoothed with p1441.
The speed actual value (r0063[0]) is additionally displayed - smoothed with p0045 - in r0063[1].
The speed (r0063[2]) calculated from the output frequency and slip can only be compared with the speed actual
value (r0063[0]) in the steady-state.
The actual speed (r0063[0]) is available as a display quantity with additional smoothing in r0021.
1-54
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
r0064
CO: Speed controller system deviation / n_ctrl system dev
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 5040, 6040
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Description:
Displays the actual system deviation of the speed controller.
Note:
In servo control mode with active reference model, the system deviation to the P component of the speed controller
is displayed.
r0065
Slip frequency / f_Slip
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1710, 6310,
6727, 6730, 6732
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: 2_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Hz]
Max
- [Hz]
Factory setting
- [Hz]
Description:
Displays the slip frequency for induction motors (ASM).
r0066
CO: Output frequency / f_outp
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1690, 5300,
5730, 6310, 6730, 6731, 6799
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: 2_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Hz]
Max
- [Hz]
Factory setting
- [Hz]
Description:
Displays the Motor Module output frequency.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0024
Note:
The output frequency is available smoothed (r0024) and unsmoothed (r0066).
r0067
CO: Output current, maximum / I_outp max
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 5722, 6300,
6640, 6724
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: 6_2
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Description:
Displays the maximum output current of the Motor Module.
Dependency:
The maximum output current is determined by the parameterized current limit and the motor and converter thermal
protection.
Refer to: p0290, p0640
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-55
Parameter
List of parameters
r0068[0...1]
CO: Absolute current actual value / I_act abs val
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1690, 6714,
6799, 7017, 8014, 8017, 8018
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: 6_2
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Description:
Displays actual absolute current.
Index:
[0] = Unsmoothed
[1] = Smoothed with p0045
Dependency:
Refer to: r0027
Notice:
The value is updated with the current controller sampling time.
Note:
Absolute current value = sqrt(Iq^2 + Id^2)
The absolute value of the current actual value is available smoothed (r0027 with 300 ms, r0068[1] with p0045) and
unsmoothed (r0068[0]).
r0069[0...6]
CO: Phase current actual value / I_phase act value
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1630, 5730,
6714, 6730, 6731, 8850, 8950
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: 6_5
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [A]
Max
- [A]
Factory setting
- [A]
Description:
Displays the measured actual phase currents as peak value.
Index:
[0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
[3] = Phase U offset
[4] = Phase V offset
[5] = Phase W offset
[6] = Total U, V, W
Note:
In indices 3 ... 5, the offset currents of the 3 phases, which are added to correct the phase currents, are displayed.
The sum of the 3 corrected phase currents is displayed in index 6.
r0070
CO: Actual DC link voltage / Vdc act val
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6723, 6724,
6730, 6731, 6799
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: 5_2
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
- [V]
Max
- [V]
Factory setting
- [V]
Description:
Displays the measured actual value of the DC link voltage.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0026
Notice:
For SINAMICS S120 AC Drive (AC/AC) the following applies:
When measuring a DC link voltage < 200 V, for the Power Module (e.g. PM340) a valid measured value is not supplied. In this case, when an external 24V power supply is connected, a value of approx. 24 V is displayed.
Note:
The DC link voltage is available smoothed (r0026) and unsmoothed (r0070).
1-56
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
r0071
Maximum output voltage / V_output max
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1710, 6300,
6640, 6722, 6723, 6724, 6725,
6727
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: 5_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Vrms]
Max
- [Vrms]
Factory setting
- [Vrms]
Description:
Displays the maximum output voltage.
Dependency:
The maximum output voltage depends on the actual DC link voltage (r0070) and the maximum modulation depth
(p1803).
Note:
As the (driven) motor load increases, the maximum output voltage drops as a result of the reduction in DC link voltage.
r0072
CO: Output voltage / V_output
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1630, 5730,
6730, 6731, 6799
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: 5_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Vrms]
Max
- [Vrms]
Factory setting
- [Vrms]
Description:
Displays the actual power unit output voltage (Motor Module).
Dependency:
Refer to: r0025
Note:
The output voltage is available smoothed (r0025) and unsmoothed (r0072).
r0073
Maximum modulation depth / Modulat_depth max
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6724
P-Group: Modulation
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:
Displays the maximum modulation depth.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1803
r0074
CO: Modulat_depth / Modulat_depth
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 5730, 6730,
6731, 6799, 8940, 8950
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:
Displays the actual modulation depth.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0028
Note:
For space vector modulation, 100% corresponds to the maximum output voltage without overcontrol.
Values above 100 % indicate an overcontrol condition - values below 100% have no overcontrol.
The phase voltage (phase-to-phase, rms) is calculated as follows:(r0074 * r0070) / (sqrt(2) * 100 %).
The modulation depth is available smoothed (r0028) and unsmoothed (r0074).
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-57
Parameter
List of parameters
r0075
CO: Current setpoint field-generating / Id_set
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1630, 5714,
5722, 6714
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: 6_2
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Description:
Displays the field-generating current setpoint (Id_set).
Note:
This value is irrelevant for the V/f control mode.
r0076
CO: Current actual value field-generating / Id_act
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1630, 1710,
5714, 5730, 6714, 6799
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: 6_2
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Description:
Displays the field-generating current actual value (Id_act).
Dependency:
Refer to: r0029
Note:
This value is irrelevant for the V/f control mode.
The field-generating current actual value is available smoothed (r0029) and unsmoothed (r0076).
r0077
CO: Current setpoint torque-generating / Iq_set
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1630, 1774,
5714, 6710, 6714, 6719
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: 6_2
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Description:
Displays the torque/force generating current setpoint.
Note:
This value is irrelevant for the V/f control mode.
r0078
CO: Current actual value torque-generating / Iq_act
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1710, 6310,
6714, 6799
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: 6_2
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Description:
Displays the torque-generating current actual value (Iq_act).
Dependency:
Refer to: r0030
Note:
This value is irrelevant for the V/f control mode.
The torque-generating current actual value is available smoothed (r0030 with 300 ms) and unsmoothed (r0078).
1-58
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
r0079
CO: Torque setpoint total / M_set total
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1700, 1710,
6030, 6060, 6710, 8012
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: 7_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2003
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Nm]
Max
- [Nm]
Factory setting
- [Nm]
Description:
Displays the torque setpoint at the output of the speed controller (before clock cycle interpolation).
r0080[0...1]
CO: Torque actual value / M_act
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6714, 6799
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: 7_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2003
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Nm]
Max
- [Nm]
Factory setting
- [Nm]
Description:
Displays the actual torque value.
Index:
[0] = Unsmoothed
[1] = Smoothed with p0045
Dependency:
Refer to: r0031
Note:
The torque actual value is available smoothed (r0031 with 100 ms, r0080[1] with p0045) and unsmoothed
(r0080[0]).
r0081
CO: Torque utilization / M_Utilization
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8012
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Displays the torque utilization as a percentage.
The torque utilization is obtained from the required smoothed torque referred to the torque limit.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0033
Note:
The torque utilization is available smoothed (r0033) and unsmoothed (r0081).
The torque utilization is obtained from the required torque referred to the torque limit as follows:
- Positive torque: r0081 = (r0079 / r1538) * 100 %
- Negative torque: r0081 = (-r0079 / -r1539) * 100 %
For SERVO, the following applies:
The calculation of the torque utilization depends on the selected smoothing time constant (p0045).
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-59
Parameter
List of parameters
r0082[0...2]
CO: Active power actual value / P_act
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6714, 6799
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: 14_5
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: r2004
Expert list: 1
Min
- [kW]
Max
- [kW]
Factory setting
- [kW]
Description:
Displays the instantaneous active power.
Index:
[0] = Unsmoothed
[1] = Smoothed with p0045
[2] = Electric power
Dependency:
Refer to: r0032
Note:
The mechanical active power is available smoothed (r0032 with 100 ms, r0082[1] with p0045) and unsmoothed
(r0082[0]).
r0083
CO: Flux setpoint / Flux setpoint
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 5722
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:
Displays the flux setpoint.
r0084[0...1]
CO: Flux actual value / Flux act val
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6726, 6730,
6731
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:
Displays the flux actual value.
Index:
[0] = Unsmoothed
[1] = Smoothed
Note:
The flux actual value (index 1) smoothed with p1585 is only displayed for separately-excited synchronous motors.
In the following cases, the unsmoothed flux actual value is also displayed:
- in the range of the current model.
- during the pole position identification.
- for I/f control.
- for a stalled drive.
1-60
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
r0087
CO: Actual power factor / Cos phi act
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6714, 6730,
6732, 6799
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the actual active power factor.
r0088
CO: DC link voltage setpoint / Vdc setpoint
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0 (Tech_ctrl)
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: 5_2
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
- [V]
Max
- [V]
Factory setting
- [V]
Description:
Displays the setpoint for the DC link voltage.
r0089[0...2]
Actual phase voltage / U_phase act val
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6719
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: 5_3
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
- [V]
Max
- [V]
Factory setting
- [V]
Description:
Displays the actual phase voltage.
Index:
[0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
Note:
The values are determined from the transistor power-on duration.
p0092
Clock synchronous operation pre-assignment/check / Clock sync op
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1(1)
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Setting to pre-assign/check the sampling times for the internal controller clock cycles for clock-synchronous PROFIBUS operation.
p0092 = 1:
The controller clock cycles are set so that clock synchronous PROFIBUS operation is possible. If it is not possible
to change the controller clock cycles of the clock-cycle synchronous PROFIBUS operation, then an appropriate
message is output.
The presetting of the controller clock cycles can result in a derating of the Motor Module (e.g. p0115[0] = 400 s -->
375 s).
When the drive unit utilization (r9976) is calculated, its maximum computing time load has already been calculated
during ramp-up for clock-cycle synchronous operation and taken into account in r9976 (V4.3 and higher), if fixed
DCC runtime groups "Receive AFTER IF1 PROFIdrive PZD" and "Send BEFORE IF1 PROFIdrive PZD" are used.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-61
Parameter
List of parameters
p0092 = 0:
The controller clock cycles are set without any restrictions by the clock-cycle PROFIBUS operation (as for up to version V2.3).
When the drive unit utilization (r9976) is calculated, its maximum computing time load has already been calculated
during ramp-up for non-clock-cycle-synchronous operation and taken into account in r9976 (V4.3 and higher), if
fixed DCC runtime groups "Receive AFTER IF1 PROFIdrive PZD" and "Send BEFORE IF1 PROFIdrive PZD" are
used.
Value:
0:
1:
No isochronous PROFIBUS
Isochronous PROFIBUS
Dependency:
Refer to: r0110, p0115
Caution:
Only current controller clock cycles (p0115 index 0) which are integers of 125 s are permitted for isochronous
mode.
Notice:
p0092 only affects the automatic default for the clock cycles (p0115) in the drive. If the clock cycles are modified
subsequently in expert mode (p0112 = 0), p0092 = 0 should be set so that the new values are not overwritten again
by the automatic default when the parameters are downloaded. Current controller clock cycle values must continue
to be integers of 125 s for synchronous mode.
r0094
CO: Transformation angle / Transformat_angle
Refer to: A01223, A01224
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1580, 1680,
1690, 4710, 6714, 6730, 6731,
6732
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2005
Expert list: 1
Min
- []
Max
- []
Factory setting
- []
Description:
Displays the transformation angle.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0431, r1778
Note:
The transformation angle corresponds to the electrical commutation angle.
If no pole position identification is carried out (p1982), and the encoder is adjusted, the following applies:
The encoder supplies the value and indicates the electrical angle of the flux position (d axis).
p0097
Select drive object type / Select DO type
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1(1)
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Topology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
17
Factory setting
0
Description:
Executes an automatic device configuration.
In so doing, p0099, p0107 and p0108 are appropriately set.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
12:
1-62
No selection
Drive object type SERVO
Drive object type VECTOR
SINAMICS GM (DFEMV & VECTORMV)
SINAMICS SM (AFEMV & VECTORMV)
SINAMICS GL (VECTORGL)
SINAMICS SL (VECTORSL)
Drive object type VECTOR parallel circuit
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
Dependency:
Drive object type VECTORMV - GM parallel circuit
Drive object type VECTORMV - SM parallel circuit
Drive object type DC_CTRL
Drive object type SERVO HMI
Drive object type VECTOR HMI
Refer to: r0098, p0099
Refer to: A01330
Note:
For p0097 = 0, p0099 is automatically set to the factor setting.
The possible settings are dependent upon the device type.
r0098[0...5]
Actual device topology / Device_act topo
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Topology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the automatically detected actual device topology in coded form.
Index:
[0] = DRIVE-CLiQ socket X100
[1] = DRIVE-CLiQ socket X101
[2] = DRIVE-CLiQ socket X102
[3] = DRIVE-CLiQ socket X103
[4] = DRIVE-CLiQ socket X104
[5] = DRIVE-CLiQ socket X105
Dependency:
Refer to: p0097, p0099
Note:
Topology coding: abcd efgh hex
a = number of Active Line Modules
b = number of Motor Modules
c = number of motors
d = number of encoders (or the line supply voltage sensing for Active Line Modules)
e = number of additional encoders (or the line supply voltage sensing for Active Line Modules)
f = number of Terminal Modules
g = number of Terminal Boards
h = reserved
if the value 0 is displayed in all indices, then components are not detected via DRIVE-CLiQ.
If a value F hex occurs at a position of the coding (abcd efgh hex), then an overflow has occurred.
p0099[0...5]
Device target topology / Device_target topo
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1(1)
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Topology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFF FFFF hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
Sets the device target topology in coded form (refer to r0098). The setting is made during commissioning.
Deactivated or non-available components are also counted
Index:
[0] = DRIVE-CLiQ socket X100
[1] = DRIVE-CLiQ socket X101
[2] = DRIVE-CLiQ socket X102
[3] = DRIVE-CLiQ socket X103
[4] = DRIVE-CLiQ socket X104
[5] = DRIVE-CLiQ socket X105
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-63
Parameter
List of parameters
Dependency:
The parameter can only be written into for p0097 = 0.
To perform an automatic device configuration run, an index of the device target topology must be set to the value of
the device actual topology in r0098 for acknowledgement. An index of the device actual topology with a value other
than 0 must be selected.
Refer to: p0097, r0098
Refer to: A01330
Note:
The parameter can only be set to the values 0, the value of the actual device topology, the value of the actual
device target topology and FFFFFFFF hex.
If the value 0 is displayed in all of the indices, then the system has still not been commissioned.
The value FFFFFFFF hex indicates that the topology was not generated by the automatic device configuration but
was commissioned using the commissioning software (e.g. using parameter download).
p0100
IEC/NEMA mot stds / IEC/NEMA mot stds
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(1)
0
Data type: Integer16
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: FEM
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Defines whether the motor and drive converter power settings (e.g. rated motor power - p0307) are expressed in
[kW] or [hp].
Depending on the selection, the rated motor frequency (p0310) is either set to 50 Hz or 60 Hz.
The following applies for IEC drives: The power factor (p0308) should be parameterized.
The following applies for NEMA drives: The efficiency (p0309) should be parameterized.
Value:
0:
1:
IEC-Motor (50 Hz, SI units)
NEMA motor (60 Hz, US units)
Dependency:
If p0100 is changed, all of the rated motor parameters are reset. Only then are possible unit changeovers made.
The units of all motor parameters are changed that are involved in the selection of IEC or NEMA (e.g. r0206, p0307,
p0316, r0333, r0334, p0341, p0344, r1493, r1969).
Refer to: r0206, p0210, p0300, p0304, p0305, p0307, p0308, p0309, p0310, p0311, p0314, p0320, p0322, p0323,
p0335, r0336, r0337, p1800
Note:
The parameter can only be changed for vector control (p0107).
The parameter value is not reset when the factory setting is restored (p0010 = 30, p0970).
p0101[0...23]
Drive object numbers / DO numbers
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1(1)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Topology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
62
Factory setting
0
Description:
The parameter contains the object number via which every drive object can be addressed.
The number of an existing drive object is entered into each index.
The numbers are automatically assigned once and can no longer be changed as long as the object has not been
deleted.
In the commissioning software, this object number cannot be entered using the expert list, but is automatically
assigned when inserting an object.
1-64
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
Index:
[0] = Drive object number Control Unit
[1] = Drive object number object 1
[2] = Drive object number object 2
[3] = Drive object number object 3
[4] = Drive object number object 4
[5] = Drive object number object 5
[6] = Drive object number object 6
[7] = Drive object number object 7
[8] = Drive object number object 8
[9] = Drive object number object 9
[10] = Drive object number object 10
[11] = Drive object number object 11
[12] = Drive object number object 12
[13] = Drive object number object 13
[14] = Drive object number object 14
[15] = Drive object number object 15
[16] = Drive object number object 16
[17] = Drive object number object 17
[18] = Drive object number object 18
[19] = Drive object number object 19
[20] = Drive object number object 20
[21] = Drive object number object 21
[22] = Drive object number object 22
[23] = Drive object number object 23
Note:
Value = 0: No drive object is defined.
r0102[0...1]
Number of drive objects / DO count
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Topology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the number of existing or existing and prepared drive objects.
Index:
[0] = Existing drive objects
[1] = Existing and prepared drive objects
Dependency:
Refer to: p0101
Note:
The numbers of the drive objects are in p0101.
Index 0:
Displays the number of drive objects that have already been set up.
Index 1:
Displays the number of drive objects that have already been set up and, in addition, the drive objects that still have
to be set up.
p0103[0...23]
Application-specific view / Appl_spec view
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1(2)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
999
Factory setting
0
Description:
The application-specific view of an existing drive object is entered into each index.
The parameter cannot be changed.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0107, p0107
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-65
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
In the non-volatile memory, the application-specific views are defined in files with the following structure:
PDxxxyyy.ACX
xxx: Application-specific view (p0103)
yyy: Type of drive object (p0107)
Example:
PD052011.ACX
--> "011" stands for the drive object, type SERVO
--> "052" is the number of the view for this drive object
r0103
Application-specific view / Appl_spec view
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned16
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the application-specific view of the individual drive object.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0107, p0107
p0105
Activate/deactivate drive object / DO act/deact
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
1
Description:
Setting to activate/deactivate a drive object.
Value:
0:
1:
Dependency:
Refer to: r0106
Notice:
The following applies when activating:
Deactivate drive object
Activate drive object
If components are inserted for the first time and the appropriate drive object is activated, then the drive system is
automatically booted. To do this, the pulses of all of the drive objects must be suppressed.
p0105
Activate/deactivate drive object / DO act/deact
ENCODER, HUB,
Can be changed: T
TB30,
Data type: Integer16
VECTOR_G130/G15
P-Group: Closed-loop control
0
Not for motor type: Min
0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Max
2
Factory setting
1
Description:
Setting to activate/deactivate a drive object.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
Recommend.:
After inserting all of the components of a drive object, before activating, first wait for Alarm A01316.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0106
Deactivate drive object
Activate drive object
Drive object, deactivate and not present
Refer to: A01316
Caution:
It is not permissible to deactivate drive objects with safety functions enabled.
Notice:
The following applies when activating:
If components are inserted for the first time and the appropriate drive object is activated, then the drive system is
automatically booted. To do this, the pulses of all of the drive objects must be suppressed.
1-66
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
Setting a drive object to deactivate principally corresponds to the "parking axis" function. however, here, all of the
DRIVE-CLiQ components, assigned to the drive object, are in involved.
p0105
Activate/deactivate drive object / DO act/deact
TM31
Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
2
Factory setting
1
Description:
Setting to activate/deactivate a drive object.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
Recommend.:
After inserting all of the components of a drive object, before activating, first wait for Alarm A01316.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0106
Deactivate drive object
Activate drive object
Drive object, deactivate and not present
Refer to: A01316
Warning:
A drive that is moved by simulating the inputs of a Terminal Module is brought to a standstill while this parameter is
being changed over.
Caution:
It is not permissible to deactivate drive objects with safety functions enabled.
Notice:
The following applies when activating:
If components are inserted for the first time and the appropriate drive object is activated, then the drive system is
automatically booted. To do this, the pulses of all of the drive objects must be suppressed.
Note:
Setting a drive object to deactivate principally corresponds to the "parking axis" function. however, here, all of the
DRIVE-CLiQ components, assigned to the drive object, are in involved.
p0105
Activate/deactivate drive object / DO act/deact
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
2
Factory setting
1
Description:
Setting to activate/deactivate a drive object.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
Recommend.:
After inserting all of the components of a drive object, before activating, first wait for Alarm A01316.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0106
Deactivate drive object
Activate drive object
Drive object, deactivate and not present
Refer to: A01316
Caution:
It is not permissible to deactivate drive objects with safety functions enabled:
TM54F can only be deactivated if all of the axes connected to it via P10010 have been deactivated or are not
enabled on the connected safety axes.
Notice:
The following applies when activating:
If components are inserted for the first time and the appropriate drive object is activated, then the drive system is
automatically booted. To do this, the pulses of all of the drive objects must be suppressed.
Note:
Setting a drive object to deactivate principally corresponds to the "parking axis" function. however, here, all of the
DRIVE-CLiQ components, assigned to the drive object, are in involved.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-67
Parameter
List of parameters
r0106
Drive object active/inactive / DO act/inact
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, HUB,
TB30, TM31,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the "active/inactive" state of a drive object.
Value:
0:
1:
Dependency:
Refer to: p0105
p0107[0...23]
Drive object type / DO type
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1(2)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
300
Factory setting
0
Drive object inactive
Drive object active
Description:
The type of an existing drive object is entered into each index.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:
30:
40:
41:
42:
51:
52:
100:
101:
102:
104:
150:
200:
201:
202:
203:
204:
205:
1-68
SINAMICS S
SINAMICS G
SINAMICS I
SINAMICS CX32
SINAMICS GM
SINAMICS DC
SINAMICS GL
SINAMICS S110
ACTIVE INFEED CONTROL
SERVO
VECTOR
VECTORMV
VECTORGL
VECTORSL
DC_CTRL
VECTORM2C
VECTORDM
SMART INFEED CONTROL
BASIC INFEED CONTROL
ACTIVE INFEED CONTROLMV
BASIC INFEED CONTROLMV
ACTIVE INFEED CONTROLM2C
SINAMICS G120 230 (SingleDO-Drive which combines Device+Vector)
SINAMICSG120 240_2 (SingleDO-Drive which combines Device+Vector)
TB30 (Terminal Board)
SINAMICS SL
SINAMICS SM2
SINAMICS SM2I
DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module
TM31 (Terminal Module)
TM41 (Terminal Module)
TM17 High Feature (Terminal Module)
TM15 (Terminal Module)
TM15 (Terminal Module for SINAMICS)
TM54F - Master (Terminal Module)
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
206:
207:
254:
300:
TM54F - Slave (Terminal Module)
TM120 (Terminal Module)
CU-LINK
ENCODER
Index:
[0] = Drive object type, Control Unit
[1] = Drive object type, object 1
[2] = Drive object type, object 2
[3] = Drive object type, object 3
[4] = Drive object type, object 4
[5] = Drive object type, object 5
[6] = Drive object type, object 6
[7] = Drive object type, object 7
[8] = Drive object type, object 8
[9] = Drive object type, object 9
[10] = Drive object type, object 10
[11] = Drive object type, object 11
[12] = Drive object type, object 12
[13] = Drive object type, object 13
[14] = Drive object type, object 14
[15] = Drive object type, object 15
[16] = Drive object type, object 16
[17] = Drive object type, object 17
[18] = Drive object type, object 18
[19] = Drive object type, object 19
[20] = Drive object type, object 20
[21] = Drive object type, object 21
[22] = Drive object type, object 22
[23] = Drive object type, object 23
Dependency:
Caution:
Refer to: p0103, r0103
If you change this parameter and exit the device commissioning mode, then the complete software will be set up
again and all of the previous drive parameter settings are deleted.
Note:
The number (p0101) and the associated drive object type are in the same index.
For SINAMICS S a drive object type can only be changed between SERVO and VECTOR. If you change the
parameter and exit drive start-up (p0009 from 2 to 0) the drive parameters are set up again.
r0107
Drive object type / DO type
ENCODER, HUB,
TB30, TM31,
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
300
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the type of each drive object.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
SINAMICS S
SINAMICS G
SINAMICS I
SINAMICS CX32
SINAMICS GM
SINAMICS DC
SINAMICS GL
SINAMICS S110
ACTIVE INFEED CONTROL
SERVO
VECTOR
VECTORMV
VECTORGL
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-69
Parameter
List of parameters
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:
30:
40:
41:
42:
51:
52:
100:
101:
102:
104:
150:
200:
201:
202:
203:
204:
205:
206:
207:
254:
300:
VECTORSL
DC_CTRL
VECTORM2C
VECTORDM
SMART INFEED CONTROL
BASIC INFEED CONTROL
ACTIVE INFEED CONTROLMV
BASIC INFEED CONTROLMV
ACTIVE INFEED CONTROLM2C
SINAMICS G120 230 (SingleDO-Drive which combines Device+Vector)
SINAMICSG120 240_2 (SingleDO-Drive which combines Device+Vector)
TB30 (Terminal Board)
SINAMICS SL
SINAMICS SM2
SINAMICS SM2I
DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module
TM31 (Terminal Module)
TM41 (Terminal Module)
TM17 High Feature (Terminal Module)
TM15 (Terminal Module)
TM15 (Terminal Module for SINAMICS)
TM54F - Master (Terminal Module)
TM54F - Slave (Terminal Module)
TM120 (Terminal Module)
CU-LINK
ENCODER
Dependency:
Refer to: p0103, r0103
p0108[0...23]
Drive object, function module / DO function module
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1(2)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
The function module of an existing drive object is entered into each index (also refer to p0101, p0107).
The following bits are available for the Control Unit (Index 0):
Bit 18: Free function blocks
Bit 29: CAN
Bit 30: COMM BOARD
Bit 31: PROFINET
For all other drive objects (Index > 0), the significance of the bits should be taken from the display parameters r0108
of the drive object.
Index:
[0] = Function module Control Unit
[1] = Function module object 1
[2] = Function module object 2
[3] = Function module object 3
[4] = Function module object 4
[5] = Function module object 5
[6] = Function module object 6
[7] = Function module object 7
[8] = Function module object 8
[9] = Function module object 9
[10] = Function module object 10
[11] = Function module object 11
[12] = Function module object 12
[13] = Function module object 13
[14] = Function module object 14
[15] = Function module object 15
[16] = Function module object 16
1-70
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
[17] = Function module object 17
[18] = Function module object 18
[19] = Function module object 19
[20] = Function module object 20
[21] = Function module object 21
[22] = Function module object 22
[23] = Function module object 23
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Note:
A "function module" is a functional expansion of a drive object that can be activated when commissioning.
r0108
Drive object, function module / DO function module
ENCODER
Signal name
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
Bit 16
Bit 17
Bit 18
Bit 19
Bit 20
Bit 21
Bit 22
Bit 23
Bit 24
Bit 25
Bit 26
Bit 27
Bit 28
Bit 29
Bit 30
Bit 31
1 signal
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
0 signal
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
FP
-
Description:
Displays the activated function module for the particular drive object.
Bit field:
Bit
12
18
31
Note:
A "function module" is a functional expansion of a drive object that can be activated when commissioning.
Signal name
Linear encoder
Free function blocks
PROFINET
1 signal
Activated
Activated
Activated
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
0 signal
Not activated
Not activated
Not activated
FP
-
1-71
Parameter
List of parameters
r0108
Drive object, function module / DO function module
TB30, TM31
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the activated function module for the particular drive object.
Bit field:
Bit
18
31
Note:
A "function module" is a functional expansion of a drive object that can be activated when commissioning.
r0108
Drive object, function module / DO function module
Signal name
Free function blocks
PROFINET
1 signal
Activated
Activated
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned32
0 signal
Not activated
Not activated
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the activated function module for the particular drive object.
Bit field:
Bit
02
08
13
14
15
16
17
18
20
28
29
31
Note:
A "function module" is a functional expansion of a drive object that can be activated when commissioning.
r0110[0...2]
Basic sampling times / t_basis
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [s]
Max
10000.00 [s]
Factory setting
- [s]
Description:
Signal name
Closed-loop speed/torque control
Extended setpoint channel
Safety rotary axis
Extended brake control
Parallel cct. config.
Technology controller
Extended signals/monitoring
Free function blocks
Software gating unit
Cooling system
CAN
PROFINET
1 signal
Activated
Activated
Activated
Activated
Activated
Activated
Activated
Activated
Not activated
Activated
Activated
Activated
0 signal
Not activated
Not activated
Not activated
Not activated
Not activated
Not activated
Not activated
Not activated
Activated
Not activated
Not activated
Not activated
FP
-
FP
-
Displays the basic sampling times.
The sampling times are set using p0112 and p0115. The values for the basic sampling times are determined as a
result of these settings.
Index:
[0] = Basic sampling time 0
[1] = Basic sampling time 1
[2] = Basic sampling time 2
1-72
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
r0111
Basic sampling time selection / t_basis sel
CU_G_G130,
Can be changed: CU_G_G150, HUB, Data type: Integer16
VECTOR_G130/G15
P-Group: Closed-loop control
0
Not for motor type: Min
0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Max
2
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the selected basic sampling time for this drive object.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0110
r0111
Basic sampling time selection / t_basis sel
TB30, TM31
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
2
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the selected basic sampling time for this drive object.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0110
Note:
For TB30 and the Terminal Module, this parameter has no significance.
For TB30 and certain Terminal Modules, the sampling times can be set using p4099 (see description of p4099 for
the Module in question).
p0112
Sampling times presetting p0115 / t_sample for p0115
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C1(3)
0
Data type: Integer16
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
3
Factory setting
3
Pre-assignment of the sampling times in p0115.
The clock cycles for the current controller / speed controller / flux controller / setpoint channel / position controller /
positioning / technology controller are pre-assigned as follows:
SINAMICS S, servo drive:
p0112 = 1: 250 / 250 / 250 / 4000 / 2000 / 8000 / 4000 s (for chassis units)
p0112 = 2: 125 / 250 / 250 / 4000 / 2000 / 8000 / 4000 s
p0112 = 3: 125 / 125 / 125 / 4000 / 1000 / 4000 / 4000 s
p0112 = 4: 62.5 / 62.5 / 62.5 / 1000 / 1000 / 2000 / 1000 s
p0112 = 5: Not possible
SINAMICS S, Active Infeed (p0112 = 1 not for p0092 = 1):
p0112 = 1: 400 / - / - / 1600 s (presetting for the rated pulse frequency = 2.5 kHz)
p0112 = 2: 250 / - / - / 2000 s (presetting for the rated pulse frequency = 4.0 kHz)
p0112 = 3: 125 / - / - / 2000 s
p0112 = 4: 125 / - / - / 1000 s
p0112 = 5: 125 / - / - / 500 s
SINAMICS S, Smart Infeed (p0112 = 1 not for p0092 = 1):
p0112 = 1: 400 / - / - / 1600 s (presetting for the rated pulse frequency = 2.5 kHz)
p0112 = 2: 250 / - / - / 2000 s (presetting for the rated pulse frequency = 4.0 kHz)
p0112 = 3: 250 / - / - / 2000 s
p0112 = 4: 250 / - / - / 1000 s
p0112 = 5: Not possible
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-73
Parameter
List of parameters
SINAMICS S, Basic Infeed, booksize:
p0112 = 4: 250 / - / - / 2000 s
SINAMICS S, Basic Infeed, chassis:
p0112 = 1: 2000 / - / - / 2000 s
p0112 = 2: 2000 / - / - / 2000 s (presetting)
p0112 = 3: 2000 / - / - / 2000 s
p0112 = 4: Not possible
p0112 = 5: Not possible
SINAMICS S/G, vector drive (p0112 = 1 not for p0092 = 1 and not for PM340):
p0112 = 1: 400 / 1600 / 1600 / 1600 / 3200 / 3200 / 3200 s (for rated pulse frequency = 1.25, 2.5 kHz)
p0112 = 2: 250 / 1000 / 2000 / 1000 / 2000 / 4000 / 4000 s
p0112 = 3: 250 / 1000 / 1000 / 1000 / 2000 / 4000 / 4000 s (for rated pulse frequency = 2.0, 4.0 kHz)
SINAMICS S, vector drive:
p0112 = 4: 250 / 500 / 1000 / 500 / 1000 / 2000 / 2000 s
p0112 = 5: 250 / 250 / 1000 / 250 / 1000 / 2000 / 1000 s
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
Expert
xLow
Low
Standard
Recommend.:
When changing the sampling times of the current and speed controllers (also refer to p0115), then we recommend
that after exiting commissioning (p0009 = 0) the controller settings are recalculated using p0340 = 4.
Dependency:
It is prohibited to select a parameter value from p0112 if the associated current controller clock cycle cannot set
(e.g. p0112 = 1 is not possible for a vector drive and PM340 power unit).
Refer to: p0092
Note:
For p0112 = 0 (expert) the individual sampling times in p0115 can be adjusted.
p0112 = 1 cannot be set for a power unit type PM340 (refer to r0203) for vector drives.
p0113
Minimum pulse frequency, selection / f_puls min sel
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C1(3)
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1.000 [kHz]
Max
2.000 [kHz]
Factory setting
2.000 [kHz]
Description:
The current controller sampling time (p0115[0]) is pre-assigned by selecting the minimum pulse frequency.
Dependency:
The parameter can only be changed with p0112 = 0 (expert). For isochronous operation (p0092 = 1) the parameter
can only be set so that a current controller clock cycle of 125 s is obtained as an integer number.
The required pulse frequency can be set in p1800 after commissioning (p0009 = p0010 = 0).
Refer to: p0112, r0114, p0115, p1800
Note:
The current controller sampling time (p0115[0]) is set to the inverse value of twice the minimum pulse frequency.
For p0113 = 1.0 kHz, p0115[0] = 500 s is set, for p0113 = 2.0 kHz, p0115[0] = 250 s is set. The current controller
sampling time (p0115[0]), calculated from the pulse frequency, is set in a grid of 1.25 s.
For a power unit type PM340 (refer to r0203), only the values 1.0 and 2.0 kHz can be set. 1.0 kHz can be set in
order to achieve a current controller clock cycle of 500s. However, in this case, the minimum pulse frequency
p1800 is limited to 2 kHz.
1-74
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
r0114[0...9]
Minimum pulse frequency, recommended / f_puls min recom
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [kHz]
Max
- [kHz]
Factory setting
- [kHz]
Displays the recommended values (indices 0 and 1) for the minimum pulse frequency (p0113).
If the system rejects a change to p0113 because the value to be used lies outside the permitted value range, then
instead the recommended value from r0114 can be used.
Index:
[0] = If only the actual drive is changed
[1] = If all drives connected to the DRIVE-CLiQ line are changed
[2] = 2. possible pulse frequency
[3] = 3. possible pulse frequency
[4] = 4. possible pulse frequency
[5] = 5. possible pulse frequency
[6] = 6. possible pulse frequency
[7] = 7. possible pulse frequency
[8] = 8. possible pulse frequency
[9] = 9. possible pulse frequency
Dependency:
Refer to: p0113
Note:
After exiting commissioning (p0009 = p0010 = 0), the pulse frequencies calculated from the sampling time p115[0]
are displayed in indices 1 to 9. If additional restrictions do not apply (e.g. due to having selected an output filter),
these can be entered into p1800. The maximum pulse frequency of the power units was already taken into account
in r0114.
A value of 0 kHz does not define a recommended pulse frequency.
p0115[0]
Sampling time for supplementary functions / t_samp suppl_fct
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1(3)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [s]
Max
16000.00 [s]
Factory setting
4000.00 [s]
Description:
Sets the basic sampling time for supplementary functions (DCC, free function blocks) on this object.
Only setting values that are an integer multiple of 125 s are permissible.
Index:
[0] = Basic sampl. time
p0115[0]
Sampling time for speed detection / t_sample n_det
ENCODER
Can be changed: C1(3)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
125.00 [s]
Max
500.00 [s]
Factory setting
125.00 [s]
Description:
Sets the sampling times for speed detection.
Index:
[0] = Basic sampl. time
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-75
Parameter
List of parameters
p0115[0]
TB30, TM31
Description:
Sampling time for supplementary functions / t_samp suppl_fct
Can be changed: C1(3)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [s]
Max
16000.00 [s]
Factory setting
4000.00 [s]
Sets the sampling times for supplementary functions (DCC, free function blocks) on this object.
Only setting values that are an integer multiple of 125 s are permissible.
Index:
[0] = Basic sampl. time
Note:
This parameter only applies to set the sampling times of possible supplementary functions.
The sampling times for inputs/outputs must be set in p4099.
p0115[0...6]
Sampling times for internal control loops / t_sample int ctrl
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C1(3)
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [s]
Max
16000.00 [s]
Factory setting
[0] 125.00 [s]
[1] 125.00 [s]
[2] 125.00 [s]
[3] 4000.00 [s]
[4] 1000.00 [s]
[5] 4000.00 [s]
[6] 4000.00 [s]
Description:
Sets the sampling times for the control loops.
Recommend.:
When changing the sampling times of the current and speed controllers (also refer to p0115), then we recommend
that after exiting commissioning (p0009 = 0) the controller settings are recalculated using p0340 = 4.
Index:
[0] = Current controller
[1] = Speed controller
[2] = Flux controller
[3] = Setpoint channel
[4] = Position controller
[5] = Positioning
[6] = Technology controller
Dependency:
The sampling times can only be separately set if p0112 is 0 (expert). If a sampling time is modified in the expert
mode, then all of the sampling times with higher indices are automatically changed in the same ratio as the sampling time itself was changed. Slower time slices are only taken if the calculated sampling time is also permitted.
Upper limit is 8 ms.
The default setting is made using p0112 and can only be individually changed for p0112 = 0 (expert).
Higher-level controls must be calculated in integral ratios to lower-level controls (e.g. p0115[1] = N * p0115[0];
where N is an integer number). The sampling time of the speed controller (p0115[1]) can have as a maximum a
value of 800% of the current controller sampling time (p0115[0]).
The sampling times for setpoint channel (p0115[3]), position controller (p0115[4]), positioning (p0115[5]) and technology controller (p0115[6]) must have at least 2x the value of the current controller sampling time (p0115[0]).
If p0092 = 1 the sampling times p0115 and the pulse frequency p1800 are checked every time the parameters are
downloaded, and reset to the initial values if necessary. This check can be deactivated by setting p0092 = 0 (making this setting does not affect isochronous PROFIBUS operation).
Refer to: r0110, r0111, p0112
Note:
For function modules that can be activated (e.g. technology controller), the parameters values are pre-assigned.
The minimum current controller clock cycle is 250 s, the maximum current controller clock cycle is 500 s. For
power unit type PM340 (r0203), only these current controller sampling times of 250 s and 500 s can be set.
1-76
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
r0116[0...1]
Drive object clock cycle recommended / DO_clock recom
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150, TB30,
TM31,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [s]
Max
- [s]
Factory setting
- [s]
Description:
Displays the recommended sampling time for the drive objects.
r00116[0] = recommended sampling time:
Recommended value which would then make the complete system operational.
r00116[1] = recommended sampling time:
Recommended value, which after changing other clock cycles on the DRIVE-CLiQ line, would result in an operational system.
Index:
[0] = Change only for the actual drive object
[1] = Changing all objects on the DRIVE-CLiQ line
Dependency:
Refer to: p0115
p0117
Current controller computing dead time mode / I_ctrl t_dead mode
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
6
Factory setting
6
Description:
Sets the mode for the computing dead time of the current controller.
0: Offset (shifted) clocking, minimum computing dead time of each drive, automatic setting
1: Clocking at the same time, the dead time aligns itself to the dead time of the latest drive, automatic setting
2: Manual setting of the computing dead time, early transfer
3: Manual setting of the computing dead time, late transfer
4-6: As for 0-2, however, no early transfers are set for vectors
Dependency:
Refer to: p0118
Refer to: A02100
Note:
Re p0117 = 0:
The times when the setpoints become effective for the individual controls is automatically and individually determined. Another computing dead time is set for each control (closed-loop) (p0118). Current is impressed for the individual controls without any offset with respect to time (improved EMC compatibility).
Re p0117 = 1:
The latest closed-loop control determines when the setpoints for each of the individual controls become active. The
same computing dead time is set for each control (p0118). Current is impressed (flows) for the individual controls
without any offset with respect to time.
Re p0117 = 2:
The computing dead time is manually set. The user must optimize the value in p0118.
Re p0117 = 3:
Only for internal Siemens use.
Re p0117 = 4 ... 6:
Behavior as for p0117 = 0 ... 2, however for vectors, the earliest times are not determined.
The modified computing dead time mode is not effective until the drive unit is powered up again.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-77
Parameter
List of parameters
p0118
Current controller computing dead time / I_ctrl t_dead
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [s]
Max
2000.00 [s]
Factory setting
0.00 [s]
Description:
This parameter is preset as a function of the current controller sampling time (p0115[0]) and normally does not have
to be changed.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0117
Refer to: A02100
Note:
For p0118 <= 0.005 s, the current controller output is delayed by a complete current controller clock cycle
(p0115[0]).
After p0118 has been changed, we recommend that the current controller is adapted (p1715).
p0120
Number of Power unit Data Sets (PDS) / PDS count
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C1(3)
0
Data type: Unsigned8
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
8
Factory setting
1
Sets the number of Power unit Data Sets (PDS).
The value corresponds to the number of power units connected together for a parallel circuit configuration.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0107, p0107
Note:
This parameter is only significant for drive objects A_INFEED and VECTOR with a parallel circuit configuration.
p0121[0...n]
Power unit component number / PU comp_no
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C1(4)
0
Data type: Unsigned8
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
199
Factory setting
0
The power unit data set is assigned to a power unit using this parameter.
This unique component number is assigned when parameterizing the topology.
Only component numbers can be entered into this parameter that correspond to a power unit.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0107, p0107
Note:
For parallel circuit configurations, the parameter index is assigned to a power unit.
p0124[0...23]
Detection of main components using LED / Detection LED
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned8
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
1-78
Detects the main components of the drive object selected via the index.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p0124[0...n]
Power unit detection via LED / PU detection LED
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: Unsigned8
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Detects the power unit assigned to this drive and data set.
Note:
While p0124 = 1, the READY LED flashes green/orange or red/orange with 2 Hz at the appropriate power unit.
For parallel circuit configurations, the parameter index is assigned to a power unit.
p0125[0...n]
Activate/deactivate power unit components / PU_comp act/deact
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C1(4), T
0
Data type: Integer16
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
2
Factory setting
1
Description:
Setting to activate/deactivate a power unit component.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
Recommend.:
After inserting a component, before activating, first wait for Alarm A01317.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0126
Deactivate component
Activate component
Component, deactivate and not present
Refer to: A01317
Caution:
It is not permissible to deactivate drive objects with safety functions enabled.
Note:
The activation of a component can be rejected if the component was inserted for the first time.
In this case, it is only possible to activate the component when the pulses for all of the drive objects are inhibited.
For units connected in parallel, when one of the power units is deactivated, then the enable in p7001 is withdrawn.
r0126[0...n]
Power unit components active/inactive / PU comp act/inact
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Integer16
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the "active/inactive" state of a power unit component.
Value:
0:
1:
Dependency:
Refer to: p0105, p0125, p0897
Component inactive
Component active
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-79
Parameter
List of parameters
r0127[0...n]
Power unit version EPROM data / PU EPROM version
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the version of the EPROM data of the power unit.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0147, r0157
Note:
For parallel circuit configurations, the parameter index is assigned to a power unit.
r0128[0...n]
Power unit, firmware version / PU FW version
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the firmware version of the power unit.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0018, r0148, r0158, r0197, r0198
Note:
Example:
The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00.
For parallel circuit configurations, the parameter index is assigned to a power unit.
p0130
Number of Motor Data Sets (MDS) / MDS count
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C1(3)
0
Data type: Unsigned8
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8575
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
16
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the number of Motor Data Sets (MDS).
p0131[0...n]
Motor component number / Mot comp_no
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C1(4)
0
Data type: Unsigned8
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
199
Factory setting
0
The motor data set is assigned to a motor using this parameter.
This unique component number is assigned when parameterizing the topology.
Only component numbers can be entered into this parameter that correspond to a motor.
1-80
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p0139[0...2]
Copy Motor Data Set MDS / Copy MDS
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(15)
0
Data type: Unsigned8
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8575
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
31
Factory setting
0
Description:
Copying a Motor Data Set (MDS) into another.
Index:
[0] = Source motor data set
[1] = Target motor data set
[2] = Start copying procedure
Note:
Procedure:
1. In Index 0, enter which motor data set should be copied.
2. In Index 1, enter the motor data set data that is to be copied into.
3. Start copying: Set index 2 from 0 to 1.
p0139[2] is automatically set to 0 when copying is completed.
When copying, p0131 is not taken into account.
p0140
Number of Encoder Data Sets (EDS) / EDS count
ENCODER
Can be changed: C1(3)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned8
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
1
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the number of Encoder Data Sets (EDS).
Note:
When parameterizing the drive with "no encoder" there must be at least one encoder data set (p0140 >= 1).
p0140
Number of Encoder Data Sets (EDS) / EDS count
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C1(3)
0
Data type: Unsigned8
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
16
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the number of Encoder Data Sets (EDS).
Note:
When parameterizing the drive with "no encoder" there must be at least one encoder data set (p0140 >= 1).
p0141[0...n]
Encoder interface (Sensor Module) component number / Enc_interf comp_no
ENCODER,
Can be changed: C1(4)
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Unsigned8
0
P-Group: Data sets
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: 4704, 8570
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
199
Factory setting
0
This parameter is used to assign the encoder data set to an encoder evaluation (e.g. SMC).
This unique component number is assigned when parameterizing the topology.
Only component numbers can be entered into this parameter that correspond to an encoder evaluation.
Note:
If the encoder evaluation and encoder are integrated (motor with DRIVE-CLiQ), then their component numbers are
identical.
For an SMC, different component numbers are assigned for the SMC (p0141) and the (actual) encoder (p0142).
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-81
Parameter
List of parameters
p0142[0...n]
Encoder component number / Encoder comp_no
ENCODER,
Can be changed: C1(4)
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Unsigned8
0
P-Group: Data sets
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: 4704
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
199
Factory setting
0
This parameter is used to assign the encoder data set to an encoder.
This assignment is made using the unique component number that was assigned when parameterizing the topology.
Only component numbers can be entered into this parameter that correspond to an encoder.
Note:
If the encoder evaluation and encoder are integrated (motor with DRIVE-CLiQ), then their component numbers are
identical.
For an SMC, different component numbers are assigned for the SMC (p0141) and the (actual) encoder (p0142).
p0144[0...n]
Sensor Module detection via LED / SM detection LED
ENCODER,
Can be changed: U, T
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Unsigned8
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Detects the Sensor Module assigned to this drive and data set.
Note:
While p0144 = 1, the READY LED flashes green/orange or red/orange with 2 Hz at the appropriate Sensor Module.
p0145[0...n]
Activate/deactivate encoder interface / Enc_intf act/deact
ENCODER,
Can be changed: C1(4), U, T
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Integer16
0
P-Group: Data sets
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
2
Factory setting
1
Description:
Setting to activate/deactivate an encoder interface (Sensor Module).
Value:
0:
1:
2:
Recommend.:
After inserting a component, before activating, first wait for Alarm A01317.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0146
Deactivate component
Activate component
Component, deactivate and not present
Refer to: A01317
Note:
The deactivation of an encoder interface corresponds to the"parking encoder" function and has the same effect.
The activation of a component can be rejected if the component was inserted for the first time.
In this case, it is only possible to activate the component when the pulses for all of the drive objects are inhibited.
With the encoder interface for encoder 1 (motor encoder), the relevant drive object for writing the parameter must
be in the "Ready for operation" state.
With the encoder interface for encoders 2 and 3, the parameter can also be written during operation.
1-82
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
r0146[0...n]
Encoder interface active/inactive / Enc_intf act/inact
ENCODER,
Can be changed: VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Integer16
0
P-Group: Data sets
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the "active" or "inactive" state of an encoder interface (Sensor Module).
Value:
0:
1:
Dependency:
Refer to: p0105, p0145, p0480, p0897
r0147[0...n]
Sensor Module EPROM data version / SM EEPROM version
Component inactive
Component active
ENCODER,
Can be changed: VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Unsigned32
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the version of the EPROM data of the Sensor Module.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0127, r0157
Note:
Example:
The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00.
r0148[0...n]
Sensor Module firmware version / SM FW version
ENCODER,
Can be changed: VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Unsigned32
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the firmware version of the Sensor Module.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0018, r0128, r0158, r0197, r0198
Note:
Example:
The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00.
p0150
Number of VSM data sets / VSM dat_sets qty.
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C1(3)
0
Data type: Unsigned8
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
2
Factory setting
1
Sets the number of VSM data sets.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-83
Parameter
List of parameters
p0151[0...1]
DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module component number / Hub comp_no
HUB
Can be changed: C1(4)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned8
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
199
Factory setting
0
Description:
This parameter is used to assign the data set to a DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module.
This unique component number is assigned when parameterizing the topology.
Only the numbers of components operated as hubs can be entered in these parameters.
[0] = DRIVE-CLiQ node 1
[1] = DRIVE-CLiQ node 2
p0151
Terminal Module component number / TM comp_no
TM31, TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: C1(4)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned8
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
199
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the component number for the Terminal Module.
This unique component number is assigned when parameterizing the topology.
Only component numbers can be entered into this parameter that correspond to a Terminal Module.
p0151[0...n]
Voltage Sensing Module component number / VSM comp_no
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C1(4)
0
Data type: Unsigned8
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: p0150
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
199
Factory setting
0
Description:
The VSM data set is assigned to a VSM evaluation using this parameter.
p0154
DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module detection via LED / Hub detection LED
HUB
Description:
1-84
Can be changed: U, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned8
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Detects any DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module that has been assigned.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p0154
Terminal Module detection via LED / TM detection LED
TM31, TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: U, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned8
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Detects the Terminal Module assigned to this drive and data set.
Note:
While p0154 = 1, the READY LED flashes green/orange or red/orange with 2 Hz at the appropriate Terminal Module.
p0155[0...n]
Voltage Sensing Module, activate/deactivate / VSM act/deact
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C1(4), T
0
Data type: Integer16
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: p0150
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
2
Factory setting
1
Description:
Setting to activate/deactivate a Voltage Sensing Module (VSM).
Value:
0:
1:
2:
Recommend.:
After inserting a component, before activating, first wait for Alarm A01317.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0156
Deactivate component
Activate component
Component, deactivate and not present
Refer to: A01317
r0156[0...n]
Voltage Sensing Module, active/inactive / VSM act/inact
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Integer16
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: p0150
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the "active" or "inactive" state of a Voltage Sensing Module (VSM).
Value:
0:
1:
Dependency:
Refer to: p0155
r0157
DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module EPROM data version / Hub EPROM version
HUB
Component inactive
Component active
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the version of the EPROM data for the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module.
Note:
Example:
The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-85
Parameter
List of parameters
r0157
Terminal Module EPROM data version / TM EPROM version
TM31, TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the version of the EPROM data of the Terminal Module.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0127, r0147
Note:
Example:
The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00.
r0157[0...n]
Voltage Sensing Module, EPROM data version / VSM EPROM version
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: p0150
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the version of the EPROM data of the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM).
Note:
Example:
The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00.
r0158
DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module firmware version / Hub FW version
HUB
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the firmware version of the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module.
r0158
Terminal Module Firmware Version / TM FW version
TM31, TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the firmware version of the Terminal Module.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0018, r0128, r0148, r0197, r0198
Note:
Example:
The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00.
1-86
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
r0158[0...n]
Voltage Sensing Module firmware version / VSM FW version
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: p0150
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the firmware version of the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM).
Dependency:
Refer to: r0018, r0128, r0197, r0198
Note:
Example:
The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00.
p0161
Option board, component number / Opt board comp_num
TB30
Description:
Can be changed: C1(4)
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned8
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9100
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
199
Factory setting
0
Sets the component number for the option board (e.g. Terminal Board 30).
This unique component number is assigned when parameterizing the topology.
Only component numbers can be entered into this parameter that correspond to an option board.
p0170
Number of Command Data Sets (CDS) / CDS count
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C1(3)
0
Data type: Unsigned8
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
2
Max
4
Factory setting
2
Description:
Sets the number of Command Data Sets (CDS).
Note:
It is possible to toggle between command parameters (BICO parameters) using this data set changeover.
p0180
Number of Drive Data Sets (DDS) / DDS count
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C1(3)
0
Data type: Unsigned8
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8565
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
32
Factory setting
1
Sets the number of Drive Data Sets (DDS).
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-87
Parameter
List of parameters
p0186[0...n]
Motor Data Sets (MDS) number / MDS number
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C1(4)
0
Data type: Unsigned8
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 8575
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
15
Factory setting
0
Using the parameter, each Drive Data Set (= index) is assigned the associated Motor Data Set (MDS).
The parameter value therefore corresponds to the number of the assigned motor data set.
p0187[0...n]
Encoder 1 encoder data set number / Enc 1 EDS number
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C1(4)
0
Data type: Unsigned8
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 1580, 8570
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
99
Factory setting
99
Using the parameter, each Drive Data Set (= index) is assigned the associated Encoder Data Set (EDS) for
encoder 1.
The parameter value therefore corresponds to the number of the assigned encoder data set.
Example:
Encoder data set 0 should be assigned to encoder 1 in drive data set 2.
--> p0187[2] = 0
Note:
A value of 99 means that no encoder has been assigned to this drive data set (not configured).
p0188[0...n]
Encoder 2 encoder data set number / Enc 2 EDS number
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C1(4)
0
Data type: Unsigned8
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 1580, 8570
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
99
Factory setting
99
Description:
Using the parameter, each Drive Data Set (= index) is assigned the associated Encoder Data Set (EDS) for
encoder 2.
Note:
A value of 99 means that no encoder has been assigned to this drive data set (not configured).
p0189[0...n]
Encoder 3 encoder data set number / Enc 3 EDS number
The parameter value therefore corresponds to the number of the assigned encoder data set.
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C1(4)
0
Data type: Unsigned8
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 1580, 8570
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
99
Factory setting
99
Description:
Using the parameter, each Drive Data Set (= index) is assigned the associated Encoder Data Set (EDS) for
encoder 3.
Note:
A value of 99 means that no encoder has been assigned to this drive data set (not configured).
The parameter value therefore corresponds to the number of the assigned encoder data set.
1-88
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
r0192
Power unit firmware properties / PU FW property
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the properties supported by the power unit firmware.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
25
26
Signal name
Edge modulation possible
Free telegram can be selected
Smart mode possible for Active Line Module
Safety Integrated possible for VECTOR
Liquid cooling
SERVO pulse frequency changeover, DDSdependent
Simulation mode possible
Internal armature short-circuit possible
Autonomous internal armature short-circuit
possible
Infeed temperature inputs X21.1/2
Integral normalized to half the gating unit
clock cycle freq.
Filtering thermal power unit current limit
possible
DC link compensation possible in power unit
PT100 temperature evaluation possible
Gating unit with pulse frequency wobbulation possible
Compound brake possible
Extended voltage range possible
Gating unit available with current limitation
control
Component status possible
Temperature evaluation via Motor Module /
CU terminals possible
Reduced device supply voltage possible
Current measurement oversampling available
Internal fan operating hours counter available
Software gating unit in the CU is supported
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
FP
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
no
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Notice:
This information represents the characteristics/features of the power unit firmware. It does not provide information/data about the characteristics/features of the hardware (e.g. bit 06 = 1 means that although the firmware supports "liquid cooling", a power unit with liquid cooling does not have to be used).
Note:
Re bit 09:
The Motor Module supports the internal armature short-circuit. The function is internally required for voltage protection (p1231 = 3).
Re bit 10:
The Motor Module supports the autonomous internal voltage protection. If the voltage protection function is internally activated (p1231 = 3) the Motor Module decides autonomously - using the DC link voltage - as to whether the
short-circuit is activated.
Re bit 23:
The component supports the detection of current actual values (and the detection of valve close durations) with
double clocking and phase shift.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-89
Parameter
List of parameters
r0194[0...n]
VSM properties / VSM properties
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned32
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: p0150
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the properties supported by the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM).
Bit field:
Bit
00
r0196[0...255]
DRIVE-CLiQ component status / DLQ comp status
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Signal name
Reserved
1 signal
Yes
0 signal
No
FP
-
Displays the status of DRIVE-CLiQ components.
r0196[0...1]: Not used
r0196[2]: Status of DRIVE-CLiQ component with component number 2
...
r0196[255]: Status of DRIVE-CLiQ component with component number 255
Note:
Structure of status value: Bits 31 ... 08, 07, 06 ... 04, 03 ... 00
Re Bit 31 ... 08: Reserved
Re Bit 07: 1: Part of target topology, 0: Only in actual topology
Re Bit 06 ... 04: 1: Active, 0: Inactive or parked
Re bit 03 ... 00:
0: Component data not available.
1: Power-up, acyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication (LED = orange).
2: Ready for operation, cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication (LED = green).
3: Alarm (LED = green).
4: Fault (LED = red).
5: Detection via LED and ready for operation (LED = green/orange).
6: Detection via LED and alarm (LED = green/orange).
7: Detection via LED and fault (LED = red/orange).
8: Downloading firmware (LED = green/red at 0.5 Hz).
9: Firmware downloading completed, Waiting for POWER ON (LED = green/red at 2.0 Hz).
r0197
Bootloader version / Bootloader vers
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the bootloader version.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0018, r0128, r0148, r0158, r0198
Note:
Example:
The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00.
1-90
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
r0198[0...1]
BIOS and EEPROM data version / BIOS/EEPROM vers
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the BIOS and EEPROM data version.
Re r0198[0]
Displays the BIOS version.
Re r0198[1]
Displays the EEPROM data version.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0018, r0128, r0148, r0158, r0197
Note:
Example:
The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00.
p0199[0...24]
All objects
Description:
Drive object name / DO name
Can be changed: C1
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
0
Freely assignable name for a drive object.
In the commissioning software, this name cannot be entered using the expert list, but is specified in the configuration assistant. The object name can be subsequently modified in the Project Navigator using standard Windows
resources.
Note:
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
r0200[0...n]
Power unit code number actual / PU code no. act
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned16
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the unique code number of the power unit.
Note:
No power unit found: r0200 = p0201.
For parallel circuit configurations, the parameter index is assigned to a power unit.
p0201[0...n]
Power unit code number / PU code no
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(2)
0
Data type: Unsigned16
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the actual code number from r0200 to acknowledge the power unit being used.
Dependency:
Refer to: F07815
When commissioned for the first time, the code number is automatically transferred from r0200 into p0201.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-91
Parameter
List of parameters
Notice:
When p0201 = 10000, the rated power unit data is reloaded and dependent parameters are set (e.g. p0205, p0210,
p0230, p0857, p1800). p0201 is then automatically assigned the value of r0200 if the code number of the power
unit could be read. A warm start must be performed after this procedure (automatically if necessary).
Note:
The parameter is used to identify when the drive is being commissioned for the first time.
The power unit commissioning can only be exited (p0201 = r0200), if the actual and acknowledged code numbers
are identical (p0010 = 2). However, if the comparator in p9906 or p9908 is at 2 (low) or 3 (minimum), the power unit
commissioning is automatically set to p0201 = r0200 upon exiting.
When the code number is changed, the connection voltage (p0210) is checked and, if necessary, adjusted.
For parallel circuit configurations, the parameter index is assigned to a power unit.
r0203[0...15]
Memory card name / Sp_card name
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned8
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the name of the memory card in ASCII code.
r0203[0]: Name character 1
...
r0203[15]: Name character 16
For the commissioning software, the ASCII characters are displayed uncoded.
Notice:
An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the Appendix of the List Manual:
r0203[0...n]
Actual power unit type / PU actual type
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Integer16
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
2
Max
400
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the type of power unit found.
Value:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
100:
101:
102:
112:
113:
114:
115:
116:
118:
120:
150:
200:
250:
260:
300:
350:
400:
Note:
For parallel circuit configurations, the parameter index is assigned to a power unit.
1-92
MICROMASTER 440
MICROMASTER 411
MICROMASTER 410
MICROMASTER 436
MICROMASTER 440 PX
MICROMASTER 430
SINAMICS S
SINAMICS S (value)
SINAMICS S (combi)
PM220 (SINAMICS G120)
PM230 (SINAMICS G120)
PM240 (SINAMICS G120)
PM250 (SINAMICS G120)
PM260 (SINAMICS G120)
SINAMICS G120 Px
PM340 (SINAMICS S120)
SINAMICS G
SINAMICS GM
SINAMICS SM
SINAMICS SM120
SINAMICS GL
SINAMICS SL
SINAMICS DCM
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
r0204[0...n]
Power unit hardware properties / PU HW property
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the properties supported by the power unit hardware.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
12
13
14
Signal name
Device type
RFI filter available
Active Line Module available
Smart Line Module available
Basic Line Module available with thyristor
bridge
Basic Line Module available with diode
bridge
Liquid cooling with cooling system (chassis
PU)
F3E regenerative feedback into the line supply
Internal Braking Module
Different cooling type supported
Safe Brake Control (SBC) supported
Safety Integrated supported
Internal LC output filter
1 signal
DC/AC device
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
AC/AC device
No
No
No
No
FP
-
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
Note:
For parallel circuit configurations, the parameter index is assigned to a power unit.
p0205
Power unit application / PU application
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(1, 2)
0
Data type: Integer16
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
7
Factory setting
6
Overloading the load duty cycles applies under the prerequisite that before and after the overload, the drive converter is operated with its base load current - in this case, a load duty cycle of 300 s is used as basis.
For booksize drive units, the following applies:
Only the setting p0205 = 0 can be selected. In this particular case, the base load current has a load duty cycle of
150 % for 60 s and 176 % for 30 s.
For chassis units, the following applies:
The base load current for a slight overload condition is based on a load duty cycle 110 % for 60 s and 150 % for 10
s.
The base load current for a high overload condition is based on a load duty cycle 150 % for 60 s and 160 % for 10 s.
Value:
0:
1:
6:
7:
Load duty cycle with high overload for vector drives
Load duty cycle with low overload for vector drives
S1 duty cycle for servo drives (feed drive)
S6 duty cycle for servo drives (spindle drive)
Note:
When the parameter is changed, all of the motor parameters and the control mode are pre-assigned according to
the selected application.
The parameter has not influence when calculating the thermal overload.
p0205 can only be changed to the settings that are saved in the power unit EEPROM.
The parameter value is not reset when the factory setting is restored (see p0010 = 30, p0970).
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-93
Parameter
List of parameters
r0206[0...4]
Rated power unit power / PU P_rated
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: 14_6
Unit selection: p0100
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [kW]
Max
- [kW]
Factory setting
- [kW]
Description:
Displays the rated power unit power for various load duty cycles.
Index:
[0] = Rating plate
[1] = Load duty cycle with low overload
[2] = Load duty cycle with high overload
[3] = S1 cont duty cyc
[4] = S6 load duty cycle
Dependency:
IECdrives (p0100 = 0): Units kW
NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): Units hp
Refer to: p0100, p0205
r0207[0...4]
Rated power unit current / PU PI_rated
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8014
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Description:
Displays the rated power unit power for various load duty cycles.
Index:
[0] = Rating plate
[1] = Load duty cycle with low overload
[2] = Load duty cycle with high overload
[3] = S1 cont duty cyc
[4] = S6 load duty cycle
Dependency:
Refer to: p0205
r0208
Rated power unit line supply voltage / PU V_rated
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Vrms]
Max
- [Vrms]
Factory setting
- [Vrms]
Displays the rated line supply voltage of the power unit.
r0208 = 400 : 380 - 480 V +/-10 %
r0208 = 500 : 500 - 600 V +/-10 %
r0208 = 690 : 660 - 690 V +/-10 %
For the Basic Line Module (BLM) the following applies:
r0208 = 690 : 500 - 690 V +/-10 %
1-94
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
r0209[0...4]
Power unit, maximum current / PU I_max
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8750, 8850,
8950
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Description:
Displays the maximum output current of the power unit.
Index:
[0] = Catalog
[1] = Load duty cycle with high overload
[2] = Load duty cycle with low overload
[3] = S1 load duty cycle
[4] = S6 load duty cycle
Dependency:
Refer to: p0205
p0210
Drive unit line supply voltage / Supply voltage
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(2), T
0
Data type: Unsigned16
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1 [V]
Max
63000 [V]
Factory setting
600 [V]
Sets the drive unit supply voltage.
AC/AC unit: The rms value of the phase-to-phase line supply voltage should be entered.
DC/AC unit: The rated DC voltage of the connection busbar should be entered.
Dependency:
Set p1254, p1294 (automatic detection of the Vdc switch-on levels) = 0.
The switch-in thresholds of the Vdc_max controller are then directly determined using p0210.
The parameter can be reduced to p0210 = 100 V if p0212 bit 0 has been set.
Refer to: p0212
Caution:
If the line supply voltage is higher than the entered value, the Vdc controller may be automatically deactivated in
some cases to prevent the motor from accelerating. In this case, an appropriate alarm is output.
Note:
Setting ranges for p0210 as a function of the rated power unit voltage:
V_rated = 400 V:
- p0210 = 380 ... 480 V (AC/AC), 510 ... 720 V (DC/AC)
V_rated = 500 V:
- p0210 = 500 ... 600 V (AC/AC), 675 ... 900 V (DC/AC)
V_rated = 660 V ... 690 V:
- p0210 = 660 ... 690 V (AC/AC), 890 ... 1035 V (DC/AC)
V_rated = 500 V ... 690 V:
- p0210 = 500 ... 690 V (AC/AC), 675 ... 1035 V (DC/AC)
The pre-charging switch-in threshold for the DC link voltage (Vdc) is calculated from p0210:
Vdc_pre = p0210 * 0.82 * 1.35 (AC/AC)
Vdc_pre = p0210 * 0.82 (DC/AC)
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-95
Parameter
List of parameters
The undervoltage thresholds for the DC link voltage (Vdc) are calculated from p0210 as a function of the rated
power unit voltage:
V_rated = 400 V:
- V_min = p0210 * 0.78 (AC/AC) > 330 V, p0210 * 0.60 (DC/AC) > 380 V
V_rated = 500 V:
- V_min = p0210 * 0.76 (AC/AC) > 410 V
V_rated = 660 V ... 690 V:
- V_min = p0210 * 0.82 (AC/AC) > 565 V, p0210 * 0.63 (DC/AC) > 650 V
V_rated = 500 V ... 690 V:
- V_min = p0210 * 0.82 (AC/AC) > 420 V, p0210 * 0.63 (DC/AC) > 480 V
p0212
Power unit configuration / PU configuration
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(2)
0
Data type: Unsigned16
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Configuration of the power unit.
Bit field:
Bit
00
Dependency:
Reduced supply voltages (bit 0 = 1) are only possible on booksize power units.
Signal name
Reduced device supply voltage
1 signal
Yes
0 signal
No
FP
-
Bit 0 = 1 can only be set if r0192 bit 22 = 1.
Refer to: r0192, p0210
Caution:
Re bit 00:
Working with reduced input voltages deactivates undervoltage detection.
Note:
Re bit 00 = 0:
It is not possible to reduce the supply voltage in p0210.
Re bit 00 = 1:
With this setting the supply voltage in p0210 can be reduced to 100 V.
Only operating mode p1300 = 19 is possible.
p0230
Drive filter type, motor side / Drv filt type mot
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(1, 2)
0
Data type: Integer16
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
4
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the type of the filter at the motor side.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
1-96
No filter
Motor reactor
dv/dt filter
Sine-wave filter, Siemens
Sine-wave filter, third-party
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
Dependency:
The following parameters are influenced using p0230:
p0230 = 1:
--> p0233 (power unit, motor reactor) = filter inductance
p0230 = 3:
--> p0233 (power unit, motor reactor) = filter inductance
--> p0234 (power unit sine-wave filter capacitance) = filter capacitance
--> p0290 (power unit overload response) = inhibit pulse frequency reduction
--> p1082 (maximum speed) = Fmax filter / pole pair number
--> p1800 (pulse frequency) >= nominal pulse frequency of the filter
--> p1802 (modulator modes) = space vector modulation without overcontrol
--> p1811 (modulator configuration) = wobbulation amplitude
--> p1909 (motor data identification, control word) = only Rs measurement
p0230 = 4:
--> p0290 (power unit overload response) = inhibit pulse frequency reduction
--> p1802 (modulator modes) = space vector modulation without overcontrol
--> p1811 (modulator configuration) = wobbulation amplitude
--> p1909 (motor data identification, control word) = only Rs measurement
The user must set the following parameters according to the data sheet of the sine-wave filter and also the user
must check whether they are permitted.
--> p0233 (power unit, motor reactor) = filter inductance
--> p0234 (power unit sine-wave filter capacitance) = filter capacitance
--> p1082 (maximum speed) = Fmax filter / pole pair number
--> p1800 (pulse frequency) >= nominal pulse frequency of the filter
Refer to: p0233, p0234, p0290, p1082, p1800, p1802
Note:
if a filter type cannot be selected, then this filter type is not permitted for the Motor Module.
p0230 = 1:
The output frequency of booksize/blocksize power units with output reactors is restricted to 120 Hz.
p0230 = 2:
Chassis-type power units with dv/dt filter, depending on the rated pulse frequency, may only be operated with a
maximum pulse frequency of p1800 = 2.5 kHz or 4 kHz. The output frequency is limited to 150 Hz.
p0230 = 3:
Sine-wave filters with a rated pulse frequency of 1.25 or 2.5 kHz should only be operated with a current controller
sampling rate p0115[0] = 400 s, sine-wave filters with a rated pulse frequency of 2 or 4 kHz with p0115[0] = 250
s.
The sine-wave filter cannot be selected if the current controller sampling rate has not been appropriately set.
Chassis power units with sine-wave filter are limited to output frequencies of 115 Hz or 150 Hz.
p0233
Power unit motor reactor / PU mot reactor
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(2), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [mH]
Max
1000.000 [mH]
Factory setting
0.000 [mH]
Description:
Enter the inductance of a filter connected at the power unit output.
Dependency:
This parameter is automatically preset when you select a filter via p0230 if a SIEMENS filter is defined for the power
unit.
Refer to: p0230
Note:
When exiting the quick commissioning using p3900 = 1, the parameter value is set to the value of the defined SIEMENS filter or to zero. For this reason, the parameter value of a third-party filter only has to be entered outside the
commissioning phase (p0010 = 0) and then the controller calculation (p0340 = 3) is carried out.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-97
Parameter
List of parameters
p0234
Power unit sine-wave filter capacitance / PU sine filter C
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(2), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [F]
Max
1000.000 [F]
Factory setting
0.000 [F]
Description:
Enters the capacitance of a sine-wave filter connected at the power unit output.
Dependency:
This parameter is automatically preset when you select a filter via p0230 if a SIEMENS filter is defined for the power
unit.
Refer to: p0230
Note:
The parameter value includes the sum of all of the capacitances of a phase connected in series (phase - ground).
When exiting the quick commissioning using p3900 = 1, the parameter value is set to the value of the defined SIEMENS filter or to zero. For this reason, the parameter value of a third-party filter only has to be entered outside the
commissioning phase (p0010 = 0).
p0235
Number of reactors connected in series / Qty L in series
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(1, 2)
0
Data type: Unsigned8
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
3
Factory setting
1
Description:
Number of reactors connected at the power unit output.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0230
Caution:
If the number of motor reactors connected in series does not correspond to the parameter value, then this can
result in an unfavorable control behavior.
Note:
The parameter cannot be changed for chassis units and for p0230 = 1.
r0238
Power unit internal resistance / PU R_int
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Ohm]
Max
- [Ohm]
Factory setting
- [Ohm]
Description:
Displays the internal resistance of the power unit (IGBT and line resistance).
Note:
For a parallel circuit, the value corresponds to the resistance of a power unit.
Index 0 refers to the first line filter from p0220[0].
Index 1 refers to the optional second line filter from p0220[1].
p0249
Power unit cooling type / PU cool type
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(1, 2)
0
Data type: Integer16
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Sets the cooling type for booksize compact power units.
This therefore defines whether for these power units, the internal air cooling is shut down and instead, the "ColdPlate" cooling type is used.
1-98
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
Value:
0:
1:
Air cooling int
Cold-Plate
Note:
For booksize compact power units, there is a 4 at the 5th position in the Order No.
The parameter is irrelevant for all other power unit types.
p0251[0...n]
Operating hours counter power unit fan / PU fan t_oper
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [h]
Max
4294967295 [h]
Factory setting
0 [h]
Displays the power unit fan operating hours.
The number of hours operated can only be reset to 0 in this parameter (e.g. after a fan has been replaced).
Dependency:
Refer to: p0252
p0252
Maximum operating time power unit fan / PU fan t_oper max
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [h]
Max
100000 [h]
Factory setting
40000 [h]
Sets the maximum operating time of the power unit fan.
The pre-alarm (warning) is output 500 hours before this set value.
The monitoring is deactivated with p0252 = 0.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0251
Note:
For chassis units, the maximum operating time in the power unit parameter is set to 50000 via the factory setting.
p0255[0...1]
Power unit contactor monitoring time / PU contactor t_mon
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [ms]
Max
6500 [ms]
Factory setting
0 [ms]
Description:
Sets the monitoring time for internal monitoring of the contactor feedback contacts.
Index:
[0] = Pre-charge contactor
[1] = Bridging contactor
Dependency:
Refer to: F30060, F30061
Note:
This parameter is only effective for chassis power units with 3 AC line connection and line contactors.
A value of 0 deactivates the associated line contactor monitoring.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-99
Parameter
List of parameters
p0260
Cooling system, starting time 1 / RKA start time 1
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0 (Cooling system)
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9795
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [s]
Max
60.0 [s]
Factory setting
5.0 [s]
Sets starting time 1 to monitor the cooling system after power-on command.
After powering up, the following signals must be present within starting time 1:
- "RKA powered up"
- "RKA liquid flow OK"
When a fault occurs, an appropriate message is output.
Dependency:
Refer to: F49152, F49153
Note:
RKA: Cooling system
p0261
Cooling system, starting time 2 / RKA start time 2
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0 (Cooling system)
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9795
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [s]
Max
1200.0 [s]
Factory setting
180.0 [s]
Sets starting time 2 to monitor the cooling system after power-on command.
After powering up, the following signals must be present within starting time 2:
- "RKA conductivity, no fault"
- "RKA conductivity, no alarm"
When a fault occurs, an appropriate message is output.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0266
Refer to: F49151, A49171
p0262
Cooling system, fault conductivity delay time / RKA cond t_del
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0 (Cooling system)
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9795
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [s]
Max
30.0 [s]
Factory setting
0.0 [s]
Sets the delay time for the fault "RKA: Conductive limit value exceeded" during operation.
The fault is only output if, during operation, the conductivity exceeds the permissible fault value and the value
remains for a longer time than is set in this parameter.
Dependency:
1-100
Refer to: F49151
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p0263
Cooling system fault liquid flow, delay time / RKA flow t_del
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0 (Cooling system)
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9795
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [s]
Max
20.0 [s]
Factory setting
3.0 [s]
Sets the delay time for the fault "RKA: Liquid flow too low".
The fault is only output if the cause is present for a time longer than is set in this parameter.
Dependency:
Refer to: F49153
p0264
Cooling system, run-on time / RKA run-on time
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0 (Cooling system)
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9795
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [s]
Max
180.0 [s]
Factory setting
30.0 [s]
Description:
Sets the run-up time of the cooling system after a power-off command.
r0265.0...3
BO: Cooling system, control word / RKA CTW
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0 (Cooling system)
Data type: Unsigned8
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the control word for the cooling system.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
p0266[0...7]
BI: Cooling system, feedback signals, signal source / RKA fdbk S_src
Signal name
Power up cooling system
Message converter off
Acknowledge faults
Leakage sensing OK
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0 (Cooling system)
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
1 signal
Activating
Off
Acknowledgement
No leaked liquid
0 signal
Deactivating
On
No acknowledgement
Leaked liquid
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the signal sources for the feedback signals from the cooling system.
Index:
[0] = Cooling system powered up
[1] = Cooling system ready to be powered up
[2] = Cooling system, no alarm present
[3] = Cooling system, no fault present
[4] = Cooling system, no leaked liquid
[5] = Cooling system, liquid flow OK
[6] = Cooling system, conductivity < fault threshold
[7] = Cooling system, conductivity < alarm threshold
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
FP
-
1-101
Parameter
List of parameters
r0267.0...7
BO: Cooling system status word / RKA ZSW
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0 (Cooling system)
Data type: Unsigned16
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status word of the cooling system.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
Dependency:
Refer to: p0266
p0278
DC link voltage undervoltage threshold reduction / Vdc V_under red
Signal name
RKA powered up
RKA ready to be powered up
RKA no alarm present
RKA no fault present
RKA no leaked fluid
RKA liquid flow OK
RKA conductivity, no fault
RKA conductivity, no alarm
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-80 [V]
Max
0 [V]
Factory setting
0 [V]
Description:
Sets the absolute value by which the threshold to initiate the undervoltage fault (F30003) is reduced.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0210, r0296
FP
9974
9974
Refer to: F30003
Notice:
When using a Control Supply Module (CSM) for 24 V supply from the DC link, the minimum continuous DC link voltage may not lie below 430 V. DC link voltages in the range 300 ... 430 V are permissible up to a duration of 1 min.
Note:
The resulting shutdown threshold can be read in r0296 and is dependent on the selected rated voltage (p0210) and
the power unit being used.
p0287[0...1]
Ground fault monitoring thresholds / Gnd flt threshold
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [%]
Max
100.0 [%]
Factory setting
[0] 6.0 [%]
[1] 16.0 [%]
Description:
Sets the shutdown thresholds for the ground fault monitoring.
The setting is made as a percentage of the maximum power unit current (r0209).
Index:
[0] = Threshold for pulse inhibit
[1] = Threshold for pulse enable
Dependency:
Refer to: F30021
1-102
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
The parameter only applies to booksize and chassis power units.
Deactivating the ground fault monitoring:
- Sequence: --> p0287[1] = 0 --> p0287[0] = 0
- irrespective of the firmware version of the power unit.
Sets the thresholds:
- the prerequisite is at least firmware version 2.2 of the power unit.
r0289
CO: Maximum power unit output current / PU I_outp max
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Description:
Displays the actual maximum output current of the power unit taking into account derating factors.
p0290
Power unit overload response / PU overld response
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Integer16
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8014
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
3
Factory setting
0
Sets the response to a thermal overload condition of the power unit.
The following quantities can result in a response to thermal overload:
- heat sink temperature (r0037.0)
- chip temperature (r0037.1)
- power unit overload I2T (r0036)
Possible measures to avoid thermal overload:
- reduce the output current limit r0289 and r0067 (for closed-loop speed/velocity or torque/force control) or the output frequency (for V/f control) indirectly via the output current limit and the intervention of the current limiting controller).
- reduce the pulse frequency (only for vector control).
A reduction, if parameterized, is always realized after an appropriate alarm is output.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
Reduce output current or output frequency
No reduction, shutdown when overload threshold is reached
Reduce I_output or f_output and f_pulse (not using I2t)
Reduce the pulse frequency (not using I2t)
Dependency:
If a sine-wave filter is parameterized as output filter (p0230 = 3, 4), then only responses can be selected without
pulse frequency reduction (p0290 = 0, 1).
If a fault or alarm is present, then r2135.13 or r2135.15 is set.
Refer to: r0036, r0037, r0108, p0108, p0230, r2135
Refer to: A05000, A05001, A07805
Caution:
If the thermal overload of the power unit is not sufficiently reduced by the actions taken, the drive is always shut
down. This means that the power unit is always protected irrespective of the setting of this parameter.
Note:
The setting p0290 = 0, 2 is only practical if the load decreases with decreasing speed (e.g. for applications with variable torque such as for pumps and fans).
Under overload conditions, the current and torque limit are reduced, and therefore the motor is braked and forbidden speed ranges (e.g. minimum speed p1080 and suppression [skip] speeds p1091 ... p1094) can be passed
through.
For p0290 = 2, 3, the I2t overload detection of the power unit does not influence the responses.
When the motor data identification routine is selected, p290 cannot be changed.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-103
Parameter
List of parameters
r0293
CO: Power unit alarm threshold model temperature / PU Tmodel_A_thresh
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: 21_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: TEMP
Expert list: 1
Min
- [C]
Max
- [C]
Factory setting
- [C]
Description:
Temperature alarm threshold for the difference from the chip and heat sink temperature in the thermal model.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0037
Refer to: F30024
Note:
The parameter is only relevant for chassis power units.
p0294
Power unit alarm with I2t overload / PU I2t alrm thresh
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8014
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
10.0 [%]
Max
100.0 [%]
Factory setting
95.0 [%]
Sets the alarm threshold for the I2t power unit overload.
Drive:
If this threshold is exceeded, an overload alarm is generated and the system responds as parameterized in p0290.
Infeed:
When the threshold value is exceeded, only an overload alarm is output.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0036, p0290
Refer to: A07805
Note:
The I2t fault threshold is 100 %. If this value is exceeded, fault F30005 is output.
p0295
Fan run-on time / Fan run-on time
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [s]
Max
600 [s]
Factory setting
0 [s]
Description:
Sets the fan run-on time after the pulses for the power unit have been canceled.
Note:
Under certain circumstances, the fan can continue to run for longer than was set (e.g. as a result of the excessively
high heat sink temperature).
For values less than 1 s, a 1 s run on time for the fan is effective.
1-104
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
r0296
DC link voltage undervoltage threshold / Vdc V_lower_thresh
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned16
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [V]
Max
- [V]
Factory setting
- [V]
Description:
If the DC link voltage falls below this threshold, the Motor Module is shut down due to a DC link undervoltage condition (F30003).
Dependency:
Refer to: p0278
Refer to: F30003
Note:
For booksize units, the following applies:
The undervoltage threshold can be reduced with p0278.
r0297
DC link voltage overvoltage threshold / Vdc V_upper_thresh
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned16
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8750, 8760,
8850, 8864, 8950, 8964
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [V]
Max
- [V]
Factory setting
- [V]
Description:
If the DC link voltage exceeds the threshold specified here, the drive unit is tripped due to DC link overvoltage.
Dependency:
Refer to: F30002
p0300[0...n]
Motor type selection / Mot type sel
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(1, 3)
0
Data type: Integer16
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 6310
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
10001
Factory setting
0
Selects the motor type or starts to read in the motor parameters for a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ (p0300 = 10000 or
10001, if there is a second data set).
The following applies for p0300 < 10000: The first digit of the parameter value always defines the general motor
type and corresponds to the third-party motor belonging to a motor list:
1 = Rotating induction motor
2 = Rotating synchronous motor
3 = Linear induction motor (reserved)
4 = Linear synchronous motor
5 = Synchronous motor separately-excited
7 = SIEMOSYN motor
8 = Reluctance motor
The type information must be entered to filter motor-specific parameters and to optimize the operating characteristics and behavior. For example, for synchronous motors, power factor (p0308) is neither used nor displayed (in the
BOP/AOP).
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-105
Parameter
List of parameters
Value:
0:
1:
2:
5:
7:
8:
11:
12:
15:
16:
17:
18:
102:
104:
107:
108:
134:
136:
166:
283:
10000:
10001:
No motor
Induction motor (rotating)
Synchronous motor (rotating, permanent-magnet)
Synchronous motor (separately excited)
SIEMOSYN motor
Reluctance motor
1LA1 standard induction motor
1LE2 standard induction motor (NEMA)
1LA5 standard induction motor
1LA6 standard induction motor
1LA7 standard induction motor
1LA8 / 1PQ8 standard induction motor
1PH2 induction motor
1PH4 induction motor
1PH7 induction motor
1PH8 induction motor
1PM4 induction motor
1PM6 induction motor
1PL6 induction motor
1FW3 synchronous motor
Motor with DRIVE-CLiQ
Motor with DRIVE-CLiQ 2nd data set
Dependency:
Motors, selection 206, 236, 237 cannot be operated (also not as motor with DRIVE-CLiQ).
p0300 = 5 cannot be selected with SINAMICS G.
When the motor type is changed, the code number in p0301 may be reset to 0.
p0300 = 12 can only be selected for p0100 = 1 (NEMA).
When selecting a motor type from the 1LA5 and 1LA7 series, parameters p0335, p0626, p0627 and p0628 of the
thermal motor model are pre-assigned as a function of p0307 and p0311.
Caution:
Refer to: p0301
A permanent-magnet synchronous motor cannot be operated with an SSI encoder without HTL/TTL track.
A separately-excited synchronous motor can only be operated with an SSI encoder if this is used as the second
encoder and an HTL/TTL encoder is used as the first encoder.
Caution:
If a catalog motor is selected (p0300 >= 100) and an associated motor code number (p0301), then the parameters,that are associated with this list cannot be changed (write protection). The write protection is canceled if the
motor type p0300 is set to a non-Siemens motor that matches p0301 (e.g. p0300 = 2 for p0301 = 2xxxx). Write protection is automatically canceled when the results of motor data identification are copied to the motor parameters.
Notice:
If required, the list of motor codes/encoder codes can be found in the Appendix of the List Manual.
For 1PQ8 motors (p0300 = 18) the fan type p0335 should be set to 5.
Note:
With p0300 = 10000, for a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ, the motor parameters are automatically downloaded, with
p0300 = 10001, the motor parameters of a second data set (if available).
If a motor type has not been selected (p0300 = 0), then the drive commissioning routine cannot be exited.
A motor type with a value above p0300 >= 100 describes motors for which a motor parameter list exists.
Motor types with a value below p0300 < 100 correspond to the selection of a third-party motor. When appropriately
selected, this means that the motor parameters are pre-assigned the settings for a third-party motor.
This also applies for parameters for a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ. In this case p0300 can only be set to p0300 = 10000
or 10001 (read motor parameters) or to the corresponding non-Siemens motor (first digit of the motor code number)
in order to be able to cancel the write protection.
1-106
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p0301[0...n]
Motor code number selection / Mot code No. sel
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(1, 3)
0
Data type: Unsigned16
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: FEM
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
0
The parameter is used to select a motor from a motor parameter list.
When changing the code number (with the exception to the value 0), all of the motor parameters are pre-assigned
from the internally available parameter lists.
Dependency:
Code numbers can only be selected for motor types that correspond to the motor type selected in p0300. For 1PH2,
1PH4, 1PH7, 1PM4, 1PM6, 1FT6 motors, code numbers are also possible, whose fourth decimal position is greater
by a value of 1 or 2 than the matching motor type in p0300. For 1FE1 motors, the third decimal position can be
higher by a value of 1.
Refer to: p0300
Notice:
If required, the list of motor codes/encoder codes can be found in the Appendix of the List Manual.
Note:
The motor code number can only be changed if the matching catalog motor was first selected in p0300.
For a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ, p0301 cannot be changed. In this case, p0301 is automatically written to the code
number of the motor parameter read in (r0302) if p0300 is set to 10000.
When selecting a catalog motor (p0300 >= 100), drive commissioning can only be exited if a code number is
selected.
r0302[0...n]
Motor code number of motor with DRIVE-CLiQ / Motor code Mot DLQ
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned16
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the motor code number from the saved motor data from a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ.
Note:
Drive commissioning can only be exited if the code number that was downloaded (r0302) matches the stored code
number (p0301). If the numbers differ, then the motor data set should be re-loaded using p0300 = 10000.
The motor data are always expected from the first encoder that is assigned to the drive data sets (refer to p0187 =
encoder 1) data set number.
The value is not updated cyclically but only on specific events (e.g. update DRIVE-CLiQ device).
r0302 = 0: No motor with DRIVE-CLiQ found
r0303[0...n]
Motor status word of motor with DRIVE-CLiQ / Mot ZSW Mot DLQ
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned16
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the status word of the automatic motor parameter sensing of a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ.
Motor parameter sensing takes place during warm restarts, following downloading, and when powering up, if the
SMI is connected to the Motor Module and the encoder is activated (see p0145).
If the motor data is reloaded (p0300 = 10000, 10001), r0303 is also updated.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-107
Parameter
List of parameters
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
Signal name
Motor data sets selection
Motor connection type
Windings are switchable
Number of switchable windings bit 0
1 signal
Two
Delta
can be chng over
2
0 signal
One
Star
cannot be chg over
0
FP
-
Dependency:
Refer to: p0145, p0300
Note:
Re bit 0: Value 0 indicates that the first SMI data set is selected, value 1 indicates that the second is selected
[MDS].
Re bit 1: Displays the connection type for the winding [MDS].
Re bit 2: Displays whether the windings can be changed over.
Re bit 3: Value 0 indicates that no windings that can be changed over are present, value 1 indicates that two are
present.
p0304[0...n]
Rated motor voltage / Mot V_rated
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(1, 3)
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 6300, 6724
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [Vrms]
Max
20000 [Vrms]
Factory setting
0 [Vrms]
Description:
Sets the rated motor voltage (rating plate).
Dependency:
Refer to: p0349
Caution:
This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301).
When selecting a catalog motor, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should
be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note:
When the parameter value is entered the connection type of the motor (star-delta) must be taken into account.
p0305[0...n]
Rated motor current / Mot I_rated
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(1, 3)
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 6300
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Arms]
Max
10000.00 [Arms]
Factory setting
0.00 [Arms]
Description:
Sets the rated motor current (rating plate).
Dependency:
Refer to: p0349
Caution:
This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Notice:
If p0305 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), then the maximum current p0640 is pre-assigned
accordingly. This is not the case when commissioning the motor (p0010 = 3).
If the rated motor current exceeds twice the maximum drive converter current (r0209), then the maximum current is
reduced due to the current harmonics that increase overproportionally (r0067).
Note:
When the parameter value is entered the connection type of the motor (star-delta) must be taken into account.
1-108
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p0306[0...n]
Number of motors connected in parallel / Motor qty
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(1, 3)
0
Data type: Unsigned8
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: FEM
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
50
Factory setting
1
Number of motors that can be operated in parallel using one motor data set.
Depending on the motor number entered, internally an equivalent motor is calculated.
The following should be carefully observed for motors connected in series:
The following rating plate data should only be entered for one motor:
- resistances and inductances: p0350 ... p0361
- currents: p0305, p0320, p0323, p0325, p0329, p0389, p0390, p0391, p0392
- power ratings: p0307
- masses/moments of inertia: p0341, p0344
All other parameters take into account the replacement/equivalent motor (e.g. r0331, r0333).
Dependency:
Refer to: r0331
Caution:
The motors to be connected in parallel must be of the same type and size (same order no. (MLFB)).
The mounting regulations when connecting motors in parallel must be carefully maintained! Especially for synchronous motors, the pole position of motors that are rigidly coupled with one another (mechanically) must be identical.
The number of motors set must correspond to the number of motors that are actually connected in parallel.
After changing p0306, it is imperative that the control parameters are adapted (e.g. using automatic calculation with
p0340 = 1).
Notice:
If p0306 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), then the maximum current p0640 is appropriately preassigned. This is not the case when commissioning the motor (p0010 = 3).
Note:
Only operation with V/f characteristic makes sense if more than 10 identical motors are connected in parallel.
Separately-excited synchronous motors must not be connected in parallel. Synchronous and reluctance motors that
are not coupled with one another align themselves when the pulses are switched in. If the motors have different
load levels, then equalization currents flow between the motors.
p0307[0...n]
Rated motor power / Mot P_rated
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(1, 3)
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 14_6
Unit selection: p0100
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-100000.00 [kW]
Max
100000.00 [kW]
Factory setting
0.00 [kW]
Description:
Sets the rated motor power (rating plate).
Dependency:
IECdrives (p0100 = 0): Units kW
NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): Units hp
Refer to: p0100
Caution:
This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Note:
This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301).
For generators, a negative rated power should be entered.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-109
Parameter
List of parameters
p0308[0...n]
Rated motor power factor / Mot cos_phi_rated
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(1, 3)
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000
Max
1.000
Factory setting
0.000
Description:
Sets the rated motor power factor (cos phi, rating plate).
Dependency:
This parameter is only available for IEC motors (p0100 = 0).
For a parameter value of 0.000, the power factor is internally calculated and displayed in r0332.
Refer to: p0100, p0309, r0332
Caution:
This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Note:
The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
p0309[0...n]
Rated motor efficiency / Mot eta_rated
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(1, 3)
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [%]
Max
99.9 [%]
Factory setting
0.0 [%]
Description:
Sets the rated motor efficiency (rating plate).
Dependency:
This parameter is only available for NEMA motors (p0100 = 1).
For a parameter value of 0.0, the power factor is internally calculated and displayed in r0332.
Refer to: p0100, p0308, r0332
Caution:
This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Note:
The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
p0310[0...n]
Rated motor frequency / Mot f_rated
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(1, 3)
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 6300
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Hz]
Max
3000.00 [Hz]
Factory setting
0.00 [Hz]
Description:
Sets the rated motor frequency (rating plate).
Dependency:
The number of pole pairs (r0313) is automatically recalculated when the parameter is changed (together with
p0311), if p0314 = 0.
The rated frequency is restricted to values between 1.00 Hz and 650.00 Hz.
Refer to: p0311, r0313, p0314
Caution:
This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Notice:
If p0310 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), then the maximum speed p1082, which is also associated with quick commissioning, is pre-assigned accordingly. This is not the case when commissioning the motor
(p0010 = 3).
1-110
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p0311[0...n]
Rated motor speed / Mot n_rated
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(1, 3)
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [rpm]
Max
210000.0 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.0 [rpm]
Sets the rated motor speed (rating plate).
For VECTOR the following applies (p0107):
For p0311 = 0, the rated motor slip of induction motors is internally calculated and displayed in r0330.
It is especially important to correctly enter the rated motor speed for vector control and slip compensation for V/f
control.
Dependency:
If p0311 is changed and for p0314 = 0, the pole pair (r0313) is recalculated automatically.
Refer to: p0310, r0313, p0314
Caution:
This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Notice:
If p0311 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), then the maximum speed p1082, which is also associated with quick commissioning, is pre-assigned accordingly. This is not the case when commissioning the motor
(p0010 = 3).
r0313[0...n]
Motor pole pair number, actual (or calculated) / Mot PolePairNo act
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned16
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 5300
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the number of motor pole pairs. The value is used for internal calculations.
Values:
r0313 = 1: 2-pole motor
r0313 = 2: 4-pole motor
etc.
Dependency:
For p0314 > 0, the entered value is displayed in r0313.
For p0314 = 0, the pole pair number (r0313) is automatically calculated from the rated power (p0307), rated frequency (p0310) and rated speed (p0311).
Refer to: p0307, p0310, p0311, p0314
Note:
For the automatic calculation, the pole pair number is set to the value of 2 if the rated speed or the rated frequency
is zero.
p0314[0...n]
Motor pole pair number / Mot pole pair No.
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(1, 3)
0
Data type: Unsigned16
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
255
Factory setting
0
Sets the motor pole pair number.
Values:
p0314 = 1: 2-pole motor
p0314 = 2: 4-pole motor
etc.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-111
Parameter
List of parameters
Dependency:
For p0314 = 0, the pole pair number is automatically calculated from the rated frequency (p0310) and the rated
speed (p0311) and displayed in r0313.
Notice:
If p0314 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), then the maximum speed p1082, which is also associated with quick commissioning, is appropriately pre-assigned. This is not the case when commissioning the motor
(p0010 = 3).
For induction motors, the value need only be input if the rated data of a generator is entered therefore resulting in a
negative rated slip. In this case, the number of pole pairs in r0313 is too low by 1 and must be manually corrected.
p0316[0...n]
Motor torque constant / Mot kT
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(1, 3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 28_1
Unit selection: p0100
Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Nm/A]
Max
400.00 [Nm/A]
Factory setting
0.00 [Nm/A]
Sets the torque constant of the synchronous motor.
p0316 = 0: The torque constant is calculated from the motor data.
p0316 > 0: The selected value is used as torque constant.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0334
Caution:
This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Note:
This parameter is not used for induction motors (p0300 = 1xx).
p0318[0...n]
Motor stall current / Mot I_standstill
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3)
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 8017
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Arms]
Max
10000.00 [Arms]
Factory setting
0.00 [Arms]
Description:
Sets the stall current for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
Caution:
This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Note:
The parameter is used for the I2t monitoring of the motor (refer to p0611).
This parameter is not used for induction motors (p0300 = 1xx).
p0320[0...n]
Motor rated magnetizing current/short-circuit current / Mot I_mag_rated
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 5722
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL, FEM
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [Arms]
Max
5000.000 [Arms]
Factory setting
0.000 [Arms]
Induction motors:
Sets the rated motor magnetizing current.
For p0320 = 0.000 the magnetizing current is internally calculated and displayed in r0331.
Synchronous motors:
Sets the rated motor short-circuit current.
Caution:
1-112
This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
The magnetization current p0320 for induction motors (not for catalog motors) is reset when quick commissioning is
exited with p3900 > 0.
VECTOR: If, for induction motors, the magnetizing current p0320 is changed outside the commissioning phase
(p0010 > 0), then the magnetizing inductance p0360 is changed so that the EMF r0337 remains constant.
p0322[0...n]
Maximum motor speed / Mot n_max
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(1, 3)
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [rpm]
Max
210000.0 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.0 [rpm]
Description:
Sets the maximum motor speed.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1082
Caution:
This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Notice:
If p0322 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), then the maximum speed p1082, which is also associated with quick commissioning, is pre-assigned accordingly. This is not the case when commissioning the motor
(p0010 = 3).
p0323[0...n]
Maximum motor current / Mot I_max
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(1, 3)
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 5722
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, FEM
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Arms]
Max
20000.00 [Arms]
Factory setting
0.00 [Arms]
Description:
Sets the maximum permissible motor current (e.g. demagnetizing current for synchronous motors).
Caution:
This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Notice:
If p0323 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), then the maximum current p0640 is pre-assigned
accordingly. This is not the case when commissioning the motor (p0010 = 3).
Note:
This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301).
The parameter has no effect for induction motors.
The parameter has not effect for synchronous motors if a value of 0.0 is entered. The user-selectable current limit is
entered into p0640.
p0324[0...n]
Winding maximum speed / Winding n_max
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(1, 3)
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [rpm]
Max
210000.0 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.0 [rpm]
Description:
Sets the electrical maximum speed of the winding.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1082
Caution:
This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Notice:
If p0324 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), then the maximum speed p1082, which is also associated with quick commissioning, is pre-assigned appropriately. This is not the case when commissioning the motor
(p0010 = 3).
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-113
Parameter
List of parameters
p0325[0...n]
Motor pole position identification current, 1st phase / Mot PolID I 1st ph
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [Arms]
Max
10000.000 [Arms]
Factory setting
0.000 [Arms]
Sets the current for the 1st phase of the two-stage technique for pole position identification routine.
The current of the 2nd phase is set in p0329.
The two-stage technique is selected with p1980 = 4.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0329, p1980, p1982, r1984, r1985, r1987, p1990
Notice:
When the motor code (p0301) is changed, it is possible that p0325 is not pre-assigned.
p0325 can be pre-assigned using p0340 = 3.
Note:
The value is automatically pre-assigned for the following events:
- For p0325 = 0 and automatic calculation of the closed-loop control parameters (p0340 = 1, 2, 3).
- for quick commissioning (p3900 = 1, 2, 3).
p0327[0...n]
Optimum motor load angle / Mot phi_load opt
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 5722
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 []
Max
135.0 []
Factory setting
90.0 []
Sets the optimum load angle for synchronous motors with reluctance torque (e.g. 1FE ... motors).
This parameter has no significance for induction motors.
SERVO: The load angle is measured at 1.5 x rated motor current.
VECTOR: The load angle is measured at the rated motor current.
Caution:
This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301).
When selecting a catalog motor, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should
be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note:
For synchronous motors without reluctance torque, a angle of 90 degrees must be set.
When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (refer to p0300).
p0328[0...n]
Motor reluctance torque constant / Mot kT_reluctance
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-1000.00 [mH]
Max
1000.00 [mH]
Factory setting
0.00 [mH]
Sets the reluctance torque constant for synchronous motors with reluctance torque (e.g. 1FE ... motors).
This parameter has no significance for induction motors.
Caution:
This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Note:
For synchronous motors without reluctance torque, the value 0 must be set.
1-114
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p0329[0...n]
Motor pole position identification current / Mot PolID current
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Arms]
Max
10000.00 [Arms]
Factory setting
0.00 [Arms]
Sets the current for the pole position identification routine.
For a two-stage technique, the current is set for the second phase.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0325, p1980, p1982, r1984, r1985, r1987, p1990
Caution:
This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
r0330[0...n]
Rated motor slip / Mot slip_rated
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Hz]
Max
- [Hz]
Factory setting
- [Hz]
Description:
Displays the rated motor slip.
Dependency:
The rated slip is calculated from the rated frequency, rated speed and number of pole pairs.
Refer to: p0310, p0311, r0313
Note:
The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
r0331[0...n]
Actual motor magnetizing current/short-circuit current / Mot I_mag_rtd act
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 5722, 6722,
6724
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL, FEM
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Induction motor:
Displays the rated magnetizing current from p0320.
For p0320 = 0, the internally calculated magnetizing current is displayed.
Synchronous motor:
Displays the rated short-circuit current from p0320.
Dependency:
If p0320 was not entered, then the parameter is calculated from the rating plate parameters.
Note:
In the case of multi-motor operation r0331 is increased by the factor p0306 compared to p0320.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-115
Parameter
List of parameters
r0332[0...n]
Rated motor power factor / Mot cos_phi_rated
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the rated power factor for induction motors.
For IEC motors, the following applies (p0100 = 0):
For p0308 = 0, the internally-calculated power factor is displayed.
For p0308 > 0, this value is displayed.
For NEMA motors, the following applies (p0100 = 1):
For p0309 = 0, the internally-calculated power factor is displayed.
For p0309 > 0, this value is converted into the power factor and displayed.
Dependency:
If p0308 is not entered, the parameter is calculated from the rating plate parameters.
Note:
The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
r0333[0...n]
Rated motor torque / Mot M_rated
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 7_4
Unit selection: p0100
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Nm]
Max
- [Nm]
Factory setting
- [Nm]
Description:
Displays the rated motor torque.
Dependency:
IEC drives (p0100 = 0): unit Nm
NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): unit lbf ft
Note:
For induction and reluctance motors, r0333 is calculated from p0307 and p0311.
For synchronous motors, r0333 is calculated from p0305, p0316, p0327 and p0328. The result can deviate from the
input in p0312. If p0316 = 0, then r0333 = p0312 is displayed.
In the case of multi-motor operation r0333 is increased by the factor p0306 compared to the rated torque of an individual motor.
r0334[0...n]
Actual motor-torque constant / Mot kT act
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 28_1
Unit selection: p0100
Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Nm/A]
Max
- [Nm/A]
Factory setting
- [Nm/A]
Description:
Displays the torque constant of the synchronous motor used.
Dependency:
IEC drives (p0100 = 0): unit Nm / A
NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): unit lbf ft / A
Refer to: p0316
Note:
This parameter is not used for induction motors (p0300 = 1xx).
For synchronous motors, parameter r0334 = p0316 is displayed. When p0316 = 0, r0334 is calculated from p0305
and p0312 or p0305, p0307, and p0311.
1-116
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p0335[0...n]
Motor cooling type / Motor cooling type
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(1, 3), T
0
Data type: Integer16
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
128
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the motor cooling system used.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
4:
5:
6:
128:
Dependency:
For 1LA5 and 1LA7 motors (refer to p0300), the parameter is preset as a function of p0307 and p0311.
Caution:
This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Note:
The parameter influences the thermal 3-mass motor model.
Non-ventilated
Forced cooling
Liquid cooling
Non-ventilated and internal fan
Forced cooling and internal fan
Liquid cooling and internal fan
No fan
1LA1 and 1LA8 motors are characterized by the fact that they have an internal rotor fan. This "internal cooling" lies
within the motor frame and is not visible. Air is not directly exchanged with the motor ambient air. For 1PQ8 motors,
p0335 should be set to 5 as these motors are force-ventilated motors.
1LA7 motors, frame size 56 are operated without fan.
r0336[0...n]
Actual rated motor frequency / Mot f_rated act
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Hz]
Max
- [Hz]
Factory setting
- [Hz]
Displays the rated frequency of the motor.
For p0310 > 0, this value is displayed.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0311, p0314
Note:
For p0310 = 0 or for synchronous motors, the rated motor frequency r0336 is calculated from the rated speed and
the pole pair number.
For p0310 > 0, this value is displayed (not for synchronous motors).
r0337[0...n]
Rated motor EMF / Mot EMF_rated
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Vrms]
Max
- [Vrms]
Factory setting
- [Vrms]
Description:
Displays the rated EMF of the motor.
Note:
EMF: Electromagnetic force
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-117
Parameter
List of parameters
r0339[0...n]
Rated motor voltage / Mot V_rated
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Vrms]
Max
- [Vrms]
Factory setting
- [Vrms]
Description:
Displays the rated motor voltage
Note:
For induction motors (p0300 = 1xx) the parameter is set to p0304.
For synchronous motors, parameter r0339 = p0304 is displayed. If p0304 = 0, then r0339 is calculated from p0305
and p0316.
p0340[0...n]
Automatic calculation, motor/control parameters / Calc auto par
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), T
0
Data type: Integer16
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
5
Factory setting
0
Description:
Setting to automatically calculate motor parameters and V/f open-loop and closed-loop control parameters from the
rating plate data.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
Notice:
After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in
r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
No calculation
Complete calculation
Calculation of equivalent circuit diagram parameters
Calculation of closed-loop control parameters
Calculation of controller parameters
Calculation of technological limits and threshold values
The following parameters are influenced using p0340:
The parameters designated with (*) are not overwritten for catalog motors (p0300 > 100).
SERVO:
p0340 = 1:
--> All of the parameters influenced for p0340 = 2, 3, 4, 5
--> p0341 (*)
--> p0342, p0344, p0600, p0640, p1082, p2000, p2001, p2002, p2003, p2005, p2007
p0340 = 2:
--> p0350 (*), p0354 (*), p0356 (*), p0358 (*), p0360 (*)
--> p0625 (matching p0350)
p0340 = 3:
--> All of the parameters influenced for p0340 = 4, 5
--> p0325 (is only calculated for p0325 = 0)
--> p0348 (*) (is only calculated for p0348 = 0)
--> p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445 (only for 1FT6, 1FK6, 1FK7 motors)
--> p0492, p1082, p1980, p1319, p1326, p1327, p1612, p1752, p1755
p0340 = 4:
--> p1441, p1460, p1462, p1463, p1464, p1465, p1470, p1472, p1590, p1592, p1596, p1656, p1657, p1658,
p1659, p1715, p1717
--> p1461 (for p0348 > p0322, p1461 is set to 100 %)
--> p1463 (for p0348 > p0322, p1463 is set to 400 %)
p0340 = 5:
--> p1037, p1038, p1520, p1521, p1530, p1531, p2140 ... p2142, p2148, p2150, p2155, p2161, p2162, p2163,
p2164, p2175, p2177, p2194, p3820 ... p3829
1-118
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
VECTOR:
p0340 = 1:
--> All of the parameters influenced for p0340 = 2, 3, 4, 5
--> p0341 (*)
--> p0342, p0344, p0600, p0640, p1082, p1231, p1232, p1333, p1349, p1441, p1442, p1576, p1577, p1609,
p1619, p1620, p1621, p1654, p1726, p1825, p1828 ... p1832, p1909, p1959, p2000, p2001, p2002, p2003, p2005,
p2007, p3927, p3928
p0340 = 2:
--> p0350 (*), p0354 ... p0361 (*), p0652 ... p0660
--> p0625 (matching p0350)
p0340 = 3:
--> All of the parameters influenced for p0340 = 4, 5
--> p0346, p0347, p0492, p0622, p1262, p1320 ... p1327, p1582, p1584, p1612, p1616, p1744, p1748, p1749,
p1755, p1756, p2178
p0340 = 4:
--> p1290, p1292, p1293, p1299, p1338, p1339, p1340, p1341, p1345, p1346, p1460, p1461, p1462, p1463,
p1464, p1465, p1470, p1472, p1590, p1592, p1600, p1628, p1629, p1630, p1643, p1703, p1715, p1717, p1740,
p1756, p1757, p1760, p1761, p1764, p1767, p1781, p1783, p1785, p1786, p1795, p7036, p7037, p7038
p0340 = 5:
--> p260 ... p264, p1037, p1038, p1520, p1521, p1530, p1531, p1574, p1750, p1802, p1803, p2140, p2142, p2148,
p2150, p2161, p2162, p2163, p2164, p2175, p2177, p2194, p3207, p3208, p3815, p3820 ... p3829
Note:
p0340 = 1 contains the calculations of p0340 = 2, 3, 4, 5 without overwriting the motor parameters from the Siemens motor lists (p0301 > 0).
p0340 = 2 calculates the motor parameters (p0350 ... p0360), but only if it does involve a Siemens catalog motor
(p0301 = 0).
p0340 = 3 contains the calculations of p0340 = 4, 5.
p0340 = 4 only calculates the controller parameters.
p0340 = 5 only calculates the controller limits.
When quick commissioning is exited using p3900 > 0, p0340 is automatically set to 1.
At the end of the calculations, p0340 is automatically set to 0.
If the STARTER commissioning software writes a 3 into p0340 when "downloading to target device", then this corresponds to a "complete calculation of the motor/control parameters without equivalent circuit diagram data". The
same calculations are carried out as for p0340 = 1, however, without the equivalent circuit diagram parameters of
the motor (p0340 = 2), the motor moment of inertia (p0341) and the motor weight (p0344).
For third-party linear synchronous motors (p0300 = 4) equivalent circuit diagram data are not calculated (p0340 =
2).
p0341[0...n]
Motor moment of inertia / Mot M_mom of inert
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 1700, 5042,
5210, 6030, 6031
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 25_1
Unit selection: p0100
Not for motor type: REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000000 [kgm]
Max
100000.000000 [kgm]
Factory setting
0.000000 [kgm]
Description:
Sets the motor moment of inertia (without load).
Dependency:
IEC drives (p0100 = 0): unit kg m^2
NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): unit lb ft^2
The parameter value is included, together with p0342, in the rated starting time of the motor.
Refer to: p0342, r0345
Caution:
This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-119
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
SERVO:
p0341 * p0342 + p1498 influence the speed/torque pre-control in encoderless operation.
VECTOR:
The product of p0341 * p0342 is used when the speed controller (p0340 = 4) is calculated automatically.
p0342[0...n]
Ratio between the total and motor moment of inertia / Mot MomInert Ratio
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 1700, 5042,
5210, 6030, 6031
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1.000
Max
10000.000
Factory setting
1.000
Description:
Sets the ratio between the total moment of inertia/mass (load + motor) and the intrinsic motor moment of inertia/mass (no load).
Dependency:
This means that together with p0341, the rated starting (accelerating time) of the motor is calculated for a vector
drive.
Refer to: p0341, r0345
Note:
SERVO:
p0341 * p0342 + p1498 influence the speed/torque pre-control in encoderless operation.
VECTOR:
The product of p0341 * p0342 is used when the speed controller (p0340 = 4) is calculated automatically.
r0343[0...n]
Identified motor rated current / Mot I_rated ident
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Arms]
Max
10000.00 [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Description:
Identified motor rated current
p0344[0...n]
Motor weight (for the thermal motor model) / Mot weight th mod
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 27_1
Unit selection: p0100
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [kg]
Max
50000.0 [kg]
Factory setting
0.0 [kg]
Description:
Sets the motor weight.
Dependency:
IEC drives (p0100 = 0): unit kg
NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): unit lb
Caution:
This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301).
When selecting a catalog motor, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should
be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note:
The parameter influences the thermal 3 mass model of the induction motor.
The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
1-120
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
r0345[0...n]
Nominal motor starting time / Mot t_start_rated
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [s]
Max
- [s]
Factory setting
- [s]
Description:
Displays the rated motor starting time. This time corresponds to the time from standstill up to reaching the motor
rated speed and the acceleration with motor rated torque (r0333).
Dependency:
Refer to: r0313, r0333, r0336, p0341, p0342
p0346[0...n]
Motor excitation build-up time / Mot t_excitation
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
20.000 [s]
Factory setting
0.000 [s]
Sets the excitation build-up time of the motor.
This involves the delay time between enabling the pulses and enabling the ramp-function generator. The induction
motor is magnetized during this time.
Caution:
If there is insufficient magnetization under load or if the acceleration rate is too high, then an induction motor can
stall (refer to the note). This is especially true for encoderless vector control or V/f control.
Notice:
If the parameter is set to 0 s for separately-excited synchronous motors (p0300 = 5), then an excitation current setpoint is generated even if the drive is powered down. In the base speed range, this is the no-load excitation current
(p0389). In the field-weakening range, the value is reduced with the inverse value of the actual speed. An excitation
current setpoint is not generated during demagnetizing (p0347) and if an encoder fault is detected.
Note:
The parameter is calculated using p0340 = 1, 3.
For induction motors, the result depends on the rotor time constant (r0384). If this time is excessively reduced, this
can result in an inadequate magnetizing of the induction motor. This is the case if the current limit is reached while
building up magnetizing. For induction motors, the parameter cannot be set to 0 s (internal limit: 0.1 * r0384).
For permanent-magnet synchronous motors and vector control, the value depends on the stator time constant
(r0386). Here, it defines the time to establish the current for encoderless operation immediately after the pulses
have been enabled.
p0347[0...n]
Motor de-excitation time / Mot t_de-excitat.
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
20.000 [s]
Factory setting
0.000 [s]
Sets the demagnetizing time (for induction motors) after the inverter pulses have been canceled.
The inverter pulses cannot be switched in (enabled) within this delay time.
Note:
The parameter is calculated using p0340 = 1, 3.
For induction motors, the result depends on the rotor time constant (r0384).
if this time is shortened too much, then this can result in an inadequate demagnetizing of the induction motor and in
an overcurrent condition when the pulses are subsequently enabled (only when the flying restart function is activated and the motor is rotating).
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-121
Parameter
List of parameters
p0349
System of units, motor equivalent circuit diagram data / Unit_sys mot ESB
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3)
0
Data type: Integer16
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
2
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the actual system of units for motor equivalent circuit diagram data.
Value:
1:
2:
Dependency:
Refer to: p0304, p0305, p0310
Note:
The reference parameter for resistances of the rated motor impedance Z = p0304 / (1.732 * p0305) is in the % units
system.
System of units, physical
System of units, referred
Inductances are converted into a resistance using the factor 2 * Pi * p0310.
If a reference parameter (p0304, p305, p0310) is zero, then it is not possible to make a changeover to "referred"
values (per unit values).
p0350[0...n]
Motor stator resistance, cold / Mot R_stator cold
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 16_1
Unit selection: p0349
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00000 [Ohm]
Max
2000.00000 [Ohm]
Factory setting
0.00000 [Ohm]
Description:
Sets the stator resistance of the motor at ambient temperature p0625.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0625, r1912
Caution:
This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Note:
The motor identification routine determines the stator resistance from the total stator resistance minus the cable
resistance (p0352).
p0352[0...n]
Cable resistance / Mot R_cable cold
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 16_1
Unit selection: p0349
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00000 [Ohm]
Max
120.00000 [Ohm]
Factory setting
0.00000 [Ohm]
Description:
Resistance of the power cable between the Motor Module and motor.
Dependency:
Caution:
Refer to: p7003
The cable resistance should be entered prior to motor data identification. If it is used subsequently, the difference
by which p0352 was changed must be subtracted from the stator resistance p0350 or motor data identification must
be repeated.
Notice:
Parallel circuits with one winding system (p7003 = 0):
p0352 includes the feeder cable resistance of an individual Motor Module. The total feeder cable resistance is
obtained from p0352 divided by the number of activated Motor Modules (refer to r0395).
Parallel circuits with multi-winding system (p7003 = 1):
p0352 includes the complete feeder cable resistance and is directly added to the stator resistance (refer to r0395).
1-122
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
The parameter influences the temperature adaptation of the stator resistance.
The motor identification sets the cable resistance to 20% of the measured total resistance if p0352 is zero at the
time that the measurement is made. If p0352 is not zero, then the value is subtracted from the measured total stator
resistance to calculate stator resistance p0350. In this case, p0350 is a minimum of 10% of the measured value.
Exception:
For parallel circuit configurations with one winding system (p07003 = 0), the cable resistance is directly measured.
It is important to note that only the component of an individual Motor Module is entered into p0352.
The cable resistance is reset when quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0.
p0353[0...n]
Motor series inductance / Mot L_series
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 15_1
Unit selection: p0349
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [mH]
Max
1000000.000 [mH]
Factory setting
0.000 [mH]
Description:
Sets the series inductance.
Note:
For the automatic calculation with p0340 = 1, 3 or 4, the calculation of p1715 is influenced by p0353.
The series inductance is reset when quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0.
p0354[0...n]
Motor rotor resistance cold / damping resistance d axis / Mot R_r cold / RDd
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 16_1
Unit selection: p0349
Not for motor type: PEM, REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00000 [Ohm]
Max
300.00000 [Ohm]
Factory setting
0.00000 [Ohm]
Sets the rotor/secondary section resistance of the motor at the ambient temperature p0625.
For separately-excited synchronous motors: Sets the damping resistance in the rotor direction (d-axis).
This parameter value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2) or using the motor identification routine (p1910) (not for separately-excited synchronous motors).
Dependency:
Refer to: p0625
Caution:
This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Note:
The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
p0355[0...n]
Motor damping resistance, q axis / Mot R_damp q
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 16_1
Unit selection: p0349
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00000 [Ohm]
Max
300.00000 [Ohm]
Factory setting
0.00000 [Ohm]
Sets the damping resistance of the separately-excited synchronous motor quadrature to the rotor direction (q axis).
This parameter value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2).
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-123
Parameter
List of parameters
p0356[0...n]
Motor stator leakage inductance / Mot L_stator leak.
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 15_1
Unit selection: p0349
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00000 [mH]
Max
1000.00000 [mH]
Factory setting
0.00000 [mH]
Induction motor, separately-excited synchronous motor: Sets the rotor leakage inductance of the motor.
Synchronous motor: Sets the stator quadrature axis inductance of the motor.
This parameter value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2) or using the motor identification routine (p1910).
Caution:
This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Note:
This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301).
If the stator leakage inductance (p0356) for induction motors is changed outside the commissioning phase (p0010 >
0), the magnetizing inductance (p0360) is automatically adapted to the new EMF (r0337). You are then advised to
repeat the measurement for the saturation characteristic (p1960).
For permanent-magnet synchronous motors (p0300 = 2), this is the non-saturated value and is, therefore, ideal for
a low current.
p0357[0...n]
Motor stator inductance, d axis / Mot L_stator d
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 15_1
Unit selection: p0349
Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00000 [mH]
Max
1000.00000 [mH]
Factory setting
0.00000 [mH]
Sets the stator direct-axis inductance of the synchronous motor.
This parameter value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2) or using the motor identification routine (p1910).
Note:
The parameter is not used for separately-excited synchronous motors (p0300 = 5).
For permanent-magnet synchronous motors (p0300 = 2), this is the non-saturated value and is ideal for a low current.
p0358[0...n]
Motor rotor leakage inductance / damping inductance, d axis / Mot L_r leak / LDd
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 15_1
Unit selection: p0349
Not for motor type: PEM, REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00000 [mH]
Max
1000.00000 [mH]
Factory setting
0.00000 [mH]
Sets the rotor/secondary section leakage inductance of the motor.
For separately-excited synchronous motors: Sets the damping inductance in the rotor direction (d-axis).
This value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2) or using the motor identification routine
(p1910) (not for separately-excited synchronous motors).
Caution:
1-124
This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
VECTOR:
If the rotor leakage inductance (p0358) for induction motors is changed outside the commissioning phase (p0010 >
0), then the magnetizing inductance (p0360) is automatically adapted to the new EMF (r0337). You are then
advised to repeat the measurement for the saturation characteristic (p1960).
p0359[0...n]
Motor damping inductance, q axis / Mot L_damp q
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 15_1
Unit selection: p0349
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00000 [mH]
Max
1000.00000 [mH]
Factory setting
0.00000 [mH]
Sets the damping inductance of the separately-excited synchronous motor quadrature to the rotor direction (q axis).
This parameter value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2).
p0360[0...n]
Motor magnetizing inductance/magn. inductance, d axis saturated / Mot Lh/Lh d sat
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 15_1
Unit selection: p0349
Not for motor type: PEM, REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00000 [mH]
Max
10000.00000 [mH]
Factory setting
0.00000 [mH]
Sets the magnetizing inductance of the motor.
For separately-excited synchronous motors: Sets the saturated magnetizing inductance in the rotor direction (daxis).
This parameter value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2) or using the motor identification routine (p1910) (not for separately-excited synchronous motors).
Caution:
This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Note:
The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
p0361[0...n]
Motor magnetizing inductance q axis, saturated / Mot L_magn q sat
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 15_1
Unit selection: p0349
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00000 [mH]
Max
10000.00000 [mH]
Factory setting
0.00000 [mH]
Sets the saturated magnetizing inductance of the separately-excited synchronous motor quadrature to the rotor
direction (q axis).
This parameter value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2).
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-125
Parameter
List of parameters
p0362[0...n]
Saturation characteristic flux 1 / Mot saturat.flux 1
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
10.0 [%]
Max
300.0 [%]
Factory setting
60.0 [%]
The saturation characteristic (flux as mapping of current) is defined using 4 points.
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (flux) for the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Induction motors (ASM) and separately-excited synchronous motors (SESM):
The saturation characteristic describes the mapping of the magnetizing current onto the motor flux.
The parameter sets the first motor flux as a [%] referred to the rated motor flux.
Permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM):
The saturation characteristic describes the mapping of the stator quadrature axis current onto the stator quadrature
axis flux.
The parameter sets the first stator quadrature axis flux as a [%] referred to the product of the unsaturated quadrature inductance (p0356) and the rated motor current.
Dependency:
The following applies for the flux values:
p0362 < p0363 < p0364 < p0365
The following applies for the stator quadrature axis flux values (PESM):
20% < p0362 < p0363 < p0364 < p0365
Refer to: p0366
Caution:
For permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM):
If the parameters are not set as specified, i.e. not in ascending order and to more than 20%, the unsaturated
quadrature inductance (p0356) is always used for quadrature axis flux calculation purposes.
Note:
For induction motors, p0362 = 100 % corresponds to the rated motor flux.
For separately-excited synchronous motors p0362 = 100% corresponds to an induced terminal voltage with the
magnitude of the rated motor voltage (under no-load conditions at the synchronous speed).
With permanent-magnet synchronous motors, p0362 = 100% corresponds to the product of the unsaturated
quadrature inductance (p0356) and the rated motor current (p0305).
When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (refer to p0300).
p0363[0...n]
Saturation characteristic flux 2 / Mot saturat.flux 2
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
10.0 [%]
Max
300.0 [%]
Factory setting
85.0 [%]
The saturation characteristic (flux as mapping of current) is defined using 4 points.
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (flux) for the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Induction motors (ASM) and separately-excited synchronous motors (SESM):
The saturation characteristic describes the mapping of the magnetizing current onto the motor flux.
The parameter sets the second motor flux as a [%] referred to the rated motor flux.
Permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM):
The saturation characteristic describes the mapping of the stator quadrature axis current onto the stator quadrature
axis flux.
The parameter sets the second stator quadrature axis flux as a [%] referred to the product of the unsaturated
quadrature inductance (p0356) and the rated motor current.
1-126
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
Dependency:
The following applies for the flux values:
p0362 < p0363 < p0364 < p0365
The following applies for the stator quadrature axis flux values (PESM):
20% < p0362 < p0363 < p0364 < p0365
Refer to: p0367
Caution:
For permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM):
If the parameters are not set as specified, i.e. not in ascending order and to more than 20%, the unsaturated
quadrature inductance (p0356) is always used for quadrature axis flux calculation purposes.
Note:
For induction motors, p0363 = 100 % corresponds to the rated motor flux.
For separately-excited synchronous motors p0363 = 100% corresponds to an induced terminal voltage with the
magnitude of the rated motor voltage (under no-load conditions at the synchronous speed).
With permanent-magnet synchronous motors, p0362 = 100% corresponds to the product of the unsaturated
quadrature inductance (p0356) and the rated motor current (p0305).
When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (refer to p0300).
p0364[0...n]
Saturation characteristic flux 3 / Mot saturat.flux 3
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
10.0 [%]
Max
300.0 [%]
Factory setting
115.0 [%]
The saturation characteristic (flux as mapping of current) is defined using 4 points.
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (flux) for the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Induction motors (ASM) and separately-excited synchronous motors (SESM):
The saturation characteristic describes the mapping of the magnetizing current onto the motor flux.
The parameter sets the third motor flux as a [%] referred to the rated motor flux.
Permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM):
The saturation characteristic describes the mapping of the stator quadrature axis current onto the stator quadrature
axis flux.
The parameter sets the third stator quadrature axis flux as a [%] referred to the product of the unsaturated quadrature inductance (p0356) and the rated motor current.
Dependency:
The following applies for the flux values:
p0362 < p0363 < p0364 < p0365
The following applies for the stator quadrature axis flux values (PESM):
20% < p0362 < p0363 < p0364 < p0365
Refer to: p0368
Caution:
For permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM):
If the parameters are not set as specified, i.e. not in ascending order and to more than 20%, the unsaturated
quadrature inductance (p0356) is always used for quadrature axis flux calculation purposes.
Note:
For induction motors, p0364 = 100 % corresponds to the rated motor flux.
For separately-excited synchronous motors p0364 = 100% corresponds to an induced terminal voltage with the
magnitude of the rated motor voltage (under no-load conditions at the synchronous speed).
With permanent-magnet synchronous motors, p0362 = 100% corresponds to the product of the unsaturated
quadrature inductance (p0356) and the rated motor current (p0305).
When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (refer to p0300).
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-127
Parameter
List of parameters
p0365[0...n]
Saturation characteristic flux 4 / Mot saturat.flux 4
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
10.0 [%]
Max
300.0 [%]
Factory setting
125.0 [%]
The saturation characteristic (flux as mapping of current) is defined using 4 points.
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (flux) for the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Induction motors (ASM) and separately-excited synchronous motors (SESM):
The saturation characteristic describes the mapping of the magnetizing current onto the motor flux.
The parameter sets the fourth motor flux as a [%] referred to the rated motor flux.
Permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM):
The saturation characteristic describes the mapping of the stator quadrature axis current onto the stator quadrature
axis flux.
The parameter sets the fourth stator quadrature axis flux as a [%] referred to the product of the unsaturated quadrature inductance (p0356) and the rated motor current.
Dependency:
The following applies for the flux values:
p0362 < p0363 < p0364 < p0365
The following applies for the stator quadrature axis flux values (PESM):
20% < p0362 < p0363 < p0364 < p0365
Refer to: p0369
Caution:
For permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM):
If the parameters are not set as specified, i.e. not in ascending order and to more than 20%, the unsaturated
quadrature inductance (p0356) is always used for quadrature axis flux calculation purposes.
Note:
For induction motors, p0365 = 100 % corresponds to the rated motor flux.
For separately-excited synchronous motors p0365 = 100% corresponds to an induced terminal voltage with the
magnitude of the rated motor voltage (under no-load conditions at the synchronous speed).
With permanent-magnet synchronous motors, p0362 = 100% corresponds to the product of the unsaturated
quadrature inductance (p0356) and the rated motor current (p0305).
When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (refer to p0300).
p0366[0...n]
Saturation characteristic I_mag 1 / Mot sat. I_mag 1
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
5.0 [%]
Max
800.0 [%]
Factory setting
50.0 [%]
The saturation characteristic (flux as mapping of current) is defined using 4 points.
This parameter specifies the x coordinate for the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Induction motors (ASM) and separately-excited synchronous motors (SESM):
The saturation characteristic describes the mapping of the magnetizing current onto the motor flux.
The parameter sets the first magnetizing current as a [%] referred to the rated magnetizing current r0331 (ASM),
which in turn is referred to the no-load excitation current (SESM).
Permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM):
The saturation characteristic describes the mapping of the stator quadrature axis current onto the stator quadrature
axis flux.
The parameter sets the first stator quadrature axis current as a [%] referred to the rated motor current (p0305).
1-128
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
Dependency:
The following applies for the magnetizing currents:
p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369
The following applies for the stator quadrature axis current values (PESM):
20% < p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369
Refer to: p0362
Caution:
For permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM):
If the parameters are not set as specified, i.e. not in ascending order and to more than 20%, the unsaturated
quadrature inductance (p0356) is always used for quadrature axis flux calculation purposes.
Note:
When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (refer to p0300).
p0367[0...n]
Saturation characteristic I_mag 2 / Mot sat. I_mag 2
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
5.0 [%]
Max
800.0 [%]
Factory setting
75.0 [%]
The saturation characteristic (flux as mapping of current) is defined using 4 points.
This parameter specifies the x coordinate for the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Induction motors (ASM) and separately-excited synchronous motors (SESM):
The saturation characteristic describes the mapping of the magnetizing current onto the motor flux.
The parameter sets the second magnetizing current as a [%] referred to the rated magnetizing current r0331
(ASM), which in turn is referred to the no-load excitation current (SESM).
Permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM):
The saturation characteristic describes the mapping of the stator quadrature axis current onto the stator quadrature
axis flux.
The parameter sets the second stator quadrature axis current as a [%] referred to the rated motor current (p0305).
Dependency:
The following applies for the magnetizing currents:
p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369
The following applies for the stator quadrature axis current values (PESM):
20% < p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369
Refer to: p0363
Caution:
For permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM):
If the parameters are not set as specified, i.e. not in ascending order and to more than 20%, the unsaturated
quadrature inductance (p0356) is always used for quadrature axis flux calculation purposes.
Note:
When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (refer to p0300).
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-129
Parameter
List of parameters
p0368[0...n]
Saturation characteristic I_mag 3 / Mot sat. I_mag 3
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
5.0 [%]
Max
800.0 [%]
Factory setting
150.0 [%]
The saturation characteristic (flux as mapping of current) is defined using 4 points.
This parameter specifies the x coordinate for the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Induction motors (ASM) and separately-excited synchronous motors (SESM):
The saturation characteristic describes the mapping of the magnetizing current onto the motor flux.
The parameter sets the third magnetizing current as a [%] referred to the rated magnetizing current r0331 (ASM),
which in turn is referred to the no-load excitation current (SESM).
Permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM):
The saturation characteristic describes the mapping of the stator quadrature axis current onto the stator quadrature
axis flux.
The parameter sets the third stator quadrature axis current as a [%] referred to the rated motor current (p0305).
Dependency:
The following applies for the magnetizing currents:
p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369
The following applies for the stator quadrature axis current values (PESM):
20% < p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369
Refer to: p0364
Caution:
For permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM):
If the parameters are not set as specified, i.e. not in ascending order and to more than 20%, the unsaturated
quadrature inductance (p0356) is always used for quadrature axis flux calculation purposes.
Note:
When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (refer to p0300).
p0369[0...n]
Saturation characteristic I_mag 4 / Mot sat. I_mag 4
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
5.0 [%]
Max
800.0 [%]
Factory setting
210.0 [%]
The saturation characteristic (flux as mapping of current) is defined using 4 points.
This parameter specifies the x coordinate for the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Induction motors (ASM) and separately-excited synchronous motors (SESM):
The saturation characteristic describes the mapping of the magnetizing current onto the motor flux.
The parameter sets the fourth magnetizing current as a [%] referred to the rated magnetizing current r0331 (ASM),
which in turn is referred to the no-load excitation current (SESM).
Permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM):
The saturation characteristic describes the mapping of the stator quadrature axis current onto the stator quadrature
axis flux.
The parameter sets the fourth stator quadrature axis current as a [%] referred to the rated motor current (p0305).
Dependency:
The following applies for the magnetizing currents:
p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369
The following applies for the stator quadrature axis current values (PESM):
20% < p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369
Refer to: p0365
1-130
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
Caution:
For permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM):
If the parameters are not set as specified, i.e. not in ascending order and to more than 20%, the unsaturated
quadrature inductance (p0356) is always used for quadrature axis flux calculation purposes.
Note:
When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (refer to p0300).
r0370[0...n]
Motor stator resistance, cold / Mot R_stator cold
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 16_1
Unit selection: p0349
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Ohm]
Max
- [Ohm]
Factory setting
- [Ohm]
Description:
Displays the motor stator resistance at an ambient temperature p0625. The value does not include the cable resistance.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0625
r0372[0...n]
Cable resistance / Mot R_cable
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 16_1
Unit selection: p0349
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Ohm]
Max
- [Ohm]
Factory setting
- [Ohm]
Description:
Displays the total cable resistance between Motor Module and motor, as well as the internal converter resistance.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0238, p0352
r0373[0...n]
Motor rated stator resistance / Mot R_stator rated
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 16_1
Unit selection: p0349
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Ohm]
Max
- [Ohm]
Factory setting
- [Ohm]
Description:
Displays the rated motor stator resistance at rated temperature (total of p0625 and p0627).
Dependency:
Refer to: p0627
Note:
The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
r0374[0...n]
Motor rotor resistance cold / damping resistance d axis / Mot R_r cold / RDd
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 16_1
Unit selection: p0349
Not for motor type: PEM, REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Ohm]
Max
- [Ohm]
Factory setting
- [Ohm]
Displays the rotor/secondary section resistance of the motor for the ambient temperature p0625.
For separately-excited synchronous motors: Displays the damping resistance in the rotor direction (d-axis).
Dependency:
Refer to: p0625
Note:
The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-131
Parameter
List of parameters
r0375[0...n]
Motor damping resistance, q axis / Mot R_damp q
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 16_1
Unit selection: p0349
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Ohm]
Max
- [Ohm]
Factory setting
- [Ohm]
Description:
Displays the damping resistance of the separately-excited synchronous motor quadrature to the rotor direction (q
axis).
r0376[0...n]
Rated motor rotor resistance / Mot R_rotor rated
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 16_1
Unit selection: p0349
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Ohm]
Max
- [Ohm]
Factory setting
- [Ohm]
Description:
Displays the rated (nominal) rotor/secondary section resistance of the motor at the rated temperature (total of
p0625 and p0628).
Dependency:
Refer to: p0628
Note:
The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
r0377[0...n]
Motor leakage inductance, total / Mot L_leak total
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 6640
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 15_1
Unit selection: p0349
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [mH]
Max
- [mH]
Factory setting
- [mH]
Induction motor, separately-excited synchronous motor:
Displays the stator leakage inductance of the motor, including the series inductance (p0353) and the motor reactor
(p0233).
Synchronous motor:
Displays the stator quadrature inductance, including the series inductance (p0353) and the motor reactor (p0233).
r0378[0...n]
Motor stator inductance, d axis / Mot L_stator_d
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 15_1
Unit selection: p0349
Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [mH]
Max
- [mH]
Factory setting
- [mH]
Description:
Displays the stator longitudinal inductance of the synchronous motor including the series inductance (p0353) and
the motor reactor (p0233).
Note:
The parameter is not used for separately-excited synchronous motors (p0300 = 5).
1-132
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
r0380[0...n]
Motor damping inductance, d axis / Mot L_damping_d
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 15_1
Unit selection: p0349
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [mH]
Max
- [mH]
Factory setting
- [mH]
Description:
Displays the damping inductance of the separately-excited synchronous motor in the rotor direction (d-axis).
r0381[0...n]
Motor damping inductance, q axis / Mot L_damping_q
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 15_1
Unit selection: p0349
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [mH]
Max
- [mH]
Factory setting
- [mH]
Description:
Displays the damping inductance of a separately-excited synchronous motor quadrature to the rotor direction (q
axis).
r0382[0...n]
Motor magnetizing inductance transformed / Lh d axis saturated / Mot L_m tr/Lhd sat
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 15_1
Unit selection: p0349
Not for motor type: PEM, REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [mH]
Max
- [mH]
Factory setting
- [mH]
Displays the magnetizing inductance of the motor.
For separately-excited synchronous motors: Displays the saturated magnetizing inductance in the rotor direction (daxis).
Note:
The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
r0383[0...n]
Motor magnetizing inductance q axis, saturated / Mot L_magn q sat
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 15_1
Unit selection: p0349
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [mH]
Max
- [mH]
Factory setting
- [mH]
Description:
Displays the saturated magnetizing inductance of a separately-excited synchronous motor quadrature to the rotor
direction (q axis).
r0384[0...n]
Motor rotor time constant / damping time constant d axis / Mot T_rotor/T_Dd
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 6722
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [ms]
Max
- [ms]
Factory setting
- [ms]
Displays the rotor time constant.
For separately-excited synchronous motors: Displays the damping time constant in the rotor direction (d-axis).
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-133
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
The parameter is not used for synchronous motors.
The value is calculated from the total of the inductances on the rotor side (p0358, p0360) divided by the rotor/damping resistance (p0354). The temperature adaptation of the rotor resistance for induction motors is not taken into
account.
r0385[0...n]
Motor damping time constant, q axis / Mot T_Dq
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [ms]
Max
- [ms]
Factory setting
- [ms]
Description:
Displays the damping time constant of a separately-excited synchronous motor quadrature to the rotor direction (q
axis).
Note:
The value is calculated from the total of the inductances on the damping side (p0359, p0361) divided by the damping resistance (p0355).
r0386[0...n]
Motor stator leakage time constant / Mot T_stator leak
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [ms]
Max
- [ms]
Factory setting
- [ms]
Description:
Displays the stator leakage time constant.
Note:
The value is calculated from the total of all leakage inductances (p0233*, p0353, p0356, p0358) divided by the total
of all motor resistances (p0350, p0352, p0354). The temperature adaptation of the resistances is not taken into
account.
* only applies for VECTOR (r0107).
r0387[0...n]
Motor stator leakage time constant, q axis / Mot T_Sleak /T_Sq
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [ms]
Max
- [ms]
Factory setting
- [ms]
Description:
Displays the stator leakage time constant quadrature to the rotor direction (q axis).
Note:
The value is calculated from the total of all leakage inductances (p0233, p0356, p0359) divided by the total of all
motor resistances (p0350, p0352, p0355).
The temperature adaptation of the resistances is not taken into account.
p0389[0...n]
Excitation rated no-load current / Exc I_noload_rated
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(1, 3)
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
1-134
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 6727
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [A]
Max
10000.00 [A]
Factory setting
0.00 [A]
Sets the rated no-load current (I_F0) for the excitation.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p0390[0...n]
Rated excitation current / Exc I_rated
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(1, 3)
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 6727
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [A]
Max
10000.00 [A]
Factory setting
0.00 [A]
Description:
Setting the rated current (I_F) of the controlled excitation rectifier (DC master).
p0391[0...n]
Current controller adaptation, starting point KP / I_adapt pt KP
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 6714
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Arms]
Max
6000.00 [Arms]
Factory setting
0.00 [Arms]
Description:
Sets the starting point of the current-dependent current controller adaptation where the current controller gain
p1715 is effective.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0392, p0393, p1402, p1715
Caution:
This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Note:
When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (refer to p0300).
p0392[0...n]
Current controller adaptation, starting point KP adapted / I_adapt pt KP adap
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 6714
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Arms]
Max
6000.00 [Arms]
Factory setting
0.00 [Arms]
Description:
Sets the starting point of the current-dependent current controller adaptation where the adapted current controller
gain p1715 * p0393 is effective.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0391, p0393, p1402, p1715
Caution:
This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Note:
When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (refer to p0300).
p0393[0...n]
Current controller adaptation P gain scaling / I_adapt Kp scal
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 6714
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [%]
Max
1000.00 [%]
Factory setting
100.00 [%]
Sets the factor for the current controller P gain in the adaptation range (e.g. r0078 > p0392, if p0392 > p0391).
The value is referred to p1715.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0391, p0392, p1402, p1715
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-135
Parameter
List of parameters
Caution:
This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Note:
For p0393 = 100 % or p1402 bit 2 = 0, the current controller adaptation is disabled and p1715 is effective over the
entire range.
When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (refer to p0300).
r0395[0...n]
Actual stator resistance / R_stator act
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 6300, 6730,
6731, 6732
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 16_1
Unit selection: p0349
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Ohm]
Max
- [Ohm]
Factory setting
- [Ohm]
Description:
Displays the actual stator resistance (phase value).
Dependency:
In the case of induction motors the parameter is also affected by the motor temperature model.
The parameter value also contains the temperature-independent cable resistance.
Refer to: p0350, p0352, p0620
Note:
In each case, only the stator resistance of the active Motor Data Set is included with the stator temperature of the
thermal motor model.
r0396[0...n]
Actual rotor resistance / R_rotor act
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 6730
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 16_1
Unit selection: p0349
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Ohm]
Max
- [Ohm]
Factory setting
- [Ohm]
Displays the actual rotor/secondary section resistance (phase value).
The parameter is affected by the motor temperature model.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0354, p0620
Note:
In each case, only the rotor resistance of the active Motor Data Set is included with the rotor temperature of the
thermal motor model.
This parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
p0398[0...n]
Angle magnet. decoupling (cross saturation) coeff 1 / Magn decoupl C1
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, FEM
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-10.000000
Max
10.000000
Factory setting
0.000000
The magnetic cross coupling of the motor's d and q axes caused by saturation (current-dependent) leads to an
angle offset affecting the axis system d'q'; this decouples the magnetic quantities.
The angle offset can be described as a third-order polynomial function of the load current consumed:
phiOffset = f(C1*iq + C3*iq^3)
This parameter is the coefficient C1; it describes the linear load impact effect.
1-136
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p0399[0...n]
Angle magnet. decoupling (cross saturation) coeff 3 / Magn decoupl C3
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, FEM
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-10.000000
Max
10.000000
Factory setting
0.000000
The magnetic cross coupling of the motor's d and q axes caused by saturation (current-dependent) leads to an
angle offset affecting the axis system d'q'; this decouples the magnetic quantities.
The angle offset can be described as a third-order polynomial function of the load current consumed:
phiOffset = f(C1*iq + C3*iq^3)
This parameter is the coefficient C3; it describes the cubic load impact effect.
p0400[0...n]
Encoder type selection / Enc_typ sel
ENCODER
Can be changed: C2(1, 4)
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: 1580, 4704
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
10100
Factory setting
0
Description:
Selects the encoder from the list of encoder types supported.
Value:
0:
202:
204:
242:
244:
1001:
1002:
1003:
1004:
2001:
2002:
2003:
2004:
2005:
2006:
2007:
2008:
2010:
2051:
2052:
2053:
2054:
2055:
2081:
2082:
2083:
2084:
2110:
2111:
2112:
2151:
3001:
3002:
3003:
3005:
3006:
No encoder
DRIVE-CLiQ encoder AS20, singleturn
DRIVE-CLiQ encoder AM20, multiturn 4096
DRIVE-CLiQ encoder AS24, singleturn
DRIVE-CLiQ encoder AM24, multiturn 4096
Resolver 1 speed
Resolver 2 speed
Resolver 3 speed
Resolver 4 speed
2048, 1 Vpp, A/B C/D R
2048, 1 Vpp, A/B R
256, 1 Vpp, A/B R
400, 1 Vpp, A/B R
512, 1 Vpp, A/B R
192, 1 Vpp, A/B R
480, 1 Vpp, A/B R
800, 1 Vpp, A/B R
18000, 1 Vpp, A/B R distance-coded
2048, 1 Vpp, A/B, EnDat, Multiturn 4096
32, 1 Vpp, A/B, EnDat, Multiturn 4096
512, 1 Vpp, A/B, EnDat, Multiturn 4096
16, 1 Vpp, A/B, EnDat, Multiturn 4096
2048, 1 Vpp, A/B, EnDat, Singleturn
2048, 1 Vpp, A/B, SSI, Singleturn
2048, 1 Vpp, A/B, SSI, Multiturn 4096
2048, 1 Vpp, A/B, SSI, singleturn, error bit
2048, 1 Vpp, A/B, SSI, multiturn 4096, error bit
4000 nm, 1 Vpp, A/B R distance-coded
20000 nm, 1 Vpp, A/B R distance-coded
40000 nm, 1 Vpp, A/B R distance-coded
16000 nm, 1 Vpp, A/B, EnDat, resolution 100 nm
1024 HTL A/B R
1024 TTL A/B R
2048 HTL A/B R
1024 HTL A/B
1024 TTL A/B
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-137
Parameter
List of parameters
3007:
3008:
3009:
3011:
3020:
3081:
3082:
3090:
3109:
9999:
10000:
10050:
10051:
10058:
10059:
10100:
Caution:
2048 HTL A/B
2048 TTL A/B
1024 HTL A/B unipolar
2048 HTL A/B unipolar
2048 TTL A/B R, with sense
SSI, Singleturn, 24 V
SSI, Multiturn 4096, 24 V
4096, HTL, A/B, SSI, Singleturn
2000 nm, TTL, A/B R distance-coded
User-defined
Identify encoder
Encoder with EnDat interface identified
DRIVE-CLiQ encoder identified
Digital encoder (absolute) identified
Digital encoder (incremental) identified
Identify encoder (waiting)
An encoder type with p0400 < 9999 defines an encoder for which there is an encoder parameter list. When selecting a catalog encoder (p0400 < 9999) the parameters from the encoder parameter list cannot be changed (write
protection). To remove write protection, the encoder type should be set to a third-party encoder (p0400 = 9999).
Notice:
If required, the list of motor codes/encoder codes can be found in the Appendix of the List Manual.
Note:
The connected encoder can be identified by setting p0400 to 10000 or 10100. This assumes that the encoder supports this method, which is possible in the following cases: Motor with DRIVE-CLiQ, encoder with EnDat interface,
DRIVE-CLiQ encoder.
The encoder data (e.g. pulse number p0408) can only be changed when p0400 = 9999.
When using an encoder with track A/B and zero pulse, as standard, fine synchronization is not set using a zero
mark. If, for a synchronous motor, fine synchronization is to be realized using a zero mark, then the following must
be executed:
- set p0400 to 9999
- set p0404.15 to 1
Prerequisite:
Coarse synchronization must be selected (e.g. pole position identification) and the zero pulse of the encoder must
be either mechanically or electronically (p0431) adjusted to the pole position.
For p0400 = 10000 the following applies:
If an identification is not possible, then p0400 is set to 0.
For p0400 = 10100 the following applies:
If an identification is not possible, p0400 remains set to 10100 until it becomes possible.
p0400[0...n]
Encoder type selection / Enc_typ sel
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(1, 4)
0
Data type: Integer16
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: 1580, 4704
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
10000
Factory setting
0
Description:
Selects the encoder from the list of encoder types supported.
Value:
0:
3001:
3002:
3003:
3005:
3006:
3007:
3008:
3009:
3011:
3020:
9999:
10000:
1-138
No encoder
1024 HTL A/B R
1024 TTL A/B R
2048 HTL A/B R
1024 HTL A/B
1024 TTL A/B
2048 HTL A/B
2048 TTL A/B
1024 HTL A/B unipolar
2048 HTL A/B unipolar
2048 TTL A/B R, with sense
User-defined
Identify encoder
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
Caution:
An encoder type with p0400 < 9999 defines an encoder for which there is an encoder parameter list. When selecting a catalog encoder (p0400 < 9999) the parameters from the encoder parameter list cannot be changed (write
protection). To remove write protection, the encoder type should be set to a third-party encoder (p0400 = 9999).
Notice:
If required, the list of motor codes/encoder codes can be found in the Appendix of the List Manual.
Note:
The connected encoder can be identified by setting p0400 to 10000 or 10100. This assumes that the encoder supports this method, which is possible in the following cases: Motor with DRIVE-CLiQ, encoder with EnDat interface,
DRIVE-CLiQ encoder.
The encoder data (e.g. pulse number p0408) can only be changed when p0400 = 9999.
When using an encoder with track A/B and zero pulse, as standard, fine synchronization is not set using a zero
mark. If, for a synchronous motor, fine synchronization is to be realized using a zero mark, then the following must
be executed:
- set p0400 to 9999
- set p0404.15 to 1
Prerequisite:
Coarse synchronization must be selected (e.g. pole position identification) and the zero pulse of the encoder must
be either mechanically or electronically (p0431) adjusted to the pole position.
For p0400 = 10000 the following applies:
If an identification is not possible, then p0400 is set to 0.
For p0400 = 10100 the following applies:
If an identification is not possible, p0400 remains set to 10100 until it becomes possible.
p0401[0...n]
Encoder type, OEM selection / Enc type OEM sel
ENCODER,
Can be changed: C2(1, 4)
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Integer16
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: 1580, 4704
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
32767
Factory setting
0
Description:
Selects the encoder from the list of encoder types that the OEM supports.
Note:
The connected encoder can be identified by p0400 = 10000. This means that the encoder must support this and is
possible in the following cases: Motor with DRIVE-CLiQ, encoder with EnDat interface.
If an identification is not possible, then p0400 is set to 0.
The encoder data (e.g. pulse number p0408) can only be changed when p0400 = 9999.
Using p0400 = 20000, the encoder type can be selected from the list of OEM encoders using p0401.
p0402[0...n]
Gearbox type selection / Gearbox type sel
ENCODER,
Can be changed: C2(1, 4)
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Integer16
0
P-Group: Encoder
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
10100
Factory setting
9999
Selects the gearbox type to preset the inversion and the gearbox factor.
Measuring gear factor = motor or load revolutions / encoder revolutions.
Value:
1:
2:
3:
4:
9999:
10000:
10100:
Gearbox 1:1 not inverted
Gearbox 2:7 inverted
Gearbox 4:17 inverted
Gearbox 2:10 inverted
Gearbox, user-defined
Identify gearbox
Identify gearbox
Dependency:
Refer to: p0410, p0432, p0433
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-139
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
Re p0402 = 1:
Automatic setting of p0410 = 0000 bin, p0432 = 1, p0433 = 1.
Re p0402 = 2:
Automatic setting of p0410 = 0011 bin, p0432 = 7, p0433 = 2.
Re p0402 = 3:
Automatic setting of p0410 = 0011 bin, p0432 = 17, p0433 = 4.
Re p0402 = 4:
Automatic setting of p0410 = 0011 bin, p0432 = 10, p0433 = 2.
Re p0402 = 9999:
No automatic setting of p0410, p0432, p0433. The parameters should be manually set.
Re p0402 = 10000:
It is only possible to identify the gearbox type for a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ. Parameters p0410, p0432 and p0433
are set corresponding to the identified gearbox. If an identification is not possible, then p0402 is set to 9999.
p0404[0...n]
Encoder configuration effective / Enc_config eff
ENCODER,
Can be changed: C2(4)
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Unsigned32
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: 4010, 4704
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Settings for the basic encoder properties.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
20
21
22
23
Caution:
This parameter is automatically preset for encoders from the encoder list (p0400).
Signal name
Linear encoder
Abs value encoder
Multiturn encoder
Track A/B sq-wave
Track A/B sinus
Track C/D
Hall sensor
EnDat encoder
SSI encoder
DRIVE-CLiQ encoder
Digital encoder
Equidistant zero mark
Irregular zero mark
Distance-coded zero mark
Commutation with zero mark (not ASM)
Acceleration
Track A/B analog
Voltage level 5 V
Voltage level 24 V
Remote sense (only SMC30)
Resolver excit.
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
no
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
FP
-
When selecting a catalog encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400
should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Notice:
If an SSI encoder (bit 9 = 1) is used as motor encoder for permanent-magnet synchronous motors, then this is only
permissible in conjunction with an additional A/B track (bit 4 = 1 or bit 5 = 1).
1-140
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
ZM: Zero mark
SMC: Sensor Module Cabinet
If a technique to determine the commutation information/data has not been selected (e.g. track C/D, Hall sensor),
and the encoder pulse number is an integer multiple of the pole number, then the following applies:
The track A/B is adjusted to match the magnetic position of the motor.
Re bit 01, 02 (absolute encoder, multiturn encoder):
These bits can only be selected for EnDat encoders, SSI encoders or DRIVE-CLiQ encoders.
Re bit 10 (DRIVE-CLiQ encoder):
This bit is only used for the large-scale integrated DRIVE-CLiQ encoders that provide their encoder data directly in
DRIVE-CLiQ format without converting this data. This bit is not, therefore, set for first-generation DRIVE-CLiQ
encoders.
Re bit 12 (equidistant zero mark):
The zero marks occur at regular intervals (e.g. rotary encoder with 1 zero mark per revolution or linear encoder with
constant zero mark distance).
The bit activates monitoring of the zero mark distance (p0424/p0425, linear/rotary) or in the case of the linear
encoder with 1 zero mark and p0424 = 0 zero mark monitoring is activated.
Re bit 13 (irregular zero mark):
The zero marks occur at irregular intervals (e.g. a linear scale with only 1 zero mark in the traversing range). The
zero mark distance is not monitored.
Re bit 14 (distance-coded zero mark):
The distance (clearance) between two or several consecutive zero marks allows the absolute position to be calculated.
Re bit 15 (commutation with zero mark):
Only applicable for synchronous motors. For distance-coded zero marks, the following applies:
The phase sequence of the C/D track (if available) must be the same as the phase sequence of the encoder (A/B
track).
The phase sequence of the Hall signal (if available) must be the same as the phase sequence of the motor. Further,
the position of the Hall sensor must be mechanically adjusted to the motor EMF.
The fine synchronization is only started after two zero marks have been passed.
p0405[0...n]
Square-wave encoder track A/B / Sq-wave enc A/B
ENCODER,
Can be changed: C2(4)
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Unsigned32
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: 4704
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1111 bin
Description:
Settings for the track A/B of a square-wave encoder. For square-wave encoders, p0404.3 must also be 1.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
Caution:
This parameter is automatically preset for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog
encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed
when removing write protection.
Note:
Re bit 02:
Signal name
Signal
Level
Track monitoring
Zero pulse
Switching thresh
Pulse/direction
1 signal
Bipolar
TTL
A/B <> -A/B
Same as A/B track
High
Yes
0 signal
Unipolar
HTL
None
24 V unipolar
Low
No
FP
-
When the function is activated, track monitoring can be deactivated by setting p437.26.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-141
Parameter
List of parameters
p0407[0...n]
Linear encoder grid division / Enc grid div
ENCODER,
Can be changed: C2(4)
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Unsigned32
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: 4010, 4704
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [nm]
Max
250000000 [nm]
Factory setting
16000 [nm]
Description:
Sets the grid division for a linear encoder.
Caution:
This parameter is automatically preset for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog
encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed
when removing write protection.
Note:
The lowest permissible value is 250 nm.
p0408[0...n]
Rotary encoder pulse No. / Rot enc pulse No.
ENCODER,
Can be changed: C2(4)
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Unsigned32
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: 4010, 4704
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
16777215
Factory setting
2048
Description:
Sets the number of pulses for a rotary encoder.
Caution:
This parameter is automatically preset for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog
encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed
when removing write protection.
Note:
The number of pole pairs for a resolver is entered here.
The smallest permissible value is 1 pulse.
p0410[0...n]
Encoder inversion actual value / Enc inv act value
ENCODER,
Can be changed: C2(4)
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Unsigned16
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Setting to invert actual values.
Bit field:
Bit
00
Signal name
Invert speed actual value
1 signal
Yes
0 signal
No
01
Invert position actual value
Yes
No
Note:
FP
4710,
4715
4704
The inversion influences the following parameters:
Bit 00: r0061, r0063 (exception: encoderless control), r0094
Bit 01: r0482, r0483
1-142
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p0410[0...n]
Encoder inversion actual value / Enc inv act value
ENCODER (Lin enc) Can be changed: C2(4)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Setting to invert actual values.
Bit field:
Bit
00
Signal name
Invert velocity actual value
1 signal
Yes
0 signal
No
01
Invert position actual value
Yes
No
Note:
FP
4710,
4715
4704
The inversion influences the following parameters:
Bit 00: r0061, r0063 (exception: encoderless control), r0094
Bit 01: r0482, r0483
p0411[0...n]
Measuring gear, configuration / Meas gear config
ENCODER,
Can be changed: C2(4)
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Unsigned32
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Sets the configuration for position tracking of a measuring gear.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
Notice:
For p0411.3 = 1 the following applies:
Signal name
Measuring gear, activate position tracking
Axis type
Measuring gear, reset position
Meas. gearbox, activate pos. tracking for
incremental encoders
1 signal
Yes
Linear axis
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
Rotary axis
No
No
FP
-
If position tracking is activated for incremental encoders, only the position actual value is stored. Axis or encoder
motion is not detected when deactivated! Any tolerance window entered in p0413 has no effect.
Note:
For the following events, the non-volatile, saved position values are automatically reset:
- when an encoder replacement has been identified.
- when changing the configuration of the Encoder Data Set (EDS).
p0412[0...n]
Measuring gear, absolute encoder, rotary, revolutions, virtual / Abs rot rev
ENCODER,
Can be changed: C2(4)
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Unsigned32
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
4194303
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the number of rotations that can be resolved for a rotary encoder with activated position tracking of the measuring gear.
Dependency:
This parameter is only of significance for an absolute encoder (p0404.1 = 1) with activated position tracking
(p0411.0 = 1) and for an incremental encoder with activated position tracking (p0411.3 = 1).
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-143
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
The resolution that is set must be able to be represented using r0483.
For rotary axes/modulo axes, the following applies:
p0411.0 = 1:
This parameter is preset with p0421 and can be changed.
p0411.3 = 1:
The parameter value is preset to the highest possible value. The highest possible value depends on the pulse number (p0408) and the fine resolution (p0419).
For linear axes, the following applies:
p0411.0 = 1:
This parameter is pre-assigned with p0421, expanded by 6 bits for multiturn information (maximum number of overflows) and cannot be changed.
p0411.3 = 1:
The parameter value is preset to the highest possible value. The highest possible value depends on the pulse number (p0408) and the fine resolution (p0419).
p0413[0...n]
Measuring gear, position tracking tolerance window / Pos track window
ENCODER,
Can be changed: C2(4)
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: FloatingPoint32
0
P-Group: Encoder
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00
Max
4294967300.00
Factory setting
0.00
Sets a tolerance window for position tracking.
After the system is powered up, the difference between the saved position and the actual position is determined,
and depending on this, the following is initiated:
Difference within the tolerance window --> The position is reproduced as a result of the encoder actual value.
Difference outside the tolerance window --> An appropriate message is output.
Dependency:
Refer to: F31501, F32501, F33501
Caution:
Rotation, e.g. through a complete encoder range is not detected.
Note:
The value is entered in integer (complete) encoder pulses.
For p0411.0 = 1, the value is automatically pre-assigned quarter of the encoder range.
Example:
Quarter of the encoder range = (p0408 * p0421) / 4
It is possible that the tolerance window may not be able to be precisely set due to the data type (floating point number with 23 bit mantissa).
p0414[0...n]
Redundant coarse position value relevant bits (identified) / Relevant bits
ENCODER,
Can be changed: C2(4)
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Unsigned16
0
P-Group: Encoder
Description:
1-144
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
16
Factory setting
16
Sets the number of relevant bits for the redundant coarse position value.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p0415[0...n]
Gx_XIST1 Coarse position safe most significant bit (identified) / Gx_XIST1 safe MSB
ENCODER,
Can be changed: C2(4)
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Unsigned16
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
31
Factory setting
14
Description:
Sets the bit number for the safe most significant bit (MSB) of the Gx_XIST1 coarse position.
Note:
MSB: Most Significant Bit
p0418[0...n]
Fine resolution Gx_XIST1 (in bits) / Enc fine Gx_XIST1
ENCODER,
Can be changed: C2(4)
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Unsigned8
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: 4010, 4704
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
2
Max
18
Factory setting
11
Description:
Sets the fine resolution in bits of the incremental position actual values.
Note:
The parameter applies for the following process data:
- Gx_XIST1
- Gx_XIST2 for reference mark or flying measurement
The fine resolution specifies the fraction between two encoder pulses. Depending on the physical measurement
principle, an encoder pulse can be broken down into a different number of fractions (e.g. squarewave encoder: 2 bit
= resolution 4, sin/cos encoder: Typical 11 bit = resolution 2048).
For a squarewave encoder, with the factory setting, the least significant bits have the value zero, i.e. they do not
supply any useful information.
For especially high quality measuring systems, the fine resolution must be increased corresponding to the available
accuracy.
p0419[0...n]
Fine resolution absolute value Gx_XIST2 (in bits) / Enc fine Gx_XIST2
ENCODER,
Can be changed: C2(4)
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Unsigned8
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: 4704, 4710
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
2
Max
18
Factory setting
9
Description:
Sets the fine resolution in bits of the absolute position actual values.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0418
Note:
This parameter applies to process data Gx_XIST2 when reading the absolute value.
p0420[0...n]
Encoder connection / Enc_connection
ENCODER,
Can be changed: C2(4)
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Unsigned16
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Selecting the encoder connection.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
Signal name
SUB-D
Terminal
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
0 signal
No
No
FP
-
1-145
Parameter
List of parameters
p0421[0...n]
Absolute encoder rotary multiturn resolution / Enc abs multiturn
ENCODER,
Can be changed: C2(4)
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Unsigned16
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: 4704
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
4096
Description:
Sets the number of rotations that can be resolved for a rotary absolute encoder.
Caution:
This parameter is automatically preset for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog
encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed
when removing write protection.
p0422[0...n]
Absolute encoder linear measuring step resolution / Enc abs meas step
ENCODER,
Can be changed: C2(4)
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Unsigned32
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: 4704
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [nm]
Max
4294967295 [nm]
Factory setting
100 [nm]
Description:
Sets the resolution of the absolute position for a linear absolute encoder.
Caution:
This parameter is automatically preset for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog
encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed
when removing write protection.
Note:
The serial protocol of an absolute encoder provides the position with a certain resolution , e.g. 100 nm. This value
must be entered here.
p0423[0...n]
Absolute encoder rotary singleturn resolution / Enc abs singleturn
ENCODER,
Can be changed: C2(4)
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Unsigned32
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: 4704
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1073741823
Factory setting
8192
Description:
Sets the number of measuring steps per revolution for a rotary absolute encoder. The resolution refers to the absolute position.
Caution:
This parameter is automatically preset for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog
encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed
when removing write protection.
p0424[0...n]
Encoder, linear zero mark distance / Enc lin ZM_dist
ENCODER,
Can be changed: C2(4)
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Unsigned16
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [mm]
Max
65535 [mm]
Factory setting
20 [mm]
Description:
Sets the distance between two zero marks for a linear encoder. This information is used for zero mark monitoring.
Caution:
This parameter is automatically preset for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog
encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed
when removing write protection.
Note:
For distance-coded zero marks, this means the basic distance.
1-146
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p0425[0...n]
Encoder, rotary zero mark distance / Enc rot dist ZM
ENCODER,
Can be changed: C2(4)
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Unsigned32
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: 4704, 8570
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
16777215
Factory setting
2048
Description:
Sets the distance in pulses between two zero marks for a rotary encoder. This information is used for zero mark
monitoring.
Caution:
This parameter is automatically preset for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog
encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed
when removing write protection.
Note:
For distance-coded zero marks, this means the basic distance.
p0426[0...n]
Encoder zero mark differential distance / Enc diff distance
ENCODER,
Can be changed: C2(4)
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Unsigned16
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
65535
Factory setting
1
Description:
Differential distance with distance-coded zero marks [signal periods]. Corresponds to jump displacement of "zero
mark with interference".
Caution:
This parameter is automatically preset for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog
encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed
when removing write protection.
p0427[0...n]
Encoder SSI baud rate / Enc SSI baud rate
ENCODER,
Can be changed: C2(4)
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: FloatingPoint32
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [kHz]
Max
65535 [kHz]
Factory setting
100 [kHz]
Description:
Sets the baud rate for an SSI encoder.
Caution:
This parameter is automatically preset for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog
encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed
when removing write protection.
Note:
SSI: Synchronous Serial Interface
p0428[0...n]
Encoder SSI monoflop time / Enc SSI t_monoflop
ENCODER,
Can be changed: C2(4)
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Unsigned16
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [s]
Max
65535 [s]
Factory setting
30 [s]
Description:
Sets the minimum delay time between two data transfers of the absolute value for an SSI encoder.
Caution:
This parameter is automatically preset for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog
encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed
when removing write protection.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-147
Parameter
List of parameters
p0429[0...n]
Encoder SSI configuration / Enc SSI config
ENCODER,
Can be changed: C2(4)
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Unsigned16
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Sets the configuration for an SSI encoder.
Bit field:
Bit
00
02
06
Caution:
This parameter is automatically preset for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog
encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed
when removing write protection.
Note:
Re bit 06:
Signal name
Transfer code
Transfer absolute value twice
Data line during the monoflop time
1 signal
Binary code
Yes
High level
0 signal
Gray code
No
Low level
FP
-
The quiescent signal level of the data line corresponds to the inverted, set level.
p0430[0...n]
Sensor Module configuration / SM config
ENCODER,
Can be changed: C2(4)
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Unsigned32
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1110 0000 0000 1000 0000
0000 0000 0000 bin
Description:
Sets the configuration of the Sensor Module.
Bit field:
Bit
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
31
Note:
Signal name
Burst oversampling
Continuous oversampling (reserved)
Safety position actual value sensing
Speed calculation mode (only SMC30)
Zero mark tolerance
Rot pos adapt
Deselection commutation with zero mark
Commutation with selected zero mark
Disconnection of encoder power supply on
parking
SSI position value extrapolation
Cubic correction
Phase correction
Amplitude correction
Offset correction
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Incremental diff
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
Flank time meas
No
No
No
No
No
FP
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Re bit 17 (burst oversampling):
Displays whether burst oversampling has been activated.
Re bit 18 (continuous oversampling):
Displays whether continuous oversampling has been activated.
Re bit 19 (safety position actual value sensing):
Displays whether the safety encoder position is sent in the cyclic telegram.
Re bit 20 (speed calculation mode):
If bit = 0 the speed is calculated via edge time measurement with extrapolation between edges. In this mode the
speed actual value 0 measuring time can be set in p0453.
If bit = 1 the speed is calculated via incremental difference without extrapolation. In this mode p0453 is irrelevant.
1-148
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
Re bit 21 (zero mark tolerance):
If bit = 1 there is no fault response (F3x100) if the number of track pulses between two zero pulses does not match
the configured number on one occasion. If the next zero mark is correct, no fault occurs.
Re bit 22 (rotor position adaptation):
If bit = 1 correction might take several steps (+/- 1 quadrant per revolution) if the zero mark arrived in a tolerance
bandwidth (+/- 1/12 of the electrical revolution).
Re bit 23 (deselection commutation with zero mark):
Only possible with the Sensor Module property "Commutation with zero mark can be deselected" (p0458.23 = yes).
This should only be set for encoders that have not been adjusted.
Re bit 24 (commutation with selected zero mark):
Sets commutation to selected zero mark.
Re bit 25 (disconnection of encoder power supply on parking):
If activated, the encoder power supply is disconnected completely on parking (0 V), regardless of whether the operating voltage is 5 V or 24 V. If not activated, the encoder power supply is not disconnected on parking (although the
24 V operating voltage is reduced to 5 V).
Re bit 27 (extrapolation SSI position value):
Sets the interpolation of the position values from the SSI encoder.
Re bit 28 (cubic correction);
Sets whether cubic correction is activated for the A-B analog signals.
Re bit 29 (phase correction):
Sets whether phase correction is activated for the A-B analog signals.
Re bit 30 (amplitude correction):
Sets whether amplitude correction is activated for the A-B analog signals.
Re bit 31 (offset correction):
Sets whether offset correction is activated for the A-B analog signals.
p0430[0...n]
Sensor Module configuration / SM config
ENCODER (Lin enc) Can be changed: C2(4)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1110 0000 0000 1000 0000
0000 0000 0000 bin
Description:
Sets the configuration of the Sensor Module.
Bit field:
Bit
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
31
Signal name
Burst oversampling
Continuous oversampling (reserved)
Safety position actual value sensing
Velocity calculation mode (only SMC30)
Zero mark tolerance
Rot pos adapt
Deselection commutation with zero mark
Commutation with selected zero mark
Disconnection of encoder power supply on
parking
SSI position value extrapolation
Cubic correction
Phase correction
Amplitude correction
Offset correction
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Incremental diff
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
Flank time meas
No
No
No
No
No
FP
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-149
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
Re bit 17 (burst oversampling):
Displays whether burst oversampling has been activated.
Re bit 18 (continuous oversampling):
Displays whether continuous oversampling has been activated.
Re bit 19 (safety position actual value sensing):
Displays whether the safety encoder position is sent in the cyclic telegram.
Re bit 20 (speed calculation mode):
If bit = 0 the speed is calculated via edge time measurement with extrapolation between edges. In this mode the
speed actual value 0 measuring time can be set in p0453.
If bit = 1 the speed is calculated via incremental difference without extrapolation. In this mode p0453 is irrelevant.
Re bit 21 (zero mark tolerance):
If bit = 1 there is no fault response (F3x100) if the number of track pulses between two zero pulses does not match
the configured number on one occasion. If the next zero mark is correct, no fault occurs.
Re bit 22 (rotor position adaptation):
If bit = 1 correction might take several steps (+/- 1 quadrant per revolution) if the zero mark arrived in a tolerance
bandwidth (+/- 1/12 of the electrical revolution).
Re bit 23 (deselection commutation with zero mark):
Only possible with the Sensor Module property "Commutation with zero mark can be deselected" (p0458.23 = yes).
This should only be set for encoders that have not been adjusted.
Re bit 24 (commutation with selected zero mark):
Sets commutation to selected zero mark.
Re bit 25 (disconnection of encoder power supply on parking):
If activated, the encoder power supply is disconnected completely on parking (0 V), regardless of whether the operating voltage is 5 V or 24 V. If not activated, the encoder power supply is not disconnected on parking (although the
24 V operating voltage is reduced to 5 V).
Re bit 27 (extrapolation SSI position value):
Sets the interpolation of the position values from the SSI encoder.
Re bit 28 (cubic correction);
Sets whether cubic correction is activated for the A-B analog signals.
Re bit 29 (phase correction):
Sets whether phase correction is activated for the A-B analog signals.
Re bit 30 (amplitude correction):
Sets whether amplitude correction is activated for the A-B analog signals.
Re bit 31 (offset correction):
Sets whether offset correction is activated for the A-B analog signals.
p0431[0...n]
Angular commutation offset / Ang_com offset
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(4)
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-180.00 []
Max
180.00 []
Factory setting
0.00 []
Description:
Sets the angular commutation offset.
Dependency:
The value is taken into account in r0094.
Refer to: r0094, r1778
Caution:
When the firmware is upgraded from V2.3 to V2.4 or higher, the value must be reduced by 60 if all the following
conditions are fulfilled:
- The motor is a synchronous motor (p0300 = 2, 2xx, 4, 4xx).
- The encoder is a resolver (p0404.23 = 1).
- The actual speed value is inverted (p0410.0 = 1).
Notice:
The angular commutation offset cannot be generally taken from other drive systems. As a minimum - the sign of the
offset determined for SIMODRIVE 611 digital and SIMODRIVE 611 universal must be reversed for SINAMICS
(p0431 (SINAMICS) = -p1016 (SIMODRIVE)).
1-150
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
Angular commutation offset, angular difference between electrical position of encoder and flux position.
For p0404.5 = 1 (track C/D) the following applies:
The angular offset in p0431 acts on track A/B, the zero mark on track C/D.
For p0404.6 = 1 (Hall sensor) the following applies:
The angular offset in p0431 acts on track A/B and the zero mark.
p0432[0...n]
Gearbox factor, encoder revolutions / Grbx_fact enc_rev
ENCODER,
Can be changed: C2(4)
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Integer16
0
P-Group: Encoder
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
10000
Factory setting
1
Sets the encoder revolutions for the gearbox factor of the encoder evaluation.
The gearbox factor specifies the ratio between the encoder shaft and motor shaft (for motor encoders) or between
the encoder shaft and the load.
Dependency:
This parameter can only be set for p0402 = 9999.
Refer to: p0402, p0410, p0433
Note:
Negative gearbox factors should be implemented with p0410.
p0433[0...n]
Gearbox factor, motor/load revolutions / Grbx_fact mot_rev
ENCODER,
Can be changed: C2(4)
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Integer16
0
P-Group: Encoder
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
10000
Factory setting
1
Sets the motor and load revolutions for the gearbox factor of the encoder evaluation.
The gearbox factor specifies the ratio between the encoder shaft and motor shaft (for motor encoders) or between
the encoder shaft and the load.
Dependency:
This parameter can only be set for p0402 = 9999.
Refer to: p0402, p0410, p0432
Note:
Negative gearbox factors should be implemented with p0410.
p0434[0...n]
Encoder SSI error bit / Enc SSI error bit
ENCODER,
Can be changed: C2(4)
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Unsigned16
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the position and level of the error bit in the SSI protocol.
Notice:
The bit may only be positioned before (p0446) or after (p0448) the absolute value in the SSI protocol.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-151
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
Value = dcba
ba: Position of the error bit in the protocol (0 ... 63).
c: Level (0: Low level, 1: High level).
d: Status of the evaluation (0: Off, 1: On with 1 error bit, 2: On with 2 error bits ... 9: On with 9 error bits).
For several error error bits, the following applies:
- the position specified under ba and the additional bits are assigned increasing consecutively.
- the level set under c applies to all error bits.
Example:
p0434 = 1013
--> The evaluation is switched in and the error bit is at position 13 with a low level.
p0434 = 1113
--> The evaluation is switched in and the error bit is at position 13 with a high level.
p0435[0...n]
Encoder SSI alarm bit / Enc SSI alarm bit
ENCODER,
Can be changed: C2(4)
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Unsigned16
0
P-Group: Encoder
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
0
Sets the position and level of the alarm bit in the SSI protocol.
Notice:
The bit may only be positioned before (p0446) or after (p0448) the absolute value in the SSI protocol.
Note:
Value = dcba
ba: Position of the alarm bit in protocol (0 ... 63).
c: Level (0: Low level, 1: High level).
d: State of the evaluation (0: Off, 1: On).
Example:
p0435 = 1014
--> The evaluation is switched in and the alarm bit is at position 14 with a low level.
p0435 = 1114
--> The evaluation is switched in and the alarm bit is at position 14 with a high level.
p0436[0...n]
Encoder SSI parity bit / Enc SSI parity bit
ENCODER,
Can be changed: C2(4)
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Unsigned16
0
P-Group: Encoder
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
0
Sets the position and parity of the parity bit in the SSI protocol.
Notice:
The bit may only be positioned before (p0446) or after (p0448) the absolute value in the SSI protocol.
Note:
Value = dcba
ba: Position of the parity bit in the protocol (0 ... 63).
c: Parity (0: even, 1: uneven).
d: State of the evaluation (0: Off, 1: On).
Example:
p0436 = 1015
--> The evaluation is switched in and the parity bit is at position 15 with even parity.
p0436 = 1115
--> The evaluation is switched in and the parity bit is at position 15 with uneven parity.
1-152
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p0437[0...n]
Sensor Module configuration extended / SM config ext
ENCODER,
Can be changed: C2(4)
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Unsigned32
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0011 0000 0000 0000 0000
1000 0000 0000 bin
Description:
Sets the extended configuration of the Sensor Module.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
04
05
06
07
11
26
28
29
31
Signal name
Activating the data logger
Zero mark edge detection
Correction position actual value XIST1
Edge evaluation
Edge evaluation
Freeze the speed actual value for dn/dt
errors
Accumulate uncorrected encoder pulses
Automatic alarm acknowledgment
Track monitoring deselection
EnDat linear encoder monitoring incremental/absolute
EnDat encoder initialization with high accuracy
Analog unipolar track monitoring
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
FP
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Dependency:
Refer to: p0430, r0459
Note:
A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present.
Re bit 00:
When the data logger (trace) is activated, in the case of a fault, data before and after the event are recorded
(traced) and saved in files on the non-volatile memory medium. Experts can then evaluate this data.
Re bit 01:
If bit = 0, the zero mark is evaluated by ANDing tracks A and B and the zero mark.
For bit = 1, the zero mark is evaluated depending on the direction of rotation detected. For a positive direction of
rotation, the positive edge of the zero mark is considered and for a negative direction of rotation, the negative edge
of the zero mark.
Re bit 02:
If the bit is set, in the event of a deviation less than the tolerance window for the zero mark (p4681, p4682), the
pulses per revolution are corrected. If the bit is not set, encoder fault F3x131 is triggered.
Re Bit 04 and Bit 05:
The current hardware only supports 1x or 4x signal evaluation.
Bit 5/4 = 0/0: Signal evaluation per period, 4x.
Bit 5/4 = 1/0: Signal evaluation per period, 4x.
Bit 5/4 = 0/1: Signal evaluation per period, 1x.
Bit 5/4 = 1/1: Illegal setting.
Re bit 06:
If the function is active, when dn/dt monitoring responds, the speed actual value is internally frozen for a time equivalent to two current controller clock cycles. The rotor position continues to be integrated. The actual value is then
re-enabled after this time has expired.
Re bit 07:
If the bit is set, the encoder pulses which have not been corrected are added to r4688 at the zero mark.
Re bit 11:
If the bit is set, within a certain time grid the Sensor Module checks whether the fault cause is still present. This
enables the Module to switch from the fault state to the operating state and provide valid actual values automatically. The faults are displayed until the user acknowledges them.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-153
Parameter
List of parameters
Re bit 20:
If the bit is set, the bandwidth of the analog filter for SMx10 (resolver) and SMx20 (sin/cos encoder) can be set via
parameter p4660.
Re bit 26:
Track monitoring is deactivated for the square-wave encoders when the bit is set, even if the monitoring function is
selected in p405.2.
Re bit 28:
Monitoring of the difference between incremental and absolute position in the case of linear encoders.
Re bit 29:
When the bit is set, the EnDat encoder is initialized under a certain speed and, therefore, with high accuracy. If initialization at a higher speed is requested, fault F31151, F32151, or F33151 is output.
Re bit 31:
When monitoring is active, the levels of the individual track signals and the corresponding inverted track signals are
monitored separately.
p0437[0...n]
Sensor Module configuration extended / SM config ext
ENCODER (Lin enc) Can be changed: C2(4)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0011 0000 0000 0000 0000
1000 0000 0000 bin
Description:
Sets the extended configuration of the Sensor Module.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
04
05
06
07
11
26
28
29
31
Signal name
Activating the data logger
Zero mark edge detection
Correction position actual value XIST1
Edge evaluation
Edge evaluation
Freeze the speed actual value for dn/dt
errors
Accumulate uncorrected encoder pulses
Automatic alarm acknowledgment
Track monitoring deselection
EnDat linear encoder monitoring incremental/absolute
EnDat encoder initialization with high accuracy
Analog unipolar track monitoring
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
FP
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Dependency:
Refer to: p0430, r0459
Note:
A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present.
Re bit 00:
When the data logger (trace) is activated, in the case of a fault, data before and after the event are recorded
(traced) and saved in files on the non-volatile memory medium. Experts can then evaluate this data.
Re bit 01:
If bit = 0, the zero mark is evaluated by ANDing tracks A and B and the zero mark.
For bit = 1, the zero mark is evaluated depending on the direction detected. For a positive direction, the positive
edge of the zero mark is considered and for a negative direction, the negative edge of the zero mark.
Re bit 02:
If the bit is set, in the event of a deviation less than the tolerance window for the zero mark (p4681, p4682), the
pulses per revolution are corrected. If the bit is not set, encoder fault F3x131 is triggered.
1-154
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
Re Bit 04 and Bit 05:
Bit 5/4 = 0/0: Signal evaluation per period, 4x.
Bit 5/4 = 1/0: Signal evaluation per period, 4x.
Bit 5/4 = 0/1: Signal evaluation per period, 1x.
Bit 5/4 = 1/1: Illegal setting.
Re bit 06:
If the function is active, when dn/dt monitoring responds, the velocity actual value is internally frozen for a time
equivalent to two current controller clock cycles. The rotor position continues to be integrated. The actual value is
then re-enabled after this time has expired.
Re bit 07:
If the bit is set, the encoder pulses detected as faulty between two zero marks are accumulated (r4688).
Re bit 29:
When the bit is set, the EnDat encoder is initialized under a certain velocity and, therefore, with high accuracy. If initialization at a higher velocity is requested, fault F31151, F32151, or F33151 is output.
Re bit 31:
When monitoring is active, the levels of the individual track signals and the corresponding inverted track signals are
monitored separately.
p0438[0...n]
Squarewave encoder filter time / Enc t_filt
ENCODER,
Can be changed: C2(4)
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: FloatingPoint32
0
P-Group: Encoder
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [s]
Max
100.00 [s]
Factory setting
0.64 [s]
Sets the filter time for a squarewave encoder.
The hardware of the squarewave encoder only supports the following values:
No filtering
0.04 s
0.64 s
2.56 s
10.24 s
20.48 s
Dependency:
Refer to: r0452
Notice:
If the filter time is too long, the track signals A/B/R may be suppressed and the appropriate messages output.
Note:
The most suitable filter time depends on the number of pulses and maximum speed of the square-wave encoder.
The filter time is automatically corrected to the next value when entering a non-specified value. In this case, no
message is output.
The effective filter time is displayed in r0452.
p0439[0...n]
Encoder ramp-up time / Enc ramp-up time
ENCODER,
Can be changed: C2(4)
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Unsigned16
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [ms]
Max
65535 [ms]
Factory setting
0 [ms]
Description:
Ramp-up time of encoder. The encoder supplies stable track signals once this time has elapsed.
Caution:
This parameter is automatically preset for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog
encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed
when removing write protection.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-155
Parameter
List of parameters
p0440[0...n]
Copy encoder serial number / Copy enc ser_no
ENCODER,
Can be changed: C2(4)
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Integer16
0
P-Group: Encoder
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Copies the actual serial number of the encoder belonging to this Encoder Data Set (EDS) to p0441 ... p0445.
Example:
For p0440[0] = 1, the serial number of the encoder belonging EDS0 is copied to p0441[0] ... p0445[0].
Value:
0:
1:
No action
Transfer serial number
Dependency:
Refer to: p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0460, r0461, r0462, r0463, r0464, p1990
Note:
For encoders with serial number, encoder replacement is monitored in order to request angular commutation calibration (adjustment) for motor encoders and absolute calibration for direct measuring systems with absolute value
data. The serial number, which from then onwards is used for monitoring purposes, can be transferred using p0440.
In the following cases, copying is automatically started in the following cases:
1.) When commissioning 1FT6, 1FK6, 1FK7 motors.
2.) When writing into p0431.
3.) For p1990 = 1.
p0440 is automatically set to 0 when the copying has been completed.
In order to permanently accept the copied values, it is necessary to save in a non-volatile fashion (p0977).
p0441[0...n]
Encoder commissioning serial number part 1 / Enc comm ser_no 1
ENCODER,
Can be changed: C2(4)
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Unsigned32
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFF FFFF hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
Serial number part 1 of the encoder for the commissioning.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0440, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0460, r0461, r0462, r0463, r0464
Note:
A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present.
p0442[0...n]
Encoder commissioning serial number part 2 / Enc comm ser_no 2
ENCODER,
Can be changed: C2(4)
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Unsigned32
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFF FFFF hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
Serial number part 2 of the encoder for the commissioning.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0440, p0441, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0460, r0461, r0462, r0463, r0464
Note:
A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present.
1-156
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p0443[0...n]
Encoder commissioning serial number part 3 / Enc comm ser_no 3
ENCODER,
Can be changed: C2(4)
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Unsigned32
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFF FFFF hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
Serial number part 3 of the encoder for the commissioning.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0440, p0441, p0442, p0444, p0445, r0460, r0461, r0462, r0463, r0464
Note:
A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present.
p0444[0...n]
Encoder commissioning serial number part 4 / Enc comm ser_no 4
ENCODER,
Can be changed: C2(4)
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Unsigned32
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFF FFFF hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
Serial number part 4 of the encoder for the commissioning.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0440, p0441, p0442, p0443, p0445, r0460, r0461, r0462, r0463, r0464
Note:
A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present.
p0445[0...n]
Encoder commissioning serial number part 5 / Enc comm ser_no 5
ENCODER,
Can be changed: C2(4)
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Unsigned32
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFF FFFF hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
Serial number part 5 of the encoder for the commissioning.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0440, p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, r0460, r0461, r0462, r0463, r0464
Note:
A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present.
p0446[0...n]
Encoder SSI number of bits before the absolute value / Enc SSI bit before
ENCODER,
Can be changed: C2(4)
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Unsigned16
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the number of bits before the absolute value in the SSI protocol.
Caution:
This parameter is automatically preset for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog
encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed
when removing write protection.
Note:
For example, error bit, alarm bit or parity bit can be positioned at these bits.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-157
Parameter
List of parameters
p0447[0...n]
Encoder SSI number of bits absolute value / Enc SSI bit val
ENCODER,
Can be changed: C2(4)
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Unsigned16
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
25
Description:
Sets the number of bits for the absolute value in the SSI protocol.
Caution:
This parameter is automatically preset for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog
encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed
when removing write protection.
p0448[0...n]
Encoder SSI number of bits after the absolute value / Enc SSI bit after
ENCODER,
Can be changed: C2(4)
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Unsigned16
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the number of bits after the absolute value in the SSI protocol.
Caution:
This parameter is automatically preset for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog
encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed
when removing write protection.
Note:
For example, error bit, alarm bit or parity bit can be positioned at these bits.
p0449[0...n]
Encoder SSI number of bits, filler bits / Enc SSI fill bits
ENCODER,
Can be changed: C2(4)
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Unsigned16
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the number of filler bits for double absolute value transfer in the SSI protocol.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0429
Caution:
This parameter is automatically preset for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog
encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed
when removing write protection.
Note:
This parameter is only of significance for p0429.2 = 1.
r0451[0...2]
Commutation angle factor / Enc commut_factor
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned16
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 4710
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the relationship between the electrical and mechanical pole positions.
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Note:
A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present.
1-158
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
r0452
Squarewave encoder filter time display / Enc t_filt displ
ENCODER
Description:
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [s]
Max
- [s]
Factory setting
- [s]
Displays the effective filter time for a squarewave encoder.
The filter time is set using p0438.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0438
Note:
A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present.
r0452[0...2]
Squarewave encoder filter time display / Enc t_filt displ
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [s]
Max
- [s]
Factory setting
- [s]
Displays the effective filter time for a squarewave encoder.
The filter time is set using p0438.
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency:
Refer to: p0438
Note:
A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present.
p0453[0...n]
Measuring time pulse encoder evaluation zero speed / t_meas enc_eva n_0
ENCODER,
Can be changed: C2(4)
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: FloatingPoint32
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.10 [ms]
Max
10000.00 [ms]
Factory setting
1000.00 [ms]
Description:
Sets the measuring time for evaluating zero speed.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0452
Note:
This function is required for slow-running motors so that actual speeds close to zero can be output correctly.
r0455
Encoder configuration recognized / Enc config act
If no further encoder pulses are detected during this time, a speed actual value of zero is output internally.
ENCODER
Description:
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the detected encoder configuration.
In this case, the encoder must automatically support the function (e.g. encoder with EnDat interface).
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-159
Parameter
List of parameters
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
20
21
22
23
Signal name
Linear encoder
Abs value encoder
Multiturn encoder
Track A/B sq-wave
Track A/B sinus
Track C/D
Hall sensor
EnDat encoder
SSI encoder
DRIVE-CLiQ encoder
Digital encoder
Equidistant zero mark
Irregular zero mark
Distance-coded zero mark
Commutation with zero mark (not ASM)
Acceleration
Track A/B analog
Voltage level 5 V
Voltage level 24 V
Remote sense (only SMC30)
Resolver excit.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0404
Note:
ZM: Zero mark
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
no
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
FP
-
This parameter is only used for diagnostics.
A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present.
Re bit 20, 21 (voltage level 5 V, voltage level 24 V):
The voltage level cannot be detected. Therefore, these bits are always set to 0.
r0455[0...2]
Encoder configuration recognized / Enc config act
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the detected encoder configuration.
In this case, the encoder must automatically support the function (e.g. encoder with EnDat interface).
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1-160
Signal name
Linear encoder
Abs value encoder
Multiturn encoder
Track A/B sq-wave
Track A/B sinus
Track C/D
Hall sensor
EnDat encoder
SSI encoder
DRIVE-CLiQ encoder
Digital encoder
Equidistant zero mark
Irregular zero mark
Distance-coded zero mark
Commutation with zero mark (not ASM)
Acceleration
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
no
No
No
No
No
No
FP
-
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
17
20
21
22
23
Track A/B analog
Voltage level 5 V
Voltage level 24 V
Remote sense (only SMC30)
Resolver excit.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0404
Note:
ZM: Zero mark
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
This parameter is only used for diagnostics.
A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present.
Re bit 20, 21 (voltage level 5 V, voltage level 24 V):
The voltage level cannot be detected. Therefore, these bits are always set to 0.
r0456
Encoder configuration supported / Enc config supp
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Contains the encoder configuration supported by the Sensor Module.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
20
21
22
23
Dependency:
Refer to: p0404
Note:
ZM: Zero mark
Signal name
Linear encoder
Abs value encoder
Multiturn encoder
Track A/B sq-wave
Track A/B sinus
Track C/D
Hall sensor
EnDat encoder
SSI encoder
DRIVE-CLiQ encoder
Digital encoder
Equidistant zero mark
Irregular zero mark
Distance-coded zero mark
Commutation with zero mark (not ASM)
Acceleration
Track A/B analog
Voltage level 5 V
Voltage level 24 V
Remote sense (only SMC30)
Resolver excit.
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
no
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
FP
-
This parameter is only used for diagnostics.
A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-161
Parameter
List of parameters
r0456[0...2]
Encoder configuration supported / Enc config supp
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Contains the encoder configuration supported by the Sensor Module.
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
20
21
22
23
Dependency:
Refer to: p0404
Note:
ZM: Zero mark
Signal name
Linear encoder
Abs value encoder
Multiturn encoder
Track A/B sq-wave
Track A/B sinus
Track C/D
Hall sensor
EnDat encoder
SSI encoder
DRIVE-CLiQ encoder
Digital encoder
Equidistant zero mark
Irregular zero mark
Distance-coded zero mark
Commutation with zero mark (not ASM)
Acceleration
Track A/B analog
Voltage level 5 V
Voltage level 24 V
Remote sense (only SMC30)
Resolver excit.
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
no
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
FP
-
This parameter is only used for diagnostics.
A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present.
r0458
Sensor Module properties / SM properties
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 4704
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Sets the Sensor Module configuration.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
1-162
Signal name
Encoder data available
Motor data available
Temperature sensor connection available
Connection for PTC for motor with DRIVECLiQ also available
Module temperature available
Absolute encoder p0408/p0421, no power
of 2
Sensor Module permits parking/unparking
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
FP
-
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
31
Hall sensor can be combined with actual
value inversion
Evaluation through several temperature
channels possible
Encoder fault and its associated information
available
Speed diagnostics in the Sensor Module
Configuring without park state possible
Extended functions available
Extended encoder fault handling
Extended singleturn/multiturn information
available
Valuation figures available
Pole position identification
Burst oversampling
Safety position actual value sensing
Extended speed calculation being used
(only SMC30)
Zero mark tolerance
Rot pos adapt
Commutation with zero mark can be deselected
Commutation with selected zero mark
Disconnection of encoder power supply on
parking supported
SSI position value extrapolation
Cubic correction
Phase correction
Amplitude correction
Offset correction
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Dependency:
Refer to: p0437, p0600, p0601
Note:
A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present.
Re bit 11:
When the property is set, the following parameters can be changed without the actual value in the encoder interface
becoming invalid (state r0481.14 = 1 "parking encoder active"):
p0314, p0315, p0430, p0431, p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445
Re bit 12:
The extended functions can be configured using p0437.
Re bit 13:
Encoder faults can be acknowledged via Gn_STW.15.
Re bit 14:
Only for internal Siemens use.
Re bit 23:
When the property is set, commutation with zero mark can be deselected using p0430.23.
Re bit 24:
If the property is set, commutation to the selected zero mark can be carried out.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-163
Parameter
List of parameters
r0458
Sensor Module properties / SM properties
ENCODER (Lin enc) Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 4704
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Sets the Sensor Module configuration.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
31
Signal name
Encoder data available
Motor data available
Temperature sensor connection available
Connection for PTC for motor with DRIVECLiQ also available
Module temperature available
Absolute encoder p0408/p0421, no power
of 2
Sensor Module permits parking/unparking
Hall sensor can be combined with actual
value inversion
Evaluation through several temperature
channels possible
Encoder fault and its associated information
available
Velocity diagnostics in the Sensor Module
Configuring without park state possible
Extended functions available
Extended encoder fault handling
Extended singleturn/multiturn information
available
Valuation figures available
Pole position identification
Burst oversampling
Safety position actual value sensing
Extended velocity calculation available (only
SMC30)
Zero mark tolerance
Rot pos adapt
Commutation with zero mark can be deselected
Commutation with selected zero mark
Disconnection of encoder power supply on
parking supported
SSI position value extrapolation
Cubic correction
Phase correction
Amplitude correction
Offset correction
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
FP
-
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Dependency:
Refer to: p0437, p0600, p0601
Note:
A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present.
Re bit 11:
When the property is set, the following parameters can be changed without the actual value in the encoder interface
becoming invalid (state r0481.14 = 1 "parking encoder active"):
p0314, p0315, p0430, p0431, p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445
Re bit 12:
The extended functions can be configured using p0437.
Re bit 13:
Encoder faults can be acknowledged via Gn_STW.15.
1-164
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
Re bit 14:
Only for internal Siemens use.
Re bit 23:
When the property is set, commutation with zero mark can be deselected using p0430.23.
Re bit 24:
If the property is set, commutation to the selected zero mark can be carried out.
r0458[0...2]
Sensor Module properties / SM properties
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 4704
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Sets the Sensor Module configuration.
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
31
Dependency:
Signal name
Encoder data available
Motor data available
Temperature sensor connection available
Connection for PTC for motor with DRIVECLiQ also available
Module temperature available
Absolute encoder p0408/p0421, no power
of 2
Sensor Module permits parking/unparking
Hall sensor can be combined with actual
value inversion
Evaluation through several temperature
channels possible
Encoder fault and its associated information
available
Speed diagnostics in the Sensor Module
Configuring without park state possible
Extended functions available
Extended encoder fault handling
Extended singleturn/multiturn information
available
Valuation figures available
Pole position identification
Burst oversampling
Safety position actual value sensing
Extended speed calculation being used
(only SMC30)
Zero mark tolerance
Rot pos adapt
Commutation with zero mark can be deselected
Commutation with selected zero mark
Disconnection of encoder power supply on
parking supported
SSI position value extrapolation
Cubic correction
Phase correction
Amplitude correction
Offset correction
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
FP
-
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Refer to: p0437, p0600, p0601
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-165
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present.
Re bit 11:
When the property is set, the following parameters can be changed without the actual value in the encoder interface
becoming invalid (state r0481.14 = 1 "parking encoder active"):
p0314, p0315, p0430, p0431, p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445
Re bit 12:
The extended functions can be configured using p0437.
Re bit 13:
Encoder faults can be acknowledged via Gn_STW.15.
Re bit 14:
Only for internal Siemens use.
Re bit 23:
When the property is set, commutation with zero mark can be deselected using p0430.23.
Re bit 24:
If the property is set, commutation to the selected zero mark can be carried out.
r0459
Sensor Module properties extended / SM prop ext
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the extended properties supported by the Sensor Module.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
04
05
06
07
09
10
11
26
28
29
31
Signal name
Activating the data logger
Zero mark edge detection
Correction position actual value XIST1
Edge evaluation
Edge evaluation
Freeze the speed actual value for dn/dt
errors
Accumulate uncorrected encoder pulses
Support function p0426, p0439
Pulse/direction interface
Automatic alarm acknowledgment
Track monitoring deselection
EnDat linear encoder monitoring incremental/absolute
EnDat encoder initialization with high accuracy
Analog unipolar track monitoring
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
FP
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Dependency:
Refer to: p0437
Note:
A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present.
Re bit 09:
Parameter p0426 or p0439 has been modified. These functions are not supported by the connected Sensor Module.
1-166
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
r0459
Sensor Module properties extended / SM prop ext
ENCODER (Lin enc) Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the extended properties supported by the Sensor Module.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
04
05
06
07
09
10
11
26
28
29
31
Signal name
Activating the data logger
Zero mark edge detection
Correction position actual value XIST1
Edge evaluation
Edge evaluation
Freeze actual velocity for dn/dt errors
Accumulate uncorrected encoder pulses
Support function p0426, p0439
Pulse/direction interface
Automatic alarm acknowledgment
Track monitoring deselection
EnDat linear encoder monitoring incremental/absolute
EnDat encoder initialization with high accuracy
Analog unipolar track monitoring
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
FP
-
Yes
No
Yes
No
Dependency:
Refer to: p0437
Note:
A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present.
Re bit 09:
Parameter p0426 or p0439 has been modified. These functions are not supported by the connected Sensor Module.
r0459[0...2]
Sensor Module properties extended / SM prop ext
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the extended properties supported by the Sensor Module.
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
04
05
06
07
09
10
11
Signal name
Activating the data logger
Zero mark edge detection
Correction position actual value XIST1
Edge evaluation
Edge evaluation
Freeze the speed actual value for dn/dt
errors
Accumulate uncorrected encoder pulses
Support function p0426, p0439
Pulse/direction interface
Automatic alarm acknowledgment
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
FP
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-167
Parameter
List of parameters
26
28
29
31
Track monitoring deselection
EnDat linear encoder monitoring incremental/absolute
EnDat encoder initialization with high accuracy
Analog unipolar track monitoring
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Dependency:
Refer to: p0437
Note:
A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present.
Re bit 09:
Parameter p0426 or p0439 has been modified. These functions are not supported by the connected Sensor Module.
r0460
Encoder serial number part 1 / Enc ser_no 1
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the actual serial number part 1 of the appropriate encoder.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0461, r0462, r0463, r0464
r0460[0...2]
Encoder serial number part 1 / Enc ser_no 1
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the actual serial number part 1 of the appropriate encoder.
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency:
Refer to: p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0461, r0462, r0463, r0464
r0461
Encoder serial number part 2 / Enc ser_no 2
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the actual serial number part 2 of the appropriate encoder.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0460, r0462, r0463, r0464
1-168
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
r0461[0...2]
Encoder serial number part 2 / Enc ser_no 2
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the actual serial number part 2 of the appropriate encoder.
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency:
Refer to: p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0460, r0462, r0463, r0464
r0462
Encoder serial number part 3 / Enc ser_no 3
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the actual serial number part 3 of the appropriate encoder.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0460, r0461, r0463, r0464
r0462[0...2]
Encoder serial number part 3 / Enc ser_no 3
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the actual serial number part 3 of the appropriate encoder.
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency:
Refer to: p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0460, r0461, r0463, r0464
r0463
Encoder serial number part 4 / Enc ser_no 4
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the actual serial number part 4 of the appropriate encoder.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0460, r0461, r0462, r0464
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-169
Parameter
List of parameters
r0463[0...2]
Encoder serial number part 4 / Enc ser_no 4
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the actual serial number part 4 of the appropriate encoder.
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency:
Refer to: p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0460, r0461, r0462, r0464
r0464
Encoder serial number part 5 / Enc ser_no 5
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the actual serial number part 5 of the appropriate encoder.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0460, r0461, r0462, r0463
r0464[0...2]
Encoder serial number part 5 / Enc ser_no 5
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the actual serial number part 5 of the appropriate encoder.
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency:
Refer to: p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0460, r0461, r0462, r0463
1-170
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
r0465[0...27]
Encoder 1 identification number/serial number / Enc1 ID_no/Ser_no
ENCODER,
Can be changed: VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Unsigned8
0
P-Group: Encoder
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the serial number of encoder 1.
Index 0 = first character of the identification number
...
Index x = 20 hex (blank) --> separation between the identification number of serial number
Index x + 1 = 2F hex (slash) --> separation between the identification number of serial number
Index x + 2 = 20 hex (blank) --> separation between the identification number of serial number
Index x + 3 = first character of the serial number
...
Index y with contents = last character of the serial number
Dependency:
Refer to: r0460, r0461, r0462, r0463, r0464
Notice:
An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the Appendix of the List Manual:
Note:
The individual characters of the identification number/serial number are available coded as ASCII characters.
r0466[0...27]
Encoder 2 identification number/serial number / Enc2 ID_no/Ser_no
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned8
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the serial number of encoder 2.
Index 0 = first character of the identification number
...
Index x = 20 hex (blank) --> separation between the identification number of serial number
Index x + 1 = 2F hex (slash) --> separation between the identification number of serial number
Index x + 2 = 20 hex (blank) --> separation between the identification number of serial number
Index x + 3 = first character of the serial number
...
Index y with contents = last character of the serial number
Dependency:
Refer to: r0460, r0461, r0462, r0463, r0464
Notice:
An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the Appendix of the List Manual:
Note:
The individual characters of the identification number/serial number are available coded as ASCII characters.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-171
Parameter
List of parameters
r0467[0...27]
Encoder 3 identification number/serial number / Enc3 ID_no/Ser_no
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned8
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the serial number of encoder 3.
Index 0 = first character of the identification number
...
Index x = 20 hex (blank) --> separation between the identification number of serial number
Index x + 1 = 2F hex (slash) --> separation between the identification number of serial number
Index x + 2 = 20 hex (blank) --> separation between the identification number of serial number
Index x + 3 = first character of the serial number
...
Index y with contents = last character of the serial number
Dependency:
Refer to: r0460, r0461, r0462, r0463, r0464
Notice:
An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the Appendix of the List Manual:
Note:
The individual characters of the identification number/serial number are available coded as ASCII characters.
r0470
Redundant coarse value valid bits / Valid bits
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the valid bits of the redundant coarse position value.
Dependency:
Refer to: p9323, p9523
r0470[0...2]
Redundant coarse value valid bits / Valid bits
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned16
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the valid bits of the redundant coarse position value.
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency:
Refer to: p9323, p9523
1-172
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
r0471
Redundant coarse value fine resolution bits / Fine bit
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the number of valid bits for the fine resolution of the redundant coarse position value.
Dependency:
Refer to: p9324, p9524
r0471[0...2]
Redundant coarse value fine resolution bits / Fine bit
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Integer16
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the number of valid bits for the fine resolution of the redundant coarse position value.
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency:
Refer to: p9324, p9524
r0472
Redundant coarse position value relevant bits / Relevant bits
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the number of relevant bits for the redundant coarse position value.
r0472[0...2]
Redundant coarse position value relevant bits / Relevant bits
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned16
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the number of relevant bits for the redundant coarse position value.
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-173
Parameter
List of parameters
r0474
Redundant coarse position value configuration / Red pos config
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the encoder configuration for the redundant coarse position value.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
Dependency:
Refer to: p9315, p9515
r0474[0...2]
Redundant coarse position value configuration / Red pos config
Signal name
Incrementer
Encoder CRC least significant byte first
Redundant coarse position val. most significant bit left-aligned
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned32
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the encoder configuration for the redundant coarse position value.
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
Dependency:
Refer to: p9315, p9515
r0475
Gx_XIST1 coarse position safe most significant bit / Gx_XIST1 safe MSB
ENCODER
Signal name
Incrementer
Encoder CRC least significant byte first
Redundant coarse position val. most significant bit left-aligned
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the bit number for the safe most significant bit (MSB) of the Gx_XIST1 coarse position.
Note:
MSB: Most Significant Bit
1-174
FP
-
FP
-
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
r0475[0...2]
Gx_XIST1 coarse position safe most significant bit / Gx_XIST1 safe MSB
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned16
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the bit number for the safe most significant bit (MSB) of the Gx_XIST1 coarse position.
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Note:
MSB: Most Significant Bit
r0477
CO: Measuring gear, position difference / Meas gear pos diff
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Data type: Integer32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the position difference before the measuring gear between powering down and powering up.
Dependency:
Refer to: F31501, F32501, F33501
Note:
The increments are displayed in the format the same as r0483. The position difference should be read in encoder
increments.
r0477[0...2]
CO: Measuring gear, position difference / Meas gear pos diff
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Integer32
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the position difference before the measuring gear between powering down and powering up.
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency:
Refer to: F31501, F32501, F33501
Note:
The increments are displayed in the format the same as r0483. The position difference should be read in encoder
increments.
r0479
CO: Diagnostics encoder position actual value Gn_XIST1 / Diag Gn_XIST1
ENCODER
Description:
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Integer32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 4704
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the encoder actual position value Gn_XIST1 according to PROFIdrive for diagnostics.
In contrast to p0482, the value is updated in each DRIVE-CLiQ basic clock cycle and displayed with sign.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-175
Parameter
List of parameters
Caution:
Following ramping-up or after a data set changeover, the new value is present at connector inputs which are interconnected to connector output r0479 and under certain circumstances take 100 ms to become available. Reason:
These interconnections are updated in the background, unlike interconnections involving other connector outputs
(e.g. CO: r0482).
The value is immediately available when non-cyclically reading r0479 (e.g. via the expert list).
r0479[0...2]
CO: Diagnostics encoder position actual value Gn_XIST1 / Diag Gn_XIST1
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Integer32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 4704
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the encoder actual position value Gn_XIST1 according to PROFIdrive for diagnostics.
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Caution:
Following ramping-up or after a data set changeover, the new value is present at connector inputs which are interconnected to connector output r0479 and under certain circumstances take 100 ms to become available. Reason:
These interconnections are updated in the background, unlike interconnections involving other connector outputs
(e.g. CO: r0482).
In contrast to p0482, the value is updated in each DRIVE-CLiQ basic clock cycle and displayed with sign.
The value is immediately available when non-cyclically reading r0479 (e.g. via the expert list).
p0480
CI: Signal source for encoder control word Gn_STW / Enc S_src Gn_STW
ENCODER
Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1580, 4720
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for the encoder control word Gn_STW according to PROFIdrive.
Note:
When the function module "basic positioner" (r0108.4 = 1) is activated, the following BICO interconnection is established:
CI: p0480[0] = r2520[0], CI: p0480[1] = r2520[1] and CI: p0480[2] = r2520[2]
p0480[0...2]
CI: Signal source for encoder control word Gn_STW / Enc S_src Gn_STW
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer16
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1580, 4720
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for the encoder control word Gn_STW according to PROFIdrive.
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Note:
When the function module "basic positioner" (r0108.4 = 1) is activated, the following BICO interconnection is established:
CI: p0480[0] = r2520[0], CI: p0480[1] = r2520[1] and CI: p0480[2] = r2520[2]
1-176
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
r0481
CO: Encoder status word Gn_ZSW / Enc Gn_ZSW
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 4010, 4704,
4730
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the encoder status word Gn_ZSW according to PROFIdrive.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
11
13
14
15
Notice:
Information on Gn_STW/Gn_ZSW can, e.g. be found in the following literature:
Signal name
Function 1 active
Function 2 active
Function 3 active
Function 4 active
Value 1
Value 2
Value 3
Value 4
Measuring probe 1 deflected
Measuring probe 2 deflected
Encoder fault acknowledge active
Absolute value cyclically
Parking encoder active
Encoder fault
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Displayed in r0483
Displayed in r0483
Displayed in r0483
Displayed in r0483
Yes
Yes
Yes
Displayed in r0483
Yes
Displayed in r0483
0 signal
No
No
No
No
Not present
Not present
Not present
Not present
No
No
No
No
No
None
FP
9676
-
SINAMICS S120 Function Manual Drive Functions
Note:
Re bit 14:
Displays the acknowledgement for "activate parking encoder" (Gn_STW.14 = 1) or encoder position actual value
(Gn_XIST1) invalid.
Re bit 14, 15:
r0481.14 = 1 and r0481.15 = 0 can have one of the following causes:
- the encoder is parked.
- the encoder is deactivated.
- the encoder is being commissioned.
- no parameterized encoder available.
- encoder data set is being changed over.
r0481.14 = 1 and r0481.15 = 1 has the following significance:
An encoder error has occurred and the encoder position actual value (Gn_XIST1) is invalid.
r0481[0...2]
CO: Encoder status word Gn_ZSW / Enc Gn_ZSW
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned16
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 4010, 4704,
4730
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the encoder status word Gn_ZSW according to PROFIdrive.
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-177
Parameter
List of parameters
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
11
13
14
15
Signal name
Function 1 active
Function 2 active
Function 3 active
Function 4 active
Value 1
Value 2
Value 3
Value 4
Measuring probe 1 deflected
Measuring probe 2 deflected
Encoder fault acknowledge active
Absolute value cyclically
Parking encoder active
Encoder fault
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Displayed in r0483
Displayed in r0483
Displayed in r0483
Displayed in r0483
Yes
Yes
Yes
Displayed in r0483
Yes
Displayed in r0483
0 signal
No
No
No
No
Not present
Not present
Not present
Not present
No
No
No
No
No
None
Notice:
Information on Gn_STW/Gn_ZSW can, e.g. be found in the following literature:
FP
9676
-
SINAMICS S120 Function Manual Drive Functions
Note:
Re bit 14:
Displays the acknowledgement for "activate parking encoder" (Gn_STW.14 = 1) or encoder position actual value
(Gn_XIST1) invalid.
Re bit 14, 15:
r0481.14 = 1 and r0481.15 = 0 can have one of the following causes:
- the encoder is parked.
- the encoder is deactivated.
- the encoder is being commissioned.
- no parameterized encoder available.
- encoder data set is being changed over.
r0481.14 = 1 and r0481.15 = 1 has the following significance:
An encoder error has occurred and the encoder position actual value (Gn_XIST1) is invalid.
r0482
CO: Encoder actual position value Gn_XIST1 / Enc Gn_XIST1
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1580, 2450,
4010, 4704, 4735, 4740
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the encoder actual position value Gn_XIST1 according to PROFIdrive.
Note:
- this value is reset if necessary when the "parking axis" function is deselected.
- in this value, the measuring gear (p0432, p0433) is only taken into account when the position tracking is activated
(p0411.0 = 1).
r0482[0...2]
CO: Encoder actual position value Gn_XIST1 / Enc Gn_XIST1
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1580, 2450,
4010, 4704, 4735, 4740
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the encoder actual position value Gn_XIST1 according to PROFIdrive.
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
1-178
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
- this value is reset if necessary when the "parking axis" function is deselected.
- in this value, the measuring gear (p0432, p0433) is only taken into account when the position tracking is activated
(p0411.0 = 1).
r0483
CO: Encoder actual position value Gn_XIST2 / Enc Gn_XIST2
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1580, 2450,
4010, 4704
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the encoder actual position value Gn_XIST2 according to PROFIdrive.
Recommend.:
Possible causes of the error codes:
Error code 4097 and 4098: Defective Control Unit hardware.
Error codes 4099 and 4100: Too many measuring pulses have occurred.
Notice:
The encoder position actual value must be requested using the encoder control word Gn_STW.13.
Note:
- in this value, the measuring gear (p0432, p0433) is only taken into account when the position tracking is activated
(p0411.0 = 1).
- if GxZSW.15 = 1 (r0481), then an error code with the following significance is located in Gx_XIST2 (r0483):
1: Encoder fault.
2: Possible position shift in Gx_XIST1.
3: Reserved.
4: Abort, reference mark search.
5: Abort, retrieve reference value.
6: Abort, flying measurement.
7: Abort, retrieve measured value.
8: Abort, absolute value transfer.
3841: Function not supported.
4097: Abort, reference mark search due to an initialization error.
4098: Abort, flying measurement due to an initialization error.
4099: Abort, reference mark search due to a measuring error.
4100: Abort, flying measurement due to a measuring error.
r0483[0...2]
CO: Encoder actual position value Gn_XIST2 / Enc Gn_XIST2
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1580, 2450,
4010, 4704
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the encoder actual position value Gn_XIST2 according to PROFIdrive.
Recommend.:
Possible causes of the error codes:
Error code 4097 and 4098: Defective Control Unit hardware.
Error codes 4099 and 4100: Too many measuring pulses have occurred.
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Notice:
The encoder position actual value must be requested using the encoder control word Gn_STW.13.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-179
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
- in this value, the measuring gear (p0432, p0433) is only taken into account when the position tracking is activated
(p0411.0 = 1).
- if GxZSW.15 = 1 (r0481), then an error code with the following significance is located in Gx_XIST2 (r0483):
1: Encoder fault.
2: Possible position shift in Gx_XIST1.
3: Reserved.
4: Abort, reference mark search.
5: Abort, retrieve reference value.
6: Abort, flying measurement.
7: Abort, retrieve measured value.
8: Abort, absolute value transfer.
3841: Function not supported.
4097: Abort, reference mark search due to an initialization error.
4098: Abort, flying measurement due to an initialization error.
4099: Abort, reference mark search due to a measuring error.
4100: Abort, flying measurement due to a measuring error.
r0484
CO: Redundant coarse encoder position + CRC Gn_XIST1 / Enc red pos+CRC
ENCODER
Description:
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the redundant coarse encoder position including CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check).
Upper 16 bits:
CRC over the redundant coarse encoder position.
Lower 16 bits:
Redundant coarse encoder position.
On SMx encoder modules, the encoder coarse position count direction is opposite to r0482 (encoder actual value
Gn_XIST1). The value contains 2 bit fine resolution.
On DRIVE-CLiQ encoders, the encoder coarse position count direction corresponds to r0482 and the encoder
coarse position contains 9 valid bits and no fine resolution bits.
Dependency:
The values are valid when the safety position actual value sensing is activated (p0430.19 = 1).
Refer to: p0430
Note:
This absolute value does not change, contrary to r0482, when deselecting the function "parking axis".
r0484[0...2]
CO: Redundant coarse encoder position + CRC Gn_XIST1 / Enc red pos+CRC
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the redundant coarse encoder position including CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check).
Upper 16 bits:
CRC over the redundant coarse encoder position.
Lower 16 bits:
Redundant coarse encoder position.
On SMx encoder modules, the encoder coarse position count direction is opposite to r0482 (encoder actual value
Gn_XIST1). The value contains 2 bit fine resolution.
On DRIVE-CLiQ encoders, the encoder coarse position count direction corresponds to r0482 and the encoder
coarse position contains 9 valid bits and no fine resolution bits.
1-180
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency:
The values are valid when the safety position actual value sensing is activated (p0430.19 = 1).
Refer to: p0430
Note:
This absolute value does not change, contrary to r0482, when deselecting the function "parking axis".
r0485
CO: Measuring gear, encoder raw value incremental / Enc raw val incr
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the raw value of the incremental encoder actual value before the measuring gear.
r0485[0...2]
CO: Measuring gear, encoder raw value incremental / Enc raw val incr
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned32
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the raw value of the incremental encoder actual value before the measuring gear.
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
r0486
CO: Measuring gear, encoder raw value absolute / Enc raw val abs
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the raw value of the absolute encoder actual value before the measuring gear.
r0486[0...2]
CO: Measuring gear, encoder raw value absolute / Enc raw val abs
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned32
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the raw value of the absolute encoder actual value before the measuring gear.
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-181
Parameter
List of parameters
r0487
Diagnostic encoder control word Gn_STW / Enc Gn_STW
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1580, 4704,
4720, 4740
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the encoder control word Gn_STW according to PROFIdrive for diagnostics.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
13
14
15
Signal name
Request function 1
Request function 2
Request function 3
Request function 4
Request command bit 0
Request command bit 1
Request command bit 2
Flying measurement mode/search for reference mark
Request absolute value cyclic
Request parking encoder
Request acknowledge encoder fault
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Flying measurement
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Reference marks
FP
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Notice:
Information on Gn_STW/Gn_ZSW should be taken from the corresponding product documentation.
Note:
The signal source for the encoder control word is set with p0480.
r0487[0...2]
Diagnostic encoder control word Gn_STW / Enc Gn_STW
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned16
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1580, 4704,
4720, 4740
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the encoder control word Gn_STW according to PROFIdrive for diagnostics.
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
13
14
15
Signal name
Request function 1
Request function 2
Request function 3
Request function 4
Request command bit 0
Request command bit 1
Request command bit 2
Flying measurement mode/search for reference mark
Request absolute value cyclic
Request parking encoder
Request acknowledge encoder fault
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Flying measurement
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Reference marks
FP
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Notice:
Information on Gn_STW/Gn_ZSW should be taken from the corresponding product documentation.
Note:
The signal source for the encoder control word is set with p0480.
1-182
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p0488
Measuring probe 1 input terminal / Meas probe 1 inp
ENCODER
Can be changed: U, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 4740
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
8
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the input terminal to connect probe 1.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
Dependency:
Refer to: p0489, p0728
Notice:
To select the values:
No measuring probe
DI/DO 9 (X122.10)
DI/DO 10 (X122.12)
DI/DO 11 (X122.13)
DI/DO 13 (X132.10)
DI/DO 14 (X132.12)
DI/DO 15 (X132.13)
DI/DO 8 (X122.9)
DI/DO 12 (X132.9)
For Cx32, NX10 and NX15, only DI/DO 8, 9, 10, 11 can be selected as fast inputs (refer to the Equipment Manual).
Note:
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
The terminal must be set as input (p0728).
Refer to the encoder interface for PROFIdrive.
If parameterization is rejected, check whether the terminal is already being used in p0580, p0680, p2517 or p2518.
p0488[0...2]
Measuring probe 1 input terminal / Meas probe 1 inp
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: Integer16
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 4740
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
8
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the input terminal to connect probe 1.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency:
Refer to: p0489, p0728
Notice:
To select the values:
No measuring probe
DI/DO 9 (X122.10)
DI/DO 10 (X122.12)
DI/DO 11 (X122.13)
DI/DO 13 (X132.10)
DI/DO 14 (X132.12)
DI/DO 15 (X132.13)
DI/DO 8 (X122.9)
DI/DO 12 (X132.9)
For Cx32, NX10 and NX15, only DI/DO 8, 9, 10, 11 can be selected as fast inputs (refer to the Equipment Manual).
Note:
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
The terminal must be set as input (p0728).
Refer to the encoder interface for PROFIdrive.
If parameterization is rejected, check whether the terminal is already being used in p0580, p0680, p2517 or p2518.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-183
Parameter
List of parameters
p0489
Measuring probe 2 input terminal / Meas probe 2 inp
ENCODER
Can be changed: U, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 4740
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
8
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the input terminal to connect probe 2.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
Dependency:
Refer to: p0488, p0728
Notice:
To select the values:
No measuring probe
DI/DO 9 (X122.10)
DI/DO 10 (X122.12)
DI/DO 11 (X122.13)
DI/DO 13 (X132.10)
DI/DO 14 (X132.12)
DI/DO 15 (X132.13)
DI/DO 8 (X122.9)
DI/DO 12 (X132.9)
For Cx32, NX10 and NX15, only DI/DO 8, 9, 10, 11 can be selected as fast inputs (refer to the Equipment Manual).
Note:
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
The terminal must be set as input (p0728).
Refer to the encoder interface for PROFIdrive.
If parameterization is rejected, check whether the terminal is already being used in p0580, p0680, p2517 or p2518.
p0489[0...2]
Measuring probe 2 input terminal / Meas probe 2 inp
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: Integer16
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 4740
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
8
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the input terminal to connect probe 2.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency:
Refer to: p0488, p0728
Notice:
To select the values:
No measuring probe
DI/DO 9 (X122.10)
DI/DO 10 (X122.12)
DI/DO 11 (X122.13)
DI/DO 13 (X132.10)
DI/DO 14 (X132.12)
DI/DO 15 (X132.13)
DI/DO 8 (X122.9)
DI/DO 12 (X132.9)
For Cx32, NX10 and NX15, only DI/DO 8, 9, 10, 11 can be selected as fast inputs (refer to the Equipment Manual).
Note:
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
The terminal must be set as input (p0728).
Refer to the encoder interface for PROFIdrive.
If parameterization is rejected, check whether the terminal is already being used in p0580, p0680, p2517 or p2518.
1-184
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p0491
Motor encoder fault response ENCODER / Fault resp ENCODER
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Integer16
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
4
Factory setting
0
Sets the behavior for the ENCODER fault response (motor encoder).
This means, for example, if an encoder fault occurs, encoderless operation can be automatically selected with a
shutdown behavior that can be selected.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
Encoder fault results in OFF2
Enc fault results in encoderless oper. and oper. continues
Encoder fault results in encoderless operation and OFF1
Encoder fault results in encoderless operation and OFF3
Encoder fault results in an armature short-cct internal/DC brake
Dependency:
The following parameters are relevant for encoderless operation.
Refer to: p0341, p0342, p1470, p1472, p1517, p1612, p1755
Refer to: F07575
Caution:
For a value = 1, 2, 3, the following applies:
- encoderless operation must have been started.
For a value = 1, the following applies:
- in spite of the motor encoder fault that has occurred, the motor continues to operate.
Note:
For a value = 1, 2, 3, the following applies:
- Refer to the status signal "encoderless operation due to a fault" (BO: r1407.13).
- Not possible for separately excited synchronous motors (p0300 = 5).
p0492
Square-wave encoder, maximum speed difference per sampling cycle /
n_dif max/samp_cyc
ENCODER
Can be changed: U, T
Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG
Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
210000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.00 [rpm]
Description:
Sets the maximum permissible speed difference within the current controller sampling time for squarewave encoders.
Dependency:
Refer to: F31118, A31418
Note:
For a value of 0.0, the speed change monitoring is disabled.
if the set maximum speed difference is only exceeded for one sampling time of the current controller, then an
appropriate alarm is output. However, if the maximum speed difference is exceeded over several sampling times,
then a corresponding fault is output.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-185
Parameter
List of parameters
p0492
Square-wave encoder, max. velocity difference per sampling cycle /
v_dif max/samp_cyc
ENCODER (Lin enc) Can be changed: U, T
Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG
Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [m/min]
Max
1000.00 [m/min]
Factory setting
0.00 [m/min]
Description:
Sets the maximum permissible velocity difference within the current controller sampling time for square-wave
encoders.
Dependency:
Refer to: F31118, A31418
Note:
For a value of 0.0, velocity change monitoring is disabled.
if the set maximum velocity difference is only exceeded for one sampling time of the current controller, then an
appropriate alarm is output. However, if the maximum speed difference is exceeded over several sampling times,
then a corresponding fault is output.
p0492
Square-wave encoder, maximum speed difference per sampling cycle /
n_dif max/samp_cyc
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
210000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.00 [rpm]
Sets the maximum permissible speed difference within the current controller sampling time for squarewave encoders.
When the value is exceeded, depending on p0491, either encoderless closed-loop speed/torque control is selected
or the drive is powered down.
Dependency:
Refer to: F31118, A31418, F32118, A32418, F33118, A33418
Note:
For a value of 0.0, the speed change monitoring is disabled.
if the set maximum speed difference is only exceeded for one sampling time of the current controller, then an
appropriate alarm is output. However, if the maximum speed difference is exceeded over several sampling times,
then a corresponding fault is output.
The following applies for VECTOR:
The parameter is only pre-assigned when selecting p0340 = 1, 3.
The following applies for SERVO, VECTORMV:
The speed actual value used for the monitoring is a floating average between p0115[0] and p0115[1].
p0493
Zero mark selection, input terminal / ZM_sel inp_term
ENCODER
Description:
Can be changed: U, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
8
Factory setting
0
Sets the input terminal for selecting the reference mark via BERO/switching signal when performing referencing
with several zero marks.
The encoder interface supplies the position of the reference mark, which was detected immediately after the positive edge of the BERO signal.
1-186
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
No selection via BERO
DI/DO 9 (X122.10)
DI/DO 10 (X122.12)
DI/DO 11 (X122.13)
DI/DO 13 (X132.10)
DI/DO 14 (X132.12)
DI/DO 15 (X132.13)
DI/DO 8 (X122.9)
DI/DO 12 (X132.9)
Notice:
For CU310, CX32, NX10 and NX15, only DI/DO 9, 10, 11 can be selected as fast inputs (refer to the Equipment
Manual).
Note:
Refer to the encoder interface for PROFIdrive.
The terminal must be set as input (p0728).
For p0493 = 0 (factory setting) the following applies:
- there is no logic operation between the reference mark search and an input signal.
For p0493 > 0, the following applies:
- the positive edge of the input signal is evaluated. If the negative edge is to be evaluated, signal inversion must be
parameterized via p0490.
- if a parameter change is rejected, a check should be performed as to whether the input terminal is already being
used in p0580, p0680, p2517, or p2518.
p0493[0...n]
Zero mark selection, input terminal / ZM_sel inp_term
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: Integer16
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
8
Factory setting
0
Sets the input terminal for selecting the reference mark via BERO/switching signal when performing referencing
with several zero marks.
The encoder interface supplies the position of the reference mark, which was detected immediately after the positive edge of the BERO signal.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
No selection via BERO
DI/DO 9 (X122.10)
DI/DO 10 (X122.12)
DI/DO 11 (X122.13)
DI/DO 13 (X132.10)
DI/DO 14 (X132.12)
DI/DO 15 (X132.13)
DI/DO 8 (X122.9)
DI/DO 12 (X132.9)
Notice:
For CU310, CX32, NX10 and NX15, only DI/DO 9, 10, 11 can be selected as fast inputs (refer to the Equipment
Manual).
Note:
Refer to the encoder interface for PROFIdrive.
The terminal must be set as input (p0728).
For p0493 = 0 (factory setting) the following applies:
- there is no logic operation between the reference mark search and an input signal.
For p0493 > 0, the following applies:
- the positive edge of the input signal is evaluated. If the negative edge is to be evaluated, signal inversion must be
parameterized via p0490.
- if a parameter change is rejected, a check should be performed as to whether the input terminal is already being
used in p0580, p0680, p2517, or p2518.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-187
Parameter
List of parameters
p0495
Equivalent zero mark, input terminal / Zero mark inp
ENCODER
Can be changed: U, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 4735
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
8
Factory setting
0
Description:
Selects the input terminal for connecting an equivalent zero mark (external encoder zero mark).
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
Notice:
For CU310, CX32, NX10 and NX15, only DI/DO 9, 10, 11 can be selected as fast inputs (refer to the Equipment
Manual).
Note:
Refer to the encoder interface for PROFIdrive.
No equivalent zero mark (evaluation of the encoder zero mark)
DI/DO 9 (X122.10)
DI/DO 10 (X122.12)
DI/DO 11 (X122.13)
DI/DO 13 (X132.10)
DI/DO 14 (X132.12)
DI/DO 15 (X132.13)
DI/DO 8 (X122.9)
DI/DO 12 (X132.9)
The terminal must be set as input.
For p0495 = 0 (factory setting), the encoder zero mark is evaluated as zero mark.
For p0495 > 0, the following applies:
Depending on the direction of motion, the positive or negative edge at the appropriate input is evaluated.
- increasing position actual values (r0482) --> the 0/1 edge is evaluated.
- decreasing position actual values (r0482) --> the 1/0 edge is evaluated.
Only one zero mark is supported. If function 2, 3 or 4 is selected, this results in a fault message in Gn_ZSW.
The inversion of the inputs via p0490 affects the function "referencing with equivalent zero mark". This is the reason
that the edge evaluation is interchanged as a function of the direction of motion.
An input can only be assigned to one encoder as measuring probe 1, 2 or equivalent zero mark. Exception: The
same encoder can be simultaneously used as measuring probe and equivalent zero mark as both functions cannot
be simultaneously requested.
p0495[0...2]
Equivalent zero mark, input terminal / Zero mark inp
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: Integer16
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 4735
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
8
Factory setting
0
Description:
Selects the input terminal for connecting an equivalent zero mark (external encoder zero mark).
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Notice:
For CU310, CX32, NX10 and NX15, only DI/DO 9, 10, 11 can be selected as fast inputs (refer to the Equipment
Manual).
1-188
No equivalent zero mark (evaluation of the encoder zero mark)
DI/DO 9 (X122.10)
DI/DO 10 (X122.12)
DI/DO 11 (X122.13)
DI/DO 13 (X132.10)
DI/DO 14 (X132.12)
DI/DO 15 (X132.13)
DI/DO 8 (X122.9)
DI/DO 12 (X132.9)
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
Refer to the encoder interface for PROFIdrive.
The terminal must be set as input.
For p0495 = 0 (factory setting), the encoder zero mark is evaluated as zero mark.
For p0495 > 0, the following applies:
Depending on the direction of motion, the positive or negative edge at the appropriate input is evaluated.
- increasing position actual values (r0482) --> the 0/1 edge is evaluated.
- decreasing position actual values (r0482) --> the 1/0 edge is evaluated.
Only one zero mark is supported. If function 2, 3 or 4 is selected, this results in a fault message in Gn_ZSW.
The inversion of the inputs via p0490 affects the function "referencing with equivalent zero mark". This is the reason
that the edge evaluation is interchanged as a function of the direction of motion.
An input can only be assigned to one encoder as measuring probe 1, 2 or equivalent zero mark. Exception: The
same encoder can be simultaneously used as measuring probe and equivalent zero mark as both functions cannot
be simultaneously requested.
p0496
Encoder diagnostic signal selection / Enc diag select
ENCODER
Can be changed: U, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
70
Factory setting
0
Description:
Selects the trace signal to be output in r0497, r0498 and r0499 for encoder diagnostics.
Value:
0:
1:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
20:
21:
22:
23:
24:
25:
30:
31:
32:
33:
40:
41:
42:
51:
52:
60:
61:
70:
Dependency:
Refer to: r0497, r0498, r0499
Inactive
r0497: Mechanical revolution
r0498: Raw value, track A, r0499: Raw value, track B
r0498: Fine position X (-A/2), r0499: Fine position Y (-B/2)
r0498: Fine position Phi, r0499: r0498: Offset correction X, r0499: Offset correction Y
r0498: Phase correction X, r0499: Amplitude correction Y
r0498: Cubic correction X, r0499: Fine position X
r0498: oversampling channel A, r0499: oversampling channel B
r0498: fan-out, amount, r0499: fan-out, number
r0498: Oversampling angle, r0499: Oversampling amount
r0498: Raw value, track C, r0499: Raw value, track D
r0498: CD position X (-D/2), r0499: CD position Y (C/2)
r0498: CD position Phi, r0499: CD pos. Phi - mech. revolution
r0497: Zero mark status
r0498: Raw value, track R, r0499: Zero mark status
r0498: Raw value, track A, r0499: Raw value, track R
r0497: Absolute position serial
r0497: Absolute position, incremental
r0497: Zero mark position
r0497: Correction absolute position difference
r0498: Raw temperature, r0499: Temperature in 0.1 C
r0498: Resistance in 0.1 Ohm, r0499: Temperature in 0.1 C
r0497: Resistance 2500 Ohm
r0497: Absolute speed difference (dn/dt)
r0497: Xact1 corrected quadrants
Analog sensor: r0498: raw val chann. A, r0499: raw val chann. B
Analog sensor: r0498: fine pos chann. A,r0499: fine pos chann. B
Resolver: r0498: Transformation ratio, r0499: phase
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-189
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
Re p0496 = 1: 360 <--> 2^32
Re p0496 = 10 (resolver): 2900 mV <--> 26214 dec
Re p0496 = 10, 20 (sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat): 500 mV <--> 21299 dec
Re p0496 = 11 (resolver): 2900 mV <--> 13107 dec, internal processor offset is corrected
Re p0496 = 11, 21 (sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat): 500 mV <--> 10650 dec, internal processor offset is corrected
Re p0496 = 12: 180 fine position <--> 32768 dec
Re p0496 = 13 (resolver): 2900 mV <--> 13107 dec
Re p0496 = 13 (sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat): 500 mV <--> 10650 dec
Re p0496 = 14: 100 % <--> 16384 dec
Re p0496 = 15: 100 % <--> 16384 dec
Re p0496 = 16: (resolver): channel A: 2900 mV <--> 26214 dec, channel B: 2900 mV <--> 26214 dec
Re p0496 = 16: (sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat) channel A: 500 mV <--> 21299 dec, channel B: 500 mV <--> 21299 dec
Re p0496 = 17 (resolver): absolute value: 2900 mV <--> 13107 dec, number: 1 ... 8
Re p0496 = 17 (sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat): absolute value 500 mV <--> 10650 dec, number: 1 ... 8
Re p0496 = 18 (resolver): angle: signal period <--> 2^16, absolute value: 2900 mV <--> 13107 dec
Re p0496 = 18 (sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat): angle: signal period <--> 2^16, absolute value: 500 mV <--> 10650 dec
Re p0496 = 22: 180 <--> 32768 dec
Re p0496 = 23, 24: r0497.31 (r0499.15) set for at least 1 current controller cycle when encoder zero mark detected
Re p0496 = 24, 25: 500 mV <--> 21299 dec
Re p0496 = 30: Rotary: 1 singleturn measuring step <--> 1 dec, linear: 1 measuring step <--> 1 dec
Re p0496 = 31: Absolute position, incremental in 1/4 encoder pulses
Re p0496 = 32: Zero mark position in 1/4 encoder pulses
Re p0496 = 33: counter offset absolute value in 1/4 encoder pulses
Re p0496 = 40: r0498 <--> (R_KTY/1 kOhm - 0.9) * 32768
Re p0496 = 42: 2500 Ohm <--> 2^32
Re p0496 = 51: 1 rpm <--> 1000 dec
Re p0496 = 52: In 1/4 encoder pulses
Re p0496 = 70: r: 100% <--> 32768 dec, phase: 180 <--> 18000 dec
p0496[0...2]
Encoder diagnostic signal selection / Enc diag select
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: Integer16
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
70
Factory setting
0
Description:
Selects the trace signal to be output in r0497, r0498 and r0499 for encoder diagnostics.
Value:
0:
1:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
20:
21:
22:
23:
24:
25:
30:
31:
1-190
Inactive
r0497: Mechanical revolution
r0498: Raw value, track A, r0499: Raw value, track B
r0498: Fine position X (-A/2), r0499: Fine position Y (-B/2)
r0498: Fine position Phi, r0499: r0498: Offset correction X, r0499: Offset correction Y
r0498: Phase correction X, r0499: Amplitude correction Y
r0498: Cubic correction X, r0499: Fine position X
r0498: oversampling channel A, r0499: oversampling channel B
r0498: fan-out, amount, r0499: fan-out, number
r0498: Oversampling angle, r0499: Oversampling amount
r0498: Raw value, track C, r0499: Raw value, track D
r0498: CD position X (-D/2), r0499: CD position Y (C/2)
r0498: CD position Phi, r0499: CD pos. Phi - mech. revolution
r0497: Zero mark status
r0498: Raw value, track R, r0499: Zero mark status
r0498: Raw value, track A, r0499: Raw value, track R
r0497: Absolute position serial
r0497: Absolute position, incremental
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
32:
33:
40:
41:
42:
51:
52:
60:
61:
70:
r0497: Zero mark position
r0497: Correction absolute position difference
r0498: Raw temperature, r0499: Temperature in 0.1 C
r0498: Resistance in 0.1 Ohm, r0499: Temperature in 0.1 C
r0497: Resistance 2500 Ohm
r0497: Absolute speed difference (dn/dt)
r0497: Xact1 corrected quadrants
Analog sensor: r0498: raw val chann. A, r0499: raw val chann. B
Analog sensor: r0498: fine pos chann. A,r0499: fine pos chann. B
Resolver: r0498: Transformation ratio, r0499: phase
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency:
Refer to: r0497, r0498, r0499
Note:
Re p0496 = 1: 360 <--> 2^32
Re p0496 = 10 (resolver): 2900 mV <--> 26214 dec
Re p0496 = 10, 20 (sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat): 500 mV <--> 21299 dec
Re p0496 = 11 (resolver): 2900 mV <--> 13107 dec, internal processor offset is corrected
Re p0496 = 11, 21 (sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat): 500 mV <--> 10650 dec, internal processor offset is corrected
Re p0496 = 12: 180 fine position <--> 32768 dec
Re p0496 = 13 (resolver): 2900 mV <--> 13107 dec
Re p0496 = 13 (sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat): 500 mV <--> 10650 dec
Re p0496 = 14: 100 % <--> 16384 dec
Re p0496 = 15: 100 % <--> 16384 dec
Re p0496 = 16: (resolver): channel A: 2900 mV <--> 26214 dec, channel B: 2900 mV <--> 26214 dec
Re p0496 = 16: (sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat) channel A: 500 mV <--> 21299 dec, channel B: 500 mV <--> 21299 dec
Re p0496 = 17 (resolver): absolute value: 2900 mV <--> 13107 dec, number: 1 ... 8
Re p0496 = 17 (sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat): absolute value 500 mV <--> 10650 dec, number: 1 ... 8
Re p0496 = 18 (resolver): angle: signal period <--> 2^16, absolute value: 2900 mV <--> 13107 dec
Re p0496 = 18 (sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat): angle: signal period <--> 2^16, absolute value: 500 mV <--> 10650 dec
Re p0496 = 22: 180 <--> 32768 dec
Re p0496 = 23, 24: r0497.31 (r0499.15) set for at least 1 current controller cycle when encoder zero mark detected
Re p0496 = 24, 25: 500 mV <--> 21299 dec
Re p0496 = 30: Rotary: 1 singleturn measuring step <--> 1 dec, linear: 1 measuring step <--> 1 dec
Re p0496 = 31: Absolute position, incremental in 1/4 encoder pulses
Re p0496 = 32: Zero mark position in 1/4 encoder pulses
Re p0496 = 33: counter offset absolute value in 1/4 encoder pulses
Re p0496 = 40: r0498 <--> (R_KTY/1 kOhm - 0.9) * 32768
Re p0496 = 42: 2500 Ohm <--> 2^32
Re p0496 = 51: 1 rpm <--> 1000 dec
Re p0496 = 52: In 1/4 encoder pulses
Re p0496 = 70: r: 100% <--> 32768 dec, phase: 180 <--> 18000 dec
r0497
Encoder diagnostic signal double word / Enc diag DW
ENCODER
Description:
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the trace signal for encoder diagnostics (double word).
The signal to be output is selected in p0496.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0496, r0498, r0499
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-191
Parameter
List of parameters
r0497[0...2]
CO: Encoder diagnostic signal double word / Enc diag DW
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the trace signal for encoder diagnostics (double word).
The signal to be output is selected in p0496.
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency:
Refer to: p0496, r0498, r0499
r0498
Encoder diagnostic signal low word / Enc diag low word
ENCODER
Description:
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the trace signal for encoder diagnostics (low component).
The signal to be output is selected in p0496.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0496, r0497, r0499
r0498[0...2]
CO: Encoder diagnostic signal low word / Enc diag low word
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Integer16
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the trace signal for encoder diagnostics (low component).
The signal to be output is selected in p0496.
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency:
Refer to: p0496, r0497, r0499
r0499
Encoder diagnostic signal high word / Enc diag high word
ENCODER
Description:
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the trace signal for encoder diagnostics (high component).
The signal to be output is selected in p0496.
Dependency:
1-192
Refer to: p0496, r0497, r0498
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
r0499[0...2]
CO: Encoder diagnostic signal high word / Enc diag high word
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Integer16
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the trace signal for encoder diagnostics (high component).
The signal to be output is selected in p0496.
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency:
Refer to: p0496, r0497, r0498
p0500
Technology application / Tec application
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(1, 5), T
0
Data type: Integer16
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Applications
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
2
Factory setting
1
Sets the technology application.
The parameter influences the calculation of open-loop and closed-loop control parameters that is e.g. initiated using
p0578.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
Standard drive (VECTOR)
Pumps and fans
Sensorless closed-loop control down to f = 0 (passive loads)
Dependency:
Refer to: p2175, p2177
Note:
The calculation of parameters dependent on the technology application can be called up as follows:
- when exiting quick commissioning using p3900 > 0
- when writing p0340 = 1, 3, 5
- when writing p0578 = 1
For p0500 = 0 and when the calculation is initiated, the following parameters are set:
p1574 = 10 V (for separately-excited synchronous motors: 20 V)
p1750 bit 2 = 0
p1802 = 4 (SVM/FLB without overcontrol)
p1803 = 106 %
For p0500 = 1 and when the calculation is initiated, the following parameters are set:
p1574 = 2 V (for separately-excited synchronous motors: 4 V)
p1750 bit 2 = 0
p1802 = 9 (edge modulation), if r0192 bit 0 = 1
p1802 = 4, if r0192 bit 0 = 0 or parallel circuit configuration with single-winding system (p7003)
p1803 = 106 %
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-193
Parameter
List of parameters
For p0500 = 2 and when the calculation is initiated, the following parameters are set:
p1574 = 2 V (for separately-excited synchronous motors: 4 V)
p1750 bit 2 = 1: Sensorless closed-loop control of induction motors effective up to a frequency of zero.
This operating mode is possible for passive loads. These include applications where the load does not generate
regenerative torque when breaking away and the motor comes to a standstill (zero speed) itself when the pulses
are inhibited.
p1802 = 4 (SVM/FLB without overcontrol)
p1803 = 106 %
The setting of p1750 is only relevant for induction motors.
p1802 and p1803 are only changed, in all cases, if a sine-wave output filter (p0230 = 3, 4) has not been selected.
p0505
Selecting the system of units / Select unit sys
ENCODER,
Can be changed: C2(5)
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Integer16
0
P-Group: Applications
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
4
Factory setting
1
Description:
Adjustable parameter of the actual system of units.
Value:
1:
2:
3:
4:
Dependency:
Caution:
The parameter cannot be changed if the master control was fetched.
If a per unit representation is selected and if reference parameters (e.g. p2000) are subsequently changed, then the
physical significance of some closed-loop control parameters will also be adapted where as a result, the closedloop control behavior can change (refer to p1576, p1621, p1744, p1752, p1755 and p1609, p1612, p1619, p1620).
Note:
Reference parameter for the unit system % are, for example, p2000 ... p2004. Depending on what has been
selected, these are displayed using either SI or US units.
p0528
Controller gain, system of units / Ctrl_gain unit_sys
ENCODER
Can be changed: C2(5)
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Applications
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
System of units SI
System of units, referred/SI
US system of units
System of units, referred/US
Description:
Sets the system of units for the controller gains.
Value:
0:
1:
Note:
For p0528 = 0 (physical/%), the following applies:
Representation, physical/% (p0505)
Representation, no dimensions (referred)
Using p0505, the dependent parameters can be changed over between physical and % representation.
For SERVO (r0107) the following applies:
The parameter is pre-assigned a value of 0 and cannot be changed.
1-194
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p0528
Controller gain, system of units / Ctrl_gain unit_sys
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(5)
0
Data type: Integer16
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Applications
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the system of units for the controller gains.
Value:
0:
1:
Note:
For VECTOR (r0107) the following applies:
Representation, physical/% (p0505)
Representation, no dimensions (referred)
The parameter is pre-assigned a value of 1 and cannot be changed.
p0530[0...n]
Bearing type selection / Bearing type sel
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(1, 3)
0
Data type: Unsigned16
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: FEM
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
104
Factory setting
0
The parameter is used to select a bearing type.
0 = No selection
1 = Manual entry
101 = STANDARD
102 = PERFORMANCE
103 = HIGH PERFORMANCE
104 = ADVANCED LIFETIME
If the bearing type changes the bearing code number (p0531) is pre-assigned accordingly.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0301, p0531
Caution:
If a valid bearing type (p0530) is entered, the parameters in the bearing list cannot be changed (write protection).
Write protection is canceled if bearing type 1 is entered.
Note:
p0530 cannot be changed on a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ.
p0531[0...n]
Bearing code number selection / Bear. code num sel
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3)
0
Data type: Unsigned16
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: FEM
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
0
The parameter is used to display and enter the bearing code number. It is pre-assigned automatically (from the
parameter lists which are available internally) when p0301 and p0530 are entered and cannot be changed (write
protection). The information in p0530 should be observed when removing write protection.
When changing the bearing code number (except in the case of changing the value to 0), all of the bearing parameters are pre-assigned from the parameter lists which are available internally.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0301, p0530
Note:
p0531 cannot be changed on a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-195
Parameter
List of parameters
p0532[0...n]
Bearing maximum speed / Bearing n_max
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(1, 3)
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: FEM
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [rpm]
Max
210000.0 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.0 [rpm]
Description:
Sets the maximum motor bearing speed.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1082
Caution:
This parameter is pre-assigned in the case of motors from the motor list (p0301) if a bearing type (p0530) or a bearing code (p0531) is selected. When selecting a catalog motor, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection).
The information in p0530 should be observed when removing write protection.
Notice:
If p0532 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), then the maximum speed p1082, which is also associated with quick commissioning, is pre-assigned appropriately. This is not the case when commissioning the motor
(p0010 = 3).
p0570
Inhibit list values effective number / Inhib list no
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: Unsigned8
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Applications
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
50
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the number of parameters in the inhibit list p0571 that should be withdrawn from the automatic motor and
closed-loop control parameter calculation (refer to p0340, p0578), starting from index 0.
Note:
Defines the number of entries in p0571 that should be taken into account. This means that a value of 0 deactivates
the complete list.
p0571[0...49]
Inhibit list, motor/closed-loop control parameter calculation / Inhib list calc
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: Integer16
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Applications
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
2142
Factory setting
0
Description:
The inhibit list contains parameters that should be withdrawn from the automatic motor and closed-loop control
parameter calculation (p0340, p0578).
Value:
0:
600:
640:
1082:
1460:
1462:
1470:
1472:
1520:
1521:
1530:
1531:
1590:
1592:
2141:
2142:
1-196
No parameter
Motor temperature sensor
Current limit
Maximum speed
Speed controller P gain
Speed controller integral time
Speed controller P gain, encoderless
Speed controller integral time, encoderless
Torque limit upper/motoring
Torque limit lower/regenerative
Power limit motoring
Power limit regenerative
Flux controller P gain
Flux controller integral time
Speed threshold 1
Hysteresis speed 1
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
p0570 defines the number of entries (starting at index 0) for which the inhibit should apply. p0572 can be used to
define for which drive data sets the inhibit list should apply.
If a motor data set is entered into a parameter number, then this is not overwritten as soon as only one drive data
set refers to the motor data set (p0186).
p0572[0...n]
Activate inhibit list / Act inhib list
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: Integer16
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Applications
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Enable ID as to whether the parameters of the inhibit list p0571 should be overwritten when calculating the motor
and closed-loop control parameters for the particular drive data set (index = DDS).
Value:
0:
1:
Note:
0: The automatic calculation (p0340, p0578) also overwrites the parameters of list p0571.
No
Yes
1: The automatic calculation (p0340, p0578) does not overwrite the parameters of list p0571.
p0573
Inhibit automatic reference value calculation / Inhibit calc
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: Integer16
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Applications
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Inhibits the calculation of reference parameters (e.g. p2000) when automatically calculating the motor and closedloop control parameters (p0340, p3900).
Value:
0:
1:
Notice:
The inhibit for the reference value calculation is canceled when new motor parameters (e.f. p0305) are entered and
only one drive data set exists (p0180 = 1). This is the case during initial commissioning. Once the motor and control
parameters have been calculated (see p3900, p0340), the inhibit for the reference value calculation is automatically
reactivated.
Note:
0: The automatic calculation (p0340, p3900) overwrites the reference parameters.
No
Yes
1: The automatic calculation (p0340, p3900) does not overwrite the reference parameters.
p0578[0...n]
Calculate parameters that are dependent on the technology/units / Calc tec par
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(5), T
0
Data type: Integer16
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Applications
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
This parameter is used to calculate all parameters that depend on the technology of the application (p0500).
All of the parameters are calculated that can also be determined using p0340 = 5.
Value:
0:
1:
No calculation
Complete parameterization
Note:
At the end of the calculations, p0578 is automatically set to 0.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-197
Parameter
List of parameters
p0595
Selecting technological units / Select tech units
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(5)
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Data type: Integer16
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Applications
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
32
Factory setting
1
Description:
Selects the units for the parameters of the technology controller.
Value:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:
21:
22:
23:
24:
25:
26:
27:
28:
29:
30:
31:
32:
Dependency:
Only units of parameters with unit group 9_1 can be changed over using this parameter.
%
1 referred, no dimensions
Bar
C
Pa
ltr/s
m/s
ltr/min
m/min
ltr/h
m/h
kg/s
kg/min
kg/h
t/min
t/h
N
kN
Nm
psi
F
gallon/s
inch/s
gallon/min
inch/min
gallon/h
inch/h
lb/s
lb/min
lb/h
lbf
lbf ft
Refer to: p0596
p0596
Reference quantity, technological units / Ref tech units
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.01
Max
340.28235E36
Factory setting
1.00
Description:
Sets the reference quantity for the technological units. When changing over using changeover parameter 595 to
absolute units, all of the parameters involved refer to the reference quantity.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0595
1-198
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p0600[0...n]
Motor temperature sensor for monitoring / Mot temp_sensor
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: Integer16
Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
21
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the sensor to monitor the motor temperature.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
10:
11:
20:
21:
Dependency:
Refer to: r0458, p0601, p0603
Caution:
If, for a selected temperature sensor (p0600 > 0), the motor temperature sensor is not connected but another
encoder, then the temperature adaptation of the motor resistances must be switched out. Otherwise, in controlledloop operation, torque errors will occur that will mean that the drive will not be able to be stopped.
Notice:
The parameter is calculated in the drive using p0340 and is inhibited for p0340 > 0.
Note:
Re p0600 = 0:
No sensor
Temperature sensor via encoder 1
Temperature sensor via encoder 2
Temperature sensor via encoder 3
Temperature sensor via a BICO interconnection
Temperature sensor via Motor Module / CU terminals
Temperature sensor via a BICO interconnection p608
Temperature sensor via a BICO interconnection p609
With induction motors, the motor temperature is calculated using the motor temperature model (see also p0612, bit
1).
Re p0600 = 1, 2, 3:
Bimetallic switch (p0601 = 4) and PT100 temperature sensor (p0601 = 5) are not supported.
Re p0600 = 10:
The BICO interconnection should be executed via connector input CI: p0603.
Re p0600 = 11:
For SINAMICS S120 AC Drive (AC/AC) and using the Control Unit Adapter CUA31, the temperature sensor is connected at the adapter (X210).
Re p0600 = 20, 21:
The BICO interconnection should be executed via connector input CI: p0608 or p0609.
Associated parameters: p0601, p4600..4603, p4610..p4613
p0601[0...n]
Motor temperature sensor type / Mot_temp_sens type
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: Integer16
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
11
Factory setting
2
Description:
Sets the sensor type for the motor temperature monitoring.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
10:
11:
Dependency:
The thermal motor model is only calculated for p0612.1 = 1.
No sensor
PTC alarm & timer
KTY84
KTY84 and PTC (only for motors with DRIVE-CLiQ):
Bimetallic NC contact alarm & timer (only for temp_eval via MM)
PT100
Evaluation via several temperature channels SME12x
Evaluation via several temperature channels BICO
Refer to: r0458, p0600, p0612
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-199
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
The temperature sensor for the temperature evaluation is set in p0600.
For p0600 = 10 (temperature sensor via a BICO interconnection), the setting in p0601 has no significance.
Information on using temperature sensors is provided in the following literature:
- hardware description of the appropriate components
- SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual
Re p0601 = 1 (PTC alarm & timer):
Tripping resistance = 1650 Ohm.
After the tripping resistance has been exceeded, an appropriate alarm is output and after the delay time set in
p0606 has expired, an appropriate fault is output.
Re p0601 = 3 (KTY84 and PTC (only for motors with DRIVE-CLiQ)):
For motors with DRIVE-CLiQ and 2 temperature sensors, the value is automatically set.
Re p0601 = 4 (bimetallic NC contact alarm & timer (only for temperature evaluation via the Motor Module)):
Tripping resistance = 100 Ohm.
After tripping, an appropriate alarm is output and after the delay time set in p0606 has expired, an appropriate fault
is output.
Re p0601 = 5 (PT100):
It is only possible to evaluate a PT100 for p0600 = 11 and r0192 bit 15 = 1.
Re p0601 = 10 (evaluation through several temperature channels (SME12x)):
Not permitted for p0600 = 0, 10, 11.
Associated parameters: p4600 ... p4603 (can be switched via EDS)
For r0458.8 = 1, a temperature evaluation is supported through several temperature channels.
Examples:
When evaluating using SME120 or SME125, 4 temperature channels are available ( parameterized using p4600,
p4601, p4602, p4603).
When evaluating using CU310 and CUA32, 2 temperature channels are available (encoder interface, parameterization via p4600 / terminal block, parameterization via p4601).
Re p0601 = 11 (evaluation via several temperature channels (BICO)):
Not permitted for p0600 = 0, 10, 11.
Associated parameters: p4610 ... p4613 (can be switched via MDS)
p0602
Par_circuit power unit number, temperature sensor / PU_No temp_sensor
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0 (Parallel)
Data type: Unsigned16
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
10
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the power unit number to which the temperature sensor is connected. The value corresponds to the Power unit
Data Set number (PDS) of the power unit. The number of power unit data sets is defined in p0120.
p0603
CI: Motor temperature signal source / Mot temp S_src
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: TEMP
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source to evaluate the motor temperature via a BICO interconnection.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0600
1-200
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
Temperature sensor KTY: Valid temperature range -48 C ... 248 C.
PTC temperature sensor:
For a value = -50 C, the following applies: Motor temperature < nominal response temperature of the PTC.
For a value = 250 C, the following applies: Motor temperature >= nominal response temperature of the PTC.
Note:
When using a Terminal Module 31 (TM31), the following applies:
- the sensor type used is set using p4100.
- the temperature signal is interconnected using CO: r4105.
p0604[0...n]
Motor temperature alarm threshold / Mot_temp al thr
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 21_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [C]
Max
200.0 [C]
Factory setting
130.0 [C]
Description:
Sets the alarm threshold for monitoring the motor temperature.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0606
Caution:
This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Note:
The hysteresis for canceling the alarm is 2 Kelvin.
When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (refer to p0300).
p0605[0...n]
Motor temperature fault threshold / Mot_temp flt thr
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 8016, 8017
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 21_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [C]
Max
200.0 [C]
Factory setting
145.0 [C]
Description:
Sets the fault threshold to monitor the motor temperature.
Caution:
This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Note:
The hysteresis for canceling the fault is 2 Kelvin.
When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (refer to p0300).
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-201
Parameter
List of parameters
p0606[0...n]
Motor temperature timer / Mot_temp timer
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
600.000 [s]
Factory setting
0.000 [s]
Sets the timer for the alarm threshold for the motor temperature monitoring function.
This timer is started when the temperature alarm threshold (p0604) is exceeded.
If the timer expires before the temperature in the meantime falls below the alarm threshold, the fault F07011 is output.
If the temperature fault threshold (p0605) is prematurely exceeded before the timer has expired, then fault F07011
is immediately output.
As long as the motor temperature has still not exceeded the fault threshold and the alarm thresholds have again
been undershot, the fault can be acknowledged.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0604, p0605
Refer to: F07011, A07910
Note:
With p0606 = 0 s, the timer is deactivated and only the fault threshold is effective.
KTY sensor: When setting the minimum value, the timer is disabled and a fault is not output until p0605 is
exceeded.
PTC sensor, bimetallic NC contact: The timer minimum value has no special significance.
p0607[0...n]
Temperature sensor fault timer / Sensor fault time
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
600.000 [s]
Factory setting
0.100 [s]
Sets the timer between the output of alarm and fault for a temperature sensor fault.
If there is a sensor fault, this timer is started. If the sensor fault is still present after the timer has expired, a corresponding fault message is output.
Note:
If the motor is an induction motor, the timer is switched off when setting the minimum value and no alarm is output.
Temperature monitoring is then based on the thermal model.
p0608[0...3]
CI: Motor temperature signal source 2 / MotTempSignal2
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: TEMP
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets signal source 2 to evaluate the motor temperature via a BICO interconnection.
Index:
[0] = Motor temperature channel 1
[1] = Motor temperature channel 2
[2] = Motor temperature channel 3
[3] = Motor temperature channel 4
Dependency:
Refer to: p0600
1-202
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
Temperature sensor KTY: Valid temperature range -48 C ... 248 C.
PTC/bimetal temperature sensor:
For a value of -50 C, the following applies: Motor temperature < nominal response temperature of the PTC (bimetal
contact closed).
For a value of 250 C, the following applies: Motor temperature >= nominal response temperature of the PTC
(bimetal contact open).
Note:
When using a Terminal Module 120 (TM120), the following applies:
- the sensor type used is set using p4100.
- the temperature signal is interconnected using CO: r4105.
p0609[0...3]
CI: Motor temperature signal source 3 / MotTempSignal3
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: TEMP
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets signal source 3 to evaluate the motor temperature via a BICO interconnection.
Index:
[0] = Motor temperature channel 1
[1] = Motor temperature channel 2
[2] = Motor temperature channel 3
[3] = Motor temperature channel 4
Dependency:
Refer to: p0600
Note:
Temperature sensor KTY: Valid temperature range -48 C ... 248 C.
PTC/bimetal temperature sensor:
For a value of -50 C, the following applies: Motor temperature < nominal response temperature of the PTC (bimetal
contact closed).
For a value of 250 C, the following applies: Motor temperature >= nominal response temperature of the PTC
(bimetal contact open).
Note:
When using a Terminal Module 120 (TM120), the following applies:
- the sensor type used is set using p4100.
- the temperature signal is interconnected using CO: r4105.
p0610[0...n]
Motor overtemperature response / Mot temp response
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), T
0
Data type: Integer16
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
2
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the system response when the motor temperature reaches the alarm threshold.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
Dependency:
Refer to: p0601, p0604, p0605
No response only alarm no reduction of I_max
Alarm with reduction of I_max and fault
Alarm and fault no reduction of I_max
Refer to: F07011, A07910
Note:
The I_max reduction is not executed for PTC (p0601 = 1) or bimetallic NC contact (p0601 = 4).
The I_max reduction results in a lower output frequency.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-203
Parameter
List of parameters
p0611[0...n]
I2t motor model thermal time constant / I2t mot_mod T
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 8017
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [s]
Max
20000 [s]
Factory setting
0 [s]
Sets the winding time constant.
The time constant specifies the warm-up time of the cold stator winding when loaded with the motor standstill current up until a temperature rise of 63 % of the continuously permissible winding temperature has been reached.
Dependency:
This parameter is only used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
Refer to: r0034, p0612, p0615
Refer to: F07011, A07012, A07910
Caution:
This parameter is automatically preset from the motor database for motors from the motor list (p0301).
When selecting a catalog motor, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should
be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note:
When parameter p0611 is reset to 0, then this switches out the thermal I2t motor model (also refer to p0612).
If no temperature sensor is parameterized, then the ambient temperature for the thermal motor model is referred to
p0625.
p0612[0...n]
Thermal motor model configuration / Therm Mot_mod conf
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: Unsigned16
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 8017
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL, FEM
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0010 bin
Description:
Sets the configuration for the thermal motor model.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
Dependency:
Refer to: r0034, p0611, p0615
Note:
Re bit 00:
Signal name
Activate I2t motor model
Activate motor temperature model
1 signal
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
FP
-
This bit is only used for permanent-magnet synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx). It is only possible to switch in thermal I2t monitoring with a time constant greater than zero (p0611 > 0).
Re bit 01:
This bit is used to activate/deactivate the thermal motor model for induction motors.
p0615[0...n]
I2t motor model fault threshold / I2t mot_mod thresh
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 8017
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 21_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [C]
Max
220.0 [C]
Factory setting
180.0 [C]
Description:
Sets the fault threshold for monitoring using the thermal I2t motor model.
Dependency:
The parameter is only used for permanent-magnet synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
Refer to: r0034, p0611, p0612
Refer to: F07011, A07012
1-204
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
Caution:
This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301).
When selecting a catalog motor, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should
be carefully observed when removing write protection.
p0616[0...n]
Motor overtemperature alarm threshold 1 / Mot temp alarm 1
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 21_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [C]
Max
200.0 [C]
Factory setting
130.0 [C]
Description:
Sets the alarm threshold 1 for monitoring the motor temperature.
Note:
The alarm threshold is not, as for p0604, coupled to the timer p0606. The hysteresis for canceling the fault is 2 Kelvin.
p0620[0...n]
Thermal adaptation, stator and rotor resistance / Mot therm_adapt R
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: Integer16
Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
2
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the thermal adaptation of the stator/primary section resistance and rotor/secondary section resistance according to r0395 and r0396.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
Note:
For p0620 = 1, the following applies:
No thermal adaptation of stator and rotor resistances
Resistances adapted to the temperatures of the thermal model
Resistances adapted to the measured stator winding temperature
The stator resistance is adapted using the temperature in r0035 and the rotor resistance together with the model
temperature in r0633.
For p0620 = 2, the following applies:
The stator resistance is adapted using the temperature in r0035. If applicable, the rotor temperature for adapting
the rotor resistance is calculated from the stator temperature (r0035) as follows:
theta_R = (r0628 + r0625) / (r0627 + r0625) * r0035
p0621[0...n]
Identification stator resistance after restart / Rst_ident Restart
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), T
0 (n/M)
Data type: Integer16
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
2
Factory setting
0
Selects the identification of the stator resistance after booting the Control Unit (only for vector control).
The identification is used to measure the actual stator resistance and from the ratio of the result of motor data identification (p0350) to the matching ambient temperature (p0625) the actual mean temperature of the stator winding is
calculated. The result is used to initialize the thermal motor model.
p0621 = 1:
Identification of the stator resistance only when the drive is powered up for the first time (pulse enable) after booting
the Control Unit.
p0621 = 2:
Identification of the stator resistance every time the drive is powered up (pulse enable).
Value:
0:
1:
2:
No temperature identification
Temperature identification after restart
Temperature identification after each power-up
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-205
Parameter
List of parameters
Dependency:
- perform motor data identification (see p1910) with cold motor.
- enter ambient temperature at time of motor data identification in p0625.
Refer to: p0622, r0623
Notice:
The calculated stator temperature can only be compared with the measured value of a temperature sensor (KTY) to
a certain extent, as the sensor is usually the warmest point of the stator winding, whereas the measured value of
identification reflects the mean value of the stator winding.
Furthermore this is a short-time measurement with limited accuracy that is performed during the magnetizing phase
of the induction motor.
Note:
The measurement is carried out:
- For induction motors
- When vector control is active (see p1300)
- If a temperature sensor (KTY) has not been connected
- When the motor is at a standstill when switched on
When a flying restart is performed on a rotating motor, the temperatures of the thermal motor model are set to a
third of the overtemperatures. This occurs only once, however, when the CU is booted (e.g. after a power failure).
If identification is activated, the magnetizing time is determined via p0622 and not via p0346. Quick magnetizing
(p1401.6) is de-energized internally and alarm A07416 is displayed. The speed is enabled after completion of the
measurement.
p0622[0...n]
Motor excitation time for Rs_ident after powering up again / t_excit Rs_id
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0 (n/M)
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
20.000 [s]
Factory setting
0.000 [s]
Description:
Sets the excitation time of the motor for the stator resistance identification after powering up again (restart).
Dependency:
Refer to: p0621, r0623
Note:
For p0622 < p0346 the following applies:
If identification is activated, the magnetizing time is influenced by p0622. The speed is enabled after measurement
is complete, but not before the time in p0346 has elapsed (see r0056 bit 4). The time taken for measurement also
depends on the settling time of the measured current.
For p0622 >= p0346 the following applies:
Parameter p0622 is internally limited to the magnetizing time p0346, so that p0346 represents the maximum possible magnetizing time during identification. The entire measurement period (magnetizing plus measurement settling
time plus measuring time) will always be greater than p0346.
r0623
Stator resistance of Rs identification after powering up again / R_Stator Reset_Id
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0 (n/M)
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Ohm]
Max
- [Ohm]
Factory setting
- [Ohm]
Description:
Displays the identified stator resistance after the Rs identification after powering up again.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0621, p0622
1-206
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p0624[0...n]
Motor Temperature Offset PT100 / Mot T_offset PT100
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 21_2
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-100.0 [K]
Max
100.0 [K]
Factory setting
0.0 [K]
Sets the temperature offset for the PT100 measured value.
If there is a difference between the motor temperature displayed in r0035 and the actual motor temperature, this offset can be entered in this parameter, thereby compensating for the difference.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0600, p0601, p0602
Note:
The parameter only takes effect with the following settings:
- Temperature sensor of the power unit detected (p0600 = 11).
- Sensor type PT100 selected (p0601 = 5).
If the resistance in series with the PT100 (e.g. the cable resistance of the feeder cable) is known, the following conversion formula must be used:
Offset in p0624 = Measured resistance in ohms x 2.5 K/Ohm
Example:
Measured cable resistance = 2 Ohm
--> 2 Ohm x 2.5 K / Ohm = 5.0 K
p0625[0...n]
Motor ambient temperature / Mot T_ambient
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 21_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-40 [C]
Max
80 [C]
Factory setting
20 [C]
Description:
Defines the ambient temperature of the motor for calculating the motor temperature model.
Note:
The parameters for stator and rotor resistance (p0350, p0354) refer to this temperature.
If the thermal I2t motor model is activated for permanent-magnet synchronous motors (refer to p0611), p0625 is
included in the model calculation if a temperature sensor is not being used (see p0601).
p0626[0...n]
Motor overtemperature, stator core / Mot T_over core
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 21_2
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
20 [K]
Max
200 [K]
Factory setting
50 [K]
Description:
Defines the rated overtemperature of the stator core referred to the ambient temperature.
Dependency:
For 1LA5 and 1LA7 motors (refer to p0300), the parameter is preset as a function of p0307 and p0311.
Refer to: p0625
Note:
When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (refer to p0300).
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-207
Parameter
List of parameters
p0627[0...n]
Motor overtemperature, stator winding / Mot T_over stator
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 21_2
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
20 [K]
Max
200 [K]
Factory setting
80 [K]
Description:
Defines the rated overtemperature of the stator winding referred to the ambient temperature.
Dependency:
For 1LA5 and 1LA7 motors (refer to p0300), the parameter is preset as a function of p0307 and p0311.
Refer to: p0625
Note:
When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (refer to p0300).
p0628[0...n]
Motor overtemperature rotor winding / Mot T_over rotor
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 21_2
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
20 [K]
Max
200 [K]
Factory setting
100 [K]
Description:
Defines the rated overtemperature of the squirrel cage rotor referred to ambient temperature.
Dependency:
For 1LA5 and 1LA7 motors (refer to p0300), the parameter is preset as a function of p0307 and p0311.
Refer to: p0625
Note:
When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (refer to p0300).
r0630[0...n]
Motor temperature model ambient temperature / MotTMod T_amb.
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 21_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM
Scaling: TEMP
Expert list: 1
Min
- [C]
Max
- [C]
Factory setting
- [C]
Description:
Displays the ambient temperature of the motor temperature model.
r0631[0...n]
Motor temperature model, stator core temperature / MotTMod T_core
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
1-208
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 21_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM
Scaling: TEMP
Expert list: 1
Min
- [C]
Max
- [C]
Factory setting
- [C]
Displays the stator core temperature of the motor temperature model.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
r0632[0...n]
Motor temperature model, stator winding temperature / MotTMod T_copper
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 21_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM
Scaling: TEMP
Expert list: 1
Min
- [C]
Max
- [C]
Factory setting
- [C]
Description:
Displays the stator winding temperature of the motor temperature model.
r0633[0...n]
Motor temperature model, rotor temperature / MotTMod T_rotor
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 21_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM
Scaling: TEMP
Expert list: 1
Min
- [C]
Max
- [C]
Factory setting
- [C]
Description:
Displays the rotor temperature of the motor temperature model.
p0634[0...n]
Q flux flux constant unsaturated / PSIQ KPSI UNSAT
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, FEM
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [Vsrms]
Max
100.000 [Vsrms]
Factory setting
0.000 [Vsrms]
The non-linear and cross-coupled quadrature axis flux functions are defined using 4 coefficients.
The parameter weights the unsaturated component of the quadrature axis flux function.
p0635[0...n]
Q flux quadrature axis current constant unsaturated / PSIQ KIQ UNSAT
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, FEM
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Arms]
Max
10000.00 [Arms]
Factory setting
0.00 [Arms]
The non-linear and cross-coupled quadrature axis flux functions are defined using 4 coefficients.
This parameter describes the interdependency of the unsaturated component of the quadrature axis current.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0634
p0636[0...n]
Q flux direct axis current constant unsaturated / PSIQ KID UNSAT
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, FEM
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Arms]
Max
10000.00 [Arms]
Factory setting
0.00 [Arms]
The non-linear and cross-coupled quadrature axis flux functions are defined using 4 coefficients.
This parameter describes the interdependency of the unsaturated component of the direct axis current.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0634
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-209
Parameter
List of parameters
p0637[0...n]
Q flux flux gradient saturated / PSIQ Grad SAT
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, FEM
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [mH]
Max
10000.00 [mH]
Factory setting
0.00 [mH]
The non-linear and cross-coupled quadrature axis flux functions are defined using 4 coefficients.
This parameter describes the gradients of the saturated component over the quadrature axis current.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0634, p0635, p0636
p0640[0...n]
Current limit / Current limit
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(1, 3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 5722, 6640
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Arms]
Max
10000.00 [Arms]
Factory setting
0.00 [Arms]
Description:
Sets the current limit.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0209, p0323
Note:
The parameter is part of the quick commissioning (p0010 = 1); this means that it is appropriately pre-assigned when
changing p0305, p0323 and p0338.
The current limit p0640 is limited to r0209 and p0323. The limit to p0323 is not realized if a value of zero is entered
there.
The resulting current limit is displayed in r0067 and if required, r0067 is reduced by the thermal model of the Motor
Module.
The torque and power limits (p1520, p1521, p1530, p1531) matching the current limit are automatically calculated
when exiting the quick commissioning using p3900 > 0 or using the automatic parameterization with p0340 = 3, 5.
For VECTOR the following applies (p0107):
p0640 is limited to 4.0 * p0305.
p0640 is pre-assigned for the automatic self commissioning routine (e.g.to 1.5 * p0305, with p0305 = r0207[1]).
p0640 must be entered when commissioning the system. This is the reason that p0640 is not calculated by the
automatic parameterization when exiting the quick commissioning (p3900 > 0).
For SERVO the following applies (p0107):
p0640 is pre-assigned as follows using the automatic parameterization (p0340 = 1, p3900 > 0) taking into account
the limits r0209 and r0323:
- for induction motors: p0640 = 1.5 * p0305
- for synchronous motors: p0640 = p0338
p0641[0...n]
CI: Current limit, variable / Curr lim var
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 6640
P-Group: Closed-loop control
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Sets the signal source for the variable current limit.
The value is referred to p0640.
1-210
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p0643[0...n]
Overvoltage protection for synchronous motors / Overvolt_protect
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3)
0 (n/M)
Data type: Integer16
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the overvoltage protection for synchronous motors in the field-weakening range.
Value:
0:
1:
Dependency:
Refer to: p0316, p1082, p1231, p9601, p9801
No measure
Voltage Protection Module (VPM)
Refer to: F07906, F07907
Notice:
When the speed limiting is removed, the user is responsible for implementing a suitable overvoltage protection.
Note:
In the field-weakening range, synchronous motors can, when a fault condition exists, generate high DC link voltages. The following possibilities exist to protect the drive system from being destroyed due to overvoltage:
- limit the maximum speed (p1082) without any additional protection.
The maximum speed without protection is calculated as follows:
Rotary motors: p1082 [rpm] <= 11.695 * p0297/p0316 [Nm/A]
Linear motors: p1082 [m/min] <= 73.484 *p0297/0316 [N/A]
- use a Voltage Protection Module (VPM) in conjunction with the function "Safe Torque Off" (p9601, p9801).
When a fault condition exists, the VPM short-circuits the motors. During the short-circuit, the pulses must be suppressed - this means that the terminals for the function "Safe Torque Off" must be connected to the VPM.
- activating the internal voltage protection (IVP) with p1231 = 3.
p0650[0...n]
Actual motor operating hours / Mot t_oper act
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [h]
Max
4294967295 [h]
Factory setting
0 [h]
Displays the operating hours for the corresponding motor.
The motor operating time counter continues to run when the pulses are enabled. When the pulse enable is withdrawn, the counter is held and the value saved.
Dependency:
The following prerequisites must be fulfilled in order to be able to save the operating hours counter in a non-volatile
fashion:
- firmware with V2.2 or higher.
- Control Unit 320 (CU320) with hardware version C or higher (module with NVRAM).
Refer to: p0651
Refer to: A01590
Note:
The operating hours counter in p0650 can only be reset to 0. In this case, p0651 is automatically set to 0.
For p0651 = 0, the operating hours counter is disabled.
The operating hours counter only runs for MDS0 and MDS1 (Motor Data Set).
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-211
Parameter
List of parameters
p0651[0...n]
Motor operating hours maintenance interval / Mot t_op maint
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [h]
Max
150000 [h]
Factory setting
0 [h]
Sets the service/maintenance intervals in hours for the appropriate motor.
An appropriate fault is output when the operating hours set here are reached.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0650
Refer to: A01590
Note:
For p0651 = 0, the operating hours counter is disabled.
The operating hours counter only runs for MDS0 and MDS1 (Motor Data Set).
p0652[0...n]
Motor stator resistance, scaling / Mot R_stator scal
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
10.0 [%]
Max
300.0 [%]
Factory setting
100.0 [%]
Description:
Factor to evaluate the stator resistance.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0350, r0370
p0653[0...n]
Motor stator leakage inductance, scaling / Mot L_S_leak scal
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
10.0 [%]
Max
300.0 [%]
Factory setting
100.0 [%]
Description:
Factor to evaluate the stator leakage inductance.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0356, r0377
p0655[0...n]
Motor magnetizing inductance, d axis saturated scaling / Mot L_m d sat scal
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
10.0 [%]
Max
300.0 [%]
Factory setting
100.0 [%]
Description:
Factor to evaluate the magnetizing inductance in the direction of the rotor axis (d axis).
Dependency:
Refer to: p0360, r0382
1-212
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p0656[0...n]
Motor magnetizing inductance, q axis, saturated scaling / Mot L_m q sat scal
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
10.0 [%]
Max
300.0 [%]
Factory setting
100.0 [%]
Description:
Factor to evaluate the magnetizing inductance quadrature to the rotor axis (q axis).
Dependency:
Refer to: p0361, r0383
p0657[0...n]
Motor damping inductance, d axis scaling / Mot L_damp d scal
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
10.0 [%]
Max
300.0 [%]
Factory setting
100.0 [%]
Description:
Factor to evaluate the damping inductance in the direction of the rotor axis (d axis).
Dependency:
Refer to: p0358, r0380
p0658[0...n]
Motor damping inductance, q axis scaling / Mot L_damp q scal
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
10.0 [%]
Max
300.0 [%]
Factory setting
100.0 [%]
Description:
Factor to evaluate the damping inductance quadrature to the rotor axis (q axis).
Dependency:
Refer to: p0359, r0381
p0659[0...n]
Motor damping resistance, d axis scaling / Mot R_damp d scal
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
10.0 [%]
Max
300.0 [%]
Factory setting
100.0 [%]
Description:
Factor to evaluate the damping resistance in the direction of the rotor axis (d axis).
Dependency:
Refer to: p0354, r0374
p0660[0...n]
Motor damping resistance, q axis scaling / Mot R_damp q scal
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
10.0 [%]
Max
300.0 [%]
Factory setting
100.0 [%]
Description:
Factor to evaluate the damping resistance quadrature to the rotor axis (q axis).
Dependency:
Refer to: p0355, r0375
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-213
Parameter
List of parameters
p0680[0...5]
Central measuring probe, input terminal / Cen meas inp
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
8
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the digital input used for the function "central measuring probe evaluation".
p0680[0]: Digital input, measuring probe 1
p0680[1]: Digital input, measuring probe 2
p0680[2]: Digital input, measuring probe 3
p0680[3]: Digital input, measuring probe 4
p0680[4]: Digital input, measuring probe 5
p0680[5]: Digital input, measuring probe 6
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
No measuring probe
DI/DO 9 (X122.10)
DI/DO 10 (X122.12)
DI/DO 11 (X122.13)
DI/DO 13 (X132.10)
DI/DO 14 (X132.12)
DI/DO 15 (X132.13)
DI/DO 8 (X122.9)
DI/DO 12 (X132.9)
Dependency:
Refer to: p0728
Notice:
To select the values:
For CU310, Cx32, NX10 and NX15, only DI/DO 8, 9, 10, 11 can be selected as fast inputs (refer to the Equipment
Manual).
Note:
Prerequisite: The DI/DO must be set as input (p0728.x = 0).
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
If a parameter change is rejected, a check should be performed as to whether the input terminal is already being
used in p0488, p0489, p0493, p0495, p0580, p2517, or p2518.
p0681
BI: Central measuring probe, synchronizing signal signal source /
Cen meas sync_sig
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Description:
Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Sets the signal source for the synchronizing signal (SYN) of the function "central measuring probe evaluation".
The signal is used to synchronize the common system time between the master and slave.
Notice:
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
p0682
CI: Central measuring probe, control word signal source / Cen meas STW S_src
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
1-214
Sets the signal source for the control word of the function "central measuring probe evaluation".
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p0684
Central measuring probe evaluation technique / Cen meas eval_tech
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the evaluation technique for the "central measuring probe evaluation" function.
Value:
0:
1:
Note:
During measurement without a handshake, the probe may have a higher evaluation frequency.
Measurement with handshake
Measurement without handshake
The setting "Measurement without handshake" must be supported by the higher-level control.
r0685
Central measuring probe, control word display / Cen meas STW disp
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the control word for the function "central measuring probe evaluation".
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
08
09
10
11
12
13
Signal name
Falling edge, measuring probe 1
Falling edge, measuring probe 2
Falling edge, measuring probe 3
Falling edge, measuring probe 4
Falling edge, measuring probe 5
Falling edge, measuring probe 6
Rising edge, measuring probe 1
Rising edge, measuring probe 2
Rising edge, measuring probe 3
Rising edge, measuring probe 4
Rising edge, measuring probe 5
Rising edge, measuring probe 6
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
FP
-
r0686[0...5]
CO: Central measuring probe, measuring time rising edge / CenMeas t_meas 0/1
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the measuring time for a rising edge at the digital input for the "central measuring probe evaluation" function.
The measuring time is specified as 16-bit value with a resolution of 0.25 s.
r0686[0]: Measuring time, rising edge measuring probe 1
r0686[1]: Measuring time, rising edge measuring probe 2
r0686[2]: Measuring time, rising edge measuring probe 3
r0686[3]: Measuring time, rising edge measuring probe 4
r0686[4]: Measuring time, rising edge measuring probe 5
r0686[5]: Measuring time, rising edge measuring probe 6
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-215
Parameter
List of parameters
r0687[0...5]
CO: Central measuring probe, measuring time falling edge / CenMeas t_meas 1/0
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the measuring time for a falling edge at the digital input for the "central measuring probe evaluation" function.
The measuring time is specified as 16-bit value with a resolution of 0.25 s.
r0687[0]: Measuring time, falling edge measuring probe 1
r0687[1]: Measuring time, falling edge measuring probe 2
r0687[2]: Measuring time, falling edge measuring probe 3
r0687[3]: Measuring time, falling edge measuring probe 4
r0687[4]: Measuring time, falling edge measuring probe 5
r0687[5]: Measuring time, falling edge measuring probe 6
r0688
CO: Central measuring probe, status word display / Cen meas ZSW disp
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status word for the function "central measuring probe evaluation".
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
08
09
10
11
12
13
p0700[0...n]
Macro Binector Input (BI) / Macro BI
Signal name
Digital input, measuring probe 1
Digital input, measuring probe 2
Digital input, measuring probe 3
Digital input, measuring probe 4
Digital input, measuring probe 5
Digital input, measuring probe 6
Sub-sampling, measuring probe 1
Sub-sampling, measuring probe 2
Sub-sampling, measuring probe 3
Sub-sampling, measuring probe 4
Sub-sampling, measuring probe 5
Sub-sampling, measuring probe 6
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(1), T
0
Data type: Unsigned32
Description:
1 signal
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
0 signal
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
999999
Factory setting
0
FP
-
Runs the corresponding macro files.
The binector inputs (BI) of the appropriate Command Data Set (CDS) are appropriately interconnected.
The selected macro file must be available on the memory card/device memory.
Example:
p0700 = 6 --> the macro file PM000006.ACX is run.
Dependency:
1-216
Refer to: p0015, p1000, p1500, r8571
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
Notice:
No errors were issued during quick commissioning (p3900 = 1) when writing to parameters of the QUICK_IBN
group!
Note:
The macros in the specified directory are displayed in r8571. r8571 is not in the expert list of the commissioning
software.
Macros available as standard are described in the technical documentation of the particular product.
BI: Binector input
r0721
CU digital inputs, terminal actual value / CU DI actual value
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1510, 2020,
2030, 2031, 2100, 2120, 2130,
2131, 2132, 2133
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the actual value at the digital inputs.
This means that the actual input signal can be checked at terminal DI x or DI/DO x prior to switching from the simulation mode (p0795.x = 1) to terminal mode (p0795.x = 0). The input signal at terminal DI x is displayed in bit x of
r0721.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
20
21
Signal name
DI 0 (X122.1)
DI 1 (X122.2)
DI 2 (X122.3)
DI 3 (X122.4)
DI 4 (X132.1)
DI 5 (X132.2)
DI 6 (X132.3)
DI 7 (X132.4)
DI/DO 8 (X122.9)
DI/DO 9 (X122.10)
DI/DO 10 (X122.12)
DI/DO 11 (X122.13)
DI/DO 12 (X132.9)
DI/DO 13 (X132.10)
DI/DO 14 (X132.12)
DI/DO 15 (X132.13)
DI 16 (X122.5)
DI 17 (X122.6)
DI 20 (X132.5)
DI 21 (X132.6)
Notice:
To the terminal designation:
1 signal
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
0 signal
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
FP
-
The first designation is valid for CU320, the second for CU310.
Note:
If a DI/DO is parameterized as output (p0728.x = 1), then r0721.x = 0 is displayed.
DI: Digital input
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-217
Parameter
List of parameters
r0722.0...21
CO/BO: CU digital inputs, status / CU DI status
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1510, 2020,
2030, 2031, 2100, 2120, 2130,
2131, 2132, 2133
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status of the digital inputs.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
20
21
Dependency:
Refer to: r0723
Note:
DI: Digital input
Signal name
DI 0 (X122.1)
DI 1 (X122.2)
DI 2 (X122.3)
DI 3 (X122.4)
DI 4 (X132.1)
DI 5 (X132.2)
DI 6 (X132.3)
DI 7 (X132.4)
DI/DO 8 (X122.9)
DI/DO 9 (X122.10)
DI/DO 10 (X122.12)
DI/DO 11 (X122.13)
DI/DO 12 (X132.9)
DI/DO 13 (X132.10)
DI/DO 14 (X132.12)
DI/DO 15 (X132.13)
DI 16 (X122.5)
DI 17 (X122.6)
DI 20 (X132.5)
DI 21 (X132.6)
1 signal
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
0 signal
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
FP
-
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
r0723.0...21
CO/BO: CU digital inputs, status inverted / CU DI status inv
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1510, 2020,
2030, 2031, 2100, 2120, 2130,
2131 2132, 2133
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the inverted status of the digital inputs.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
1-218
Signal name
DI 0 (X122.1)
DI 1 (X122.2)
DI 2 (X122.3)
DI 3 (X122.4)
DI 4 (X132.1)
DI 5 (X132.2)
DI 6 (X132.3)
DI 7 (X132.4)
DI/DO 8 (X122.9)
DI/DO 9 (X122.10)
1 signal
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
0 signal
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
FP
-
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
20
21
DI/DO 10 (X122.12)
DI/DO 11 (X122.13)
DI/DO 12 (X132.9)
DI/DO 13 (X132.10)
DI/DO 14 (X132.12)
DI/DO 15 (X132.13)
DI 16 (X122.5)
DI 17 (X122.6)
DI 20 (X132.5)
DI 21 (X132.6)
Dependency:
Refer to: r0722
Note:
DI: Digital input
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
p0728
CU, set input or output / CU DI or DO
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1510, 2030,
2031, 2130, 2131, 2132, 2133
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Sets the bidirectional digital inputs/outputs as an input or output.
Bit field:
Bit
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Notice:
To the terminal designation:
Signal name
DI/DO 8 (X122.9)
DI/DO 9 (X122.10)
DI/DO 10 (X122.12)
DI/DO 11 (X122.13)
DI/DO 12 (X132.9)
DI/DO 13 (X132.10)
DI/DO 14 (X132.12)
DI/DO 15 (X132.13)
1 signal
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
0 signal
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
FP
-
The first designation is valid for CU320, the second for CU310.
Note:
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
r0729
CU digital outputs access authority / CU DO access
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2030, 2031,
2130, 2131, 2132, 2133
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the access authority at the digital outputs.
Bit = 1:
The control has access authority to the digital output via PROFIBUS or direct access.
Bit = 0:
The drive has access authority to the digital output or the digital input/output is not set as digital output or is not
available.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-219
Parameter
List of parameters
Bit field:
Bit
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Signal name
DI/DO 8 (X122.9)
DI/DO 9 (X122.10)
DI/DO 10 (X122.12)
DI/DO 11 (X122.13)
DI/DO 12 (X132.9)
DI/DO 13 (X132.10)
DI/DO 14 (X132.12)
DI/DO 15 (X132.13)
1 signal
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
0 signal
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Dependency:
Refer to: p0728, p0738, p0739, p0740, p0741, p0742, p0743, p0744, p0745, r0747, p0748
Note:
The DI/DO must be connected as output (p0728).
FP
-
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
p0738
BI: CU, signal source for terminal DI/DO 8 / CU S_src DI/DO 8
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1510, 2030,
2130
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for terminal DI/DO 8 (X122.7).
Notice:
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note:
Prerequisite: The DI/DO must be set as an output (p0728.8 = 1).
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
p0739
BI: CU, signal source for terminal DI/DO 9 / CU S_src DI/DO 9
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2030, 2130
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for terminal DI/DO 9 (X122.8).
Notice:
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note:
Prerequisite: The DI/DO must be set as an output (p0728.9 = 1).
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
p0740
BI: CU, signal source for terminal DI/DO 10 / CU S_src DI/DO 10
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2031, 2131
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for terminal DI/DO 10 (X122.10).
Notice:
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note:
Prerequisite: The DI/DO must be set as an output (p0728.10 = 1).
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
1-220
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p0741
BI: CU, signal source for terminal DI/DO 11 / CU S_src DI/DO 11
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1510, 2031,
2131
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for terminal DI/DO 11 (X122.11).
Notice:
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note:
Prerequisite: The DI/DO must be set as an output (p0728.11 = 1).
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
p0742
BI: CU, signal source for terminal DI/DO 12 / CU S_src DI/DO 12
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1510, 2132
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for terminal DI/DO 12 (X132.7).
Notice:
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note:
Prerequisite: The DI/DO must be set as an output (p0728.12 = 1).
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
p0743
BI: CU, signal source for terminal DI/DO 13 / CU S_src DI/DO 13
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2132
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for terminal DI/DO 13 (X132.8).
Notice:
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note:
Prerequisite: The DI/DO must be set as an output (p0728.13 = 1).
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
p0744
BI: CU, signal source for terminal DI/DO 14 / CU S_src DI/DO 14
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2133
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for terminal DI/DO 14 (X132.10).
Notice:
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note:
Prerequisite: The DI/DO must be set as an output (p0728.14 = 1).
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-221
Parameter
List of parameters
p0745
BI: CU, signal source for terminal DI/DO 15 / CU S_src DI/DO 15
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1510, 2133
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for terminal DI/DO 15 (X132.11).
Notice:
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note:
Prerequisite: The DI/DO must be set as an output (p0728.15 = 1).
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
r0747
CU, digital outputs status / CU DO status
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2130, 2131,
2132, 2133
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status of digital outputs.
Bit field:
Bit
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Note:
Inversion using p0748 has been taken into account.
Signal name
DI/DO 8 (X122.9)
DI/DO 9 (X122.10)
DI/DO 10 (X122.12)
DI/DO 11 (X122.13)
DI/DO 12 (X132.9)
DI/DO 13 (X132.10)
DI/DO 14 (X132.12)
DI/DO 15 (X132.13)
1 signal
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
0 signal
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
FP
-
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
p0748
CU, invert digital outputs / CU DO invert
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2030, 2031,
2130, 2131, 2132, 2133
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Setting to invert the signals at the digital outputs.
Bit field:
Bit
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Signal name
DI/DO 8 (X122.9)
DI/DO 9 (X122.10)
DI/DO 10 (X122.12)
DI/DO 11 (X122.13)
DI/DO 12 (X132.9)
DI/DO 13 (X132.10)
DI/DO 14 (X132.12)
DI/DO 15 (X132.13)
1 signal
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
0 signal
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Notice:
If telegram 39x is set via p0922 in SINAMICS Integrated, the inversion of the output has no effect.
Note:
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
1-222
FP
-
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p0771[0...2]
CI: Test sockets signal source / TestSktsSigSrce
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8134
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for the signal to be output at the test sockets.
Index:
[0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Dependency:
Can only be set when p0776 = 99.
Refer to: r0772, r0774, p0776, p0777, p0778, p0779, p0780, p0783, p0784, r0786
r0772[0...2]
Test sockets output signal / TestSktsSignalVal
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8134
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:
Displays the actual value of the signal to be output.
Index:
[0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Dependency:
Refer to: p0771, r0774, p0776, p0777, p0778, p0779, p0780, p0783, p0784, r0786
r0774[0...2]
Test sockets output voltage / TestSkts V_output
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [V]
Max
- [V]
Factory setting
- [V]
Description:
Displays the actual output voltage for the test sockets.
Index:
[0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Dependency:
Refer to: p0771, r0772, p0776, p0777, p0778, p0779, p0780, p0783, p0784, r0786
p0776[0...2]
Test socket mode / Test skt mode
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8134
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
96
Max
99
Factory setting
99
Description:
Sets the mode for the test sockets.
Value:
96:
97:
98:
99:
Physical address (32-bit integer signal unsigned)
Physical address (32-bit integer signal)
Physical address (32-bit floating-point signal)
BICO signal
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-223
Parameter
List of parameters
Index:
[0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Dependency:
Refer to: p0771, r0772, r0774, p0777, p0778, p0779, p0780, p0783, p0784, r0786, p0788, p0789, r0790
p0777[0...2]
Test socket characteristic value x1 / Test skt char x1
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8134
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-100000.00 [%]
Max
100000.00 [%]
Factory setting
0.00 [%]
Description:
The scaling characteristic for the test sockets is defined using two points. This parameter specifies the x coordinate
(percentage) of the first point on the characteristic.
Index:
[0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Dependency:
Can only be set when p0776 = 99.
Refer to: p0778, p0779, p0780, r0786
Note:
The value 0.00 % corresponds to 2.49 V.
p0778[0...2]
Test socket characteristic value y1 / Test skt char y1
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8134
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [V]
Max
4.98 [V]
Factory setting
2.49 [V]
Description:
The scaling characteristic for the test sockets is defined using two points. This parameter specifies the y coordinate
(output voltage) of the first point on the characteristic.
Index:
[0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Dependency:
Can only be set when p0776 = 99.
Refer to: p0777, p0779, p0780, r0786
p0779[0...2]
Test socket characteristic value x2 / Test skt char x2
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8134
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-100000.00 [%]
Max
427.9E9 [%]
Factory setting
100.00 [%]
Description:
The scaling characteristic for the test sockets is defined using two points. This parameter specifies the x coordinate
(percentage) of the second point on the characteristic.
Index:
[0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Dependency:
Can only be set when p0776 = 99.
Refer to: p0777, p0778, p0780, r0786
Note:
The value 100.00 % corresponds to 4.98 V.
1-224
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p0780[0...2]
Test socket characteristic value y2 / Test skt char y2
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8134
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [V]
Max
4.98 [V]
Factory setting
4.98 [V]
Description:
The scaling characteristic for the test sockets is defined using two points. This parameter specifies the y coordinate
(output voltage) of the second point on the characteristic.
Index:
[0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Dependency:
Can only be set when p0776 = 99.
Refer to: p0777, p0778, p0779, r0786
p0783[0...2]
Test sockets offset / Test skt offset
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8134
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-4.98 [V]
Max
4.98 [V]
Factory setting
0.00 [V]
Description:
Sets an additional offset for the test sockets.
Index:
[0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
p0784[0...2]
Test socket limit on/off / TestSktLim on/off
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8134
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the limit for a signal to be output via test sockets.
Value:
0:
1:
Index:
[0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Note:
Limiting on:
Limiting off
Limiting on
If signals are output outside the permissible measuring range, the signal is limited to 4.98 V or to 0 V.
Limiting off:
If signals are output outside the permissible measuring range, this causes signal overflow. In the case of signal
overflow, the signal jumps from 0 V to 4.98 V or from 4.98 V to 0 V.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-225
Parameter
List of parameters
r0786[0...2]
Test socket scaling per volt / TestSktScale/Volt
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8134
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the scaling of the signal to be output. A change in the output voltage by 1 volt corresponds to the value in
this parameter. The units are determined by the interconnected test signal.
Index:
[0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Dependency:
Refer to: p0771, r0772, r0774, p0777, p0778, p0779, p0780, p0783, p0784
Note:
Example:
r0786[0] = 1500.0 and the measuring signal is r0063 (CO: Actual speed smoothed [rpm]).
A change of 1 V at the output of test socket T0 corresponds to 1500.0 [rpm].
p0788[0...2]
Test sockets physical address / Test skt PhyAddr
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 bin
Max
1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111
1111 1111 bin
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Sets the physical address to output signals via the test sockets.
Index:
[0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Dependency:
Changes only become effective if p0776 does not equal 99.
Refer to: p0789, r0790
p0789[0...2]
Test sockets physical address gain / TestSktPhyAddrGain
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-340.28235E36
Max
340.28235E36
Factory setting
1.00000
Description:
Sets the gain of a signal output of a physical address via test sockets.
Index:
[0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Dependency:
Changes only become effective if p0776 does not equal 99.
Refer to: p0788
1-226
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
r0790[0...2]
Test sockets physical address signal value / TestSktsPhyAddrVal
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the actual value of a signal determined via a physical address.
Index:
[0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Dependency:
Only effective when p0776 = 97 or p0776 = 96.
Refer to: p0788
p0795
CU digital inputs simulation mode / CU DI simulation
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1510, 2020,
2030, 2031, 2100, 2120, 2130,
2131, 2132, 2133
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Sets the simulation mode for digital inputs.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
20
21
Dependency:
The setpoint for the input signals is specified using p0796.
Signal name
DI 0 (X122.1)
DI 1 (X122.2)
DI 2 (X122.3)
DI 3 (X122.4)
DI 4 (X132.1)
DI 5 (X132.2)
DI 6 (X132.3)
DI 7 (X132.4)
DI/DO 8 (X122.9)
DI/DO 9 (X122.10)
DI/DO 10 (X122.12)
DI/DO 11 (X122.13)
DI/DO 12 (X132.9)
DI/DO 13 (X132.10)
DI/DO 14 (X132.12)
DI/DO 15 (X132.13)
DI 16 (X122.5)
DI 16 (X122.6)
DI 16 (X132.5)
DI 16 (X132.6)
1 signal
Simulation
Simulation
Simulation
Simulation
Simulation
Simulation
Simulation
Simulation
Simulation
Simulation
Simulation
Simulation
Simulation
Simulation
Simulation
Simulation
Simulation
Simulation
Simulation
Simulation
0 signal
Terminal eval.
Terminal eval.
Terminal eval.
Terminal eval.
Terminal eval.
Terminal eval.
Terminal eval.
Terminal eval.
Terminal eval.
Terminal eval.
Terminal eval.
Terminal eval.
Terminal eval.
Terminal eval.
Terminal eval.
Terminal eval.
Terminal eval.
Terminal eval.
Terminal eval.
Terminal eval.
FP
-
Refer to: p0796, p9620
Notice:
If a digital input is used as signal source for the function "STO" (BI: p9620) then it is not permissible to select the
simulation mode and this is rejected.
Note:
This parameter is not saved when data is backed-up (p0971, p0977).
DI: Digital input
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-227
Parameter
List of parameters
p0796
CU digital inputs simulation mode setpoint / CU DI simul setp
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1510, 2020,
2030, 2031, 2100, 2120, 2130,
2131, 2132, 2133
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Sets the setpoint for the input signals in the digital input simulation mode.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
20
21
Dependency:
The simulation of a digital input is selected using p0795.
Signal name
DI 0 (X122.1)
DI 1 (X122.2)
DI 2 (X122.3)
DI 3 (X122.4)
DI 4 (X132.1)
DI 5 (X132.2)
DI 6 (X132.3)
DI 7 (X132.4)
DI/DO 8 (X122.9)
DI/DO 9 (X122.10)
DI/DO 10 (X122.12)
DI/DO 11 (X122.13)
DI/DO 12 (X132.9)
DI/DO 13 (X132.10)
DI/DO 14 (X132.12)
DI/DO 15 (X132.13)
DI 16 (X122.5)
DI 17 (X122.6)
DI 20 (X132.5)
DI 21 (X132.6)
1 signal
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
0 signal
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
FP
-
Refer to: p0795
Note:
DI: Digital input
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
This parameter is not saved when data is backed-up (p0971, p0977).
p0799[0...2]
CU inputs/outputs, sampling time / CU I/O t_sampl
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1(3)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2020, 2030,
2031
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [s]
Max
5000.00 [s]
Factory setting
4000.00 [s]
Description:
Sets the sampling time for the inputs and outputs.
Index:
[0] = Digital inputs/outputs (DI/DO)
[1] = Not available - analog inputs (AI)
[2] = Not available - analog outputs (AO)
Dependency:
The parameter can only be modified for p0009 = 3, 29.
Refer to: p0009
Note:
The modified sampling time is not effective until the drive unit is powered up again.
1-228
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p0806
BI: Inhibit master control / PcCtrl inhibit
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source to block the master control.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0807
Note:
The master control is used from the commissioning software (drive control panel) and from the Advanced Operator
Panel (AOP, LOCAL mode).
r0807.0
BO: Master control active / PcCtrl active
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned8
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays what has the master control.
The drive can be controlled via the BICO interconnection or from external (e.g. the commissioning software).
Bit field:
Bit
00
Signal name
Master control active
1 signal
Yes
0 signal
No
FP
5030,
6031
Dependency:
Refer to: p0806
Notice:
The master control only influences control word 1 and speed setpoint 1. Other control words/setpoints can be transferred from another automation device.
Note:
Bit 0 = 0: BICO interconnection active
Bit 0 = 1: Master control for PC/AOP
The master control is used from the commissioning software (drive control panel) and from the Advanced Operator
Panel (AOP, LOCAL mode).
p0809[0...2]
Copy Command Data Set CDS / Copy CDS
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned8
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8560
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
15
Factory setting
0
Description:
Copies one Command Data Set (CDS) into another.
Index:
[0] = Source Command Data Set
[1] = Target Command Data Set
[2] = Start copying procedure
Note:
Procedure:
1. In Index 0, enter which command data set should be copied.
2. In Index 1, enter the command data set that is to be copied into.
3. Start copying: Set index 2 from 0 to 1.
p0809[2] is automatically set to 0 when copying is completed.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-229
Parameter
List of parameters
p0810
BI: Command Data Set selection CDS bit 0 / CDS select., bit 0
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8560
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source to select the Command Data Set bit 0 (CDS bit 0).
Dependency:
Refer to: r0050, p0811, r0836
Notice:
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note:
The Command Data Set selected using the binector inputs is displayed in r0836.
The currently effective command data set is displayed in r0050.
A Command Data Set can be copied using p0809.
p0811
BI: Command data set selection CDS bit 1 / CDS select., bit 1
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8560
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source to select the Command Data Set bit 1 (CDS bit 1).
Dependency:
Refer to: r0050, p0810, r0836
Note:
The Command Data Set selected using the binector inputs is displayed in r0836.
The currently effective command data set is displayed in r0050.
A Command Data Set can be copied using p0809.
p0819[0...2]
Copy Drive Data Set DDS / Copy DDS
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(15)
0
Data type: Unsigned8
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8565
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
31
Factory setting
0
Description:
Copies one Drive Data Set (DDS) into another.
Index:
[0] = Source Drive Data Set
[1] = Target Drive Data Set
[2] = Start copying procedure
Note:
Procedure:
1. In Index 0, enter which drive data set is to be copied.
2. In Index 1, enter the drive data set data that is to be copied into.
3. Start copying: Set index 2 from 0 to 1.
p0819[2] is automatically set to 0 when copying is completed.
1-230
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p0820[0...n]
BI: Drive Data Set selection DDS bit 0 / DDS select., bit 0
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(15), T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 8565, 8575
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source to select the Drive Data Set, bit 0 (DDS, bit 0).
Dependency:
Refer to: r0051, r0837
Notice:
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
p0821[0...n]
BI: Drive Data Set selection DDS bit 1 / DDS select., bit 1
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(15), T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 8565
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source to select the Drive Data Set, bit 1 (DDS, bit 1).
Dependency:
Refer to: r0051, r0837
Notice:
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
p0822[0...n]
BI: Drive Data Set selection DDS bit 2 / DDS select., bit 2
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(15), T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 8565
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source to select the Drive Data Set, bit 2 (DDS, bit 2).
Dependency:
Refer to: r0051, r0837
Notice:
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
p0823[0...n]
BI: Drive Data Set selection DDS bit 3 / DDS select., bit 3
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(15), T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 8565
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source to select the Drive Data Set, bit 3 (DDS, bit 3).
Dependency:
Refer to: r0051, r0837
Notice:
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-231
Parameter
List of parameters
p0824[0...n]
BI: Drive Data Set selection DDS bit 4 / DDS select., bit 4
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(15), T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 8565, 8575
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source to select the Drive Data Set, bit 4 (DDS, bit 4).
Dependency:
Refer to: r0051, r0837
Notice:
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
p0826[0...n]
Motor changeover, motor number / Mot_chng mot No.
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3)
0
Data type: Unsigned16
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 8575
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
15
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the freely-assignable motor number for the motor changeover.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0827
Caution:
When changing over motor data sets with the same motor number (e.g. star-delta changeover) and for a motor with
brake, the motor brake remains open during the changeover.
Note:
When the motor data sets are changed over, the following applies:
The same motor number signifies the same thermal model.
For the same motor number, the correction values of the Rs, Lh or kT adaptation are applied for the data set
changeover (refer to r1782, r1787, r1797).
p0827[0...n]
Motor changeover status word bit number / Mot_chg ZSW bitNo.
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3)
0
Data type: Unsigned16
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 8575
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
15
Factory setting
0
Sets the bit number for every motor data set.
Example:
p0827[0] = 0: For MDS0, r0830.0 is switched.
p0827[1] = 5: For MDS1, r0830.5 is switched.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0826, r0830
Note:
A motor is only changed over (a new motor selected) after the pulses have been suppressed.
When the motor data sets are changed over, the following applies:
Bit numbers that are not identical, signify that the motor must be changed over.
1-232
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p0828[0...n]
BI: Motor changeover, feedback signal / Mot_chng fdbk sig
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3), T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 8575
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Sets the signal source for the feedback signal when changing over the motor.
For p0833.0 = 1 the following applies:
This feedback signal (0/1 edge) is required after a motor changeover to enable the pulses.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0833
Notice:
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
r0830.0...15
CO/BO: Motor changeover, status word / Mot_chngov ZSW
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned16
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8575
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the status word of the motor changeover.
These signals can be connected to digital outputs to change over the motor.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Signal name
Motor selection, bit 0
Motor selection, bit 1
Motor selection, bit 2
Motor selection, bit 3
Motor selection, bit 4
Motor selection, bit 5
Motor selection, bit 6
Motor selection, bit 7
Motor selection, bit 8
Motor selection, bit 9
Motor selection, bit 10
Motor selection, bit 11
Motor selection, bit 12
Motor selection, bit 13
Motor selection, bit 14
Motor selection, bit 15
Dependency:
Refer to: p0827
1 signal
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
0 signal
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
FP
-
1-233
Parameter
List of parameters
p0831[0...15]
BI: Motor changeover, contactor feedback / Mot_chg cont fdbk
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8575
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Sets the signal source for the feedback signal of the contactors when changing over motors.
There is a fixed inter-relationship between energizing the contactor and the feedback signal.
Example:
A changeover is to be made between MDS0 (motor 0) and MDS1 (motor 1). The contactors should be switched
using bit 4 (contactor 0) and 5 (contactor 1). The changeover should be made with an interconnection of the feedback signal.
Implementation:
MDS0: p0827[0] = 4, interconnect output to switch contactor 0 to r0830.4, p0831[4] = "input, feedback signal, contactor 0"
MDS1: p0827[1] = 5, interconnect output to switch contactor 1 to r0830.5, p0831[5] = "input, feedback signal, contactor 1"
The following sequence applies when changing over from MDS0 to MDS1:
1. The status bit r0830.4 is deleted. When the feedback signal (p0831[4]) is connected, the system waits until the
feedback signal "contactor open" is displayed. If the feedback signal is not connected, then the system waits for the
switch-off interlocking time of 320 ms.
2. The status bit r0830.5 is set. If the feedback signal (p0831[5]) is connected, the system waits until the feedback
signal "contactor closed" is displayed. If the feedback signal is not connected, then the system waits for the switchon interlocking time of 160 ms.
Index:
[0] = Feedback signal contactor 0
[1] = Feedback signal contactor 1
[2] = Feedback signal contactor 2
[3] = Feedback signal contactor 3
[4] = Feedback signal contactor 4
[5] = Feedback signal contactor 5
[6] = Feedback signal contactor 6
[7] = Feedback signal contactor 7
[8] = Feedback signal contactor 8
[9] = Feedback signal contactor 9
[10] = Feedback signal contactor 10
[11] = Feedback signal contactor 11
[12] = Feedback signal contactor 12
[13] = Feedback signal contactor 13
[14] = Feedback signal contactor 14
[15] = Feedback signal contactor 15
1-234
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
r0832.0...15
CO/BO: Mot. changeover, contactor feedback sig. status word / Mot_chng fdbk ZSW
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8575
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status word of the contactor feedback signals when changing over a motor.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Dependency:
Refer to: p0831
p0833
Data set changeover configuration / DS_chng config
Signal name
Feedback signal contactor 0
Feedback signal contactor 1
Feedback signal contactor 2
Feedback signal contactor 3
Feedback signal contactor 4
Feedback signal contactor 5
Feedback signal contactor 6
Feedback signal contactor 7
Feedback signal contactor 8
Feedback signal contactor 9
Feedback signal contactor 10
Feedback signal contactor 11
Feedback signal contactor 12
Feedback signal contactor 13
Feedback signal contactor 14
Feedback signal contactor 15
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(15)
0
Data type: Unsigned16
1 signal
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
FP
-
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8575
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0010 bin
Description:
Sets the configuration for the motor and encoder changeover.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
Note:
0 signal
Opened
Opened
Opened
Opened
Opened
Opened
Opened
Opened
Opened
Opened
Opened
Opened
Opened
Opened
Opened
Opened
Signal name
Contactor changeover from the application/drive
Pulse suppression by application/drive
Suppress drive parking for EDS changeover
1 signal
application
0 signal
Drive
FP
-
application
Yes
Drive
No
Re bit 00:
When the bit is set and the motor has to be changed over, then p0827 must be set differently in the appropriate
motor data sets.
Re bit 02:
The bit defines whether, for an EDS changeover, the status signal Gn_ZSW.14 is suppressed (parking encoder
active).
Re motor changeover to running motor:
The "flying restart" function should also be activated (p1200) when changing over to a motor that is already running.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-235
Parameter
List of parameters
r0835.2
ENCODER
CO/BO: Data set changeover status word / DDS_ZSW
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8575
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status word for the drive data set changeover.
Bit field:
Bit
02
Note:
Re bit 02:
Signal name
Internal parameter calculation active
1 signal
Yes
0 signal
No
FP
-
A data set changeover is delayed by the time required for the internal parameter calculation.
r0835.0...11
CO/BO: Data set changeover status word / DDS_ZSW
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned16
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8575
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status word for the drive data set changeover.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
04
05
06
07
08
10
11
Note:
This parameter is only supplied with up-to-date values if data set changeover has been selected or is running.
Signal name
Motor changeover active
Encoder changeover active
Internal parameter calculation active
Armature short circuit active
Identification running
Friction characteristic record running
Rotating measurement running
Motor data identification running
Wait for pulse suppression
Wait for motor changeover feedback signal
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
FP
8575
-
Re bit 00:
The signal is only influenced when a motor changeover is set via p0827 (unequal bit numbers).
Re bit 01:
The signal is only influenced when an encoder changeover is set via p0187, p0188, or p0189.
Re bit 02:
A data set changeover is delayed by the time required for the internal parameter calculation.
Re bit 04:
A data set changeover is only carried out when the armature short circuit is not activated.
Re bit 05:
The following applies for SERVO:
A data set changeover is only carried out when pole position identification, encoder adjustment, motor data identification, and rotating measurement are not running.
The following applies for VECTOR:
A data set changeover is only carried out when pole position identification is not running.
Re bit 06:
A data set changeover is only carried out when the friction characteristic record is not running.
Re bit 07 (VECTOR only):
A data set changeover is only carried out when rotating measurement is not running.
Re bit 08 (VECTOR only):
A data set changeover is only carried out when motor data identification is not running.
1-236
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
Re bit 10:
A motor changeover is set with p0833.1 = 1. It can only be carried out when the application performs pulse suppression.
Re bit 11:
A motor changeover is set with p0833.0 = 1. The pulses are only enabled when the "Motor changeover feedback"
signal is detected.
r0836.0...3
CO/BO: Command Data Set CDS selected / CDS selected
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned8
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1530, 8560
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the command data set (CDS) selected via the binector input.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
Dependency:
Refer to: r0050, p0810, p0811
Note:
Command data sets are selected via binector input p0810 and following.
Signal name
CDS select. bit 0
CDS select. bit 1
CDS select. bit 2
CDS select. bit 3
1 signal
On
On
On
On
0 signal
Off
Off
Off
Off
FP
-
The currently effective command data set is displayed in r0050.
r0837.0...4
CO/BO: Drive Data Set DDS selected / DDS selected
ENCODER,
Can be changed: VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Unsigned8
0
P-Group: Displays, signals
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8565
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the drive data set (DDS) selected via the binector input.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
Dependency:
Refer to: r0051, p0820, p0821, p0822, p0823, p0824
Note:
Drive data sets are selected via binector input p0820 and following.
Signal name
DDS select. bit 0
DDS select. bit 1
DDS select. bit 2
DDS select. bit 3
DDS select. bit 4
1 signal
On
On
On
On
On
0 signal
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
FP
-
The currently effective drive data set is displayed in r0051.
If there is only one data set, then a value of 0 is displayed in this parameter and not the selection via binector inputs.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-237
Parameter
List of parameters
r0838[0...3]
Motor/Encoder Data Set selected / MDS/EDS selected
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned8
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8565
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the selected Motor Data Set (MDS) and the selected Encoder Data Sets (EDS).
Index:
[0] = Motor Data Set MDS selected
[1] = Encoder 1 Encoder Data Set EDS selected
[2] = Encoder 2 Encoder Data Set EDS selected
[3] = Encoder 3 Encoder Data Set EDS selected
Dependency:
Refer to: r0049, p0186, p0187, p0188, p0189
Note:
Value 99 means the following: No encoder assigned (not configured).
p0839
Motor changeover contactor control delay time / Mot_chg ctrl t_del
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(3)
0
Data type: Unsigned16
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [ms]
Max
500 [ms]
Factory setting
0 [ms]
Sets the delay time for the contactor control for the motor changeover.
The delay time is taken into account in the following cases:
- for feedback signal, previous contactor "Open". The new motor contactor is controlled (energized) after the delay
time has expired.
- for the feedback signal, new motor contactor "Closed". The pulses are enabled after the delay time has expired.
p0840[0...n]
BI: ON/OFF1 / ON/OFF1
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 2501, 2610,
8720, 8820, 8920
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for control word 1 bit 0 (ON/OFF1).
Recommend.:
When the setting for this binector input is changed, the motor can only be switched on by means of an appropriate
signal change of the source.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1055, p1056
Notice:
For BI: p0840 = 0 signal, the motor can be moved, jogging using BI: p1055 or BI: p1056.
The command "ON/OFF1" can be issued using BI: p0840 or using BI: p1055/p1056.
Only the signal source that originally powered up can also power down again.
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note:
For drives with closed-loop speed control (p1300 = 20, 21), the following applies:
Bit 0 = 0: OFF1 (braking with the ramp-function generator, then pulse suppression and switching on inhibited)
For drives with closed-loop torque control (p1300 = 22, 23), the following applies:
Bit 0 = 0: Immediate pulse suppression
For drives with closed-loop torque control (activated using p1501), the following applies:
Bit 0 = 0: No dedicated braking response, but pulse suppression when standstill is detected (p1226, p1227)
For drives with closed-loop speed/torque control, the following applies:
Bit 0 = 0/1: ON (pulses can be enabled)
1-238
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
For active infeeds (Active Line Module and Smart Line Module) the following applies:
Bit 0 = 0: OFF1 (reduce Vdc along the ramp, then pulse suppression and pre-charging contactor/line contactor
open)
Bit 0 = 0/1: ON (pre-charging contactor/line contactor closed, pulses can be enabled)
For passive infeeds (Basic Line Module) the following applies:
Bit 0 = 0: OFF1 (pre-charging contactor/line contactor open)
Bit 0 = 0/1: ON (pre-charging contactor/line contactor closed)
r0863.1 of a drive can also be selected as signal source.
p0844[0...n]
BI: 1. OFF2 / 1. OFF2
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 2501, 8720,
8820, 8920
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the signal source for the 1st OC/OFF2.
Caution:
When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.
Notice:
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note:
For drives, the following applies:
The AND logic operation of the 1st OC/OFF2 and 2nd OC/OFF2 results in control word 1, bit 1 (OC/OFF2).
Bit 1 = 0: OFF2 (immediate pulse suppression and switching on inhibited)
Bit 1 = 1: No OFF2 (enable is possible)
For infeed units, the following applies:
Bit 1 = 0: OFF2 (immediate pulse suppression for Active Infeed Modules and Smart Line Modules, pre-charging
contactor/line contactor open and switching on inhibited)
Bit 1 = 1: No OFF2 (enable is possible)
OC: Operating condition
p0845[0...n]
BI: 2. OFF2 / 2. OFF2
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 2501, 8720,
8820, 8920
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Sets the signal source for the 2nd OC/OFF2.
The AND logic operation of the 1st OC/OFF2 and 2nd OC/OFF2 results in control word 1, bit 1 (OC/OFF2).
Note:
For drives, the following applies:
Bit 1 = 0: OFF2 (immediate pulse suppression and switching on inhibited)
Bit 1 = 1: No OFF2 (enable is possible)
For infeed units, the following applies:
Bit 1 = 0: OFF2 (immediate pulse suppression for Active Infeed Modules and Smart Line Modules, pre-charging
contactor/line contactor open and switching on inhibited)
Bit 1 = 1: No OFF2 (enable is possible)
OC: Operating condition
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-239
Parameter
List of parameters
p0848[0...n]
BI: 1. OFF3 / 1. OFF3
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 2501
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Sets the signal source for the 1st OC/OFF3.
The AND logic operation of the 1st OC/OFF3 and 2nd OC/OFF3 results in control word 1, bit 2 (OC/OFF3).
Caution:
When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.
Notice:
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note:
Bit 2 = 0: OFF3 (braking along the OFF3 ramp (p1135), then pulse suppression and switching on inhibited)
Bit 2 = 1: No OFF3 (enable is possible)
OC: Operating condition
p0849[0...n]
BI: 2. OFF3 / 2. OFF3
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 2501
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Sets the signal source for the 2nd OC/OFF3.
The AND logic operation of the 1st OC/OFF3 and 2nd OC/OFF3 results in control word 1, bit 2 (OC/OFF3).
Note:
Bit 2 = 0: OFF3 (braking along the OFF3 ramp (p1135), then pulse suppression and switching on inhibited)
Bit 2 = 1: No OFF3 (enable is possible)
OC: Operating condition
p0852[0...n]
BI: Operation enable / Operation enable
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 2501, 8820,
8920
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the signal source for control word 1 bit 3 (enable operation)
Caution:
When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.
Notice:
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note:
Bit 3 = 0: Inhibit operation (cancel pulses)
Bit 3 = 1: Enable operation (pulses can be enabled)
1-240
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p0854
BI: Master ctrl by PLC / Master ctrl by PLC
ENCODER
Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2501, 8720,
8820, 8920
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the signal source for control word 1 bit 10 (master control by PLC).
Notice:
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note:
Bit 10 = 0: No master control by PLC
Bit 10 = 1: Master control by PLC
This bit is used to initiate a response for the drives when the control fails (F07220). If there is no control available,
then BI: p0854 should be set to a 1 signal.
If a control is available, control word 1 bit 10 = 1 (STW1.10, PZD1) must be set so that the received data is updated.
This applies regardless of the setting in p0854 and even in the case of free telegram configuration (p0922 = 999).
p0854[0...n]
BI: Master ctrl by PLC / Master ctrl by PLC
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 2501, 8720,
8820, 8920
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the signal source for control word 1 bit 10 (master control by PLC).
Notice:
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note:
Bit 10 = 0: No master control by PLC
Bit 10 = 1: Master control by PLC
This bit is used to initiate a response for the drives when the control fails (F07220). If there is no control available,
then BI: p0854 should be set to a 1 signal.
If a control is available, control word 1 bit 10 = 1 (STW1.10, PZD1) must be set so that the received data is updated.
This applies regardless of the setting in p0854 and even in the case of free telegram configuration (p0922 = 999).
p0855[0...n]
BI: Unconditionally release holding brake / Uncond open brake
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 2501, 2701,
2707
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for the command "unconditionally open holding brake".
Dependency:
Refer to: p0858
Notice:
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note:
The signal via BI: p0858 (unconditionally close holding brake) has a higher priority than via BI: p0855 (unconditionally open holding brake).
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-241
Parameter
List of parameters
p0856[0...n]
BI: Speed controller enable / n_ctrl enable
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 2501, 2701,
2707
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Sets the signal source for the command "enable speed controller" (r0898.12).
0 signal: Set the I component and speed controller output to zero.
1 signal: Enable speed controller.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0898
Note:
If "enable speed controller" is withdrawn, then an existing brake will be closed.
If "speed controller enable" is withdrawn, the pulses are not suppressed.
p0857
Power unit monitoring time / PU t_monit
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8760, 8864,
8964
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
100.0 [ms]
Max
60000.0 [ms]
Factory setting
6000.0 [ms]
Sets the monitoring time for the power unit.
The following applies for infeeds and drives:
The monitoring time is started after an 0/1 edge of the ON/OFF1 command. If the power unit does not return a
READY signal within the monitoring time, then fault F06000 (infeeds) or F07802 (drives) is output.
For drives, the following also applies:
After the pulse enable (operation enabled, p0852), the monitoring time is re-started. If the infeed does not signal
ready to the drive within the monitoring time (using BI: p0864 of the drive), fault F07840 is initiated.
Dependency:
Refer to: F07802, F07840, F30027
Notice:
The maximum time to pre-charge the DC link is monitored in the power unit and cannot be changed. The maximum
duration of the pre-charging depends on the power class and the power unit design.
The monitoring time for the pre-charging is started after the ON command (BI: p0840 = 0/1 signal). Fault F30027 is
output when the maximum pre-charging duration is exceeded.
Note:
The factory setting for p0857 depends on the power class and the design of the power unit.
The monitoring time for the ready signal of the power unit includes the time to pre-charge the DC link and, if relevant, the de-bounce time of the contactors.
If an excessively low value is entered into p0857, then after enable, this results in the corresponding fault.
p0858[0...n]
BI: Unconditionally close holding brake / Uncond close brake
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 2501, 2701,
2707
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for the command "unconditionally close holding brake".
Dependency:
Refer to: p0855
1-242
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
The signal via BI: p0858 (unconditionally close holding brake) has a higher priority than via BI: p0855 (unconditionally open holding brake).
For a 1 signal via BI: p0858, the command "unconditionally close the holding brake" is executed and internally a
zero setpoint is entered.
p0860
BI: Line cont. fdbk sig / Line contact feedb
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2634, 8734,
8834, 8934
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
863.1
Description:
Sets the signal source for the feedback signal from the line contactor.
Recommend.:
When the monitoring is activated (BI: p0860 not equal to r0863.1), then to control the line contactor, signal BO:
r0863.1 of its own drive object should be used.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0861, r0863
Refer to: F07300
Notice:
The line contactor monitoring is deactivated if the control signal of the particular drive object is set as the signal
source for the feedback signal of the line contactor (BI: p0860 = r0863.1).
Note:
The state of the line contactor is monitored depending on signal BO: r0863.1.
When the monitoring is activated (BI: p0860 not equal to r0863.1), fault F07300 is then also output if the contactor
is closed before it is controlled using r0863.1.
p0861
Line contactor monitoring time / LineContact t_mon
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2634, 8734,
8834, 8934
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [ms]
Max
5000 [ms]
Factory setting
100 [ms]
Sets the monitoring time of the line contactor.
This time starts each time that the line contactor switches (r0863.1). If a feedback signal is not received from the
line contactor within the time, a message is output.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0860, r0863
Refer to: F07300
Note:
The monitoring function is disabled for the factory setting of p0860.
p0862
Power unit ON delay / PU t_on
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2610, 8732,
8832, 8932
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [ms]
Max
65000 [ms]
Factory setting
0 [ms]
Description:
Sets the delay time for the control command of the power unit and a line contactor, if used.
Note:
This means that it is possible to realize a shifted (delayed) pre-charging or power-on using a single ON command.
When the infeed units are active, before the line contactor is closed, an offset adjustment of the current measurement is carried out for a duration of 120 ms (p3491).
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-243
Parameter
List of parameters
r0863.0...2
CO/BO: Drive coupling status word/control word / CoupleZSW/STW
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned16
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status and control words of the drive coupling.
Bit field:
Bit
00
Signal name
Closed-loop control operation
1 signal
Yes
0 signal
No
01
Energize contactor
Yes
No
02
Infeed line supply failure
Yes
No
Dependency:
Refer to: p0864
Note:
Re bit 00:
FP
2610,
6495,
8732,
8832,
8932,
9794
2610,
2634,
8732,
8734,
8832,
8834,
8932,
8934
-
Bit 0 signals that the infeed is ready.
When the operating signal is transferred via BO: r0863.0 this allows several drives to start (run-up) staggered over
time when they are simultaneously powered up.
To realize this, the following connections/interconnections are required:
Drive 1: Internconnect BI: p0864 with BO: r0863.0 of the infeed
Drive 2: Internconnect BI: p0864 with BO: r0863.0 of drive 1
Drive 3: Internconnect BI: p0864 with BO: r0863.0 of drive 2, etc.
The first drive only transfers the operating signal to the next drive after it has reached its ready condition.
Re bit 01:
Bit 1 is used to control an external line contactor.
Re bit 02:
This bit only signals line supply failure for Active Infeed (A_INF) and Smart Infeed (S_INF).
p0864
BI: Infeed operation / INF operation
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1773, 1774,
2610
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for the operating signal of the infeed (e.g. BO: r0863.0).
Dependency:
Refer to: r0863
Note:
The sequence control of a servo/vector drive requires this signal.
The following applies for an infeed without DRIVE-CLiQ:
For these infeeds, the "ready" message is available via an output terminal. This signal must be connected to a digital input. The drives supplied from this infeed must use this signal as ready signal (BI: p0864 = digital input).
1-244
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p0868
Power unit DC switch debounce time / PU DC sw t_deboun
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [ms]
Max
65000 [ms]
Factory setting
65000 [ms]
Description:
Sets the debounce time for the DC circuit breaker for Motor Modules in "chassis" format.
Note:
The following applies if p0868 = 65000 ms:
The debounce time defined internally in the power unit's EEPROM is implemented.
p0895[0...n]
BI: Activate/deactivate power unit components / PU_comp act/deact
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the signal source to activate/deactivate a power unit component.
Dependency:
BI: p0895 = 0 signal
Deactivating power unit components
BI: p0895 = 1 signal
Activating power unit components
Refer to: p0125, r0126
Refer to: A05054
Caution:
It is not permissible to deactivate drive objects with safety functions enabled.
Note:
The power unit is only deactivated when the pulses are suppressed.
For units connected in parallel, when one of the power units is deactivated, then the enable in p7001 is withdrawn.
r0896.0
BO: Parking axis, status word / Parking axis, ZSW
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned8
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status word for the "parking axis" function.
Bit field:
Bit
00
Dependency:
Refer to: p0897
Signal name
Parking axis active
1 signal
Yes
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
0 signal
No
FP
-
1-245
Parameter
List of parameters
p0897
BI: Parking axis selection / Parking axis sel
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source to select the "parking axis" function.
Dependency:
BI: p0897 = 0 signal
The function "parking axis" is not selected.
BI: p0897 = 1 signal
The function "parking axis" is selected.
Refer to: r0896
Notice:
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note:
After it has been selected the "parking axis" function only becomes active when the pulses are suppressed.
r0898.0...15
CO/BO: Control word drive object 1 / STW DO1
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the control word of drive object 1 (Control Unit).
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
07
12
13
14
15
r0898.10
CO/BO: Control word sequence control encoder DO / STW seq_ctrl encDO
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Signal name
Synchronization signal SYN
Real time synchronization PING
Acknowledge fault
Master sign-of-life bit 0
Master sign-of-life bit 1
Master sign-of-life bit 2
Master sign-of-life bit 3
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Description:
Displays the control word for sequence control on the encoder drive object.
Bit field:
Bit
10
1-246
Signal name
Master ctrl by PLC
1 signal
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
0 signal
No
FP
-
FP
-
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
r0898.0...14
CO/BO: Control word sequence control / STW seq_ctrl
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned16
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1530, 2501
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the control word of the sequence control.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
12
14
Note:
OC: Operating condition
r0899.0...15
CO/BO: Status word drive object 1 / ZSW DO1
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Signal name
ON/OFF1
OC / OFF2
OC / OFF3
Operation enable
Ramp-function generator enable
Continue ramp-function generator
Speed setpoint enable
Command open brake
Jog 1
Jog 2
Master ctrl by PLC
Speed controller enable
Command close brake
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Description:
Displays the status word from drive object 1 (Control Unit).
Bit field:
Bit
00
03
07
08
12
13
14
15
r0899.9
CO/BO: Status word sequence control encoder DO / ZSW seq_ctrl encDO
ENCODER
Signal name
reserved
Fault present
Alarm present
System time synchronized
Slave sign-of-life bit 0
Slave sign-of-life bit 1
Slave sign-of-life bit 2
Slave sign-of-life bit 3
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
FP
-
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
FP
-
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status word for sequence control on the encoder drive object.
Bit field:
Bit
09
Note:
For PROFIdrive, this signal is used for status word ZSW2_ENC.
Signal name
Control request
1 signal
Yes
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
0 signal
No
FP
-
1-247
Parameter
List of parameters
r0899.0...15
CO/BO: Status word sequence control / ZSW seq_ctrl
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned16
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1530, 2503
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status word of the sequence control.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
11
12
13
14
15
Note:
Re bits 00, 01, 02, 04, 05, 06, 09:
Signal name
Ready for sw on
Ready
Operation enabled
Jog active
No coasting active
No Quick Stop active
Switching on inhibited active
Drive ready
Controller enable
Control request
Pulses enabled
Holding brake open
Command close holding brake
Pulse enable from the brake control
Setpoint enable from the brake control
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
OFF2 inactive
OFF3 inactive
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
OFF2 active
OFF3 active
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
FP
-
For PROFIdrive, these signals are used for status word 1.
Re bit 13:
When the "Safe Brake Control" (SBC) is activated and selected, the brake is no longer controlled using this signal.
Re bit 14, 15:
These signals are only of significance when the "extended brake control" function module is activated (r0108.14 =
1).
p0918
PROFIBUS address / PB address
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1520, 2410
P-Group: Communications
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
126
Factory setting
126
Description:
Displays or sets the PROFIBUS address for PROFIBUS interface on the Control Unit.
The address can be set as follows:
1) Using the address switch on the Control Unit.
--> p0918 can then only be read and displays the selected address.
--> A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
2) Using p0918
--> Only if the address 00 hex, 7F hex, 80 hex, or FF hex has been set using the address switch.
--> The address is saved in a non-volatile fashion using the function "copy from RAM to ROM".
--> A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
Note:
Permissible PROFIBUS addresses: 1 ... 126 (01 hex ... 7E hex)
Address 126 is used for commissioning.
Every PROFIBUS address change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
1-248
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p0922
PROFIdrive telegram selection / PD Telegr_sel
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C2(1), T
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1520, 2420,
2423, 2481, 2483
P-Group: Communications
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
390
Max
999
Factory setting
999
Description:
Sets the send and receive telegram.
Value:
390:
391:
392:
999:
p0922
PROFIdrive telegram selection / PD Telegr_sel
ENCODER
SIEMENS telegram 390, PZD-2/2
SIEMENS telegram 391, PZD-3/7
SIEMENS telegram 392, PZD-3/15
Free telegram configuration with BICO
Can be changed: C2(1), T
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1520, 2420,
2422, 2423, 2468, 2470
P-Group: Communications
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
81
Max
999
Factory setting
999
Description:
Sets the send and receive telegram.
Value:
81:
82:
83:
999:
Dependency:
Refer to: p2038
SIEMENS telegram 81, PZD-2/6
SIEMENS telegram 82, PZD-2/7
SIEMENS telegram 83, PZD-2/8
Free telegram configuration with BICO
Refer to: F01505, F01506
Note:
If a value is not equal to 999, a telegram is set and the automatically set interconnections in the telegram are inhibited.
The inhibited interconnections can only be changed again after setting value 999.
p0922
PROFIdrive telegram selection / PD Telegr_sel
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(1), T
0
Data type: Unsigned16
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1520, 2420,
2422, 2423, 2468, 2470
P-Group: Communications
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
999
Factory setting
999
Description:
Sets the send and receive telegram.
Value:
1:
2:
20:
220:
352:
999:
Dependency:
Refer to: F01505, F01506
Caution:
Telegrams 2, 3 and 4 are not suitable for sensorless vector control (p1300 = 20). For sensorless vector control, it is
necessary that the setpoint speed is entered at the ramp-function generator input (e.g. p1070) and not after the
ramp-function generator (p1155).
Standard telegram 1, PZD-2/2
Standard telegram 2, PZD-4/4
Standard telegram 20, PZD-2/6
SIEMENS telegram 220, PZD-10/10
SIEMENS telegram 352, PZD-6/6
Free telegram configuration with BICO
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-249
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
If a value is not equal to 999, a telegram is set and the automatically set interconnections in the telegram are inhibited.
The inhibited interconnections can only be changed again after setting value 999.
p0922
PROFIdrive telegram selection / PD Telegr_sel
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(1), T
0 (n/M)
Data type: Unsigned16
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1520, 2420,
2422, 2423, 2468, 2470
P-Group: Communications
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
999
Factory setting
999
Description:
Sets the send and receive telegram.
Value:
1:
2:
3:
4:
20:
220:
352:
999:
Dependency:
Refer to: F01505, F01506
Caution:
Telegrams 2, 3 and 4 are not suitable for sensorless vector control (p1300 = 20). For sensorless vector control, it is
necessary that the setpoint speed is entered at the ramp-function generator input (e.g. p1070) and not after the
ramp-function generator (p1155).
Note:
If a value is not equal to 999, a telegram is set and the automatically set interconnections in the telegram are inhibited.
Standard telegram 1, PZD-2/2
Standard telegram 2, PZD-4/4
Standard telegram 3, PZD-5/9
Standard telegram 4, PZD-6/14
Standard telegram 20, PZD-2/6
SIEMENS telegram 220, PZD-10/10
SIEMENS telegram 352, PZD-6/6
Free telegram configuration with BICO
The inhibited interconnections can only be changed again after setting value 999.
r0924[0...1]
ZSW bit pulses enabled / ZSW pulses enab
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned16
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2454, 2456
P-Group: Communications
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Display of the position of the "Pulses enabled" status word bit in the PROFIdrive telegram
Index:
[0] = Signal number
[1] = Bit position
p0925
PROFIdrive clock synchronous sign-of-life tolerance / PD SoL_tol
ENCODER,
Can be changed: U, T
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Unsigned16
0 (n/M)
P-Group: Communications
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2410
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the number of tolerated consecutive sign-of-life errors of the clock-cycle synchronous master.
Dependency:
Refer to: p2045, r2065
The sign-of-life signal is normally received in PZD4 (control word 2) from the master.
Refer to: F01912
Note:
The sign-of-life monitoring is disabled for p0925 = 65535.
1-250
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
r0930
PROFIdrive operating mode / PD operating mode
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned16
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the operating mode.
1: Closed-loop speed controlled operation with ramp-function generator
2: Closed-loop position controlled operation
3: Closed-loop speed controlled operation without ramp-function generator
r0944
CO: Counter for fault buffer changes / Fault buff change
All objects
Description:
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8060
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays fault buffer changes. This counter is incremented every time the fault buffer changes.
Recommend.:
Used to check whether the fault buffer has been read out consistently.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109
r0945[0...63]
Fault code / Fault code
All objects
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1750, 8060
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the numbers of faults that have occurred.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109, r2130, r2133, r2136, r3120, r3122
Note:
The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
Fault buffer structure (general principle):
r0945[0], r0949[0], r0948[0], r2109[0], r3115[0] --> actual fault case, fault 1
...
r0945[7], r0949[7], r0948[7], r2109[7], r3115[7] --> actual fault case, fault 8
r0945[8], r0949[8], r0948[8], r2109[8], r3115[8] --> 1st acknowledged fault case, fault 1
...
r0945[15], r0949[15], r0948[15], r2109[15], r3115[15] --> 1st acknowledged fault case, fault 8
...
r0945[56], r0949[56], r0948[56], r2109[56], r3115[56] --> 7th acknowledged fault case, fault 1
...
r0945[63], r0949[63], r0948[63], r2109[63], r3115[63] --> 7th acknowledged fault case, fault 8
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-251
Parameter
List of parameters
r0946[0...65534] Fault code list / Fault code list
All objects
Description:
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8060
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Lists the fault codes stored in the drive unit.
The indices can only be accessed with a valid fault code.
Dependency:
The parameter assigned to the fault code is entered in r0951 under the same index.
r0947[0...63]
Fault number / Fault number
All objects
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1750, 8060
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
This parameter is identical to r0945.
r0948[0...63]
Fault time received in milliseconds / t_fault recv ms
All objects
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1750, 8060
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [ms]
Max
- [ms]
Factory setting
- [ms]
Description:
Displays the system runtime in milliseconds when the fault occurred.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0949, r2109, r2114, r2130, r2133, r2136, r3115, r3120, r3122
Notice:
The time comprises r2130 (days) and r0948 (milliseconds).
Note:
The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
The structure of the fault buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r0945.
When the parameter is read via PROFIdrive, the TimeDifference data type applies.
r0949[0...63]
All objects
Fault value / Fault value
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Integer32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1750, 8060
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays additional information about the fault that occurred (as integer number).
Dependency:
Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r2109, r2130, r2133, r2136, r3115, r3120, r3122
Note:
The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
The structure of the fault buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r0945.
1-252
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p0952
Fault cases, counter / Fault cases qty
All objects
Can be changed: U, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1710, 8060
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
0
Description:
Number of fault situations that have occurred since the last reset.
Dependency:
The fault buffer is deleted (cleared) by setting p0952 to 0.
Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109, r2130, r2133, r2136
r0963
PROFIBUS baud rate / PB baud rate
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
255
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the corresponding value for the PROFIBUS baud rate.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
255:
9.6 kbit/s
19.2 kbit/s
93.75 kbit/s
187.5 kbit/s
500 kbit/s
1.5 Mbit/s
3 Mbit/s
6 Mbit/s
12 Mbit/s
31.25 kbit/s
45.45 kbit/s
Baud rate unknown
r0964[0...6]
Device identification / Device ident.
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the device identification.
Index:
[0] = Company (Siemens = 42)
[1] = Device type
[2] = Firmware version
[3] = Firmware date (year)
[4] = Firmware date (day/month)
[5] = Number of drive objects
[6] = Firmware patch/hot fix
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-253
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
Example:
r0964[0] = 42 --> SIEMENS
r0964[1] = 5000 --> SINAMICS S CU320
r0964[1] = 5200 --> SINAMICS G CU320
r0964[2] = 102 --> first part of the firmware version V01.02 (second part, refer to index 6)
r0964[3] = 2003 --> year 2003
r0964[4] = 1401 --> 14th of January
r0964[5] = 4 --> 4 drive objects
r0964[6] = 600 --> second part, firmware version (complete version: V01.02.06.00)
r0965
PROFIdrive profile number / PD profile number
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the PROFIdrive profile number and profile version.
Constant value = 0329 hex.
Byte 1: Profile number = 03 hex = PROFIdrive profile
Byte 2: Profile version = 29 hex = Version 4.1
Note:
When the parameter is read via PROFIdrive, the Octet String 2 data type applies.
p0969
System runtime relative / t_System relative
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1750, 8060
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [ms]
Max
4294967295 [ms]
Factory setting
0 [ms]
Description:
Displays the system runtime in ms since the last POWER ON.
Note:
The value in p0969 can only be reset to 0.
The value overflows after approx. 49 days.
When the parameter is read via PROFIdrive, the TimeDifference data type applies.
p0970
ENCODER reset parameters / ENC par reset
ENCODER
Can be changed: C2(30)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Factory settings
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
100
Factory setting
0
Description:
The parameter is used to initiate the reset of the parameters on the ENCODER drive object.
Value:
0:
1:
100:
Notice:
After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in
r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
Note:
A factory setting run can only be started if p0010 was first set to 30 (parameter reset).
Parameter p0141 is not reset. It is only reset if the entire drive unit is reset to the factory settings (p0976).
Inactive
Start a parameter reset
Start a BICO interconnection reset
At the end of the calculations, p0970 is automatically set to 0. Parameter reset has been completed if p0970 and
p0010 have been set to 0.
1-254
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p0970
TB30 reset parameters / TB30 par reset
TB30
Description:
Can be changed: C2(30)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Factory settings
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
100
Factory setting
0
The parameter is used to initiate a reset of the parameters on Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
The sampling time p4099 is not reset if in so doing a conflict occurs with the basic clock cycle.
Parameter p0161 is not reset. It is only reset if the entire drive unit is reset to the factory settings (p0976).
Value:
0:
1:
100:
Inactive
Start a parameter reset
Start a BICO interconnection reset
Notice:
After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in
r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
Note:
A factory setting run can only be started if p0010 was first set to 30 (parameter reset).
At the end of the calculations, p0970 is automatically set to 0. Parameter reset has been completed if p0970 and
p0010 have been set to 0.
p0970
TM31 reset parameters / TM31 par reset
TM31
Description:
Can be changed: C2(30)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Factory settings
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
100
Factory setting
0
The parameter is used to initiate a reset of the parameters on Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
The sampling time p4099 is not reset if in so doing a conflict occurs with the basic clock cycle.
Parameter p0151 is not reset. It is only reset if the entire drive unit is reset to the factory settings (p0976).
Value:
0:
1:
100:
Inactive
Start a parameter reset
Start a BICO interconnection reset
Dependency:
Refer to: p0010
Notice:
After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in
r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
Note:
A factory setting run can only be started if p0010 was first set to 30 (parameter reset).
At the end of the calculations, p0970 is automatically set to 0.
p0970
TM54F reset parameters / TM54F par reset
TM54F_MA
Can be changed: C2(30)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Factory settings
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
100
Factory setting
0
Description:
The parameter is used to initiate a reset of the parameters on Terminal Module 54F (TM54F).
Value:
0:
1:
100:
Notice:
After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in
r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
Parameter p0151 is not reset. It is only reset if the entire drive unit is reset to the factory settings (p0976).
Inactive
Start a parameter reset
Start a BICO interconnection reset
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-255
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
A factory setting run can only be started if p0010 was first set to 30 (parameter reset).
At the end of the calculations, p0970 is automatically set to 0. Parameter reset has been completed if p0970 and
p0010 have been set to 0.
p0970
Reset drive parameters / Drive par reset
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(30)
0
Data type: Unsigned16
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Factory settings
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
100
Factory setting
0
The parameter is used to initiate the reset of the parameters of an individual drive unit.
Parameters p0100, p0205 (only for VECTOR) and the parameters of the basic drive commissioning (p0009) are not
reset (p0107, p0108, p0111, p0112, p0115, p0121, p0130, p0131, p0140, p0141, p0142, p0170, p0186 ... p0189).
These can only be reset using the factory setting of the complete drive unit (p0976).
Value:
0:
1:
5:
100:
Inactive
Start a parameter reset
Starts a safety parameter reset
Start a BICO interconnection reset
Dependency:
Refer to: F01659
Notice:
After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in
r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
Note:
A factory setting run can only be started if p0010 was first set to 30 (parameter reset).
At the end of the calculations, p0970 is automatically set to 0. Parameter reset has been completed if p0970 and
p0010 have been set to 0.
If a Safety Integrated function is parameterized (p9601), the safety parameters will not be reset if p0970 = 1. In this
case, an error message (F1659) is output with fault value 2.
p0971
Save drive object parameters / Drv_obj par save
All objects
Can be changed: U, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Factory settings
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Setting to save the parameter of the particular drive object in the non-volatile memory.
Value:
0:
1:
Dependency:
Refer to: p0977, p1960, p3845, r3996
Caution:
The Control Unit power supply may only be powered down after data has been saved (i.e. after data save has been
started, wait until the parameter again has the value 0).
Notice:
Writing to parameters is inhibited while saving.
Inactive
Save drive object
The progress while saving is displayed in r3996.
Note:
Starting from the particular drive object, the following parameters are saved:
CU3xx: Device-specific parameters and PROFIBUS device parameters.
Other objects: Parameters of the actual object and PROFIBUS device parameters.
Prerequisite:
In order that the parameter of a drive object, saved with p0971 = 1, is read the next time that the Control Unit is
booted, then all parameters must, as a minimum, have first been saved once with p0977 = 1.
1-256
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p0972
Drive unit reset / Drv_unit reset
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
3
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the required procedure to execute a hardware reset for the drive unit.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
Danger:
It must be absolutely ensured that the system is in a safe condition.
Inactive
Hardware-Reset immediate
Hardware reset preparation
Hardware reset after cyclic communication has failed
The memory card of the Control Unit must not be accessed.
Notice:
For SIMOTION or SINUMERIK with integrated SINAMICS, the hardware reset acts on the complete system and
depends on the state of the control.
Note:
Re value = 1:
Reset is immediately executed and communications interrupted.
After communications have been established, check the reset operation (refer below).
Re value = 2:
Help to check the reset operation.
Firstly, set p0972 = 2 and then read back. Secondly, set p0972 = 1 (it is possible that this request is possibly no longer acknowledged). The communication is then interrupted.
After communications have been established, check the reset operation (refer below).
Re value = 3:
The reset is executed after interrupting cyclic communication. This setting is used to implement a synchronized
reset by a control for several drive units.
If the cyclic communication is active for both PROFIdrive interfaces, then the reset is executed after completing
both cycle communications.
After communications have been established, check the reset operation (refer below).
To check the reset operation:
After the drive unit has been restarted and communications have been established, read p0972 and check the following:
p0972 = 0? --> The reset was successfully executed.
p0972 > 0? --> The reset was not executed.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-257
Parameter
List of parameters
r0975[0...10]
All objects
Drive object identification / DO identification
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the identification of the drive object.
Index:
[0] = Company (Siemens = 42)
[1] = Drive object type
[2] = Firmware version
[3] = Firmware date (year)
[4] = Firmware date (day/month)
[5] = PROFIdrive drive object, type class
[6] = PROFIdrive drive object, sub-type Class 1
[7] = Drive object number
[8] = Reserved
[9] = Reserved
[10] = Firmware patch/hot fix
Note:
Example:
r0975[0] = 42 --> SIEMENS
r0975[1] = 11 --> SERVO drive object type
r0975[2] = 102 --> first part, firmware version V01.02 (second part, refer to index 10)
r0975[3] = 2003 --> year 2003
r0975[4] = 1401 --> 14th of January
r0975[5] = 1 --> PROFIdrive drive object, type class
r0975[6] = 9 --> PROFIdrive drive object sub-type class 1
r0975[7] = 2 --> drive object number = 2
r0975[8] = 0 (reserved)
r0975[9] = 0 (reserved)
r0975[10] = 600 --> second part, firmware version (complete version: V01.02.06.00)
p0976
Reset and load all parameters / Reset load all par
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1(30)
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Factory settings
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1013
Factory setting
0
Description:
Resets or downloads all parameters of the drive system.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
10:
11:
12:
20:
21:
22:
23:
24:
25:
26:
100:
1-258
Inactive
Start reset of all parameters to factory setting
Start dnload of param. saved in non-volatile mem w/ p0977=1
Start dnload of volatile parameters from RAM
Start dnload of param. saved in non-volatile mem w/ p0977=10
Start dnload of param. saved in non-volatile mem w/ p0977=11
Start dnload of param. saved in non-volatile mem w/ p0977=12
Start download of Siemens internal setting 20
Start download of Siemens internal setting 21
Start download of Siemens internal setting 22
Start download Siemens internal setting 23
Start download Siemens internal setting 24
Start download Siemens internal setting 25
Start download Siemens internal setting 26
Start resetting of all BICO interconnections
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
1011: Start dnload of param. saved in volatile mem w/ p0977=1011
1012: Start dnload of param. saved in volatile mem w/ p0977=1012
1013: Start dnload of param. saved in volatile mem w/ p0977=1013
Notice:
After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in
r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
Note:
After all of the parameters have been reset to their factory setting, the system must be commissioned for the first
time again.
Resetting or loading is realized in the non-volatile memory.
Procedure:
1. Set p0009 = 30 (parameter reset).
2. Set p0976 to "required value". The system is rebooted.
p0976 is automatically set to 0 and p0009 is automatically set to 1 after this has been carried out.
p0977
Save all parameters / Save all par
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: U, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Factory settings
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1013
Factory setting
0
Description:
Saves all parameters of the drive system to the non-volatile memory.
Value:
0:
1:
10:
11:
12:
20:
21:
22:
23:
24:
25:
26:
1011:
1012:
1013:
Dependency:
Refer to: p0976, p1960, p3845, r3996
Caution:
The Control Unit power supply may only be powered down after data has been saved (i.e. after data save has been
started, wait until the parameter again has the value 0).
Notice:
Writing to parameters is inhibited while saving.
Inactive
Save in non-volatile memory - downloaded at POWER ON
Save as opt. in non-vol. memory - downloaded w/ p0976=10
Save as opt. in non-vol. memory - downloaded w/ p0976=11
Save as opt. in non-vol. memory - downloaded w/ p0976=12
Save in non-volatile memory as setting 20 (reserved)
Save in non-volatile memory as setting 21 (reserved)
Save in non-volatile memory as setting 22 (reserved)
Save in non-volatile memory as setting 23 (reserved)
Save in non-volatile memory as setting 24 (reserved)
Save in non-volatile memory as setting 25 (reserved)
Save in non-volatile memory as setting 26 (reserved)
Save in volatile memory, downloaded with p0976=1011
Save in volatile memory, downloaded with p0976=1012
Save in volatile memory, downloaded with p0976=1013
The progress while saving is displayed in r3996.
Note:
Parameters saved with p0977 = 10, 11 or 12 can be downloaded again with p0976 = 10, 11 or 12.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-259
Parameter
List of parameters
p0978[0...24]
List of drive objects / List of the DO
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1(1)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned8
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Topology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
255
Factory setting
[0] 1
[1] 0
[2] 0
[3] 0
[4] 0
[5] 0
[6] 0
[7] 0
[8] 0
[9] 0
[10] 0
[11] 0
[12] 0
[13] 0
[14] 0
[15] 0
[16] 0
[17] 0
[18] 0
[19] 0
[20] 0
[21] 0
[22] 0
[23] 0
[24] 0
Description:
This parameter is an image of p0101 in conformance with PROFIdrive.
Parameters p0101 and p0978 contain the following information:
1) The same number of drive objects
2) The same drive objects
In this sense, they are consistent.
Difference between p0101 and p0978:
p0978 can be re-sorted and a zero inserted in order to identify those drive objects that participate in the process
data exchange and to define their sequence in the process data exchange. Drive objects that are listed after the
first zero, are excluded from the process data exchange.
For p0978, in addition, the value 255 can be inserted a multiple number of times.
p0978[n] = 255 means: The drive object is visible for the PROFIBUS master and is empty (without any actual process data exchange). This allows cyclic communications of a PROFIBUS master with unchanged configuring to the
drive units with a lower number of drive objects.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0101, p0971, p0977
Note:
p0978 cannot be changed when the drive system is first commissioned. The reason for this is that at this time the
actual topology has still not been acknowledged (p0099 is still not equal to r0098 and p0009 is set to 0).
1-260
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
r0979[0...10]
PROFIdrive encoder format / PD encoder format
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 4010, 4704
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the actual position encoder used according to PROFIdrive.
Index:
[0] = Header
[1] = Type, encoder 1
[2] = Resolution enc 1
[3] = Shift factor G1_XIST1
[4] = Shift factor G1_XIST2
[5] = Distinguishable revolutions encoder 1
[6] = Reserved
[7] = Reserved
[8] = Reserved
[9] = Reserved
[10] = Reserved
Note:
Information about the individual indices can be taken from the following literature:
PROFIdrive Profile Drive Technology
r0979[0...10]
PROFIdrive encoder format / PD encoder format
ENCODER (Lin enc) Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 4010, 4704
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the actual position encoder used according to PROFIdrive.
Index:
[0] = Header
[1] = Type, encoder 1
[2] = Resolution enc 1
[3] = Shift factor G1_XIST1
[4] = Shift factor G1_XIST2
[5] = Distinguishable distance encoder 1
[6] = Reserved
[7] = Reserved
[8] = Reserved
[9] = Reserved
[10] = Reserved
Note:
Information about the individual indices can be taken from the following literature:
PROFIdrive Profile Drive Technology
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-261
Parameter
List of parameters
r0979[0...30]
PROFIdrive encoder format / PD encoder format
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 4010, 4704
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the actual position encoder used according to PROFIdrive.
Index:
[0] = Header
[1] = Type, encoder 1
[2] = Resolution enc 1
[3] = Shift factor G1_XIST1
[4] = Shift factor G1_XIST2
[5] = Distinguishable revolutions encoder 1
[6] = Reserved
[7] = Reserved
[8] = Reserved
[9] = Reserved
[10] = Reserved
[11] = Type, encoder 2
[12] = Resolution enc 2
[13] = Shift factor G2_XIST1
[14] = Shift factor G2_XIST2
[15] = Distinguishable revolutions encoder 2
[16] = Reserved
[17] = Reserved
[18] = Reserved
[19] = Reserved
[20] = Reserved
[21] = Type, encoder 3
[22] = Resolution enc 3
[23] = Shift factor G3_XIST1
[24] = Shift factor G3_XIST2
[25] = Distinguishable revolutions encoder 3
[26] = Reserved
[27] = Reserved
[28] = Reserved
[29] = Reserved
[30] = Reserved
Note:
Information about the individual indices can be taken from the following literature:
PROFIdrive Profile Drive Technology
r0980[0...299]
All objects
List of existing parameters 1 / List avail par 1
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the parameters that exist for this drive.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0981, r0989
1-262
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
The existing parameters are displayed in indices 0 to 298. If an index contains the value 0, then the list ends here.
In a long list, index 299 contains the parameter number at which position the list continues.
This list consists solely of the following parameters:
r0980[0...299], r0981[0...299] ... r0989[0...299]
The parameters in this list are not displayed in the expert list of the commissioning software. However, they can be
read from a higher-level control system (e.g. PROFIBUS master).
r0981[0...299]
All objects
List of existing parameters 2 / List avail par 2
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the parameters that exist for this drive.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0980, r0989
Note:
The existing parameters are displayed in indices 0 to 298. If an index contains the value 0, then the list ends here.
In a long list, index 299 contains the parameter number at which position the list continues.
This list consists solely of the following parameters:
r0980[0...299], r0981[0...299] ... r0989[0...299]
The parameters in this list are not displayed in the expert list of the commissioning software. However, they can be
read from a higher-level control system (e.g. PROFIBUS master).
r0989[0...299]
All objects
List of existing parameters 10 / List avail par 10
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the parameters that exist for this drive.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0980, r0981
Note:
The existing parameters are displayed in indices 0 to 298. If an index contains the value 0, then the list ends here.
This list consists solely of the following parameters:
r0980[0...299], r0981[0...299] ... r0989[0...299]
The parameters in this list are not displayed in the expert list of the commissioning software. However, they can be
read from a higher-level control system (e.g. PROFIBUS master).
r0990[0...99]
All objects
List of modified parameters 1 / List chang. par 1
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays those parameters with a value other than the factory setting for this drive.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0991, r0999
Note:
Modified parameters are displayed in indices 0 to 98. If an index contains the value 0, then the list ends here. In a
long list, index 99 contains the parameter number at which position the list continues.
This list consists solely of the following parameters:
r0990[0...99], r0991[0...99] ... r0999[0...99]
The parameters in this list are not displayed in the expert list of the commissioning software. However, they can be
read from a higher-level control system (e.g. PROFIBUS master).
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-263
Parameter
List of parameters
r0991[0...99]
All objects
List of modified parameters 2 / List chang. par 2
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays those parameters with a value other than the factory setting for this drive.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0990, r0999
Note:
Modified parameters are displayed in indices 0 to 98. If an index contains the value 0, then the list ends here. In a
long list, index 99 contains the parameter number at which position the list continues.
This list consists solely of the following parameters:
r0990[0...99], r0991[0...99] ... r0999[0...99]
The parameters in this list are not displayed in the expert list of the commissioning software. However, they can be
read from a higher-level control system (e.g. PROFIBUS master).
r0999[0...99]
All objects
List of modified parameters 10 / List chang. par 10
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays those parameters with a value other than the factory setting for this drive.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0990, r0991
Note:
Modified parameters are displayed in indices 0 to 98. If an index contains the value 0, then the list ends here.
This list consists solely of the following parameters:
r0990[0...99], r0991[0...99] ... r0999[0...99]
The parameters in this list are not displayed in the expert list of the commissioning software. However, they can be
read from a higher-level control system (e.g. PROFIBUS master).
p1000[0...n]
Macro Connector Inputs (CI) for speed setpoints / Macro CI n_set
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(1), T
0
Data type: Unsigned32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
999999
Factory setting
0
Runs the corresponding macro files.
The Connector Inputs (CI) for the speed setpoints of the appropriate Command Data Set (CDS) are appropriately
interconnected.
The selected macro file must be available on the memory card/device memory.
Example:
p1000 = 6 --> the macro file PM000006.ACX is run.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0015, p0700, p1500, r8572
Notice:
No errors were issued during quick commissioning (p3900 = 1) when writing to parameters of the QUICK_IBN
group!
Note:
The macros in the specified directory are displayed in r8572. r8572 is not in the expert list of the commissioning
software.
Macros available as standard are described in the technical documentation of the particular product.
CI: Connector Input
1-264
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p1001[0...n]
CO: Fixed speed setpoint 1 / n_set_fixed 1
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 1021, 3010
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-210000.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.000 [rpm]
Description:
Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 1.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice:
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
p1002[0...n]
CO: Fixed speed setpoint 2 / n_set_fixed 2
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-210000.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.000 [rpm]
Description:
Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 2.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice:
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
p1003[0...n]
CO: Fixed speed setpoint 3 / n_set_fixed 3
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-210000.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.000 [rpm]
Description:
Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 3.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice:
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
p1004[0...n]
CO: Fixed speed setpoint 4 / n_set_fixed 4
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-210000.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.000 [rpm]
Description:
Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 4.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice:
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-265
Parameter
List of parameters
p1005[0...n]
CO: Fixed speed setpoint 5 / n_set_fixed 5
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-210000.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.000 [rpm]
Description:
Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 5.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice:
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
p1006[0...n]
CO: Fixed speed setpoint 6 / n_set_fixed 6
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-210000.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.000 [rpm]
Description:
Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 6.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice:
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
p1007[0...n]
CO: Fixed speed setpoint 7 / n_set_fixed 7
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-210000.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.000 [rpm]
Description:
Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 7.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice:
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
p1008[0...n]
CO: Fixed speed setpoint 8 / n_set_fixed 8
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-210000.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.000 [rpm]
Description:
Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 8.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice:
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
1-266
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p1009[0...n]
CO: Fixed speed setpoint 9 / n_set_fixed 9
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-210000.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.000 [rpm]
Description:
Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 9.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice:
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
p1010[0...n]
CO: Fixed speed setpoint 10 / n_set_fixed 10
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-210000.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.000 [rpm]
Description:
Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 10.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice:
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
p1011[0...n]
CO: Fixed speed setpoint 11 / n_set_fixed 11
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-210000.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.000 [rpm]
Description:
Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 11.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice:
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
p1012[0...n]
CO: Fixed speed setpoint 12 / n_set_fixed 12
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-210000.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.000 [rpm]
Description:
Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 12.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice:
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-267
Parameter
List of parameters
p1013[0...n]
CO: Fixed speed setpoint 13 / n_set_fixed 13
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-210000.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.000 [rpm]
Description:
Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 13.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice:
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
p1014[0...n]
CO: Fixed speed setpoint 14 / n_set_fixed 14
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-210000.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.000 [rpm]
Description:
Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 14.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice:
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
p1015[0...n]
CO: Fixed speed setpoint 15 / n_set_fixed 15
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 1021, 3010
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-210000.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.000 [rpm]
Description:
Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 15.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice:
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
p1020[0...n]
BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 0 / n_set_fixed Bit 0
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 2505
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for selecting the fixed speed setpoint.
Dependency:
Selects the required fixed speed setpoint using p1020 ... p1023.
Displays the number of the actual fixed speed setpoint in r1197.
Sets the values for the fixed speed setpoints 1 ... 15 using p1001 ... p1015.
Refer to: p1021, p1022, p1023, r1197
Note:
If a fixed speed setpoint has not been selected (p1020 ... p1023 = 0, r1197 = 0), then r1024 = 0 (setpoint = 0).
1-268
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p1021[0...n]
BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 1 / n_set_fixed Bit 1
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 2505
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for selecting the fixed speed setpoint.
Dependency:
Selects the required fixed speed setpoint using p1020 ... p1023.
Displays the number of the actual fixed speed setpoint in r1197.
Sets the values for the fixed speed setpoints 1 ... 15 using p1001 ... p1015.
Refer to: p1020, p1022, p1023, r1197
Note:
If a fixed speed setpoint has not been selected (p1020 ... p1023 = 0, r1197 = 0), then r1024 = 0 (setpoint = 0).
p1022[0...n]
BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 2 / n_set_fixed Bit 2
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 2505
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for selecting the fixed speed setpoint.
Dependency:
Selects the required fixed speed setpoint using p1020 ... p1023.
Displays the number of the actual fixed speed setpoint in r1197.
Sets the values for the fixed speed setpoints 1 ... 15 using p1001 ... p1015.
Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1023, r1197
Note:
If a fixed speed setpoint has not been selected (p1020 ... p1023 = 0, r1197 = 0), then r1024 = 0 (setpoint = 0).
p1023[0...n]
BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 3 / n_set_fixed Bit 3
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 2505
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for selecting the fixed speed setpoint.
Dependency:
Selects the required fixed speed setpoint using p1020 ... p1023.
Displays the number of the actual fixed speed setpoint in r1197.
Sets the values for the fixed speed setpoints 1 ... 15 using p1001 ... p1015.
Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, r1197
Note:
If a fixed speed setpoint has not been selected (p1020 ... p1023 = 0, r1197 = 0), then r1024 = 0 (setpoint = 0).
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-269
Parameter
List of parameters
r1024
CO: Fixed speed setpoint effective / n_set_fixed eff
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1550, 3010
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Displays the selected and effective fixed speed setpoint.
This setpoint is the output value for the fixed speed setpoints and must be appropriately interconnected (e.g. with
the main setpoint).
Recommend.:
Interconnect the signal with main setpoint (p1070).
Dependency:
Selects the required fixed speed setpoint using p1020 ... p1023.
Displays the number of the actual fixed speed setpoint in r1197.
Sets the values for the fixed speed setpoints 1 ... 15 using p1001 ... p1015.
Refer to: p1070, r1197
Note:
If a fixed speed setpoint has not been selected (p1020 ... p1023 = 0, r1197 = 0), then r1024 = 0 (setpoint = 0).
p1030[0...n]
Motorized potentiometer configuration / Mop configuration
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: Unsigned16
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3020
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0110 bin
Description:
Sets the configuration for the motorized potentiometer.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
Notice:
Signal name
Data save active
Automatic mode, ramp-function generator
active
Initial rounding-off active
Save in NVRAM active
1 signal
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
FP
-
Yes
Yes
No
No
The following prerequisites must be fulfilled in order to be able to save the setpoint (Bit 03 = 1) in a non-volatile
fashion:
- Firmware with V2.3 or higher.
- Control Unit 320 (CU320) with hardware version C or higher (module with NVRAM).
Note:
Re bit 00:
0: The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is not saved and after ON is entered using p1040.
1: The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is saved after OFF and after ON set to the saved value. In order to
save in a non-volatile fashion, bit 03 should be set to 1.
Re bit 01:
0: Without ramp-function generator in the automatic mode (ramp-up/ramp-down time = 0).
1: With ramp-function generator in the automatic mode.
For manual operation (0 signal via BI: p1041), the ramp-function generator is always active.
Re bit 02:
0: Without initial rounding-off
1: With initial rounding-off. The selected ramp-up/down time is correspondingly exceeded. The initial rounding-off is
a sensitive way of specifying small changes (progressive reaction when keys are pressed).
The jerk for the initial rounding-off is independent of the ramp-up time and only depends on the selected maximum
speed (p1082). It is calculated as follows:
r = 0.01 % * p1082 [1/s] / 0.13^2 [s^2]
The jerk acts up until the maximum acceleration is reached (a_max = p1082 [1/s] / p1047 [s]), and then the drive
continues to run linearly with a constant rate of acceleration. The higher the maximum acceleration (the lower that
p1047 is), the longer the ramp-up time increases with respect to the set ramp-up time.
1-270
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
Re bit 03:
0: Non-volatile data save deactivated.
1: The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is saved in a non-volatile fashion (for bit 00 = 1).
p1035[0...n]
BI: Motorized potentiometer setpoint raise / Mop raise
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 2442, 2505,
3020
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source to increase the setpoint for the motorized potentiometer
Dependency:
Refer to: p1036
Notice:
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
p1036[0...n]
BI: Motorized potentiometer lower setpoint / Mop lower
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 2442, 2505
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source to reduce the setpoint for the motorized potentiometer.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1035
Notice:
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
p1037[0...n]
Motorized potentiometer maximum speed / Mop n_max
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3020
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-210000.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.000 [rpm]
Description:
Sets the maximum speed/velocity for the motorized potentiometer.
Note:
This parameter is automatically pre-assigned in the commissioning phase.
The setpoint output from the motorized potentiometer is limited to this value.
p1038[0...n]
Motorized potentiometer minimum speed / Mop n_min
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 2
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3020
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-210000.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.000 [rpm]
Description:
Sets the minimum speed/velocity for the motorized potentiometer.
Note:
This parameter is automatically pre-assigned in the commissioning phase.
The setpoint output from the motorized potentiometer is limited to this value.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-271
Parameter
List of parameters
p1039[0...n]
BI: Motorized potentiometer inversion / Mop inversion
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 3020
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source to invert the minimum speed/velocity or the maximum speed/velocity for the motorized
potentiometer.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1037, p1038
Note:
The inversion is only active during "motorized potentiometer raise" or "motorized potentiometer lower".
p1040[0...n]
Motorized potentiometer starting value / Mop start value
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3020
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-210000.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.000 [rpm]
Description:
Sets the starting value for the motorized potentiometer. This starting value becomes effective after the drive has
been powered up.
Dependency:
Only effective if p1030.0 = 0.
Refer to: p1030
p1041[0...n]
BI: Motorized potentiometer manual/automatic / Mop manual/auto
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 3020
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Sets the signal source to change over from manual to automatic when using a motorized potentiometer.
In the manual mode, the setpoint is changed using two signals - raise and lower. In the automatic mode, the setpoint must be interconnected via a connector input.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1030, p1035, p1036, p1042
Note:
The effectiveness of the internal ramp-function generator can be set in automatic mode.
p1042[0...n]
CI: Motorized potentiometer automatic setpoint / Mop auto setpoint
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 3020
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for the setpoint of the motorized potentiometer in the automatic mode.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1041
1-272
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p1043[0...n]
BI: Motorized potentiometer accept setpoint / Mop accept set val
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 3020
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source to accept the setting value for the motorized potentiometer.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1044
Note:
The setting value (CI: p1044) becomes effective for a 0/1 edge of the setting command (BI: p1043).
p1044[0...n]
CI: Motorized potentiometer setting value / Mop set val
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 3020
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for the setting value for the motorized potentiometer.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1043
Note:
The setting value (CI: p1044) becomes effective for a 0/1 edge of the setting command (BI: p1043).
r1045
CO: Mot. potentiometer speed setp. in front of ramp-fct. gen. / Mop n_set bef RFG
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 3020
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Description:
Sets the effective setpoint in front of the internal motorized potentiometer ramp-function generator.
p1047[0...n]
Motorized potentiometer ramp-up time / Mop ramp-up time
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3020
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
1000.000 [s]
Factory setting
10.000 [s]
Sets the ramp-up time for the internal ramp-function generator for the motorized potentiometer.
The setpoint is changed from zero up to the speed/velocity limit (p1082) within this time (if no initial rounding-off has
been activated).
Dependency:
Refer to: p1030, p1048, p1082
Note:
When the initial rounding-off is activated (p1030.2) the ramp-up time is correspondingly extended.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-273
Parameter
List of parameters
p1048[0...n]
Motorized potentiometer ramp-down time / Mop ramp-down time
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3020
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
1000.000 [s]
Factory setting
10.000 [s]
Sets the ramp-down time for the internal ramp-function generator for the motorized potentiometer.
The setpoint is changed from the speed/velocity limit (p1082) to zero within this time (if no initial rounding-off has
been activated).
Dependency:
Refer to: p1030, p1047, p1082
Note:
The deceleration time is extended corresponding to the activated initial rounding-off (p1030.2).
r1050
CO: Motor. potentiometer setpoint after the ramp-function generator /
Mop setp after RFG
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1550, 3020
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Sets the effective setpoint after the internal motorized potentiometer ramp-function generator.
This setpoint is the output value of the motorized potentiometer and must be appropriately interconnected onwards
(e.g. with the main setpoint).
Recommend.:
Interconnect the signal with main setpoint (p1070).
Dependency:
Refer to: p1070
Note:
For "With ramp-function generator", after an OFF1, OFF2, OFF3 or for a 0 signal via BI: p0852 (inhibit operation,
cancel pulses) the ramp-function generator output (r1050) is set to the starting value (configuration via p1030.0).
p1051[0...n]
CI: Speed limit RFG positive direction of rotation / n_limit RFG pos
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 3050
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1083[0]
Description:
Sets the signal source for the speed limit of the positive direction on the ramp-function generator input.
p1052[0...n]
CI: Speed limit RFG negative direction of rotation / n_limit RFG neg
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32
Description:
1-274
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 3050
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1086[0]
Sets the signal source for the speed limit of the negative direction on the ramp-function generator input.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p1055[0...n]
BI: Jog bit 0 / Jog bit 0
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 2501, 3030
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for jog 1.
Recommend.:
When the setting for this binector input is changed, the motor can only be switched on by means of an appropriate
signal change of the source.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0840, p1058
Notice:
The drive is enabled for jogging using BI: p1055 or BI: p1056.
The command "ON/OFF1" can be issued using BI: p0840 or using BI: p1055/p1056.
Only the signal source that was used to power up can also be used to power down again.
p1056[0...n]
BI: Jog bit 1 / Jog bit 1
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 2501, 3030
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for jog 2.
Recommend.:
When the setting for this binector input is changed, the motor can only be switched on by means of an appropriate
signal change of the source.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0840, p1059
Notice:
The drive is enabled for jogging using BI: p1055 or BI: p1056.
The command "ON/OFF1" can be issued using BI: p0840 or using BI: p1055/p1056.
Only the signal source that was used to power up can also be used to power down again.
p1058[0...n]
Jog 1 speed setpoint / Jog 1 n_set
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 1550, 3030
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-210000.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.000 [rpm]
Description:
Sets the speed/velocity for jog 1. Jogging is level-triggered and allows the motor to be incrementally moved.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1055, p1056
p1059[0...n]
Jog 2 speed setpoint / Jog 2 n_set
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 1550, 3030
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-210000.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.000 [rpm]
Description:
Sets the speed/velocity for jog 2. Jogging is level-triggered and allows the motor to be incrementally moved.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1055, p1056
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-275
Parameter
List of parameters
p1063[0...n]
Speed limit setpoint channel / n_limit setp
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3040
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
40000.000 [rpm]
Description:
Sets the speed limit/velocity limit effective in the setpoint channel.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1082, p1083, p1085, p1086, p1088
p1070[0...n]
CI: Main setpoint / Main setpoint
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 1550, 3030
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1024[0]
Sets the signal source for the main setpoint.
Examples:
r1024: Fixed speed setpoint effective
r1050: Motor. potentiometer setpoint after the ramp-function generator
Dependency:
Refer to: p1071, r1073, r1078
Notice:
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
p1071[0...n]
CI: Main setpoint scaling / Main setp scal
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 1550, 3030
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the signal source for scaling the main setpoint.
r1073
CO: Main setpoint effective / Main setpoint eff
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
1-276
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 3030
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Displays the effective main setpoint. The value shown is the main setpoint after scaling.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p1075[0...n]
CI: Supplementary setpoint / Suppl setpoint
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 1550, 3030
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for the supplementary setpoint.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1076, r1077, r1078
p1076[0...n]
CI: Supplementary setpoint scaling / Suppl setp scal
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 1550, 3030
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the signal source for scaling the supplementary setpoint.
r1077
CO: Supplementary setpoint effective / Suppl setpoint eff
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 3030
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Description:
Displays the effective supplementary setpoint. The value shown is the additional setpoint after scaling.
r1078
CO: Total setpoint effective / Total setpoint eff
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 3030
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Description:
Displays the total effective setpoint. The value indicates the sum of the effective main setpoint and supplementary
setpoint.
p1080[0...n]
Minimum speed / Minimum speed
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(1), T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3050
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [rpm]
Max
19500.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.000 [rpm]
Description:
Sets the lowest possible speed/velocity. This value is not undershot in operation.
Note:
The parameter value applies for both motor directions of rotation.
In exceptional cases, the motor can operate below this value (e.g. when reversing).
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-277
Parameter
List of parameters
p1082[0...n]
Maximum speed / n_Max
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(1), T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3020, 3050,
3060, 3070, 3095, 5300
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
1500.000 [rpm]
Description:
Sets the highest possible speed.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0115, p0230, r0313, p0322, r0336
Notice:
After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in
r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
Note:
The parameter applies for both motor directions. The parameter has a limiting effect and is the reference quantity
for all ramp-up and ramp-down times (e.g. down ramps, ramp-function generator, motor potentiometer).
Since the parameter is part of quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), it is defined appropriately when p0310, p0311, and
p0322 are changed.
The following limits are always effective for p1082:
p1082 <= p0322, if p0322 > 0
p1082 <= 60 * Minimum (15 * r0336, 650 Hz) / r0313
p1082 <= 60 * Maximum power unit pulse frequency / (k * r0313)
k = 12 for vector control (r0108.2 = 1), k = 6.5 for V/f control (r0108.2 = 0)
If a sine-wave filter (p0230 = 3) is parameterized as output filter, then the maximum speed is limited corresponding
to the maximum permissible filter output frequency (refer to the filter data sheet). For reactors and dv/dt filters, it is
limited to 150 Hz / r0313 (for chassis power units) or 120 Hz / r0313 (for booksize power units).
For the automatic calculation (p0340 = 1) the value of the parameter is pre-assigned the maximum motor speed
(p0322). If p0322 = 0, the rated motor speed (p0311) is used as default (pre-assignment) value. For induction
motors that are not catalog motors (p0301 = 0), the synchronous no-load speed is used as default (pre-assignment)
value (p0310 * 60 / r0313).
For synchronous motors, the following additionally applies:
The maximum speed p1082 is restricted to speeds (r1084) where the EMF does not exceed the DC link voltage.
The effective assignment of the motor data set parameter (e.g. p0311) to the drive data set parameter p1082 when
pre-assigning should be taken from p0186.
p1082 is also available in the quick commissioning (p0010 = 1); this means that when exiting via p3900 > 0, the
value is not changed.
For vector control (p1300 = 20 ... 23) the maximum speed is limited to 60.0 / (8.333 * p0115[0] * r0313). This can be
identified by a reduction in r1084. p1082 is not changed in this process due to the fact that the operating mode
p1300 can be changed over.
When using sine-wave filters (p0230 = 3, 4), the maximum speed r1084 is limited to 70% of the resonant frequency
of the filter capacitance and the motor leakage inductance.
p1083[0...n]
CO: Speed limit in positive direction of rotation / n_limit pos
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3050, 6732
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
40000.000 [rpm]
Description:
Sets the maximum speed for the positive direction.
Notice:
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
1-278
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
r1084
CO: Speed limit positive effective / n_limit pos eff
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 3050, 3095
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Description:
Displays the effective positive speed limit.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1082, p1083, p1085
p1085[0...n]
CI: Speed limit in positive direction of rotation / n_limit pos
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 3050
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1083[0]
Description:
Sets the signal source for the speed limit of the positive direction.
p1086[0...n]
CO: Speed limit in negative direction of rotation / n_limit neg
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3050
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-210000.000 [rpm]
Max
0.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
-40000.000 [rpm]
Description:
Sets the speed limit for the negative direction.
Notice:
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
r1087
CO: Speed limit negative effective / n_limit neg eff
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 3050, 3095
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Description:
Displays the effective negative speed limit.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1082, p1086, p1088
p1088[0...n]
CI: Speed limit in negative direction of rotation / n_limit neg
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 3050
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1086[0]
Sets the signal source for the speed/velocity limit of the negative direction.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-279
Parameter
List of parameters
p1091[0...n]
Skip speed 1 / n_skip 1
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3050
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.000 [rpm]
Description:
Sets skip speed 1.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1092, p1093, p1094, p1101
Note:
The skip (suppression) speeds can be used to prevent the effects of mechanical resonance.
p1092[0...n]
Skip speed 2 / n_skip 2
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3050
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.000 [rpm]
Description:
Sets skip speed 2.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1091, p1093, p1094, p1101
p1093[0...n]
Skip speed 3 / n_skip 3
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3050
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.000 [rpm]
Description:
Sets skip speed 3.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1091, p1092, p1094, p1101
p1094[0...n]
Skip speed 4 / n_skip 4
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3050
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.000 [rpm]
Description:
Sets skip speed 4.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1091, p1092, p1093, p1101
1-280
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p1101[0...n]
Skip speed bandwidth / n_skip bandwidth
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3050
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.000 [rpm]
Description:
Sets the bandwidth for the skip speeds/velocities 1 to 4.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1091, p1092, p1093, p1094
Note:
The setpoint (reference) speeds are skipped (suppressed) in the range of the skip speed +/-p1101.
Steady-state operation is not possible in the skipped (suppressed) speed range. The skip (suppression) range is
skipped.
Example:
p1091 = 600 and p1101 = 20
--> setpoint speeds between 580 and 620 [rpm] are skipped.
For the skip bandwidths, the following hysteresis behavior applies:
For a setpoint speed coming from below, the following applies:
r1170 < 580 [rpm] and 580 [rpm] <= r1114 <= 620 [rpm] --> r1119 = 580 [rpm]
For a setpoint speed coming from above, the following applies:
r1170 > 620 [rpm] and 580 [rpm] <= r1114 <= 620 [rpm] --> r1119 = 620 [rpm]
p1110[0...n]
BI: Inhibit negative direction / Inhib neg dir
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 2505, 3040
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source to disable the negative direction.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1111
p1111[0...n]
BI: Inhibit positive direction / Inhib pos dir
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 2505, 3040
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source to disable the positive direction.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1110
r1112
CO: Speed setpoint after minimum limiting / n_set n. min_lim
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 3050
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Description:
Displays the speed setpoint after the minimum limiting.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1091, p1092, p1093, p1094, p1101
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-281
Parameter
List of parameters
p1113[0...n]
BI: Setpoint inversion / Setp inv
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 2441, 2442,
2505, 3040
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Dependency:
Refer to: r1198
Notice:
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
r1114
CO: Setpoint after the direction limiting / Setp after limit
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1550, 3040,
3050
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Description:
Displays the speed/velocity setpoint after the changeover and limiting the direction.
p1115
Ramp-function generator selection / RFG selection
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Integer16
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1550, 3080
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the ramp-function generator type.
Value:
0:
1:
Note:
Another ramp-function generator type can only be selected when the motor is at a standstill.
r1119
CO: Ramp-function generator setpoint at the input / RFG setp at inp
Basic ramp-function generator
Extended ramp-function generator
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1550, 1690,
3050, 3060, 3070
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Description:
Displays the setpoint at the input of the ramp-function generator.
Notice:
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note:
The setpoint is influenced by other functions, e.g. skip (suppressed) speeds, minimum and maximum limits.
1-282
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p1120[0...n]
Ramp-function generator ramp-up time / RFG ramp-up time
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(1), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3060, 3070
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
999999.000 [s]
Factory setting
10.000 [s]
Description:
The ramp-function generator ramps-up the speed setpoint from standstill (setpoint = 0) up to the maximum speed
(p1082) in this time.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1082
Note:
The parameter is adapted during the rotating measurement (p1960 > 0). This is the reason that during the rotating
measurement, the motor can accelerate faster than was originally parameterized.
For V/f control and encoderless vector control (see p1300), ramp-up times of 0 s are not expedient. The setting
should be based on the startup times (r0345) of the motor.
p1121[0...n]
Ramp-function generator ramp-down time / RFG ramp-down time
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(1), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3060, 3070
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
999999.000 [s]
Factory setting
10.000 [s]
Description:
The ramp-function generator ramps-down the speed setpoint from the maximum speed (p1082) down to standstill
(setpoint = 0) in this time. Further, the ramp-down time is always effective for OFF1.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1082
Note:
For V/f control and encoderless vector control (see p1300), ramp-down times of 0 s are not recommended. The setting should be based on the startup times (r0345) of the motor.
p1122[0...n]
BI: Bypass ramp-function generator / Bypass RFG
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 2505
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for bypassing the ramp generator (ramp-up and ramp-down times = 0).
Notice:
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note:
For VECTOR in encoderless operation, it is not permissible that the ramp-function generator is bypassed.
p1130[0...n]
Ramp-function generator initial rounding-off time / RFG t_start_round
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3070
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
30.000 [s]
Factory setting
0.000 [s]
Description:
Sets the initial rounding-off time for the extended ramp generator. The value applies to ramp-up and ramp-down.
Note:
Rounding-off times avoid an abrupt response and prevent damage to the mechanical system.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-283
Parameter
List of parameters
p1131[0...n]
Ramp-function generator final rounding-off time / RFG t_end_delay
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3070
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
30.000 [s]
Factory setting
0.000 [s]
Description:
Sets the final rounding-off time for the extended ramp generator. The value applies to ramp-up and ramp-down.
Note:
Rounding-off times avoid an abrupt response and prevent damage to the mechanical system.
p1134[0...n]
Ramp-function generator rounding-off type / RFG round-off type
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: Integer16
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3070
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the smoothed response to the OFF1 command or the reduced setpoint for the extended ramp-function generator.
Value:
0:
1:
Dependency:
No effect up to initial rounding-off time (p1130) > 0 s.
Note:
p1134 = 0 (continuous smoothing)
Cont. smoothing
Discont smoothing
If the setpoint is reduced while ramping-up, initially a final rounding-off is carried out and then the ramp-up completed. During the final rounding-off, the output of the ramp-function generator continues to go in the direction of the
previous setpoint (overshoot). After the final rounding-off has been completed, the output goes toward the new setpoint.
p1134 = 1 (discontinuous smoothing)
If the setpoint is reduced while ramping-up, then the output goes immediately in the direction of the new setpoint.
For the setpoint change there is no rounding-off.
p1135[0...n]
OFF3 ramp-down time / OFF3 t_RD
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(1), U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3060, 3070
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
600.000 [s]
Factory setting
3.000 [s]
Description:
Sets the ramp-down time from the maximum speed down to zero speed for the OFF3 command.
Note:
This time can be exceeded if the DC link voltage reaches its maximum value.
p1136[0...n]
OFF3 initial rounding-off time / RFGOFF3 t_strt_rnd
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
1-284
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3070
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
30.000 [s]
Factory setting
0.000 [s]
Sets the initial rounding-off time for OFF3 for the extended ramp generator.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p1137[0...n]
OFF3 final rounding-off time / RFG OFF3 t_end_del
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3070
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
30.000 [s]
Factory setting
0.000 [s]
Description:
Sets the final rounding-off time for OFF3 for the extended ramp generator.
p1140[0...n]
BI: Ramp-function generator enable / RFG enable
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 2501
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the signal source for control word 1 bit 4 (operating condition/disable ramp-function generator).
Dependency:
Refer to: p1141, p1142
Notice:
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note:
Bit 4 = 0: Inhibit ramp-function generator (the ramp-function generator output is set to zero)
Bit 4 = 1: Operating condition (the ramp-function generator can be enabled)
p1141[0...n]
BI: Continue ramp-function generator / Continue RFG
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 2501
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the signal source for control word 1 bit 5 (continue ramp-function generator/freeze ramp-function generator).
Dependency:
Refer to: p1140, p1142
Notice:
The ramp-function generator is, independent of the state of the signal source, active in the following cases:
- OFF1/OFF3.
- ramp-function generator output within the suppression bandwidth.
- ramp-function generator output below the minimum speed.
Note:
Bit 5 = 0: Freeze ramp-function generator
Bit 5 = 1: Continue ramp-function generator
p1142[0...n]
BI: Speed setpoint enable / n_set enable
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 2501
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the signal source for control word 1 bit 6 (enable setpoint/disable setpoint).
Dependency:
Refer to: p1140, p1141
Notice:
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note:
Bit 6 = 0: Inhibit setpoint (the ramp-function generator input is set to zero)
Bit 6 = 1: Enable setpoint
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-285
Parameter
List of parameters
p1143[0...n]
BI: Ramp-function generator, accept setting value / Accept RFG set val
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 3060, 3070
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for accepting the setting value of the ramp-function generator.
Dependency:
The signal source for the ramp-function generator setting value is set using parameters.
Refer to: p1144
Note:
0/1 signal:
The ramp-function generator output is immediately (without delay) set to the setting value of the ramp-function generator.
1 signal:
The setting value of the ramp-function generator is effective.
1/0 signal:
The input value of the ramp-function generator is effective. The ramp-function generator output is adapted to the
input value using the ramp-up time or the ramp-down time.
0 signal:
The input value of the ramp-function generator is effective.
p1144[0...n]
CI: Ramp-function generator setting value / RFG setting value
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 3060, 3070
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for the ramp-function generator setting value.
Dependency:
The signal source for accepting the setting value is set using parameters.
Refer to: p1143
p1145[0...n]
Ramp-function generator tracking intensity. / RFG track intens
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3080
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0
Max
50.0
Factory setting
1.3
Sets the ramp-function generator tracking.
The output value of the ramp-function generator is tracked (corrected) corresponding to the maximum possible
drive acceleration. The reference value is the deviation at the speed/velocity controller input that is necessary to
ensure that the motor accelerates at the torque/force limit.
Recommend.:
p1145 = 0.0:
This value deactivates the ramp-function generator tracking.
p1145 = 0.0 ... 1.0:
Generally, these values are not practical. They cause the motor to accelerate below its torque limit. The lower the
selected value, the greater the margin between the controller and torque limit when accelerating.
p1145 > 1.0:
The greater the value, the higher the permissible deviation between the speed setpoint and speed actual value.
1-286
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
Notice:
If ramp-function generator tracking is activated and the ramp time is set too short, this can cause unsteady acceleration.
Remedy:
- switch off ramp-function generator tracking (p1145 = 0).
- increase the ramp-up/ramp-down time (p1120, p1121).
Note:
In the V/f mode, ramp-function generator tracking is not active.
For SERVO with V/f operation, the following applies:
The complete ramp-function generator is not active, i.e. ramp-up and ramp-down time = 0.
p1148[0...n]
Ramp-function gen., tolerance for ramp-up and ramp-down active / RFG tol HL/RL act
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3060, 3070
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [rpm]
Max
1000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
19.800 [rpm]
Sets the tolerance value for the status of the ramp-function generator (ramp-up active, ramp-down active).
If the input of the ramp-function generator does not change in comparison to the output by more than the entered
tolerance time, then the status bits "ramp-up active" and "ramp-down active" are not influenced.
Dependency:
Refer to: r1199
r1149
CO: Ramp-function generator, acceleration / RFG acceleration
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 3060, 3070
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 39_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2007
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rev/s]
Max
- [rev/s]
Factory setting
- [rev/s]
Description:
Displays the acceleration of the ramp-function generator.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1145
r1150
CO: Ramp-function generator speed setpoint at the output / RFG n_set at outp
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1550, 3080
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Description:
Displays the setpoint at the output of the ramp-function generator.
p1151[0...n]
Ramp-function generator configuration / RFG config
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: Unsigned16
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3070
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Sets the configuration for the extended ramp-function generator.
Bit field:
Bit
00
Signal name
Disable rounding-off at the zero cross-over
1 signal
Yes
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
0 signal
No
FP
3070
1-287
Parameter
List of parameters
Caution:
Re bit 00 = 1:
If the ramp-up time is longer than the ramp-down time (p1120 > p1121), then there is an acceleration step at the
zero crossover. This can have a negative impact on the mechanical system.
Note:
Re bit 00 = 1:
When the direction change is changed there is no rounding-off before and after the zero crossover.
p1152
BI: Setpoint 2 enable / Setp 2 enab
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0 (Extended brk)
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2711, 4015
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
899.15
Description:
Sets the signal source for "setpoint 2 enable".
p1155[0...n]
CI: Speed controller speed setpoint 1 / n_ctrl n_set 1
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 1550, 3080,
5030, 6031
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for speed setpoint 1 of the speed controller.
Dependency:
The effectiveness of this setpoint depends on, e.g. STW1.4 and STW1.6.
Refer to: r0002, p0840, p0844, p0848, p0852, p0854, r0898, p1140, p1142, p1160, r1170, p1189
Notice:
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
p1160[0...n]
CI: Speed controller speed setpoint 2 / n_ctrl n_set 2
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 1550, 3080
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for speed setpoint 2 of the speed controller.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1155, r1170
Note:
For OFF1/OFF3, the ramp-function generator ramp is effective.
The ramp-function generator is set (SERVO: to the actual value, VECTOR: To the setpoint (r1170)) and stops the
drive corresponding to the ramp-downtime (p1121 or p1135). While stopping via the ramp-function generator,
STW1.4 is effective (enable ramp-function generator).
When the function module "position control" (r0108.3 = 1) is activated, this connector input is interconnected as follows as standard:
CI: p1160 = r2562
1-288
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
r1169
CO: Speed controller, speed setpoints 1 and 2 / n_ctrl n_set 1/2
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 3080
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Description:
Displays the speed setpoint after the addition of the speed setpoint 1 (p1155) and speed setpoint 2 (p1160).
Dependency:
Refer to: p1155, p1160
Note:
The value is only correctly displayed at r0899.2 = 1 (operation enabled).
r1170
CO: Speed controller, setpoint sum / n_ctrl setp sum
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1550, 1590,
1690, 1700, 1750, 3080, 5020,
6030
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Description:
Displays the speed setpoint after selecting the ramp-function generator and adding the speed setpoint 1 (p1155)
and speed setpoint 2 (p1160).
Dependency:
Refer to: r1150, p1155, p1160
p1189[0...n]
Speed setpoint configuration / n_ctrl config
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: Unsigned16
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3080
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0011 bin
Description:
Sets the configuration for the speed setpoint.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
Note:
Signal name
1 signal
Interpolation ramp-fct gen/speed controller Yes
active
Interpol. op-loop ctrl /speed controller active Yes
0 signal
No
FP
3080
No
3080
Re bit 01:
The interpolator is only effective for clock-cycle synchronous PROFIBUS operation and when the master receives a
sign-of-life (STW 2.12 ... STW 2.15).
r1197
Fixed speed setpoint number actual / n_set_fixed No act
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the number of the selected fixed speed/velocity setpoint.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023
Note:
If a fixed speed setpoint has not been selected (p1020 ... p1023 = 0, r1197 = 0), then r1024 = 0 (setpoint = 0).
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-289
Parameter
List of parameters
r1198.0...15
CO/BO: Control word setpoint channel / STW setpoint chan
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned16
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1530, 2505
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the control word for the setpoint channel.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
05
06
11
13
14
15
r1199.0...6
CO/BO: Ramp-function generator status word / RFG ZSW
Signal name
Fixed setpoint bit 0
Fixed setpoint bit 1
Fixed setpoint bit 2
Fixed setpoint bit 3
Inhibit negative direction
Inhibit positive direction
Setpoint inversion
Motorized potentiometer raise
Motorized potentiometer lower
Bypass ramp-function generator
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned16
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
FP
3010
3010
3010
3010
3040
3040
3040
3020
3020
3060,
3070
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1550, 3080,
8010
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status word for the ramp-function generator (RFG).
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
Note:
Re bit 02:
Signal name
Ramp-up active
Ramp-down active
Ramp-function generator active
Ramp-function generator set
Ramp-function generator held
Ramp-function generator tracking active
Maximum limit active
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
FP
-
The bit is an OR logic operation - bit 00 and bit 01.
p1200[0...n]
FlyRest oper mode / FlyRest op_mode
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: Integer16
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 1690
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
6
Factory setting
0
Sets the operating mode for flying restart.
The flying restart allows the drive converter to be powered up while the motor is still rotating. In so doing, the drive
converter output frequency is changed until the actual motor speed/velocity is found. The motor then accelerates up
to the setpoint at the ramp-function generator setting.
1-290
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
Flying restart inactive
Flying restart always active (start in setpoint direction)
FlyRestart active after on, fault, OFF2 (start in setp. dir.)
FlyRestart active after fault, OFF2 (start in setp. direction)
Flying restart always active (start only in setpoint direction)
FlyRestart active after on, fault, OFF2 (start only in setp_dir)
FlyRestart active after fault, OFF2 (start only in setp. dir.)
Dependency:
For induction motors, the following applies:
A differentiation is made between flying restart for V/f control and for vector control (p1300).
Flying restart, V/f control: p1202, p1203, r1204
Flying restart, vector control: p1202, p1203, r1205
For synchronous motors, the following applies:
Flying restart is not possible with V/f control or if, in the case of sensorless vector control, a Voltage Sensing Module
has not been connected and parameterized.
Refer to: p1201
Refer to: F07330, F07331
Notice:
The "flying restart" function must be used in cases where the motor may still be running (e.g. after a brief line supply
interruption) or is being driven by the load. The system might otherwise shut down as a result of overcurrent.
It does not make sense to use "flying restart" together with the "motor holding brake function" (p1215 > 0) because
then the flying restart will always be realized with the motor stationary.
Note:
For p1200 = 1, 4, the following applies:
Flying restart is active after faults, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3.
For p1200 = 2, 5, the following applies:
The "power-on" is the first power-on operation after the drive system has been booted. This is practical for motors
with a high-inertia load.
For p1200 = 1, 2, 3, the following applies: The search is made in both directions.
For p1200 = 4, 5, 6, the following applies: The search is only made in the setpoint direction.
For operation with encoder, the following applies:
p1200 = 1, 4 as well as p1200 = 2, 5 and p1200 = 3, 6 have the same meaning.
For V/f control (p1300 < 20), the following applies:
The speed can only be sensed for values above approx. 5 % of the rated motor speed. For lower speeds, it is
assumed that the motor is at a standstill.
If p1200 is changed while commissioning (p0009, p0010 > 0), then it is possible that the old value will no longer be
able to be set. The reason for this is that the dynamic limits of p1200 have been changed by a parameter that was
set when the drive was commissioned (e.g. p0300).
p1201[0...n]
BI: Flying restart enable signal source / Fly_res enab S_src
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the signal source to enable the "flying restart" function.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1200
Note:
Withdrawing the enable signal has the same effect as setting p1200 = 0.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-291
Parameter
List of parameters
p1202[0...n]
FlyRest srch curr / FlyRest I_srch
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
10 [%]
Max
400 [%]
Factory setting
100 [%]
Sets the search current for the "flying restart" function.
The value is referred to the motor magnetizing current.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0331
Caution:
An unfavorable parameter value can result in the motor behaving in an uncontrollable fashion.
Note:
In V/f control mode, the parameter serves as a threshold value for establishing the current at the beginning of the
flying restart function. When the threshold value is reached, the prevailing search current is set dependent upon the
frequency on the basis of voltage inputs.
Reducing the search current can also improve flying restart performance (if the system moment of inertia is not very
high, for example).
p1203[0...n]
Flying restart search rate factor / FlyRst v_Srch Fact
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
10 [%]
Max
4000 [%]
Factory setting
100 [%]
Description:
The value influences the rate at which the output frequency is changed during a flying restart . A higher value
results in a longer search time.
Caution:
An unfavorable parameter value can result in the motor behaving in an uncontrollable fashion.
For vector control, a value that is too low or too high can cause flying restart to become unstable.
Note:
The parameter factory setting is selected so that standard induction motors that are rotating can be found and
restarted as quickly as possible (fast flying restart).
With this presetting, if the motor is not found (e.g. for motors that are accelerated as a result of active loads) we recommend that the search rate is reduced (by increasing p1203).
r1204.0...13
CO/BO: Flying restart, V/f control status / FlyRest Vf st
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned16
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status for checking and monitoring flying restart states in the V/f control mode.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
1-292
Signal name
Current impressed
No current flow
Voltage input
Voltage reduced
Start ramp-function generator
Wait for execution
Slope filter act
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
FP
-
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
r1205.0...15
Positive gradient
Current < thresh
Current minimum
Search in the positive direction
Stop after positive direction
Stop after negative direction
No result
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
CO/BO: Flying restart, vector control status / FlyRest vector st
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned16
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status for checking and monitoring flying restart states in the vector control mode.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Note:
Bits 0..9: Used by the control in internal sequences during the flying restart.
Signal name
Speed adaptation circuit record angle
Speed adaptation circuit set gain to 0
Isd channel enable
Speed control switched out
Quadrature arm switched in
Special transformation active
Speed adaptation circuit set I comp to 0
Current control on
Isd_set = 0 A
Frequency held
Search in the positive direction
Search Started
Current impressed
Search interrupted
Speed adaptation circuit deviation = 0
Speed control activated
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
FP
-
Depending on the motor type (p0300), the number of active bits differs.
Bits 10..15: Are used to monitor the flying restart sequence.
For PEM, only bits 10, 11 and 15 are supported.
p1206[0...9]
Set the fault number without automatic restart / Fault_No w/o AR
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: Unsigned16
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
0
Description:
Selects the faults for which automatic restart should not be effective.
Dependency:
The setting is only effective for p1210 = 6, 16.
Refer to: p1210
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-293
Parameter
List of parameters
p1208[0...1]
BI: AR modification infeed / AR modification
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Sets the signal source to modify the automatic restart (AR).
Interconnections between the automatic restart and infeed:
With the following interconnection in the mode p1210 = 6, the automatic restart can respond to infeed faults:
BI: p1208[0] = r2139.3
With the following interconnection, in the mode p1210 = 4, the automatic restart can respond to line supply failure of
the infeed:
BI: p1208[1] = r0863.2
Index:
[0] = Infeed fault
[1] = Infeed line supply failure
Dependency:
Refer to: r0863, r2139
p1210
Automatic restart, mode / AR mode
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: Integer16
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
16
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the automatic restart mode (AR).
Value:
0:
1:
4:
6:
14:
16:
Recommend.:
For brief line supply failures, the motor shaft may still be rotating when restarting. The "flying restart" function
(p1200) might need to be activated to restart while the motor shaft is still rotating.
Dependency:
The automatic restart requires an active ON command, e.g. that is available at a digital input.
Inhibit automatic restart
Acknowledge all faults without restarting
Restart after line supply failure w/o additional start attempts
Restart after fault with additional start attempts
Restart after line supply failure following man. acknowledgment
Restart after fault following manual acknowledgment
If, for p1210 > 1, there is no active ON command, then the automatic restart is interrupted.
When using an Operator Panel in the LOCAL mode, then there is no automatic start.
For p1210 = 14, 16, a manual acknowledgement is required for an automatic restart.
Refer to: p0840, p0857, p1267
Danger:
Caution:
Refer to: F30003
If the automatic restart is activated (p1210 > 1) if there is an ON command (refer to p0840), the drive is powered up
as soon as any fault messages that are present can be acknowledged. This also occurs after the line supply returns
or the Control Unit boots if the DC link voltage is again present or the feedback of the line supply infeed (refer to
p0864) is again available. This automatic power-up sequence can only be interrupted by withdrawing the ON command.
A change is only accepted and made in the state "initialization" (r1214.0) and "wait for alarm" (r1214.1). When faults
are present, therefore, the parameter cannot be changed.
For p1210 > 1, the motor is automatically started.
1-294
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
When automatic restart mode is activated, the supply voltage must remain connected (e.g. backed up by UPS).
Re p1210 = 1:
Faults that are present are automatically acknowledged. If new faults occur after a successful fault acknowledgment, then these are also automatically acknowledged again. For p1210 = 1, fault F07320 is not generated if the
acknowledgment attempt was unsuccessful, for example, because the monitoring time p1213 index 0 was
exceeded.
Re p1210 = 4:
An automatic restart is only carried out if fault F30003 occurred at the Motor Module or a high signal is present at
binector input p1208[1]. If additional faults are present, then these faults are also acknowledged and when successful, starting continues. If the 24 V Control Unit power supply fails, then this is interpreted as a line supply failure.
Re p1210 = 6:
An automatic restart is carried out if any fault has occurred or there is a high signal at binector input p1208[0].
Re p1210 = 14:
As for p1210 = 4. However, faults that are present must be manually acknowledged.
Re p1210 = 16:
As for p1210 = 6. However, faults that are present must be manually acknowledged.
p1211
Automatic restart, start attempts / AR start attempts
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: Unsigned16
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
10
Factory setting
3
Description:
Sets the start attempts of the automatic restart function for p1210 = 4, 6.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1210, r1214
Refer to: F07320
Caution:
A change is only accepted and made in the state "initialization" (r1214.0) and "wait for alarm" (r1214.1).
Notice:
After fault F07320 occurs, the power-on command must be withdrawn and all of the faults acknowledged so that the
automatic restart function is reactivated.
After a complete blackout the start counter always starts with the counter value that applied before the blackout,
and decrements this startup attempt by 1. If a further attempt to acknolwedge is started by the automatic restart
function prior to blackout, e.g. when the CU remains active on blackout longer than the time p1212 / 2, the fault
counter will already have been decremented by 1. In this case, the fault counter is thus decreased by the value 2.
Note:
A start attempt starts immediately when a fault occurs. The start attempt is considered to been completed if the
motor was magnetized (r0056.4 = 1) and an additional delay time of 1 s has expired.
As long as a fault is present, an acknowledge command is generated in the time intervals of p1212 / 2. When successfully acknowledged, the start counter is decremented. If, after this, a fault re-occurs before a restart has been
completed, then acknowledgement starts again from the beginning.
Fault F07320 is output if, after several faults occur, the number of parameterized start attempts has been reached.
After a successful start attempt, i.e. a fault/error has no longer occurred up to the end of the magnetizing phase, the
start counter is again reset to the parameter value after 1 s. If a fault re-occurs - the parameterized number of start
attempts is again available.
At least one start attempt is always carried out.
After a line supply failure, acknowledgement is immediate and when the line supply returns, the system is powered
up. If, between successfully acknowledging the line fault and the line supply returning, another fault occurs, then its
acknowledgement also causes the start counter to be decremented.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-295
Parameter
List of parameters
p1212
Automatic restart, delay time start attempts / AR t_wait start
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.1 [s]
Max
1000.0 [s]
Factory setting
1.0 [s]
Description:
Sets the delay time up to restart.
Dependency:
This parameter setting is active for p1210 = 4, 6.
For p1210 = 1, the following applies: Faults are only automatically acknowledged in half of the waiting time, no
restart.
Refer to: p1210, r1214
Caution:
A change is only accepted and made in the state "initialization" (r1214.0) and "wait for alarm" (r1214.1).
Note:
The faults are automatically acknowledged after half of the waiting time has expired and the full waiting time.
If the cause of a fault is not removed in the first half of the delay time, then it is no longer possible to acknowledge in
the waiting time.
p1213[0...1]
Automatic restart, monitoring time / AR t_monitoring
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [s]
Max
10000.0 [s]
Factory setting
0.0 [s]
Description:
Sets the monitoring time of the automatic restart (AR).
Index:
[0] = For restart
[1] = To reset the fault counter
Dependency:
Refer to: p1210, r1214
Caution:
A change is only accepted and made in the state "initialization" (r1214.0) and "wait for alarm" (r1214.1).
Notice:
After fault F07320 occurs, the power-on command must be withdrawn and all of the faults acknowledged so that the
automatic restart function is reactivated.
Note:
Index 0:
The monitoring time starts when the faults are detected. If the automatic acknowledgements are not successful, the
monitoring time runs again. If, after the monitoring time has expired, the drive has still not successfully started again
(flying restart and magnetizing of the motor must have been completed: r0056.4 = 1), then fault F07320 is output.
The monitoring is deactivated with p1213 = 0. If p1213 is set lower than the sum of p1212, the magnetizing time
p0346 and the additional delay time due to the flying restart, then fault F07320 is generated at each restart. If, for
p1210 = 1, the time in p1213 is set lower than in p1212, then fault F07320 is also generated at each restart.
The monitoring time must be extended if the faults that occur cannot be immediately and successfully acknowledged (e.g. for faults that are permanently present).
Index 1:
The fault counter (refer to r1214) is only set back to the starting value p1211 if, after successful restart, the time in
p1213 index 1 has expired. The delay time is not effective for fault acknowledgement without automatic restart
(p1210 = 1). After a power failure (blackout) the delay time only starts after the line supply returns and the Control
Unit boots. The fault counter is set to p1211, if F07320 occurred, the power-on command is withdrawn and the fault
is acknowledged.
The fault counter is immediately updated if the starting value p1211 or the mode p1210 is changed.
1-296
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
r1214.0...15
CO/BO: Automatic restart, status / AR status
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned16
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status of the automatic restart (AR).
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
10
12
13
14
15
Note:
Signal name
Initialization
Wait for alarm
Auto restart act
Setting the acknowledgement command
Acknowledge alarms
Restart
Delay time running after automatic powerup
Fault
Effective fault
Start count. bit 0
Start count. bit 1
Start count. bit 2
Start count. bit 3
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
FP
-
Yes
Yes
On
On
On
On
No
No
Off
Off
Off
Off
Re bit 00:
State to display the single initialization after POWER ON.
Re bit 01:
State in which the automatic restart function waits for faults (initial state).
Re bit 02:
General display that a fault has been identified and that the restart or acknowledgement has been initiated.
Re bit 03:
Displays the acknowledge command within the "acknowledge alarms" state (bit 4 = 1). For bit 5 = 1 or bit 6 = 1, the
acknowledge command is continually displayed.
Re bit 04:
State in which the faults that are present are acknowledged. The state is exited again after successful acknowledgement. A change is only made into the next state if it is signaled that a fault is no longer present after an
acknowledgement command (bit 3 = 1).
Re bit 05:
State in which the drive is automatically powered up (only for p1210 = 4, 6).
Re bit 06:
State in which the system waits after having been powered up, to the end of the start attempt (to the end of the
magnetizing process).
For p1210 = 1, this signal is directly set after the faults have been successfully acknowledged.
Re bit 07:
State which is assumed after a fault occurs within the automatic restart function. This is only reset after acknowledging the fault and withdrawing the power-on command.
Re bit 10:
When the automatic restart function is active, r1214 bit 7 is displayed, otherwise the effective fault r2139 bit 3.
Re bits 12 ... 15:
Actual state of the start counter (binary coded).
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-297
Parameter
List of parameters
p1215
Motor holding brake configuration / Brake config
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: Integer16
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2701, 2707,
2711
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
3
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the holding brake configuration.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
Dependency:
Refer to: p1216, p1217, p1226, p1227, p1228, p1278
Caution:
For the setting p1215 = 0, if a brake is used, it remains closed. If the motor moves, this will destroy the brake.
Notice:
If p1215 was set to 1 or if p1215 was set to 3, then when the pulses are suppressed, the brake is closed even if the
motor is still rotating. Pulse suppression can either be caused by a 0 signal at p0844, p0845 or p0852 or as a result
of a fault with OFF2 response. If this is not desirable (e.g. for a flying restart), then the brake can be kept open using
a 1 signal at p0855.
Note:
If the configuration is set to "no holding brake present" when booting, then the motor holding brake will be automatically identified. If a motor holding brake is detected, the configuration is set to "motor holding brake as for sequence
control".
No motor holding brake being used
Motor holding brake acc. to sequence control
Motor holding brake always open
Motor holding brake like sequence control, connection via BICO
If a holding brake integrated in the motor is used, then it is not permissible that p1215 is set to 3.
if an external motor holding brake is being used, then p1215 should be set to 3 and r0899.12 should be interconnected as control signal.
When the function module "extended brake control" is activated (r0108.14 = 1), r1229.1 should be interconnected
as control signal.
The parameter can only be set to zero when the pulses are inhibited.
The parameterization "no motor holding brake available" and "Safe Brake Control" enabled (p1215 = 0, p9602 = 1,
p9802 = 1) is not practical if there is no motor holding brake.
The parameterization "motor holding brake the same as sequence control, connection via BICO" and "Safe Brake
Control" enabled (p1215 = 3, p9602 = 1, p9802 = 1) is not practical.
p1216
Motor holding brake, opening time / Brake t_open
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2701, 2711
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [ms]
Max
10000 [ms]
Factory setting
100 [ms]
Sets the time to open the motor holding brake.
After controlling the holding brake (opens), the speed/velocity setpoint remains at zero for this time. After this, the
speed/velocity setpoint is enabled.
Recommend.:
This time should be set longer than the actual opening time of the brake. This ensures that the drive cannot accelerate when the brake is applied.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1215, p1217
1-298
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p1217
Motor holding brake closing time / Brake t_close
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2701, 2711
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [ms]
Max
10000 [ms]
Factory setting
100 [ms]
Sets the time to apply the motor holding brake.
After OFF1 or OFF3 and the holding brake is controlled (the brake closes), then the drive remains closed-loop controlled for this time stationary with a speed setpoint/velocity setpoint of zero. The pulses are suppressed when the
time expires.
Recommend.:
This time should be set longer than the actual closing time of the brake. This ensures that the pulses are only suppressed after the brake has closed.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1215, p1216
Notice:
If the selected closing time is too short with respect to the actual closing time of the brake, then the load can sag.
If the closing time is selected to be too long with respect to the actual closing time of the brake, the control works
against the brake and therefore reduces its lifetime.
p1218[0...1]
BI: Open motor holding brake / Open brake
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0 (Extended brk)
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2707
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the signal source for a conditional opening of the motor holding brake.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1215
Note:
[0]: Signal, open brake, AND logic operation, input 1
[1]: Signal, open brake, AND logic operation, input 2
p1219[0...3]
BI: Immediately close motor holding brake / Close brake
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0 (Extended brk)
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2707
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
[0] 0
[1] 0
[2] 0
[3] 1229.9
Description:
Sets the signal source for an unconditional (immediate) closing of the motor holding brake.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1215, p1275
Note:
[0]: Signal, immediately close brake, inversion via p1275.0
[1]: Signal, immediately close brake, inversion via p1275.1
[2]: Signal, immediately close brake
[3]: Signal, immediately close brake - refer to the factory setting
These four signals form an OR logic operation.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-299
Parameter
List of parameters
p1220
CI: Open motor holding brake, signal source, threshold / Open brake thresh
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0 (Extended brk)
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2707
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the signal source for the command "open brake".
Dependency:
Refer to: p1215, p1221, r1229, p1277
p1221
Open motor holding brake, threshold / Open brake thresh
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0 (Extended brk)
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2707
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [%]
Max
200.00 [%]
Factory setting
0.00 [%]
Description:
Sets the threshold value for the command "open brake".
Dependency:
Refer to: p1220, r1229, p1277
p1222
BI: Motor holding brake feedback signal brake closed / Brake feedb closed
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0 (Extended brk)
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2711
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Sets the signal source for the feedback signal "brake closed".
For motor holding brakes with feedback signal, the signal "brake closed" can be activated using p1275.5 = 1.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1223, p1275
Note:
1 signal: Brake closed.
When braking with 1 feedback signal, the inverted feedback signal is connected to the BICO input for the second
feedback signal (p1223).
For r1229.5 = 1, OFF/OFF3 are suppressed to prevent the drive accelerating by a load that drives the motor whereby OFF2 remains effective.
p1223
BI: Motor holding brake feedback signal brake open / Brake feedb open
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0 (Extended brk)
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2711
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Sets the signal source for the feedback signal "brake open".
For motor holding brakes with feedback signal, the signal "brake open" can be activated using p1275.5 = 1.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1222, p1275
Note:
1 signal: Brake open.
When braking with 1 feedback signal, the inverted feedback signal is connected to the BICO input for the second
feedback signal (p1222).
1-300
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p1224[0...3]
BI: Close motor holding brake at standstill / Brk close standst
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0 (Extended brk)
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2704
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for close brake at standstill.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1275
Note:
[0]: Signal, close brake at standstill, inversion via p1275.2
[1]: Signal, close brake at standstill, inversion via p1275.3
[2]: Signal, close brake at standstill
[3]: Signal, close brake at standstill
These four signals form an OR logic operation.
p1225
CI: Standstill detection, threshold value / Standstill thresh
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0 (Extended brk)
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2704
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
63[0]
Description:
Sets the signal source "threshold value" for the standstill identification.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1226, p1228, r1229
p1226[0...n]
Threshold for zero speed detection / n_standst n_thresh
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 2701, 2704
P-Group: Functions
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
210000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
20.00 [rpm]
Sets the speed threshold for the standstill identification.
Acts on the actual value and setpoint monitoring.
When braking with OFF1 or OFF3, when the threshold is undershot, standstill is identified.
The following applies when the brake control is activated:
When the threshold is undershot, the brake control is started and the system waits for the brake closing time in
p1217. The pulses are then suppressed.
if the brake control is not activated, the following applies:
When the threshold is undershot, the pulses are suppressed and the drive coasts down.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1215, p1216, p1217, p1227
Notice:
For reasons relating to the compatibility to earlier software versions, a parameter value of 0 in indices 1 to 31 is
overwritten with the parameter value in index 0 when the Control Unit boots.
Note:
Standstill is detected if the actual speed drops below the speed threshold in p1226 or if the monitoring time (p1227)
- started when speed setpoint <= speed threshold (p1226) - has expired.
The actual value sensing is subject to measuring noise. For this reason, standstill cannot be detected if the speed
threshold is too low.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-301
Parameter
List of parameters
p1227
Zero speed detection monitoring time / n_standst t_monit
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2701, 2704
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
300.000 [s]
Factory setting
4.000 [s]
Sets the monitoring time for the standstill identification.
When braking with OFF1 or OFF3, standstill is identified after this time has expired, after the setpoint speed has
fallen below p1226 (also refer to p1145).
After this, the brake control is started, the system waits for the closing time in p1217 and then the pulses are suppressed.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1215, p1216, p1217, p1226
Notice:
For p1145 > 0.0 (RFG tracking) the setpoint is not equal to zero dependent on the selected value. This can therefore cause the monitoring time in p1227 to be exceeded. In this case, for a driven motor, the pulses are not suppressed.
Note:
Standstill (zero speed) is detected if, during the complete monitoring time (p1227), the speed setpoint falls below
the speed threshold (p1226).
For p1227 = 300.000 s, the following applies:
The monitoring is deactivated.
For p1227 = 0.000 s, the following applies:
With OFF1 or OFF3 and a ramp-down time = 0, the pulses are immediately suppressed and the motor "coasts"
down.
p1228
Pulse suppression delay time / Pulse suppr t_del
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2701, 2704
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
10.000 [s]
Factory setting
0.000 [s]
Sets the delay time for pulse suppression.
After OFF1 or OFF3 and zero speed detection, the system waits for this time to expire and the pulses are then suppressed.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1226, p1227
Note:
Standstill (zero speed) is detected if, during the complete delay time (p1228), the speed actual value falls below the
speed threshold (p1226).
r1229.1...11
CO/BO: Motor holding brake status word / Brake ZSW
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0 (Extended brk)
Data type: Unsigned32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status word for the motor holding brake.
Bit field:
Bit
01
03
04
05
06
1-302
Signal name
Command open brake (continuous signal)
Pulse enable, extended brake control
Brake does not open
Brake does not close
Brake threshold exceeded
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
FP
2711
2711
2711
2711
2707
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
07
08
09
10
11
p1230[0...n]
Brake threshold undershot
Brake monitoring time expired
Pulse enable request missing/n_ctrl inhibited
Brake OR logic operation result
Brake AND logic operation result
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
2704
2704
2707
Yes
Yes
No
No
2707
2707
BI: Armature short-circuit / DC brake activation / ASC act
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 7014, 7016,
7017
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source to activate the armature short-circuit or DC brake.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1231, p1232, p1233, p1234, p1235, p1236, p1237, r1238, r1239, p1345, p1346
Note:
1 signal: Armature short-circuit/DC brake is deactivated.
0 signal: Armature short-circuit/DC brake is deactivated.
p1231[0...n]
Armature short-circuit / DC brake configuration / ASC config
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: Integer16
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 7014, 7016,
7017
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
14
Factory setting
0
Description:
Setting to activate the various types for armature short-circuit / DC brake.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
14:
Dependency:
Refer to: p0300, p1230, p1232, p1233, p1234, p1235, p1236, p1237, r1238, r1239, p1345, p1346
Danger:
Re p1231 = 1, 2:
No function
External armature short-circuit with contactor feedback signal
Ext. armature short circuit without contactor feedback signal
Internal voltage protection
Internal armature short-circuit / DC brake
DC brake under starting speed
- only short-circuit-proof motors may be used, or suitable resistors must be used to short-circuit the motor
Re p1231 = 3:
- when the internal voltage protection is active, after pulse suppression, all of the motor terminals are at half of the
DC link voltage (without an internal voltage protection, the motor terminals are at zero potential)!
- it is only permissible to use motors that are short-circuit proof (p0320 < p0323).
- The Motor Module must be able to conduct 180% short-circuit current (r0320) of the motor (r0209).
- the internal voltage protection cannot be interrupted due to a fault response. If an overcurrent condition occurs
during the active, internal voltage protection, then this can destroy the Motor Module and/or the motor.
- if the Motor Module does not support the autonomous, internal voltage protection (r0192.10 = 0), in order to
ensure safe, reliable functioning when the line supply fails, an external 24 V power supply (UPS) must be used for
the components.
- if the Motor Module does support the autonomous, internal voltage protection (r0192.10 = 1), in order to ensure
safe, reliable functioning when the line supply fails, the 24 V power supply for the components must be provided
through a Control Supply Module.
- if the internal voltage protection is active, it is not permissible that the motor is driven by the load for a longer
period of time (e.g. as a result of loads that move the motor or another coupled motor).
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-303
Parameter
List of parameters
Re p1231 = 4 and synchronous motor:
- when armature short-circuit is active, all of the motor terminals are at half of the DC link potential.
- it is only permissible to use motors that are short-circuit proof (p0320 < p0323).
- The Motor Module must be able to conduct 180% short-circuit current (r0320) of the motor (r0209).
Note:
Re p1231 = 1, 2:
The external armature short circuit can only be selected for synchronous motors (p0300). In this case, control bit
BO: r1239.0 must be interconnected (e.g. to a digital input) to control the external contactor.
The external armature short circuit cannot be set as a fault response. It can be triggered via binector input p1230. It
is also always activated in the case of pulse suppression.
Re p1231 = 3:
Internal voltage protection (using an internal armature short circuit) can only be selected for synchronous motors
(p0300) and Motor Modules in booksize or chassis format. Further, it is not permissible for Safety to be active on
blocksize Motor Modules (i.e. p9501 = 0 and p9601 = 0). The internal voltage protection prevents the DC link
capacitance from being charged if there is no possibility of regenerating the EMF of a motor operated in the fieldweakening mode. The Motor Module must support this function (r0192.9 = 1).
a) If the Motor Module does not support the autonomous, internal armature short-circuit (r0192.10 = 0), the armature short-circuit is activated as soon as the activation criterion is fulfilled (refer below):
b) If the Motor Module supports the autonomous internal voltage protection (r0192.10 = 1), then the Motor Module
itself decides - using the DC link voltage - as to whether the short-circuit should be activated. In this case, protection
is also provided even if the DRIVE-CLiQ connection between the Control Unit and Motor Module was interrupted.
The short circuit is activated if the DC link voltage exceeds 800 V. If the DC link voltage falls below 450 V, then the
short-circuit is withdrawn. This therefore ensures that the required input voltage for the Control Supply Module is
maintained.
Re p1231 = 4:
The function is activated as soon as the activation criterion is fulfilled.
- the function can be initiated by OFF2
a) For synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx, 4xx), the internal armature short-circuit is initiated.
- the Motor Module must support this function (r0192.9 = 1).
b) For induction motors (p0300 = 1xx), the DC brake is initiated.
Activation criterion (one of the following criteria is fulfilled):
- 1 signal via binector input p1230 (DC brake activation)
- the drive is not in the state "S4: Operation" or in S5x (refer to function diagram 2610).
- the internal pulse enable is missing (r0046.19 = 0).
Re p1231 = 14:
This DC brake can only be set on induction motors.
The DC brake is triggered if a 1 signal is pending at binector input p1230 during operation and the current speed is
below the starting speed p1234. Then, following upstream demagnetization (see p0347), the braking current p1232
is injected for the duration of time set in p1233. This is followed by automatic switch-off. During operation the command for DC braking can be withdrawn at any time.
DC braking by means of fault response continues to be possible.
Re p1231 = 3, 4, 14:
The value can only be changed to values not equal to 3 or 4 or 14 if p0491 is not equal to 4 and p2101 is not equal
to 6 (armature short-circuit/DC brake not set).
In the case of SERVO, the DC brake does not function in V/f operation (p1317).
Note:
ASC: Armature short circuit
IVP: Internal Voltage Protection
UPS: Uninterruptible Power Supply
CSM: Control Supply Module
DC brake
1-304
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p1232[0...n]
DC braking, braking current / DCBRK I_brake
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 7017
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Arms]
Max
10000.00 [Arms]
Factory setting
0.00 [Arms]
Description:
Sets the braking current for DC braking.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1230, p1231, p1233, p1234, r1239, p1345, p1346
Note:
A change to the braking current becomes effective the next time that the DC brake is powered up.
The value for p1232 is specified as an rms value in the 3-phase system. The magnitude of the braking current is the
same as that of an identical output current at frequency zero (see r0067, r0068, p0640).
For the current controller, the settings of parameters p1345 and p1346 (I_max limiting controller) are used.
p1233[0...n]
DC braking time / DCBRK time
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 7017
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [s]
Max
3600.0 [s]
Factory setting
1.0 [s]
Description:
Sets the DC braking time (as fault response).
Dependency:
Refer to: p1230, p1231, p1232, p1234, r1239
Note:
If a speed encoder is being used, DC braking is ended as soon as the drive falls below the standstill threshold
p1226.
p1234[0...n]
Speed at the start of DC braking / DCBRK n_start
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 7017
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
210000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
40000.00 [rpm]
Description:
Sets the starting speed for DC braking.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1230, p1231, p1232, p1233, r1239
Caution:
If an encoder fault occurs during closed-loop operation with encoder, controlled decceleration of the drive down to
the start speed p1234 of the DC current brake. In this case, the DC brake is activated immediately and injects the
braking current p1232 for the braking current time p1233 after demagnetization.
If the actual speed falls below this threshold, then DC braking is activated.
The braking current and braking duration must, therefore, be dimensioned accordingly for this situation so that the
drive can be decelerated to standstill.
p1235[0...n]
BI: External armature short-circuit, contactor feedback signal / ASC ext feedback
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for the contactor feedback signal for external armature short-circuit.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1230, p1231, p1236, p1237, r1239
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-305
Parameter
List of parameters
Notice:
In order that the pulses are not enabled when the contactor is closed, the contactor feedback signal must lag by a
sufficiently long time when opening the contactor.
Note:
1 signal: The contactor is closed.
0 signal: The contactor is open.
p1236[0...n]
Ext. armature short-cct., contactor feedback signal monit. time / ASC ext t_monit
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [ms]
Max
1000 [ms]
Factory setting
200 [ms]
Sets the monitoring time of the contactor feedback signal for the external armature short-circuit configuration.
If the contactor feedback signal (p1235) is parameterized, then the appropriate feedback signal (r1239.1) is
expected within this monitoring time after either opening or closing the contactor.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1230, p1231, p1235, p1237, r1239
Refer to: A07904, F07905
p1237[0...n]
External armature short-circuit, waiting time when opening / ASC ext t_wait
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [ms]
Max
1000 [ms]
Factory setting
200 [ms]
Sets the delay time when opening the contactor of the external armature short-circuit.
If no contactor feedback signal has been selected (p1235), then the system waits for this time before the pulses are
switched in.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1230, p1231, p1235, p1236, r1239
Notice:
This delay time must be at least long enough so that the contactor contacts reliably open before the pulses are
switched in. The delay time must be greater than the contactor response time. The Motor Module can be damaged
if the delay time is too short.
r1238
CO: Armature short-circuit, external state / EASC state
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Integer16
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2610
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
6
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the state for the external armature short-circuit.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
Dependency:
Refer to: p1230, p1231, p1235, p1236, p1237, r1239
Powered down
Ready
Active
Active - feedback signal "Closed" OK
Active - feedback signal "Closed" missing
Prompt to remove the armature short-circuit
Active - feedback signal "Open" missing
Refer to: A07904, F07905
1-306
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
Activation criterion (one of the following criteria is fulfilled):
- the signal at BI: p1230 (armature short-circuit activation) is 0.
- the drive is not in the state "S4: Operation" or in S5x (refer to function diagram 2610).
- the internal pulse enable is missing (r0046.19 = 0).
Re state "switched out" (r1238 = 0):
- the external armature short-circuit can be selected with p1231 = 1.
Re state "ready" (r1238 = 1):
- as soon as the activation criterion is fulfilled, then a transition is made into the state "active" (r1238 = 2).
Regarding the state "active" (r1238 = 2), "active - feedback signal "Closed" OK" (r1238 = 3)", "active - feedback signal "Closed" missing" (r1238 = 4)":
- the control signal to close contactor r1239.0 is set to "1" (closed) and the pulses are suppressed.
- if a contactor feedback signal is not connected (BI: p1235 = 0 signal), then a transition is immediately made into
state 3.
- if a contactor feedback signal is connected, then a transition is made into state 3 if the feedback signal at BI:
p1235 goes to "1" (closed) within the monitoring time (p1236).
- otherwise, a transition is made into state 4.
Re state "prompt to remove the armature short-circuit" (r1238 = 5):
- the activation criterion is no longer fulfilled. An attempt is made to again remove the armature short circuit.
- the control signal to close the contactor r1239.0 is set to "0" (open) and the pulses remain suppressed.
- if a contactor feedback signal is not connected (BI: p1235 = 0 signal), the system waits for the delay time (p1237)
to expire until a transition is made into state 1.
- if a contactor feedback signal is connected, the system waits until the feedback signal at BI:p1235 goes to "0"
(open) until a transition is made into state 1. If this does not occur within the monitoring time (p1236), then a transition is made into state 6.
Re state "active - feedback signal "Open" missing" (r1238 = 6):
- this error state can be exited by deselecting the external armature short-circuit (p1231 = 0).
r1239.0...11
CO/BO: Armature short-circuit / DC brake status word / ASC/DCBRK ZSW
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: Unsigned32
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status word for armature short-circuit.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
08
10
11
Dependency:
Signal name
External armature short-circuit
External armature short-circuit, contactor
feedback signal
External armature short-circuit ready
External armature short-circuit with contactor feedback signal
Internal armature short-circuit
Internal armature short circuit, feedback signal from power unit
Internal armature short-circuit ready
DC brake active
DC brake ready
Armature short circuit/DC brake selected
1 signal
Active
Closed
0 signal
Inactive
Open
FP
-
Yes
Yes
No
No
Active
Active
Inactive
Inactive
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
7017
7017
-
Refer to: p1230, p1231, p1232, p1233, p1234, p1235, p1236, p1237
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-307
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
External armature short-circuit (bits 0 ... 3):
Re bit 00:
Using this signal, the motor is short-circuited through an external contactor circuit. This means that this BO:
p1239.0 must be interconnected e.g. to a digital output.
Re bit 01:
This signal indicates the state of the contactor to establish the armature short-circuit. To do this, BI: p1235 must be
interconnected to a digital input.
Re bit 02:
The external armature short-circuit configuration is ready and is activated as soon as the activation criterion is fulfilled.
Re bit 03:
1: A feedback signal from an external contactor was parameterized in BI: p1235.
Internal voltage protection / internal armature short-circuit (bits 4 ... 6):
Re bit 04:
a) Internal voltage protection (p1231 = 3) was selected and the Motor Module does not support the autonomous
internal voltage protection (r0192.10 = 0).
The Control Unit issues the command to the Motor Module to short-circuit the motor through the power semiconductors.
a) Internal voltage protection (p1231 = 3) was selected and the Motor Module supports the autonomous internal
voltage protection (r0192.10 = 1).
The Motor Module decides autonomously whether the armature short-circuit is activated. In this case, the following
applies: r1239.4 = r1239.5.
c) Internal armature short-circuit (p1231 = 4) was selected.
The Control Unit issues the command to the Motor Module to short-circuit the motor through the power semiconductors.
Re bit 05:
The Motor Module signals that the motor is short-circuited in the Motor Module through the power semiconductors.
Re bit 06:
a) Internal voltage protection (p1231 = 3) was selected and the Motor Module does not support the autonomous
internal voltage protection (r0192.10 = 0).
The internal voltage protection is ready and is activated as soon as the activation criterion is fulfilled.
a) Internal voltage protection (p1231 = 3) was selected and the Motor Module supports the autonomous internal
voltage protection (r0192.10 = 1).
The internal voltage protection is ready and the Motor Module decides autonomously - using the DC link voltage whether the short-circuit is activated. In this case, protection is also provided even if the DRIVE-CLiQ connection
between the Control Unit and Motor Module was interrupted. The short-circuit is activated if the DC link voltage
exceeds 800 V. If the DC link voltage falls below 450 V, then the short-circuit is withdrawn.
c) Internal armature short-circuit (p1231 = 4) was selected.
The internal armature short-circuit is ready and is activated as soon as the activation criterion is fulfilled.
Activation criterion (one of the following criteria is fulfilled):
- the signal at BI: p1230 (armature short-circuit activation) is 1.
- the drive is not in the state "S4: Operation" or in S5x (refer to function diagram 2610).
- the internal pulse enable is missing (r0046.19 = 0).
1-308
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p1240[0...n]
Vdc controller or Vdc monitoring configuration / Vdc_ctrl config
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0 (n/M)
Data type: Integer16
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6220
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
6
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the controller configuration of the DC link voltage (Vdc controller) in the closed-loop control mode.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
Dependency:
Refer to: p1245
Inhib Vdc ctrl
Vdc_max controller enable
Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering) enable
Vdc_min controller and Vdc_max controller enable
Activates Vdc_max monitoring
Activates Vdc_min monitoring
Activates Vdc_min monitoring and Vdc_max monitoring
Refer to: A07400, A07401, A07402, F07403, F07404, F07405, F07406
Notice:
An excessively high value in p1245 can possibly negatively influence the normal operation of the drive.
Note:
p1240 = 1, 3:
When the DC link voltage limit specified for the Motor Module is reached the following applies:
- the Vdc_max controller limits the regenerative energy in order that the DC link voltage is kept below the maximum
DC link voltage when braking.
- the ramp-down times are automatically increased.
p1240 = 2, 3:
When the switch-in threshold of the Vdc_min controller is reached (p1245), the following applies:
- the Vdc_min controller limits the energy taken from the DC link in order to keep the DC link voltage above the minimum DC link voltage when accelerating.
- the motor is braked in order to use its kinetic energy to buffer the DC link.
p1240 = 4, 5, 6:
When the threshold in r1242 or r1246 is reached, the DC link voltage monitoring initiates a fault (F07403 or F07404)
with a response and therefore reduces additional negative effects on the DC link voltage.
r1242
Vdc_max controller switch-in level / Vdc_max on_level
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0 (n/M)
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6220
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
- [V]
Max
- [V]
Factory setting
- [V]
Displays the switch-in level for the Vdc_max controller.
If p1254 = 0 (automatic sensing of the switch-in level = off), then the following applies:
AC/AC device: r1242 = 1.15 * sqrt(2) * V_mains = 1.15 * sqrt(2) * p0210 (supply voltage)
DC/AC device: r1242 = 1.15 * Udc = 1.15 * p0210 (supply voltage)
If p1254 = 1 (automatic sensing of the switch-in level = on), then the following applies:
r1242 = Vdc_max - 50.0 V (Vdc_max: Overvoltage threshold of the power unit)
Note:
The Vdc_max controller is not switched back off until the DC-link voltage falls below the threshold 0.95 * p1242 and
the controller output is zero.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-309
Parameter
List of parameters
p1243[0...n]
Vdc_max controller dynamic factor / Vdc_max dyn_factor
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0 (n/M)
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6220
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1 [%]
Max
10000 [%]
Factory setting
100 [%]
Sets the dynamic factor for the DC link voltage controller (Vdc_max controller).
100% means that p1250, p1251, and p1252 (gain, integral time, and rate time) are used corresponding to their
basic settings and based on a theoretical controller optimization.
If subsequent optimization is required, this can be carried out using the dynamic factor. In this case p1250, p1251,
p1252 are weighted with the dynamic factor p1243.
If several modules are connected to the DC link, then the dynamic factor must be increased corresponding to the
ratio of the additional capacitances to the capacitance of the module involved.
Note:
The presetting of the dynamic factor is based on the power units connected to DRIVE-CLiQ. It is assumed that the
power units connected via DRIVE-CLiQ are also electrically connected to the DC link. If this is not the case, then
the dynamic factor must be optimized manually.
p1245[0...n]
Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min on_level
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0 (n/M)
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
65 [%]
Max
150 [%]
Factory setting
76 [%]
Sets the switch-in level for the Vdc-min controller (kinetic buffering).
The value is obtained as follows:
AC/AC device: r1246[V] = p1245[%] * sqrt(2) * p0210
DC/AC device: r1246[V] = p1245[%] * p0210
Dependency:
Refer to: p0210
Warning:
An excessively high value may adversely affect normal drive operation. The values up to 150 % are intended for
operating modes p1240 = 5, 6.
Note:
For SINAMICS GM/SM, the following applies:
Minimum value = 0.75, Maximum value = 0.90
r1246
Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min on_level
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0 (n/M)
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6220
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
- [V]
Max
- [V]
Factory setting
- [V]
Description:
Displays the switch-in level for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering).
Note:
The Vdc_min controller is not switched back off until the DC-link voltage rises above the threshold 1.05 * p1246 and
the controller output is zero.
1-310
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p1247[0...n]
Vdc_min controller dynamic factor (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min dyn_factor
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0 (n/M)
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6220
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1 [%]
Max
10000 [%]
Factory setting
100 [%]
Sets the dynamic factor for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering).
100% means that p1250, p1251, and p1252 (gain, integral time, and rate time) are used corresponding to their
basic settings and based on a theoretical controller optimization.
If subsequent optimization is required, this can be carried out using the dynamic factor. In this case p1250, p1251,
p1252 are weighted with the dynamic factor p1247.
If several modules are connected to the DC link, then the dynamic factor must be increased corresponding to the
ratio of the additional capacitances to the capacitance of the module involved.
p1249[0...n]
Vdc_max controller speed threshold / Vdc_max n_thresh
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0 (n/M)
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
210000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
10.00 [rpm]
Description:
Sets the lower speed threshold for the Vdc_max controller. When this speed threshold is undershot, the Vdc_max
control is switched out and the speed is controlled using the ramp-function generator.
Note:
For fast braking where the ramp-function generator tracking was active, it is possible to prevent the drive rotating in
the opposite direction by increasing the speed threshold and setting a final rounding-off time in the ramp-function
generator (p1131). This is supported using a dynamic setting of the speed controller.
p1250[0...n]
Vdc controller proportional gain / Vdc_ctrl Kp
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0 (n/M)
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00
Max
100.00
Factory setting
1.00
Description:
Sets the proportional gain for the DC-link voltage controller (Vdc_min controller, Vdc_max controller).
Dependency:
The effective proportional gain is obtained taking into account p1243 (Vdc_max controller dynamic factor).
Note:
The gain factor is proportional to the capacitance of the DC link. The parameter is preset to a value that is optimally
adapted to the capacitance of the individual Motor Module. The capacitances of the other power units, which are
connected to the DC link, can be taken into account using the dynamic factor (p1247 or p1243).
p1251[0...n]
Vdc controller integral time / Vdc_ctrl Tn
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0 (n/M)
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6220
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [ms]
Max
10000 [ms]
Factory setting
0 [ms]
Description:
Sets the integral time for the DC-link voltage controller (Vdc_min controller, Vdc_max controller).
Dependency:
The effective integral time is obtained taking into account p1243 (Vdc_max controller dynamic factor).
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-311
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
An integral time is normally not required for single axis drives. For multi-axis drives on the other hand, it may be
possible to compensate for interference from other axes using the integral time (integral component) . An integral
time of 0 (default) deactivates the integral component of the controller.
p1252[0...n]
Vdc controller rate time / Vdc_ctrl t_rate
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0 (n/M)
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6220
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [ms]
Max
1000 [ms]
Factory setting
0 [ms]
Description:
Sets the rate time constant for the DC-link voltage controller (Vdc_min controller, Vdc_max controller).
Dependency:
The effective rate time is obtained taking into account p1243 (Vdc_max controller dynamic factor).
p1254
Vdc_max controller automatic ON level detection / Vdc_max SenseOnLev
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0 (n/M)
Data type: Integer16
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
1
Description:
Activates/deactivates the automatic sensing of the switch-in level for the Vdc_max controller.
Value:
0:
1:
p1255[0...n]
Vdc_min controller time threshold / Vdc_min t_thresh
Automatic detection inhibited
Automatic detection enabled
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0 (n/M)
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
10000.000 [s]
Factory setting
0.000 [s]
Sets the time threshold for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering). If this value is exceeded a fault is output; the
required response can be parameterized.
Prerequisite: p1256 = 1.
Dependency:
Refer to: F07406
Notice:
If a time threshold has been parameterized, the Vdc_max controller should also be activated (p1240 = 3) so that the
drive does not shut down with overvoltage when Vdc_min control is exited (due to the time violation) and in the
event of fault response OFF3. It is also possible to increase the OFF3 ramp-down time p1135.
p1256[0...n]
Vdc_min controller response (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min response
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0 (n/M)
Data type: Integer16
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the response for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering).
Value:
0:
1:
Dependency:
Refer to: F07405, F07406
1-312
Buffer Vdc until undervoltage, n<p1257 -> F07405
Buff. Vdc until undervolt., n<p1257 -> F07405, t>p1255 -> F07406
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p1257[0...n]
Vdc_min controller speed threshold / Vdc_min n_thresh
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0 (n/M)
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
210000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
50.00 [rpm]
Description:
Sets the speed threshold for the Vdc-min controller (kinetic buffering). If this value is exceeded a fault is output; the
required response can be parameterized .
r1258
CO: Vdc controller output / Vdc_ctrl output
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0 (n/M)
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6220
P-Group: Functions
Units group: 6_2
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Description:
Displays the actual output of the Vdc controller (DC link voltage controller)
Note:
The regenerative power limit p1531 is used for vector control to pre-control the Vdc_max controller. The lower the
power limit is set, the lower the correction signals of the controller when the voltage limit is reached.
p1260
Bypass configuration / Bypass config
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Data type: Integer16
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
3
Factory setting
0
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
Bypass deactivated
Bypass with synchronization and overlap
Bypass with synchronization without overlap
Bypass without synchronization
Note:
If the bypass function is selected ((p1260 > 0), then when the power unit restarts after POWER OFF, the state of
the bypass switch is evaluated. This means that after the ramp-up, it is possible to directly change into the standby
mode. This is only possible for p1267 = 0 (bypass using the control signal) and if the control command after the system has been booted is still available (p1266). This function has a higher priority than the automatic restart function
(p1210).
The "bypass" function can only be switched out again (p1260 = 0) if the bypass is not active or the bypass function
has a fault.
r1261.0...9
CO/BO: Bypass control/status word / Bypass STW / ZSW
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0 (Tech_ctrl)
Data type: Unsigned32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Control and feedback signals of the bypass switch.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
Signal name
Command switch motor - drive
Command switch motor - line supply
Synchronization requested
1 signal
Close
Close
Yes
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
0 signal
Open
Open
No
FP
-
1-313
Parameter
List of parameters
03
05
06
07
08
09
Staging status
Feedback signal switch motor - drive
Feedback signal switch motor - line supply
Bypass command (from p1266)
Feedback signal synchronization completed
(from p1268)
Staging requested (from p2369)
Active
Closed
Closed
Yes
Yes
Not active
Opened
Opened
No
No
Yes
No
Dependency:
Refer to: p2369
Note:
Control bits 0 and 1 should be interconnected to the signal outputs via which the switches in the motor feeder
cables should be controlled. These should be selected/dimensioned for switching under load.
p1262[0...n]
Bypass dead time / Bypass t_dead
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
20.000 [s]
Factory setting
1.000 [s]
Description:
Sets the dead time for non-synchronized bypass.
Note:
This parameter is used to define the changeover time of the contactors. It should not be shorter than the demagnetizing time of the motor (p0347). The total changeover time for the bypass is based on the total of p1262 plus the
OFF time for the relevant switch (p1274[x]).
p1263
Debypass delay time / Debypass t_del
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
300.000 [s]
Factory setting
1.000 [s]
Description:
Sets the delay time to switch back to converter operation for a non-synchronized bypass.
p1264
Bypass delay time / Bypass t_del
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
300.000 [s]
Factory setting
1.000 [s]
Description:
Sets the delay time for switching to line operation for a non-synchronized bypass.
p1265
Bypass speed threshold / Bypass n_thresh
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: REL
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
210000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
1480.00 [rpm]
Description:
Sets the speed threshold to activate the bypass.
Note:
When selecting p1260 = 3 and p1267.1 = 1, the bypass is automatically activated when this speed is reached.
1-314
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p1266
BI: Bypass, control command / Bypass command
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for the command to bypass.
p1267
Bypass changeover source configuration / Chngov_src config
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Data type: Unsigned8
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Sets the cause that should initiate the bypass.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
Note:
The parameter only has an effect for a non-synchronized bypass.
Signal name
Bypass via signal (BI: p1266)
Bypass via reaching the speed threshold
1 signal
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
FP
-
p1267 bit 0 = 1:
The bypass is initiated by setting a binary signal. When the command is reset, after the debypass delay time
(p1263) has expired, operation at the Motor Module is re-selected.
p1267 bit 1 = 1:
When the speed threshold entered in p1265 is reached, the bypass is switched in. The system only switches back
when the speed setpoint again falls below the threshold value.
p1268
BI: Bypass, feedback synchronization completed / FdbkSig sync compl
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
3819.2
Description:
Input for the feedback signal that synchronization was successfully completed.
Dependency:
Refer to: r3819
p1269[0...1]
BI: Bypass switch feedback signal / Bypass FS
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for the feedback signal of the bypass switch.
Index:
[0] = Switch motor - drive
[1] = Switch motor - line supply
Note:
In the case of switches without a feedback signal, connect the corresponding control bit as the signal source:
p1269 index 0 = r1261 bit 0
p1269 index 1 = r1261 bit 1
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-315
Parameter
List of parameters
p1272
Simulation mode / Simulation mode
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Integer16
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
In the simulation mode, the closed-loop control or V/f control can be operated without motor.
The simulation mode is used to test the power unit. Even though the DC link voltage is missing, the pulses are
enabled when powering up. The DC link pre-charging is bypassed and the undervoltage detection is disabled.
Closed-loop speed control with an encoder is possible if the torque setpoint (r0079) is used in order to operate a
second drive in the closed-loop torque controlled mode.
Value:
0:
1:
Off
On
Dependency:
The following functions are deactivated in the simulation mode:
- motor data identification routine
- motor data identification routine, rotating without encoder
- pole position identification routine
For V/f control and encoderless vector control, flying restart is not carried out (refer to p1200).
Refer to: r0192, p1900, p1910, p1960, p1990
Refer to: A07825, F07826
Notice:
In simulation mode, binector output r0863.1 = 1 is set. This is why you need to check whether other devices are
powered up via this signal before activating simulation mode. You might need to disconnect the corresponding
BICO interconnection temporarily.
Note:
Simulation mode is only possible for DC link voltages below 40 V. In order that the closed-loop control can be calculated, the displayed DC link voltage (r0026, r0070) is set to the rated DC link voltage (refer to p0210). Closed-loop
current control and motor model are switched out (disabled) - the same is true for the speed controller for encoderless closed-loop speed control.
When fault messages occur, the parameter is not automatically reset. This function is not implemented for
SINAMICS GM.
p1274[0...1]
Bypass switch monitoring time / Switch t_monit
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0 (Tech_ctrl)
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [ms]
Max
5000 [ms]
Factory setting
1000 [ms]
Description:
Sets the bypass switch monitoring time.
Index:
[0] = Switch motor - drive
[1] = Switch motor - line supply
Note:
The monitoring is deactivated with p1274 = 0 ms. The changeover time for the bypass (p1262) is extended by the
time set in this parameter.
1-316
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p1275
Motor holding brake control word / Brake STW
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0 (Extended brk)
Data type: Unsigned32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Sets the control word for the motor holding brake.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
05
p1276
Motor holding brake, standstill detection, bypass / Brk standst bypass
Signal name
Inverting BI: 1219[0]
Inverting BI: 1219[1]
Inverting BI: 1224[0]
Inverting BI: 1224[1]
Brake with feedback
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0 (Extended brk)
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
FP
2707
2707
2704
2704
2711
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2704
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
300.000 [s]
Factory setting
300.000 [s]
Sets the delay time for closing the brake at standstill.
After this time has expired, if the "close brake at standstill" or OFF1/OFF3 is present, the brake is closed and the
pulses are suppressed.
For p1276 = 300.000 s, the timer is deactivated - this means that the timer output is always zero.
p1277
Motor holding brake, braking threshold delay exceeded / Del thresh exceed.
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0 (Extended brk)
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2707
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
300.000 [s]
Factory setting
0.000 [s]
Description:
Sets the delay time for the signal "braking threshold exceeded" (BO: r1229.6).
Dependency:
Refer to: p1220, p1221, r1229
p1278
Brake control, diagnostics evaluation / Brake diagnostics
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: Integer16
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Sets the brake control type (with or without diagnostics evaluation).
Example for brake control with diagnostics evaluation.
- brake control in the Motor Modules in booksize format
- Safe Brake Relay for AC Drive
Example for brake control without diagnostics evaluation.
- Brake Relay for AC Drive
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-317
Parameter
List of parameters
Value:
0:
1:
Brake control with diagnostics evaluation
Brake control without diagnostics evaluation
Note:
If the configuration of the motor holding brake (p1215) is set to "no holding brake present" when booting, then an
automatic identification of the motor holding brake will be carried out. If a brake control is detected without diagnostics evaluation (e.g. Brake Relay for AC Drive), then the parameter is set to "brake control without diagnostics evaluation".
It is not permissible to parameterize "brake control without diagnostics evaluation" and also enable "safe brake control" (p1278 = 1, p9602 = 1, p9802 = 1).
p1279[0...3]
BI: Motor holding brake, OR/AND logic operation / Brake OR AND
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0 (Extended brk)
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2707
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for the OR/AND logic operation.
Dependency:
Refer to: r1229
Note:
[0]: OR logic operation, input 1 --> the result is displayed in r1229.10.
[1]: OR logic operation, input 2 --> the result is displayed in r1229.10.
[2]: AND logic operation, input 1 --> the result is displayed in r1229.11.
[3]: AND logic operation, input 2 --> the result is displayed in r1229.11.
p1280[0...n]
Vdc controller or Vdc monitoring configuration (V/f) / Vdc_ctr config V/f
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: Integer16
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 1690, 6320
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
6
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the configuration of the controller for the DC link voltage (Vdc controller) in the V/f operating mode.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
Note:
p1240 = 4, 5, 6:
Inhib Vdc ctrl
Vdc_max controller enable
Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering) enable
Vdc_min controller and Vdc_max controller enable
Activates Vdc_max monitoring
Activates Vdc_min monitoring
Activates Vdc_min monitoring and Vdc_max monitoring
When the threshold in r1282 or r1286 is reached, the DC link voltage monitoring initiates a fault (F07403 or F07404)
with a response and therefore reduces additional negative effects on the DC link voltage.
1-318
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
r1282
Vdc_max controller switch-in level (V/f) / Vdc_max on_level
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6320
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
- [V]
Max
- [V]
Factory setting
- [V]
Displays the switch-in level for the Vdc_max controller.
If p1294 = 0 (automatic sensing of the switch-in level = off), then the following applies:
AC/AC device: r1282 = 1.15 * sqrt(2) * V_mains = 1.15 * sqrt(2) * p0210 (supply voltage)
DC/AC device: r1282 = 1.15 * Vdc = 1.15 * p0210 (supply voltage)
If p1294 = 1 (automatic sensing of the switch-in level = on), then the following applies:
r1282 = Vdc_max - 50.0 V (Vdc_max: Overvoltage threshold of the power unit)
Note:
The Vdc_max controller is not switched back off until the DC-link voltage falls below the threshold 0.95 * p1282 and
the controller output is zero.
p1283[0...n]
Vdc_max controller dynamic factor (V/f) / Vdc_max dyn_factor
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6320
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1 [%]
Max
10000 [%]
Factory setting
100 [%]
Sets the dynamic factor for the DC link voltage controller (Vdc_max controller).
100% means that p1290, p1291, and p1292 (gain, integral time, and rate time) are used in accordance with their
basic settings and on the basis of a theoretical controller optimization.
If subsequent optimization is required, this can be carried out using the dynamic factor. In this case, p1290, p1291,
and p1292 are weighted with the dynamic factor p1283.
If several modules are connected to the DC link, then the dynamic factor must be increased corresponding to the
ratio of the additional capacitances to the capacitance of the module involved.
Note:
The presetting of the dynamic factor is based on the power units connected to DRIVE-CLiQ. It is assumed that the
power units connected via DRIVE-CLiQ are also electrically connected to the DC link. If this is not the case, then
the dynamic factor must be optimized manually.
p1285[0...n]
Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering) (V/f) / Vdc_min on_level
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
65 [%]
Max
150 [%]
Factory setting
76 [%]
Sets the switch-in level for the Vdc-min controller (kinetic buffering).
The value is obtained as follows:
AC/AC unit: p1286[V] = p1285[%] * sqrt(2) * p0210
Warning:
DC/AC unit: p1286[V] = p1285[%] * p0210
An excessively high value may adversely affect normal drive operation. The values up to 150 % are intended for
operating modes p1240 = 5, 6.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-319
Parameter
List of parameters
r1286
Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering) (V/f) / Vdc_min on_level
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6320
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
- [V]
Max
- [V]
Factory setting
- [V]
Description:
Displays the switch-in level for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering).
Note:
The Vdc_min controller is not switched back off until the DC-link voltage rises above the threshold 1.05 * p1286 and
the controller output is zero.
p1287[0...n]
Vdc_min controller dynamic factor (kinetic buffering) (V/f) / Vdc_min dyn_factor
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6320
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1 [%]
Max
10000 [%]
Factory setting
100 [%]
Sets the dynamic factor for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering).
100% means that p1290, p1291, and p1292 (gain, integral time, and rate time) are used corresponding to their
basic settings and based on a theoretical controller optimization.
If subsequent optimization is required, this can be carried out using the dynamic factor. In this case, p1290, p1291,
and p1292 are weighted with the dynamic factor p1287.
If several modules are connected to the DC link, then the dynamic factor must be increased corresponding to the
ratio of the additional capacitances to the capacitance of the module involved.
Note:
The presetting of the dynamic factor is based on the power units connected to DRIVE-CLiQ. It is assumed that the
power units connected via DRIVE-CLiQ are also electrically connected to the DC link. If this is not the case, then
the dynamic factor must be optimized manually.
p1288[0...n]
Vdc_max controller feedback coupling factor ramp-fct. gen. (V/f) /
Vdc_max factor RFG
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000
Max
100.000
Factory setting
0.500
Description:
Sets the feedback factor for the ramp-function generator. Its ramp times are decelerated relative to the output signal
of the Vdc_max controller.
Note:
For values p1288 = 0.0 to 0.5, the controller dynamics are automatically adapted internally.
p1289[0...n]
Vdc_max controller speed threshold (V/f) / Vdc_max n_thresh
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
1-320
Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
210000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
10.00 [rpm]
Sets the lower speed threshold for the Vdc_max controller. When this speed threshold is undershot, the Vdc_max
control is switched out and the speed is controlled using the ramp-function generator.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p1290[0...n]
Vdc controller proportional gain (V/f) / Vdc_ctrl Kp
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6320
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00
Max
100.00
Factory setting
1.00
Description:
Sets the proportional gain for the Vdc controller (DC link voltage controller).
Note:
The gain factor is proportional to the capacitance of the DC link. The parameter is preset to a value that is optimally
adapted to the capacitance of the individual Motor Module. The capacitances of the other power units which are
connected to the DC link can be taken into account using the dynamic factor (p1287 or p1283).
p1291[0...n]
Vdc controller integral time (V/f) / Vdc_ctrl Tn
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6320
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [ms]
Max
10000 [ms]
Factory setting
40 [ms]
Description:
Sets the integral time for the Vdc controller (DC link voltage controller).
p1292[0...n]
Vdc controller rate time (V/f) / Vdc_ctrl t_rate
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6320
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [ms]
Max
1000 [ms]
Factory setting
10 [ms]
Description:
Sets the rate time constant for the Vdc controller (DC link voltage controller).
p1293[0...n]
Vdc min controller output limit (V/f) / Vdc_min outp_lim
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6320
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Hz]
Max
600.00 [Hz]
Factory setting
10.00 [Hz]
Description:
Sets the output limit for the Vdc min controller (DC link undervoltage controller).
p1294
Vdc_max controller automatic detection ON signal level (V/f) / Vdc_max SenseOnLev
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: Integer16
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Activates/deactivates the automatic sensing of the switch-in level for the Vdc_max controller. When the sensing
function is deactivated, the activation threshold r1282 for the Vdc_max controller is determined from the parameterized connection voltage p0210.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-321
Parameter
List of parameters
Value:
0:
1:
Automatic detection inhibited
Automatic detection enabled
p1295[0...n]
Vdc_min controller time threshold (V/f) / Vdc_min t_thresh
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
10000.000 [s]
Factory setting
0.000 [s]
Sets the time threshold for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering). If this value is exceeded a fault is output; the
required response can be parameterized.
Prerequisite: p1296 = 1.
Notice:
If a time threshold has been parameterized, the Vdc_max controller should also be activated (p1280 = 3) so that the
drive does not shut down with overvoltage when Vdc_min control is exited (due to the time violation) and in the
event of fault response OFF3. It is also possible to increase the OFF3 ramp-down time p1135.
p1296[0...n]
Vdc_min controller response (kinetic buffering) (V/f / Vdc_min response
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: Integer16
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the response for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering).
Value:
0:
1:
Note:
Re p1296 = 1:
Buffer Vdc until undervoltage, n<p1297 -> F07405
Buff. Vdc until undervolt., n<p1297 -> F07405, t>p1295 -> F07406
The quick stop ramp entered in p1135 must not be equal to zero, to prevent overcurrent shutdown if F07406 is triggered.
p1297[0...n]
Vdc_min controller speed threshold (V/f) / Vdc_min n_thresh
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
210000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
50.00 [rpm]
Sets the speed threshold for the Vdc-min controller (kinetic buffering).
If this value is exceeded a fault is output; the required response can be parameterized .
r1298
CO: Vdc controller output (V/f) / Vdc_ctrl output
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
1-322
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6320
P-Group: Functions
Units group: 3_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Displays the actual output of the Vdc controller (DC link voltage controller)
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p1300[0...n]
Open-loop/closed-loop control operating mode / Op/cl-lp ctrl_mode
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(1), T
0
Data type: Integer16
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 1690, 6300,
6310, 6320
P-Group: V/f open-loop control
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
19
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the V/f control mode of the drive.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
19:
Recommend.:
The use of the vector control operating modes is recommended for synchronous motors.
Dependency:
If you are working with reduced supply voltages (p0212, bit 0 = 1), only V/f control with independent voltage setpoint
(p1300 = 19) can be set as the operating mode.
Notice:
Active slip compensation is required in the V/f control types with Eco mode (p1300 = 4, 7). The scaling of the slip
compensation (p1335) should be set so that the slip is completely compensated (generally 100%).
V/f control with linear characteristic
V/f control with linear characteristic and FCC
V/f control with parabolic characteristic
V/f control with parameterizable characteristic
V/f control with linear characteristic and ECO
V/f control for drives requiring a precise freq. (e.g. textiles)
V/f control for drives requiring a precise frequency and FCC
V/f control for a parabolic characteristic and ECO
V/f control with independent voltage setpoint
The Eco mode is only effective in steady-state operation and when the ramp-function generator is not bypassed. In
the case of analog setpoints, if required the tolerance for ramp-up and ramp-down should be actively increased for
the ramp-function generator using p1148 in order to reliably signal a steady-state condition.
Note:
For the open-loop control modes p1300 = 5 and 6, the slip compensation p1335 and the resonance damping p1338
are internally switched out (disabled) in order to be able to precisely set the output frequency.
For the open-loop control modes p1300 = 4 and 7 (Eco mode), the efficiency can be optimized by varying the voltage (when the operating point is constant).
During operation (the pulses enabled) the open-loop control mode cannot be changed by changing over drive data
sets.
p1300[0...n]
Open-loop/closed-loop control operating mode / Op/cl-lp ctrl_mode
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(1), T
0 (n/M)
Data type: Integer16
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 1690, 1700,
6300, 8012
P-Group: V/f open-loop control
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
23
Factory setting
20
Description:
Sets the open and closed loop control mode of a drive.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
18:
19:
20:
21:
22:
23:
V/f control with linear characteristic
V/f control with linear characteristic and FCC
V/f control with parabolic characteristic
V/f control with parameterizable characteristic
V/f control with linear characteristic and ECO
V/f control for drives requiring a precise freq. (e.g. textiles)
V/f control for drives requiring a precise frequency and FCC
V/f control for a parabolic characteristic and ECO
I/f control with fixed current
V/f control with independent voltage setpoint
Speed control (encoderless)
Speed control (with encoder)
Torque control (encoderless)
Torque control (with encoder)
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-323
Parameter
List of parameters
Recommend.:
The use of the vector control operating modes is recommended for synchronous motors.
Dependency:
Closed-loop speed or torque control (with encoder) cannot be selected if the encoder type is not entered (p0400).
Closed-loop speed or torque control can be selected if the closed-loop speed/torque control was selected as operating mode (p0108.2).
Only operation with V/f characteristic is possible if the rated motor speed is not entered (p0311).
A reluctance motor can only be operated in a V/f control mode (p1300 < 20).
Sensorless control on separately excited synchronous motors is only possible with a VSM module (see p0150,
p0151).
Refer to: r0108, p0108, p0300, p0311, p0400, p1501
Notice:
Active slip compensation is required in the V/f control types with Eco mode (p1300 = 4, 7). The scaling of the slip
compensation (p1335) should be set so that the slip is completely compensated (generally 100%).
The Eco mode is only effective in steady-state operation and when the ramp-function generator is not bypassed. In
the case of analog setpoints, if required the tolerance for ramp-up and ramp-down should be actively increased for
the ramp-function generator using p1148 in order to reliably signal a steady-state condition.
Note:
The closed-loop torque control can only be changed over in operation (p1300 = 20, 21) by selecting the closed-loop
speed control (p1501). At the changeover, the setting of p1300 does not change. In this case, the actual state is displayed in r1407, bit 2 and bit 3.
For the open-loop control modes p1300 = 5 and 6 (textile sector), slip compensation p1335, resonance damping
p1338, and the Imax frequency controller are switched off internally so that the output frequency can be set precisely. The Imax voltage controller remains active.
For the open-loop control modes p1300 = 4 and 7 (Eco mode), the efficiency can be optimized by varying the voltage (when the operating point is constant).
Separately-excited synchronous motors can only be operated in modes p1300 = 20, 21 and 23 - or for diagnostic
purposes in modes p1300 = 0, 3 and 18. For I/f control (p1300 = 18), the current amplitude can be set using p1609.
Both for V/f as well as for I/f control only a small load may be applied to the separately-excited synchronous motor
because the excitation current is not calculated as a function of the load.
During operation (the pulses enabled) the open-loop/closed-loop control mode cannot be changed by changing
over drive data sets.
p1300 is pre-assigned depending on r0108.2 and p0187.
p1302[0...n]
V/f control configuration / V/f configuration
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned16
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: V/f open-loop control
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Sets the configuration for V/f control.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
Note:
Re bit 00:
Signal name
U_output starting angle zero
Take the sign of the setpoint voltage into
account
1 signal
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
FP
-
If the bit is set the device will always start up with setpoint angle zero on pulse enable. This also affects the setpoint
angle for DC braking (p1231).
Re bit 01:
If the bit is set, in the case of V/f control with independent voltage setpoint (p1300 = 19) and negative setpoint voltages at the input of p1330, the setpoint angle is rotated through 180 degrees, thereby achieving a negative output
voltage. This renders the voltage boost p1310, p1311 ineffective.
1-324
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p1310[0...n]
Voltage boost permanent / V_boost perm
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 1690, 6300
P-Group: V/f open-loop control
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [%]
Max
250.0 [%]
Factory setting
50.0 [%]
Defines the voltage boost as a [%] referred to the rated motor current (p0305).
The magnitude of the permanent voltage boost is reduced with increasing frequency so that at the rated motor frequency, the rated motor voltage is present.
The magnitude of the boost in Volt at a frequency of zero is defined as follows:
Voltage boost [V] = 1.732 * p0305 (rated motor current [A]) x r0395 (stator/primary section resistance [ohm]) x
p1310 (permanent voltage boost [%]) / 100 %
At low output frequencies, there is only a low output voltage in order to maintain the motor flux. However, the output
voltage can be too low in order to achieve the following:
- magnetize the induction motor.
- hold the load.
- compensate for losses in the system.
This is the reason that the output voltage can be increased using p1310.
The voltage boost can be used for both linear as well as square-law V/f characteristics and is calculated as follows:
Voltage boost = 1.732 * p0305 (rated motor current) x r0395 (stator/primary section resistance) x p1310 (permanent
voltage boost)
Dependency:
The current limit p0640 limits the boost.
For vector control, the permanent voltage boost (p1310) has no effect as the drive converter automatically sets the
optimum operating conditions.
Refer to: p1300, p1311, p1312, r1315
Notice:
The voltage boost increases the motor temperature (particularly at zero speed).
Note:
The voltage boost is only effective for V/f control (p1300).
The boost values are combined with one another if the permanent voltage boost (p1310) is used in conjunction with
other boost parameters (acceleration boost (p1311), voltage boost for starting (p1312)).
However, these parameters are assigned the following priorities: p1310 > p1311, p1312
p1311[0...n]
Voltage boost at acceleration / V_boost accelerate
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 1690, 6300
P-Group: V/f open-loop control
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [%]
Max
250.0 [%]
Factory setting
0.0 [%]
p1311 only results in a voltage boost when accelerating and generates a supplementary torque to accelerate the
load.
The voltage boost becomes effective for a positive setpoint increase and disappears as soon as the setpoint has
been reached. The build-up and withdrawal of the voltage boost are smoothed.
The magnitude of the boost in Volt at a frequency of zero is defined as follows:
Voltage boost [V] = 1.732 * p0305 (rated motor current [A]) x r0395 (stator/primary section resistance [ohm]) x
p1311 (voltage boost when accelerating [%]) / 100 %
Dependency:
The current limit p0640 limits the boost.
Refer to: p1300, p1310, p1312, r1315
Notice:
The voltage boost results in a higher motor temperature increase.
Note:
The voltage boost when accelerating can improve the response to small, positive setpoint changes.
Assigning priorities for the voltage boosts: refer to p1310
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-325
Parameter
List of parameters
p1312[0...n]
Voltage boost when starting / V_boost starting
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 1690, 6300
P-Group: V/f open-loop control
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [%]
Max
250.0 [%]
Factory setting
0.0 [%]
p1312 causes an additional voltage boost when starting, however, only for the first acceleration phase.
The voltage boost becomes effective for a positive setpoint increase and disappears as soon as the setpoint has
been reached. The build-up and withdrawal of the voltage boost are smoothed.
Dependency:
The current limit p0640 limits the boost.
Refer to: p1300, p1310, p1311, r1315
Notice:
The voltage boost results in a higher motor temperature increase.
Note:
The voltage boost when accelerating can improve the response to small, positive setpoint changes.
Assigning priorities for the voltage boosts: refer to p1310
r1315
Voltage boost total / V_boost total
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6300
P-Group: V/f open-loop control
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Vrms]
Max
- [Vrms]
Factory setting
- [Vrms]
Description:
Displays the total resulting voltage boost in volt (p1310 + p1311 + p1312).
Dependency:
Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1312
p1320[0...n]
V/f control programmable characteristic frequency 1 / Uf char f1
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6300
P-Group: V/f open-loop control
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Hz]
Max
3000.00 [Hz]
Factory setting
0.00 [Hz]
Description:
The programmable characteristic for the V/f control is defined using 4 points and 0 Hz/p1310.
Dependency:
Selects the freely programmable characteristic using p1300 = 3.
This parameter specifies the voltage of the first point along the characteristic.
The following applies to the frequency values: p1320 <= p1322 <= p1324 <= p1326. Otherwise, a standard characteristic is used that contains the rated motor operating point.
Refer to: p1300, p1310, p1311, p1321, p1322, p1323, p1324, p1325, p1326, p1327
Note:
Linear interpolation is carried out between the points 0 Hz/p1310, p1320/p1321 ... p1326/p1327.
The voltage boost when accelerating (p1311) is also applied to the freely programmable V/f characteristic.
1-326
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
p1321[0...n]
V/f control programmable characteristic voltage 1 / Vf char U1
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6300
P-Group: V/f open-loop control
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [Vrms]
Max
10000.0 [Vrms]
Factory setting
0.0 [Vrms]
Description:
The programmable characteristic for the V/f control is defined using 4 points and 0 Hz/p1310.
Dependency:
Selects the freely programmable characteristic using p1300 = 3.
This parameter specifies the voltage of the first point along the characteristic.
Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1320, p1322, p1323, p1324, p1325, p1326, p1327
Note:
Linear interpolation is carried out between the points 0 Hz/p1310, p1320/p1321 ... p1326/p1327.
The voltage boost when accelerating (p1311) is also applied to the freely programmable V/f characteristic.
p1322[0...n]
V/f control programmable characteristic frequency 2 / Vf char f2
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6300
P-Group: V/f open-loop control
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Hz]
Max
3000.00 [Hz]
Factory setting
0.00 [Hz]
Description:
The programmable characteristic for the V/f control is defined using 4 points and 0 Hz/p1310.
Dependency:
The following applies to the frequency values: p1320 <= p1322 <= p1324 <= p1326. Otherwise, a standard characteristic is used that contains the rated motor operating point.
This parameter specifies the voltage of the second point along the characteristic.
Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1320, p1321, p1323, p1324, p1325, p1326, p1327
p1323[0...n]
V/f control programmable characteristic voltage 2 / Vf char U2
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6300
P-Group: V/f open-loop control
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [Vrms]
Max
10000.0 [Vrms]
Factory setting
0.0 [Vrms]
Description:
The programmable characteristic for the V/f control is defined using 4 points and 0 Hz/p1310.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1320, p1321, p1322, p1324, p1325, p1326, p1327
p1324[0...n]
V/f control programmable characteristic frequency 3 / Vf char f3
This parameter specifies the voltage of the second point along the characteristic.
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6300
P-Group: V/f open-loop control
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Hz]
Max
3000.00 [Hz]
Factory setting
0.00 [Hz]
Description:
The programmable characteristic for the V/f control is defined using 4 points and 0 Hz/p1310.
Dependency:
The following applies to the frequency values: p1320 <= p1322 <= p1324 <= p1326. Otherwise, a standard characteristic is used that contains the rated motor operating point.
This parameter specifies the voltage of the third point along the characteristic.
Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1320, p1321, p1322, p1323, p1325, p1326, p1327
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
1-327
Parameter
List of parameters
p1325[0...n]
V/f control programmable characteristic voltage 3 / Vf char U3
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6300
P-Group: V/f open-loop control
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [Vrms]
Max
10000.0 [Vrms]
Factory setting
0.0 [Vrms]
Description:
The programmable characteristic for the V/f control is defined using 4 points and 0 Hz/p1310.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1320, p1321, p1322, p1323, p1324, p1326, p1327
p1326[0...n]
V/f control programmable characteristic frequency 4 / Vf char f4
This parameter specifies the voltage of the third point along the characteristic.
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 5300, 6300
P-Group: V/f open-loop control
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Hz]
Max
10000.00 [Hz]
Factory setting
0.00 [Hz]
In the servo control mode the following applies:
The linear characteristic for the V/f control is defined by 0 Hz / p1319 and p1326 / p1327.
For vector control, the following applies:
The programmable characteristic for the V/f control is defined using 4 points and 0 Hz/p1310.
This parameter specifies the frequency of the fourth point along the characteristic.
Dependency:
In the servo control mode the following applies:
Activates the V/f control using p1317.
For vector control, the following applies:
Selects the freely programmable characteristic using p1300 = 3.
The following applies to the frequency values: p1320 <= p1322 <= p1324 <= p1326. Otherwise, a standard characteristic is used that contains the rated motor operating point.
Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1320, p1321, p1322, p1323, p1324, p1325, p1327
Note:
In the servo control mode the following applies:
Linear interpolation is carried out between the points 0 Hz / p1319 and p1326 / p1327.
For vector control, the following applies:
Linear interpolation is carried out between the points 0 Hz/p1310, p1320/p1321 ... p1326/p1327. For output frequencies above p1326, the characteristic is extrapolated with the gradient between the characteristic points
p1324/p1325 and p1326/p1327.
The voltage boost when accelerating (p1311) is also applied to the freely programmable V/f characteristic.
p1327[0...n]
V/f control programmable characteristic voltage 4 / Vf char U4
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T
0
Data type: FloatingPoint32
Description:
Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 5300, 6300
P-Group: V/f open-loop control
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [Vrms]
Max
10000.0 [Vrms]
Factory setting
0.0 [Vrms]
In the servo control mode the following applies:
The linear characteristic for the V/f control is defined by 0 Hz / p1319 and p1326 / p1327.
For vector control, the following applies:
The programmable characteristic for the V/f control is defined using 4 points and 0 Hz/p1310.
This parameter specifies the voltage of the fourth point along the characteristic.
1-328
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Parameter
List of parameters
Dependency:
In the servo control mode the following applies:
Activates the V/f control using p1317.
For vector control, the following applies:
Selects the freely programmable characteristic using p1300 = 3.
Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1320, p1321, p1322, p1323, p1324, p1325, p1326
Note:
In the servo control mode the following applies:
Linear interpolation is carried out between the points 0 Hz / p1319 and p1326 / p1327.
For vector control, the following applies:
Linear interpolation is carried out between the points 0 Hz/p1310, p1320/p1321 ... p1326/p1327.
The voltage boost when accelerating (p1311) is also applied to the freely programmable V/f characteristic.
p1330[0...n]
CI: V/f control independent voltage setpoint / Vf V_set independ.
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T
0
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 6300
P-Group: V/f open-loop control
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min